JP2022055663A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing an attention degree and an amusement of a game for improving a game motivation of a player.SOLUTION: A game machine 10 is configured so that if a result of a jackpot lottery in a second time shortening game state to which a state is shifted when a jackpot lottery result in a normal game state is a first kind jackpot, is a time shortening pattern stop failure, if the number of the time shortening game rounds set to the time shortening pattern stop failure is larger than the number of residual time shortening game rounds in the second time shortening game state, the state is shifted to a third time shortening game state which is advantageous relative to the second time shortening game state. A probability at which the jackpot lottery result in the second time shortening game state is a time shortening pattern stop failure, is equal. In addition, the second time shortening game state is configured so that if the number of the residual time shortening game rounds is larger than a regulated number, a first performance is executed, and if the number of the residual time shortening game rounds is less than the regulated number, a second performance being different from the first performance, is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 115

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

Examples of pachinko gaming machines include a first-class gaming machine called a digital pachinko machine, a second-class gaming machine called a wing mono, and a first-class and second-class mixing machine having these characteristics.

In the first-class gaming machine, the result of the big hit lottery executed when the game ball enters the predetermined winning opening is notified by the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the big hit lottery is the big hit. If is, the jackpot game is executed. In addition, as the first-class gaming machine, like the loop probabilistic machine and the ST machine, after the jackpot game is completed, the game shifts to the electric role support mode in which the game ball can easily enter a specific winning opening by the support of the electric accessory. There is something.

In the second-class gaming machine, the wing mono is activated when the game ball enters a specific winning opening, and when the gaming ball enters the V winning opening that can be won by the operation of the wing mono, it is a big hit. The game is executed.

In the 1st and 2nd type mixer, a 1st type big hit game based on the result of the big hit lottery and a 2nd type big hit game based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening by the operation of the blade mono are executed. obtain. Specifically, in the type 1 and type 2 mixer, in the type 1 jackpot game, for example, when the jackpot lottery result triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined winning opening is a jackpot, the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot. After the end of the type 1 jackpot game, which is executed after the end of the special figure game that clearly indicates that, the game shifts to a time-saving game state in which the entry of the game ball into a specific winning opening is facilitated. On the other hand, in the type 1 and type 2 mixer, the type 2 big hit game is a small hit when the big hit lottery result triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening in the time-saving game state is a small hit. In the small hit game based on the above, it is executed on condition that the game ball is inserted into the V winning opening by operating the blade object.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2020-18599

By the way, in a gaming machine, it is important to increase the degree of attention and interest in the game to improve the player's motivation to play.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention and interest in a game and improving the player's motivation to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) in which a predetermined profit can be given in a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first opportunity (the jackpot lottery result in the normal game state is a type 1 jackpot). )When,
The first state (the state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (maintenance state of the second time-saving game state)) or the second state (the setting of the number of time-saving games) which is more profitable than the first state is enabled. A state executing means (41) capable of executing a state (third time-saving game state), and
Equipped with
The state executing means (41) is
A specific value determining means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second opportunity different from the first opportunity (the result of the big hit lottery in the second time-saving game state is out of the time-saving symbol) is established in the predetermined state. ,
When the specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, the means capable of executing the second state and the means.
When the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established, a means capable of executing the first state and a means for executing the first state.
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, the period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined state among the execution periods that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value is longer than a predetermined period (the first). The number of time-saving games set for the jackpot lottery result in the two-time-saving game state is larger than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state).
Specific timing determination means (41) for determining whether or not the predetermined timing is the specific timing in the predetermined period in which the predetermined state is executed, and
An effect executing means (51) that executes a predetermined effect in the predetermined state, and
Equipped with
The effect executing means (51) is
After the execution of the predetermined state is started by the predetermined state execution means (41), the first effect is executed as the predetermined effect until the specific timing determination means (41) determines that the specific timing is reached. Means and
A means for executing a second effect different from the first effect as the predetermined effect in the predetermined period after the specific timing determination means (41) determines that the specific timing is reached.
It is characterized by having.

The perspective view which shows an example of the structure of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. The development view which shows an example of the structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The development view which shows an example of the structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The front view which shows an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The front view which shows an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The front view which shows an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of the storage area of the main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main control unit. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main control unit. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an example of a normal diagram holding storage area in the storage area of the main control device shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main control unit. The block diagram which shows an example of the game information storage area in the storage area of a main control device. The figure which shows an example of the performance information display device of a main control device schematically. The figure which shows the display example in the performance display monitor of a performance information display device. The figure which shows the display example in the setting value display part of the performance information display device. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt processing executed by the main control unit. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the main timer interrupt process of FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the first special figure hold command setting process executed in the start winning process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the through gate processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main processing executed by the main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a normal game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 21. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the normal map data setting process executed in the normal map game control process of FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a normal map fluctuation start process executed in the normal map game control process of FIG. 22. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a game control process per normal figure executed in the main process of FIG. 21. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the special figure game control processing executed in the main processing of FIG. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the special figure data setting process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. 26. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a special figure variation start process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. 26. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game setting value change processing executed in the main processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process executed in the main process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the base information which is updated by the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a sub-timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of an operation detection process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of an operation button operation detection process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 43. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of an operation detection pattern determination process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 43. A table showing the relationship between the detection pattern and the operation status. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table used for setting a variation type (effect pattern type) executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table used for setting a variation type (effect pattern type) executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 47. 51 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the color of the decorative symbol, and FIG. 51 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a first stop symbol selection table used when a variable pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 47. .. FIG. 52 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first reserved image display unit set in the symbol display unit in the normal gaming state, the variable image display unit, and the existing variable image display unit, and FIG. 52 (B) is a probability variation game state. The figure which shows an example of the 2nd hold image display part and the variable image display part set in the symbol display part in the time saving game state. The figure which shows an example of the change of the hold image in the 1st hold image display part. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a jackpot game effect control process executed by the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42. The figure for demonstrating the conventional effect execution order with respect to the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the effect execution order of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the distribution table used when the jackpot type is distributed in the main control device of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. A flowchart showing an example of the command judgment processing procedure. A flowchart showing an example of the command judgment processing procedure. The figure which shows the screen example in the design display part of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a hold continuous effect process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 59. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the hold continuous effect processing. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the hold continuous production process of FIG. 62. The figure which shows an example of the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol which is variablely displayed in the symbol display part. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the second special figure special effect processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 59. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a variation type (effect pattern) setting process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 60. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure for setting a variation type (effect pattern). A flowchart showing an example of a procedure for setting a variation type (effect pattern). A flowchart showing an example of a procedure for setting a variation type (effect pattern). A flowchart showing an example of a procedure for setting a variation type (effect pattern). FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a variation type (effect pattern) setting process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 60. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a stop symbol combination setting process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 60. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process. The figure for demonstrating the effect execution order of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart for demonstrating the difference from the 2nd Embodiment in the command determination processing of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart for demonstrating the difference from the 2nd Embodiment in the command determination processing of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart for demonstrating the difference from the 2nd Embodiment in the 2nd special figure special effect setting processing of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart for demonstrating the difference from the 2nd Embodiment in the variation type (effect pattern) setting processing of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. A flowchart for explaining the difference from the second embodiment in the variation type (effect pattern) setting process. A flowchart for explaining the difference from the second embodiment in the variation type (effect pattern) setting process. The front view which shows an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the feather accessory device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 82. A cross-sectional view showing a main part of a feather accessory device. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of a table or the like used in the main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 82. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main control unit. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main control unit. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main processing executed by the main control unit. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a normal map fluctuation start process executed in the normal map game control process in the main process of FIG. 88. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a special figure variation start process executed in the special figure game control process in the main process of FIG. 88. A time chart showing an example of game progress in a small hit game executed by the game machine shown in FIG. 82. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a small hit game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 88. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a small hit game control process. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a small hit game control process. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a small hit game control process. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of a game flow (shift of a gaming state) in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 82. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 88. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a game state transition process. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a game state transition process. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a game state transition process. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a game state transition process. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a game state transition process. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a game state transition process. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 82. A flowchart showing an example. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a variation type (effect pattern) setting process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 104. The figure which shows an example of the effect pattern (the second time-shortening game state continuation effect pattern and the third time-shortening game state transition effect pattern) in the special figure game executed in the 2nd time-shortening game state. The figure which shows the screen example of the symbol display part in the special figure game executed in the 2nd time shortening game state. The figure which shows the screen example of the symbol display part in the special figure game executed in the 2nd time shortening game state. The figure which shows the screen example of the symbol display part in the special figure game executed in the 2nd time shortening game state. The figure which shows the screen example of the symbol display part in the special figure game executed in the 2nd time shortening game state. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a stop symbol combination setting process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 104. The figure which shows an example of the relationship between the number of time-saving games and the stop display combination of a decorative symbol. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a time reduction counter process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 104. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main control device of the gaming machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for setting a variation type (effect pattern) in a command determination process executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 82. The figure which shows an example of the effect pattern (the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern) in the 2nd time short game state. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process executed in the command judgment process. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the time saving game number | times at the time of the transition of the 3rd time saving game state in the gaming machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transition processing in the main processing executed by the main control device of the gaming machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main control device of the gaming machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the screen example of the symbol display part in the special figure game executed in the 2nd time shortening game state. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the screen example of the symbol display part in the special figure game executed in the 2nd time shortening game state.

Hereinafter, the first to seventh embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings, and the present invention will be understood. Further, each of the following embodiments is an example embodying the present invention, and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 55.

[Rough configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and FIGS. 4 to 6 are front views of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the front-back, left-right, and up-down expressions used in the present embodiment are defined by the front-back direction D1, the up-down direction D2, and the left-right direction D3 shown in FIGS. 1 to 3.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine provided with a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is provided on an island facility (not shown) in a gaming hall. By fixing the outer frame 14, it is installed in the game hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine, but other machines such as a spinning machine (slot machine), an arrange ball gaming machine, and a Jiyan ball gaming machine will be described. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine.

[Structure of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the inner frame 12.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection determination unit 21, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination unit 27, and the like.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 7) that switches an input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 described later according to the presence or absence of a pressing operation. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the operation button 20. The operation button 20 is triggered by an operation on the operation button 20 by the player during a predetermined operation acceptance period in the special figure game production executed in the special figure game in which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is clearly shown to the player. Operation button to be executed It is operated to execute the effect.

The installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper plate 23, and may be any position of the front frame 11 as long as it can be operated by the player. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Further, the operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In this case, when various game settings are made by operating the jog dial, options (items) such as the effect stage (background effect), characters, and music during the jackpot game, as well as the selection frequency and jackpot expectations of the predetermined effect. A desired item can be provisionally selected from the game settings such as the degree, and the provisionally selected option (item) can be selected by operating the operation button 20.

Further, the operation means for receiving the operation by the player such as the operation button 20 may be one or a plurality. In addition to the operation button 20, for example, a rotatable handle, a rotatable lever, a pushing member capable of moving back and forth (reciprocating) back and forth, up and down (reciprocating movement), a symbol display unit 341 described later, and a sub-movable display are used as the operating means. Examples include a touch panel provided on the unit 38, or a combination of two or more of these operating means (for example, an operating means capable of rotating and moving forward and backward), and these operating means are provided with an operation button 20 (for example, a handle or a lever). It may be an operation means provided with an operation button 20 or a touch panel).

The selection determination unit 21 is operated by the player, and is, for example, a push button used when a player accepts a player's pressing operation in a standby state in which the game is not executed and the player makes various game settings. be. Examples of various game settings include setting of characters appearing in game production, setting of execution frequency of various effects such as button effects, setting of jackpot expectation of various effects, and the like. The selection determination unit 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and a determination button 21B.

The plurality of selection buttons 21A are operated by the player to temporarily select a desired item from the options (items) on the various setting screens, for example, when performing various game settings, and the upper selection button 211 and the lower button 21A are operated. Includes select button 212, left select button 213 and right select button 214. Here, the provisional selection means that the contents of the provisional selection are confirmed (stored in the RAM 512) by operating the enter button 21B. As shown in FIG. 7, each of these selection buttons 211 to 214 has an upper selection operation switch 211a, a lower selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, and a right selection operation switch for switching an input signal to the voice lamp control device 5. It is equipped with 211d. These switches 211a to 211d are connected to the input / output I / F of the voice lamp control device 5. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 5, it is possible to determine whether or not the operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been performed based on the input signals of the switches 211a to 211d.

Further, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that the operation for each selection button 211 to 214 has been started, it is determined that the operation for each selection button 211 to 214 has been performed. Of course, when it is detected that the operation for each selection button 211 to 214 is continued or the operation is completed, it may be determined that the operation for each selection button 211 to 214 has been performed. ..

On the other hand, the decision button 21B is operated by the player to determine the tentatively selected item. Further, the determination button 21B includes a determination operation switch 21Ba for switching an input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 described later. The determination operation switch 21Ba is connected to the input / output I / F of the voice lamp control device 5. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not the operation for the determination operation switch 21Ba has been performed based on the input signal of the determination operation switch 21Ba.

Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the decision button 21B, the symbol display unit 341 and the sub movable display unit 38, which will be described later, are provided with a touch panel for receiving the operation of the player, and the touch panel is used as an operation means. It is also conceivable that it will be provided as. It is also conceivable to provide a rotating member such as a jog dial instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214). Further, the selection switches 211a to 211d and the determination operation switch 21Ba (see FIG. 7) are contact type switches and the like, but if they can be used to detect the presence or absence of operation by the player, for example, a piezoelectric element or the like. May be.

The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to launch the game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is performed by launching a gaming ball from the gaming ball launching mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, when the firing handle 22 is operated by the player, the gaming ball launching mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area every 0.6 sec.

The upper plate 23 is arranged below the panel 25, stores the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 of the payout mechanism 130 described later, and arranges the stored game balls in a row. It is used to guide the game ball launch mechanism 32. Further, the lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23, and is used to store the game balls that have become surplus in the upper plate 23.

The panel 25 is colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the game machine 10. The speaker 26 is a pair of speakers provided on the left and right of the upper end portion of the front frame 11, and executes an audio output effect for outputting audio. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. Further, the illumination unit 27 has a built-in light source such as an indicator lamp and an LED, and executes a lamp effect according to a blinking mode such as a lighting color, lighting or extinguishing.

[Structure of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launch mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. The inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the front frame 11 as described above. Therefore, the game board 31, the game ball launching mechanism 32, and the control unit 33 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11. In FIG. 2, the description on the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for the sake of simplification of the illustration.

The control unit 33 is provided on the back side of the game board 31, and has a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing the control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to one direction of the sub control unit 332. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 has an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314, a second winning opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, a through gate 317L, 317R, and an out. A mouth 318, a variable display unit 34, a main display unit 36, a sub movable display unit 38, and a movable accessory member 39 are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the game area on the board surface of the game board 31. Then, after being fired from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game balls that did not enter the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the out opening 318. Will be done.

Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a launching rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 is formed on the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is a guide. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 one by one onto the launch rail 321. The solenoid 323 is a driving means for launching the game ball supplied on the launch rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. Then, in the gaming machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the operation of the launching handle 22 by the player, and the gaming ball is launched from the gaming ball launching mechanism 32 to the gaming board 31. The game ball launch mechanism 32 may be a mechanism for launching a game ball by using another driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 4, openings penetrating the game board 31 in the front-rear direction are formed in the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening opening 318. ing. Then, on the back side of the game board 31, the entry of the game ball can be individually detected corresponding to each of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316. The ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 7) are provided. Further, the game balls that have passed through the openings of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the out opening 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31, and the out ball sensor 318a described later is collected. (See FIG. 7). The through gates 317L and 317R are vertically penetrating gates through which the game balls can pass, and have ball entry sensors 317La and 317Ra (see FIG. 7) capable of individually detecting the game balls passing through the through gates 317L and 317R. .. In the game board 31, the game ball launched in the left side area of the game board 31 may pass through the through gate 317L, and the game ball launched in the right side area of the game board 31 may pass through the through gate 317R. There is. and. When the passage of the game ball is detected by the ball entry sensors 317La and 317Ra (see FIG. 7), a normal winning lottery for whether or not to open the second winning opening 315 is executed. Then, if the lottery result in the lottery per drawing is a win, the game ball can be entered into the second winning opening 315 by opening the electric accessory 315b described later. That is, in the gaming machine 10, not only the probabilistic gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), but also the gaming ball is launched into the left region of the gaming board 31. Therefore, even in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), it is possible to insert the gaming ball into the second winning opening 315.

The high-probability mode has a high jackpot probability of being a jackpot as a result of the jackpot lottery (see FIG. 9B), and is a mode in which it is easy to shift to a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is executed, whereas a low probability mode is used. The mode has a low jackpot probability of becoming a jackpot as a result of the jackpot lottery (see FIG. 9A), and is a mode in which it is difficult to shift to the jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the high-frequency support mode has a high probability of hitting a normal figure as a result of a lottery per normal figure (see FIG. 12B), and the electric accessory 315b, which will be described later, has a high operating frequency, so that the second prize is won. While it is a mode in which it is easy to allow a game ball to enter the mouth 315, the low frequency support mode has a low probability of hitting a normal figure as a result of a lottery per normal figure (FIG. 12 (A)). (See), it is a mode in which it is difficult to allow a game ball to enter the second winning opening 315 because the operation frequency of the electric accessory 315b is low.

The ball entry sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, 317Ra and the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 7) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the ball entry sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, 317Ra and the out ball sensor The detection result of 318a is input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) transmits a command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the game ball according to the detection results of the ball entry sensors 313a to 316a. Hereinafter, the detection of the entry of a game ball by the entry sensors 313a to 316a may be referred to as winning. Further, the main control unit 331 (MPU41) counts the number of out balls based on the detection result of the out ball sensor 318a. The number of out balls counted here coincides with the number of launched game balls launched on the game board 31 by the game ball launching mechanism 32.

The ball entry sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, 317Ra, and the out ball sensor 318a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but it is possible to individually detect the ball entry of a game ball by another detection method. It may be any sensor.

Further, the second winning opening 315 is provided with an electric accessory (electric role) 315b for switching whether or not there is a restriction on the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening 315. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back surface side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, the electric accessory 315b can be opened to allow the game ball to enter the second winning opening 315, and the electric accessory 315b can be closed to allow the game ball to enter the second winning opening 315. The ball is restricted.

Further, the variable winning opening 316 is provided with an opening / closing door 319 for switching whether or not there is a restriction on the entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening 316. The opening / closing door 319 is opened / closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, the opening / closing door 319 allows the game ball to enter the variable winning opening 316, and the opening / closing door 319 restricts the entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening 316. The door. The opening / closing door 319 is moved to a position where the variable winning opening 316 is opened in the round game in the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and is otherwise waited at a position where the variable winning opening 316 is closed. As a result, a game ball launched in the right area of the game board 31 can enter the variable winning opening 316 in a round game in a big hit game.

In the gaming machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 is detected by the entry sensor 314a or the entry sensor 315a, the main control unit 331 performs a big hit lottery. Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display unit 36 according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery. Further, the lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub control unit 332, and the sub control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 and the like according to the lottery result.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the entry sensors 313a to 316a, A preset number of prize balls will be paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general winning opening 313 is 10, the number of winning balls when entering the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 is 3, and the number of winning balls is entered into the variable winning opening 316. If so, the number of prize balls is 10. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the lottery result performed by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the game shifts to the jackpot gaming state, and the later-described round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times or). By repeating this (16 times), a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

Further, when the game ball wins in the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, the jackpot lottery is executed. Then, when the lottery result is won, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state) and a 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state. In the 5R jackpot game state, the variable winning opening 316 is opened until a predetermined time elapses or until the maximum number (for example, 9) or more game balls are won in the variable winning opening 316. It is a game state including the execution mode. The 16R probability variation jackpot game state is a game state including an open / close execution mode in which a round game is performed 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out than in the 5R jackpot game state, which is more advantageous for the player than the 5R jackpot game state. It is a game state.

As shown in FIG. 4, the variable display unit 34 has a symbol display unit 341 such as a liquid crystal display that is visibly arranged through an opening 31A formed in a substantially central portion of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, a variable display effect of the decorative symbol according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 according to the ball entering the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. , And various image effects such as the special figure game effect executed in association with the variable display effect are performed. Further, the symbol display unit 341 may have a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display. It may further have a touch panel that accepts a person's touch operation.

For example, in the variable display effect of the decorative symbol on the symbol display unit 341, for example, a plurality of types of decorative symbols with numbers "1" to "9" are scrolled in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the diagonal direction, and the like in order. Will be done. In addition, a sub-design such as another character or a design may be displayed between the decorative symbols. Further, in the present embodiment, there are no sub-designs, and there are nine types of decorative symbols "1" to "9".

In the gaming machine 10, in the special symbol game, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed so that the variation of all the decorative symbols is stopped after the lapse of the preset variation display time from the start of the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341. Will be executed. More specifically, in the variation display of the decorative symbols, first, all the decorative symbols change along the preset variation directions (for example, the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, etc.), and the variation of the plurality of decorative symbols stops in order. Then, when the variation of the decorative symbol on all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time elapses, the variation display of the decorative symbol ends.

When the variation display of the decorative symbol on the symbol display unit 341 is completed, the symbol display unit 341 displays a state in which the decorative symbols are lined up on one or a plurality of effective lines. At this time, the stopped state of the decorative symbol clearly indicates or suggests the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot" or "5R normal jackpot", a state in which decorative symbols of the same type are lined up on the effective line is displayed, and it is clearly indicated that the lottery is a jackpot. Will be done. In addition, the jackpot type may be specified by the combination of decorative symbols on the effective line, but it is not always specified. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", a state in which, for example, "777" symbol combinations set as symbol combinations indicating 16R probability variation jackpot among decorative symbols are lined up on the effective line. Is displayed, or a state in which the same combination of decorative symbols other than "777" is lined up on the valid line is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", a state in which symbol combinations such as "333", which are set in advance as symbol combinations indicating 5R probability variation jackpot among the decorative symbols, are lined up on the effective line is displayed. Or, a state in which the same combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of symbols indicating 16R probability variation jackpot or 5R probability variation jackpot such as "777" and "333" is lined up on the effective line is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", other than the combination of decorative symbols such as "222" and "444" which are set in advance as a symbol combination indicating a normal jackpot among the decorative symbols. The state where the same combination of decorative symbols is lined up on the effective line is displayed. If the lottery result is "off", a state in which different combinations of decorative symbols are lined up on the effective line (for example, "323" or "723") is displayed.

In addition, the symbol display unit 341 displays a variable display of the decorative symbol in the special symbol game and a special symbol game effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. If the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" and a state in which jackpot symbol combinations other than the combination of decorative symbols indicating 16R probability variation jackpot is lined up on the effective line is displayed, 5R probability variation is displayed as a special figure game effect. A suggestion effect suggesting that it is a jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect is executed to clearly indicate that the lottery result for the special figure game is a 16R probability variation jackpot. Similarly, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" and a state in which jackpot symbol combinations other than the combination of decorative symbols indicating the probability variation jackpot are lined up on the effective line is displayed, 5R normal as a special figure game effect. A suggestion effect suggesting that it is a big hit is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the special figure game is a 5R probability variation jackpot is executed.

Further, when the game state shifts to the big hit game state, the symbol display unit 341 displays the big hit game effect including the opening effect, the opening / closing execution mode effect, and the ending effect.

The sub-movable display unit 38 includes a display device 381 such as a liquid crystal display, and is provided in the left side region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. The sub-movable display unit 38 is connected to the MPU 61 via the input / output I / F 62 of the display control device 6 (see FIG. 7), and is based on the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5. Then, under the control of the MPU 61, the image effect is executed on the display device 381 together with the symbol display unit 341 in the special figure game and the jackpot game.

The display device 381 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display. Further, the sub-movable display unit 38 may further include a touch panel that accepts a player's touch operation, in addition to the display device 381.

Further, the sub-movable display unit 38 can move in the left-right direction D3 between the standby position (position shown in FIG. 4) shown by a virtual line in FIG. 5 and the operating position shown by a solid line in FIG.

Here, as shown in FIG. 7, the gaming machine 10 returns to detect that the motor 38a that supplies the driving force to the sub movable display unit 38 and the sub movable display unit 38 have returned to the standby position. It has a detection unit 38b. The motor 38a is a stepping motor, a DC motor, or the like, and the return detection unit 38b is an optical sensor, a contact type sensor, or the like. The sub-movable display unit 38 and the motor 38a are connected via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear (not shown), and the sub-movable display unit 38 is placed in a standby position according to the rotation direction of the motor 38a (see FIG. 4). Move from to the right direction (operating direction) toward the operating position (solid line position in FIG. 5), or from the operating position (solid line position in FIG. 5) to the left direction (returning direction) toward the standby position (see FIG. 4). .. For example, the sub-movable display unit 38 is moved from the standby position (see FIG. 4) to the operating position (solid line position in FIG. 5) by rotating the motor 38a in the positive direction, and conversely, the motor 38a moves. By being rotated in the opposite direction, it is moved from the operating position (solid line position in FIG. 5) to the standby position (see FIG. 4).

Further, the gaming machine 10 includes a motor driver 38c to which the motor 38a and the return detection unit 38b are connected. The motor driver 38c is connected to the input / output I / F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5. Then, the motor driver 38c controls the motor 38a according to a control instruction from the voice lamp control device 5. Further, the motor driver 38c can acquire the detection result by the return detection unit 38b and transmit it to the voice lamp control device 5. The motor driver 38c may be omitted, and the motor 38a and the return detection unit 38b may be directly connected to the input / output I / O 52 of the voice lamp control device 5 and controlled by the voice lamp control device 5.

Such a sub-movable display unit 38 is operated in order to execute an effect related to the lottery result in the big hit lottery in the special figure game or the big hit game. For example, in the special figure game, the sub-movable display unit 38 operates as a jackpot confirmation effect indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and also has a chance to improve the expectation that the lottery result is a jackpot. It works as an up effect. Further, in the jackpot game, the sub-movable display unit 38 is a promotion effect (executed in the jackpot game) that clearly indicates that the actual lottery result is more advantageous to the player than the lottery result suggested by the special figure game effect. In addition to being operated for promotion of the number of rounds and promotion from normal jackpot to probabilistic jackpot), the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot while the right to execute the special figure game executed after the end of the jackpot game is pending. It is also possible to operate as a hold consecutive villa confirmation effect to notify that the thing is included.

The standby position and the operating position of the sub movable display unit 38 are not limited to the left side region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, and may be other positions. Further, the number of the sub-movable display units 38 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality of sub-movable display units 38, and the plurality of sub-movable display units 38 may be those that cooperate, interlock, follow, and follow. Further, the sub-movable display unit 38 may be movable in another direction in addition to or instead of the left-right direction D3. For example, the sub-movable display unit 38 may be movable in the vertical direction D2, an oblique direction, or the like, and may be further rotatable in a clockwise direction, a counterclockwise direction, or the like. Further, the sub-movable display unit 38 can be omitted, and one or more immovable display devices may be provided in place of the sub-movable display unit 38.

As shown in FIG. 4, the main display unit 36 has a normal symbol display unit 361, a first special symbol display unit 362, a second special symbol display unit 363, and a first special symbol reservation arranged in the upper right portion of the game board 31. The number display unit 364 and the second special figure reserved number display unit 365 are provided.

The ordinary symbol display unit 361 includes an LED pair as an ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol), and is a lottery per ordinary symbol as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b executed when the through gates 317L and 317R are won. The lottery result is displayed by the combination of turning on and off the LED pair. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) blinks the LED pair (normal symbol is variablely displayed) when the through gates 317L and 317R are won, and turns on or off each LED (normal symbol is stopped) after the variable display time has elapsed. By displaying), the result of the lottery per drawing is displayed. In addition, displaying the lottery result in the lottery per normal symbol by the variable display and the stop display of the normal symbol (normal symbol) is referred to as "ordinary symbol game" or "general figure game".

The first special symbol display unit 362 includes a 7-segment display device as a first special symbol (first special symbol), and whether or not to execute a jackpot game executed when a prize is won in the first winning opening 314. The lottery result in the 1st special symbol lottery (1st special symbol lottery, big hit lottery) is displayed by the combination of turning on and off the 7 segments in the 7-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) blinks the seven segments of the seven-segment display device (variates the first special symbol) when the first winning opening 314 is won, and after the variation display time elapses, each segment is displayed. The result of the jackpot lottery is displayed by turning it on or off (stopping and displaying the first special symbol). In addition, displaying the lottery result in the big hit lottery by the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol (first special symbol) is referred to as "first special symbol game" or "first special symbol game".

The second special symbol display unit 363 includes a 7-segment display device as a second special symbol (second special symbol), and whether or not to execute a jackpot game executed when a prize is won in the second winning opening 315. The lottery result in the second special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery, big hit lottery) is displayed by the combination of turning on and off the seven segments in the seven-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) blinks the seven segments of the seven-segment display device (variates the second special symbol) when the second winning opening 315 wins a prize, and after the variation display time elapses, each segment is displayed. The result of the jackpot lottery is displayed by turning it on or off (stopping and displaying the second special symbol). In addition, displaying the lottery result in the big hit lottery by the variable display and the stop display of the second special symbol (second special symbol) is referred to as "second special symbol game" or "second special symbol game".

In the following, the first special symbol (first special symbol) and the second special symbol (second special symbol) may be referred to as "special symbol" or "special symbol", and the first special symbol game (first). 1 special symbol game) and the second special symbol game (second special symbol game) may be referred to as "special symbol game" or "special symbol game".

The first special figure holding number display unit 364 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and is the number of holdings of the right to execute the first special figure game generated by winning a prize in the first winning opening 314. The number of holds N is displayed according to the number of lights of the four LEDs.

The second special figure holding number display unit 365 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and is the number of holdings of the right to execute the second special figure game generated by winning the second winning opening 315. The number of holds M is displayed according to the number of lights of the four LEDs.

The movable accessory member 39 is shown in the predetermined standby position shown in FIG. 4 (position shown by a virtual line in FIG. 6) located above the symbol display unit 341 and in FIG. 6 set below the standby position. It can move up and down along the surface of the symbol display unit 341 to and from the operation position shown by the solid line. The operating position (see the solid line in FIG. 6) is a position closer to the center of the symbol display unit 341 than the standby position (see FIG. 4). Further, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position (see the solid line in FIG. 6), the coverage rate on the surface of the symbol display unit 341 is higher than in the case where the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position (see FIG. 4). Further, in the movable accessory member 39, a plurality of lamps 391 are arranged in an annular shape on the peripheral portion thereof. In the present embodiment, 15 lamps 391 are arranged on the movable accessory member 39, and each lamp 391 can be individually turned on and off. Further, each of the plurality of lamps 391 is, for example, an LED lamp, and can be lit in a plurality of colors including white, yellow, green, red, or a mixed color thereof. In this way, each lamp 391 can be individually turned on and off, and can be turned on in a plurality of colors. Therefore, for example, when the movable accessory member 39 is operated, the lighting pattern and lighting color of each lamp 391 can be changed. Depending on the number of lights, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) that the lottery result in the big hit lottery that triggered the special figure game is a big hit, or to clearly indicate that the lottery result is a big hit. become. For example, with regard to the lighting color, the jackpot expectation can be increased in the order of white, yellow, green, and red, and by appropriately setting the lighting pattern and lighting color, a rainbow lamp effect is executed. By doing so, it is also possible to execute a definite effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit. Further, in the present embodiment, the movable accessory member 39 is exposed from the opening 31A at the standby position (see FIG. 4), but the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is obtained by using the lamp 391 of the portion exposed from the opening 31A. It is also conceivable to execute a production that suggests the degree of expectation of being a big hit. For example, in the present embodiment, since the four lamps 391 located on the lower side are exposed from the opening 31A (see FIG. 4), a jackpot expectation is made depending on which of these lamps 391 the lamp 391 is turned on. It is possible to suggest the degree. Further, in addition to the four lamps 391 located on the lower side, it is conceivable that the image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit.

The movable accessory member 39 may be entirely hidden without being exposed from the opening 31A at the standby position. Further, the gaming machine 10 may include a plurality of movable accessory members 39. Further, the movable accessory member 39 may be a combination of a plurality of separated movable members, a member that can be deformed into two or more forms, and a display such as a liquid crystal display device. Of course, the movable accessory member 39 is not limited to covering a part of the display screen of the symbol display unit 341, and may cover the entire display screen. Further, the central portion of the movable accessory member 39 may be configured as an illuminated portion that can be turned on and off. In this case, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit by turning on or blinking the illuminated portion, or to execute an effect of clearly indicating the big hit.

Such a movable accessory member 39 is operated in order to execute an effect related to a lottery result in a big hit lottery in a special figure game or a big hit game. For example, in the special figure game, the movable accessory member 39 operates as a jackpot confirmation effect indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and also has a chance to improve the expectation that the lottery result is a jackpot. It works as an up effect. Further, in the jackpot game, the movable accessory member 39 is a promotion effect (executed in the jackpot game) that clearly indicates that the actual lottery result is more advantageous to the player than the lottery result suggested by the special figure game effect. In addition to being operated for promotion of the number of rounds and promotion from normal jackpot to probabilistic jackpot), the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot while the right to execute the special figure game executed after the end of the jackpot game is pending. It is also possible to operate as a hold consecutive villa confirmation effect to notify that the thing is included.

As shown in FIG. 7, the gaming machine 10 has a motor 39a that supplies a driving force to the movable accessory member 39, and a return detection unit 39b for detecting that the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby position. Has. The motor 39a is a stepping motor, a DC motor, or the like, and the return detection unit 39b is an optical sensor, a contact type sensor, or the like. The movable accessory member 39 and the motor 39a are connected via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear (not shown), and the movable accessory member 39 is placed in a standby position according to the rotation direction of the motor 39a (see FIG. 4). From the downward direction (operation direction) toward the operating position (see the solid line in FIG. 6), or from the operating position (see the solid line in FIG. 6) to the upward direction (return direction) toward the standby position (see FIG. 4). .. For example, the movable accessory member 39 is moved from the standby position (see FIG. 4) to the operating position (see the solid line in FIG. 6) by rotating the motor 39a in the positive direction, and conversely, the motor 39a moves. By being rotated in the opposite direction, it is moved from the operating position (see the solid line in FIG. 6) to the standby position (see FIG. 4).

Further, the gaming machine 10 includes a motor driver 39c to which the motor 39a and the return detection unit 39b are connected. The motor driver 39c is connected to the input / output I / F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5. Then, the motor driver 39c controls the motor 39a according to the control instruction from the voice lamp control device 5. Further, the motor driver 39c can acquire the detection result by the return detection unit 39b and transmit it to the voice lamp control device 5. The motor driver 39c may be omitted, and the motor 39a and the return detection unit 39b may be directly connected to the input / output I / O 52 of the voice lamp control device 5 and controlled by the voice lamp control device 5.

Further, each lamp 391 of the movable accessory member 39 is individually connected to the input / output I / F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5, and each lamp 391 is individually turned on and off by the voice lamp control device 5. It can also be lit in multiple colors.

Further, it is conceivable to provide the game board 31 with a magnet sensor and a radio wave sensor (both not shown). The magnet sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning opening 314 and the variable winning opening 316. The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331. Thereby, when an act of illegally inducing a game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the variable winning opening 316 is performed by using a magnet, it is possible to detect the fraudulent act. On the other hand, the radio wave sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor is input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect the fraudulent act when the radio wave is illegally input to the ball entry sensors 314a and 315a to erroneously detect the entry of the game ball. The radio wave sensor can detect, for example, a radio wave of 50 MHz to 3 GHz.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 for storing a ball game ball supplied from an island facility (not shown) in the game hall, and a payout device 132 for paying out the ball game ball from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls on the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

The peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of balls to be paid out by the payout device 132. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts the electric power supplied from the island equipment (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the electric power to the control device and the driving means provided in the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 16.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in FIG. 7, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transition to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input / output I / F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 41 has a built-in ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, a part or all of the processing executed by the main controller 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the main control device 4 and outputs a control signal from the main control device 4. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to the ball entry sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, 317Ra, the out ball sensor 318a, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 enters the game ball into the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316 based on the detection signals from the entry sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, 317Ra. It is determined whether or not the ball is present and whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gates 317L and 317R. Further, the MPU 41 counts the number of out balls (number of fired balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 318a. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to a voice lamp control device 5, a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, a power supply control device 9, and the like.

Then, the MPU 41 gives the voice lamp control device 5 a normal figure fluctuation pattern command, an electric accessory opening command, an electric accessory closing command, a special figure fluctuation pattern command, a first special figure hold command, a second special figure hold command, and the like. Special figure shift command, jackpot game start command, opening start command, opening end command, open / close execution mode start command, round game start command, round game end command, interval start command, interval end command, open / close execution mode end command, ending start Outputs commands such as commands, ending end commands, jackpot game end commands, and game setting value change commands.

The normal map fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the fluctuation display time (normal map fluctuation pattern) of the normal symbol in the normal map game and the lottery result in the lottery per normal map. The normal symbol variation pattern command is based on the information stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area 412c (see FIG. 11) described later when the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 is started. The setting is made in step S1709 in the normal map fluctuation start processing of FIG. 24, which will be described later. The normal map fluctuation pattern command may be a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of only the fluctuation display time (normal map fluctuation pattern) of the normal symbol in the normal map game. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the common map lottery is set as a command different from the normal map fluctuation pattern command.

The electric accessory release command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the electric accessory 315b is released (operated). The electric accessory release command is set in step S1809 in the game control process per normal drawing in FIG. 25, which will be described later, when the electric accessory 315b is released (operated).

The electric accessory closing command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the electric accessory 315b is closed (returned). The electric accessory closing command is set in step S1816 in the game control process per normal drawing of FIG. 25, which will be described later, when the electric accessory 315b is closed (returned).

The special figure fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the fluctuation display time of the special symbol in the special figure game and the lottery result in the big hit lottery, and when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit. Contains information about jackpot types. When the special symbol variation pattern command starts the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36, the special symbol reservation storage area 412b (FIG. 8) described later is used. Based on the information stored in (see), it is set in step S2105 in the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. 28, which will be described later. The special symbol variation pattern command includes information that can specify the type of the special symbol when the variation is started, but the special symbol variation pattern command when the variation of the first special symbol is started and the second special symbol The special figure fluctuation pattern command when the fluctuation is started may be set as a separate special figure fluctuation command. Further, the special figure fluctuation pattern command may be a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the fluctuation display time and only of the special symbol in the special figure game. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type is set as a command different from the special figure fluctuation pattern command.

The first special figure hold command and the second special figure hold command are stored in the special figure hold storage area 412b (see FIG. 8) described later by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. When the number of 1st special figure hold N or the 2nd special figure hold number M increases, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the increased hold, the variation display time of the special symbol (special symbol variation pattern), and the first This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the special figure hold number N or the second special figure hold number M. In the first special figure hold command and the second special figure hold command, when the first special figure hold number N or the second special figure hold number M increases, the special figure hold storage area 412b (see FIG. 8) described later. ), The first special figure hold command setting process of step S1105 in the start winning process of FIG. 18 described later (step S1207 of the first special figure hold command setting process of FIG. 19 described later) or It is set in S1209) or in the second special figure hold command setting process in step S1110.

The special figure shift command is the first of the first special figure hold storage area REA when the first special figure hold number N or the second special figure hold number M decreases due to the start of the special figure game (variation display of the special figure). 1 Reservation area REA1 to 4 Reservation area REA4, or 2nd special figure reservation storage area REB 1st reservation area REB1 to 4th reservation area REB4 (see FIG. 8). This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the information has been shifted. The special figure shift command is set in step S2008 in the special figure data setting process of FIG. 27, which will be described later.

The jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is started, that is, the gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, and when shifting to the jackpot gaming state, FIG. 29 described later. It is set in step S2204 in the jackpot game control process of.

The opening start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game is to be started, and is set in step S2208 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, which will be described later, when the opening of the jackpot game is started. Will be done. The opening start command can be omitted because it is possible to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game is started by the jackpot game start command.

The opening end command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the opening of the big hit game is finished, and is set in step S2214 in the big hit game control process of FIG. 30 described later when the opening of the big hit game is finished. Will be done.

The open / close execution mode start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game is started, and when the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game is started, the jackpot game control of FIG. It is set in step S2216 in the process.

The round game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the round number information indicating the start of each round game and the round number of the round game in the open / close execution mode in the jackpot game. , At the start of each round game, it is set in step S2217 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 30 described later. In addition to the round game start command, a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started may be set at the start of the round game, and the command may be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5.

The round game end command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the current round game is ended in the open / close execution mode in the big hit game, and when each round game is finished, the big hit game of FIG. 31 described later is described. It is set in step S2229 in the control process.

The interval start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the interval between round games is started in the open / close execution mode in the jackpot game, and when the interval is started, the jackpot game control of FIG. 31 described later is described. It is set in step S2233 in the process.

The interval end command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the interval between round games is ended in the open / close execution mode in the jackpot game, and when the interval is terminated, the jackpot game control of FIG. 32, which will be described later. It is set in step S2239 in the process.

The open / close execution mode end command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game is to be terminated, and when the open / close execution mode is terminated, the step in the jackpot game control process of FIG. It is set in S2241.

The ending start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the ending of the jackpot game is to be started, and is set in step S2242 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 31 described later when the ending is started.

The ending end command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the ending of the big hit game is finished, and is set in step S2248 in the big hit game control process of FIG. 32, which will be described later, when the ending is finished.

The jackpot game end command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is finished, and is set in step S2250 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, which will be described later, when the jackpot game is terminated.

The game setting value change command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value, and when the game setting value is changed, FIG. 35 described later. It is set in step S2408 in the game setting value change processing of.

Although commands other than the above-mentioned commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, their description will be omitted.

Further, the main control device 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillating circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillating circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of the main timer interrupt process, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In the present embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 has a main timer interrupt described later each time a rising edge (or falling edge) of the clock signal occurs. It is assumed that the embedded process is started and executed. The oscillation circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are also mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as needed, and supply the operation clock of the control main body in the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

The ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used to set a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 and the like. The RAM 412 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 8, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a big hit lottery or a common drawing lottery will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter storage area 412a, the special figure hold storage area 412b, and the normal figure hold storage area 412c of the RAM 412 to display the jackpot lottery result and the variation display time of the special figure. And the setting of the lottery result per normal figure and the variable display time of the normal symbol are executed.

In the lottery counter storage area 412a, a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a reach random number counter C3 are stored as lottery counters. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for a jackpot lottery as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is used when the result of the jackpot lottery is out of order and the out-of-order type is determined. Further, the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the special figure variation type counter CS1 are stored in the lottery counter storage area 412a. The jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The special symbol variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the variation display time of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36. Further, in the lottery counter storage area 412a, a normal hit random number counter C4, a normal hit type random number counter C5, a normal hit random number initial value counter CIN2, and a normal figure variation type counter CS2 are stored as lottery counters. The normal hit random number counter C4 is used for a lottery per drawing as to whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second winning opening 315 is set to the electric accessory open state. The normal hit type random number counter C5 is used to sort the normal figure hit type (short open or long open) when the result of the lottery per normal figure is a normal figure hit. The normal hit random number initial value counter CIN2 is used to set the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4. The normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is used to determine the variation display time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36.

Then, each lottery counter C1 to C5, CIN1, CIN2, CS1, CS2 is used as a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value at short intervals by the MPU 41 and returns to 0 after reaching the preset maximum value. Be done. The updated values are recorded in the lottery counters C1 to C5, CIN1, CIN2, CS1, and CS1, and the jackpot lottery result, the variable display time of the special figure, the setting of the jackpot type and the missed type, and the lottery result per normal figure are recorded. , It is referred to by MPU41 when setting the variable display time of a normal symbol and the type per normal symbol.

The special figure hold storage area 412b includes a first special figure hold storage area REA, a second special figure hold storage area REB, and a special figure execution area AE. The first special figure hold storage area REA includes a first hold area REA1, a second hold area REA2, a third hold area REA3, a fourth hold area REA4, and a first special figure hold number storage area NAA. The second special figure hold storage area REB includes a first hold area REB1, a second hold area REB2, a third hold area REB3, a fourth hold area REB4, and a second special figure hold number storage area NAB.

Then, when the game ball enters the first winning opening 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the special figure variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is obtained. It is acquired as special figure winning / failing information used in the jackpot lottery, and is stored in any of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 of the first special figure reserved storage area REA. Further, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 315, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the special figure variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is obtained. It is acquired as the special figure winning / failing information used in the jackpot lottery, and is stored in any of the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second special figure reserved storage area REB. The lottery counter storage area 412a (big hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and special figure fluctuation corresponding to each of the first special figure holding storage area REA and the second special figure holding storage area REB. Type counter CS1 etc.) may be provided individually.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the special figure variation type counter CS1 is the first reserved area REA1 to the first reserved area REA of the first special figure reserved storage area REA. 4 It is stored in one of the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the hold area REA4 and the second special figure hold storage area REB.

Therefore, the special figure is stored in the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 of the first special figure hold storage area REA, and the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the second special figure hold storage area REA. In addition to the lottery result of the big hit lottery for the special symbol game executed based on the figure winning / failing information, the special symbol (symbol display unit 341) on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 in the special symbol game. It is possible to determine in advance the variation display time (special map variation pattern) for the decorative pattern).

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first winning opening 314, the special figure winning / failing information is the first holding area REA1, the second holding area REA2, and the third holding area REA3 of the first special figure holding storage area REA. , 4th reserved area Stored in an empty area in the priority order of REA4. In the first special figure hold number storage area NAA, the number of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 in which the special figure hit / miss information is stored is stored as the first special figure hold number N.

Further, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 315, the special figure winning / failing information is the first holding area REB1, the second holding area REB2, the third holding area REB3, and the second holding area REB of the second special figure holding storage area REB. 4 Hold area Stored in an empty area in the priority order of REB4. In the second special figure hold number storage area NAB, the number of the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 in which the special figure pass / fail information is stored is stored as the second special figure hold number M.

That is, in the gaming machine 10, the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 of the first special drawing holding storage area REA, and the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second special figure holding storage area REB. With a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, it is possible to hold up to four special figure winning / failing information as winning history for the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315.

In addition, it is considered as another embodiment that a holding area having a maximum holding number of 8 is provided in common to the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315, and even in this case, a maximum of eight can be held in total. It is possible to withhold special figure winning / failing information as a winning history. The storage process of the special figure pass / fail information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing the process according to the control program.

The special symbol execution area AE is the first special symbol holding storage area REA when the variable display of the special symbol is started in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36. 1 Reservation area A storage area used to move the special figure hit / miss information stored in the first reservation area REB1 of the reservation area REA1 or the second special figure reservation storage area REB. Specifically, the special figure hit / miss information of the first reserved area REB1 of the second special figure reserved storage area REB is preferentially moved to the special figure execution area AE, and the first reserved area of the second special figure reserved storage area REB is given priority. When the special figure hold number N does not exist in REB1 and the second special figure hold number N stored in the second special figure hold number storage area NAB is 0, the first hold area of the first special figure hold storage area REA is The special figure hit / miss information of REA1 is moved to the special figure execution area AE. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the second special figure game is executed in preference to the first special figure game, and in the probabilistic game state and the time-saving game state, which are the high-frequency support modes, the game ball is placed in the right area of the game board 31. By executing the so-called right-handed hitting, the second special figure game is mainly executed.

The first special figure hold number N stored in the first special figure hold number storage area NAA of the first special figure hold storage area REA and the second special figure hold number storage area of the second special figure hold storage area REB. If the difference from the second special figure hold number M stored in the NAB is 2 or more, the value of the hold area with the larger number may be given priority and moved to the special figure execution area AE. It can be considered as another embodiment. Further, the special figure hit / miss information of the first reserved area REA1 of the first special figure reserved storage area REA and the first reserved area REB1 of the second special figure reserved storage area REB may be alternately moved to the special figure execution area AE. It can be considered as another embodiment.

Then, at the start of one special figure game, the MPU 41 performs a big hit lottery or the like based on the numerical information stored as the special figure hit / miss information in the special figure execution area AE. At this time, when the first holding area REA1 of the first special drawing holding storage area REA is moved to the special drawing execution area AE, the special figure winning / failing information stored in the second holding area REA2 is the first holding area REA1. The special figure winning / failing information stored in the third holding area REA3 shifts to the second holding area REA2, and the special drawing winning / failing information stored in the fourth holding area REA4 shifts to the third holding area REA3.

Similarly, when the first holding area REB1 of the second special drawing holding storage area REB is moved to the special drawing execution area AE, the special figure winning / failing information stored in the second holding area REB2 is transferred to the first holding area REB1. The special figure winning / failing information stored in the third holding area REB3 is shifted to the second holding area REB2, and the special drawing winning / failing information stored in the fourth holding area REB4 is shifted to the third holding area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated by adding 1 in order in the range of 0 to 637, for example, in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17 described later, and is 0 after reaching the maximum value. Is returned to. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated in the same manner as the jackpot random number counter C1. Then, in the first to fourth reserved areas REA1 to REA4 and REA1 to REB4 of the first special figure reserved storage area REA1 or the second special figure reserved storage area REA2, the game ball is placed in the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening. The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 at the timing of winning the prize in 315 is stored.

There are two types of random number values for winning the jackpot, depending on the winning / failing table stored in the winning / failing table storage area in ROM 411, corresponding to the low-probability mode, which is a normal gaming state or a time-saving gaming state, and the high-probability mode, which is a probabilistic gaming state. It is set. Here, FIG. 9A is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability mode hit / fail table corresponding to a low-probability mode, and FIG. 9B is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability mode hit / miss table corresponding to a high-probability mode.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the probability that the lottery result in the big hit lottery will be a big hit (big hit probability) is set as the game setting value as the low probability mode hit / miss table and the high probability mode hit / miss table, respectively. A plurality of different pass / fail tables are provided depending on the situation. The low-probability mode hit / miss table and the high-probability mode hit / miss table each include six hit / miss tables corresponding to the game setting values 1 to 6 in six stages. In the order of game setting value 6, game setting value 5, game setting value 4, game setting value 3, game setting value 2 and game setting value 1, the lottery result in the big hit lottery has a high jackpot probability and is advantageous to the player. Will be.

In the game setting value 1, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 206 (0 to 205) for the low probability mode winning / failing table, which is high. The number of probability mode hit / fail tables is 821 (0 to 820). That is, at the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 318.1 (206/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/79. 9 (820/65536).

In the game setting value 2, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 212 (0 to 211) for the low probability mode winning / failing table, which is high. The number of probability mode hit / fail tables is 845 (0 to 844). That is, in the game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 309.1 (212/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/77. 6 (845/65536).

In the game setting value 3, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 218 (0 to 217) for the low probability mode winning / failing table, which is high. The number of probability mode hit / fail tables is 869 (0 to 868). That is, at the game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 300.6 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/75. 4 (869/65536).

In the game setting value 4, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 224 (0 to 223) for the low probability mode winning / failing table, which is high. The number of probability mode hit / fail tables is 893 (0 to 892). That is, at the game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 292.6 (224/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/73. 4 (893/65536).

In the game setting value 5, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 230 (0 to 229) for the low probability mode winning / failing table, which is high. The number of probability mode hit / fail tables is 917 (0 to 916). That is, at the game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 284.9 (230 / 65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/71. 5 (917/65536).

In the game setting value 6, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 236 (0 to 235) for the low probability mode winning / failing table, which is high. The number of probability mode hit / fail tables is 941 (0 to 940). That is, at the game setting value 6, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 277.7 (236/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/69. 6 (941/65536).

If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than these random numbers that win the jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be out of the question.

Here, in the low-probability mode win / fail table and the high-probability mode win / fail table, random numbers that are big hits in the big hit lottery between the same game setting values are common, but it is also considered that the random numbers that are big hits are not common. Will be. Further, the random numbers that win the jackpot may not be continuous values but may be partially or wholly discrete values.

Further, the low-probability mode hit / miss table and the high-probability mode hit / miss table are provided six by six according to the game setting values of six stages, but at least one win / miss table for each mode is sufficient. That is, the game setting value is not limited to 6 stages. It is also conceivable to provide a plurality of low-probability mode hit / miss tables corresponding to a plurality of game setting values, while providing one high-probability mode hit / miss table. That is, it is conceivable that a plurality of stages of game setting values are provided for the low probability mode, and a stepwise game setting value is not provided for the high probability mode, and the jackpot probability is made uniform. Of course, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode may be made uniform, and a plurality of stages of game setting values may be provided for the high probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins in the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpots, the probabilistic jackpot and the normal jackpot, is set by the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area in the ROM 411.

Here, FIG. 9C is a diagram showing an example of a distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 9C, when the type of the special figure game is the first special figure game triggered by the winning of the first winning opening 314, the number of random numbers that become the 5R probability variation jackpot is 0 to 9. There are 10 random numbers, and the number of random numbers that are 16R probability variation jackpots is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that are 5R normal jackpots is 5 from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of the special figure game is the second special figure game triggered by winning the second winning opening 315, the number of random numbers that become the 5R probability variation jackpot is 5 from 0 to 4, and the 16R probability variation jackpot. The number of random numbers to be becomes 10 is 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers to be a 5R normal jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of the probability variation jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is set to be the same at 75%, but 16R in the second special symbol game as compared with the first special symbol game. The probability of a probabilistic jackpot is set high. That is, in the probabilistic game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode in which the opening probability of the electric accessory 315b is high) and the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), the normal game state (low probability mode and electric power). Compared to the low-frequency support mode in which the opening probability of the accessory 315b is low), the expected value of the game ball when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is set higher.

Then, in both the first special figure game and the second special figure game, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a probabilistic jackpot, the probabilistic game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) is set after the jackpot game is completed. Transition. In the gaming machine 10, an upper limit value is not set for the number of special figure games that can be executed in the probabilistic gaming state, and the gaming machine 10 is configured as a so-called loop probabilistic machine.

If the result of the big hit lottery is a normal big hit, the game shifts to a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the big hit game is completed. In the gaming machine 10, an upper limit value (100 times in this embodiment) is set for the number of special figure games that can be executed in the time-saving game state (number of times of time-saving games), and a big hit is made within the number of special figure games of this upper limit value. If the result of the lottery is not a big hit, the game shifts to the normal game state, which is the low frequency support mode, after the special figure game of the upper limit value is executed. The number of special figure games in the time-saving game state is not limited to 100, and may be another number.

It should be noted that the transition from the probabilistic gaming state to the normal gaming state is not limited to the case where the special figure game of the upper limit value is executed, and may be executed, for example, when the state transition lottery (falling lottery) is won. .. In this case, until a predetermined number of special figure games are executed, the probabilistic game state is prevented from transitioning (falling) to the normal game state, and the minimum number of special figure games executed in the probabilistic game state is set to the predetermined number of times. Guarantee is also possible. This prevents the number of special figure games to be executed in the probabilistic game state from being significantly reduced.

In this embodiment, the first winning opening 314, which triggers the execution of the first special symbol game by winning, and the second winning opening 315, which triggers the execution of the second special symbol game by winning, are individually assigned. A minute table is set, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, but the first special symbol game and the second special symbol It is also possible that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same for the game. Further, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to the loop probabilistic machine, but may be configured as an ST machine including a V-ST machine, a kind-type two-kind mixer, or the like.

Then, in the MPU 41, the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot", and "16R probability variation jackpot" based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the special figure execution area AE. 5R It is determined whether it is a "normal jackpot" or a "missing".

Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an open / close execution mode is executed in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened in a predetermined mode is repeated five times in the jackpot game. Further, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the open / close execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times in the jackpot game is executed. As an opening mode of the variable winning opening 316 in each round game, for example, it is conceivable to open the variable winning opening 316 once. Of course, it is also conceivable to open the variable winning opening 316 a plurality of times in some or all round games.

In the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game, the player shifts to a probability variation game state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high and the probability of opening the electric accessory 315b is high. Then, in the present embodiment, the probability variation game state is continued until the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is determined by the MPU 41 to be "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot", or "5R normal jackpot".

On the other hand, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state, which is a low probability mode in which the jackpot winning probability is low and a high frequency support mode in which the opening probability of the electric accessory 315b is high. Then, in the present embodiment, the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) continues until the player is notified of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery of a predetermined number of preset times such as 100 times. Or, it ends when the player is notified that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit before the lapse of the specified number of times.

Further, in the special figure game, it is also conceivable to perform a fall lottery from the probabilistic game state to the time-saving game state or the normal game state as another embodiment. If the lottery result in the big hit lottery is out of order, the probabilistic game state is not changed to the big hit game state and the time-saving game state. In the present embodiment, a case where the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpots, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot, will be described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, 2 round probability variation jackpot, 2 It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types such as round regular jackpot and 16R regular jackpot.

Further, the reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and reaches the maximum value in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17, which will be described later, by adding one by one in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 238. It will be returned to 0 later. Then, in the first to fourth reserved areas REA1 to REA4 and REA1 to REB4 of the first special figure reserved storage area REA1 or the second special figure reserved storage area REA2, the game ball is placed in the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening. The value of the reach random number counter C3 at the timing when the prize is won in 315 is stored.

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stop result of the variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order. Specifically, due to the deviation type table stored in the deviation type table storage area in the ROM 411, the front / rear deviation reach, in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the reach is also generated. The value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to each of the three types of outliers, that is, the reach other than the front-back deviation in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol, and the complete deviation in which the reach does not occur, is set.

Here, FIG. 9D is a diagram showing an example of an outlier type table. In the example shown in FIG. 9 (D), the value of the random number that is out of front and back is 0 to 8, the value of the random number that is reach other than front and back is 9 to 38, and the value of the random number that is completely out of line is 39. ~ 238. The MPU 41 determines that reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the special figure game in which the 5R probability variation jackpot, the 16R probability variation jackpot, or the 5R normal jackpot is won, that is, the special figure game that shifts to the jackpot game state. ..

Here, the reach indicates a state in which a combination of decorative symbols indicating that a big hit has been won is likely to occur between the start of the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display unit 341 and the stop display of the symbol. It is a fluctuating state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions of the decorative symbol on the effective line in the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position fluctuates. be. Further, while the reach of the symbol display unit 341 is in a fluctuating state, a story effect process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest an expectation level, or an operation by a player on an operation button 20 is reflected in the effect. Person participation type operation effect processing and the like are executed. It is conceivable that the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden, reduced or enlarged, and displayed during the execution of these effect processes.

The special figure variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 199, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the special symbol variation type counter CS1 has a special symbol (symbol display unit) on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36, depending on the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. The special symbol variation pattern type (variation display time of the special symbol) indicating the variation display time of the decorative symbol (decorative symbol in 341) is determined. By determining the special figure fluctuation pattern type in this way, the voice lamp control device 5 has rough features such as high-speed fluctuation effect (basic effect, non-reach effect), normal reach effect, super reach effect, and special reach effect. The variation type (effect pattern) in the figure game is determined according to the special figure variation pattern type (variation display time of the special symbol). The special figure variation type counter CS1 is updated at least once in step S1402 each time the main process of FIG. 21 described later is executed by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated in step S1414 even within the remaining time in the main process. .. Then, in the first to fourth reserved areas REA1 to REA4 and REA1 to REB4 of the first special figure reserved storage area REA1 or the second special figure reserved storage area REA2, the game ball is placed in the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening. The value of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 at the timing when the prize is won in 315 is stored.

Then, the MPU 41 has a variation display time of the special symbol based on the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the variation table (see FIGS. 10A to 10C) preset according to the result of the jackpot lottery. Determine the special figure fluctuation pattern that indicates. Specifically, the MPU 41 is a normal jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 10A), a probabilistic jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 10B), or an out-of-bounds fluctuation table stored in advance in the fluctuation table storage area of ROM 411 (see FIG. 10 (A)). (See FIG. 10C) to specify the special figure fluctuation pattern type. It should be noted that these fluctuation tables may be provided separately for the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. Further, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

Here, FIGS. 10 (A), 10 (B), and 10 (C) are diagrams showing an example of a fluctuation table. In the normal jackpot fluctuation table shown in FIG. 10A, the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table shown in FIG. 10B, and the deviation fluctuation table shown in FIG. 10C, the special chart fluctuation is performed according to the value of the special chart fluctuation type counter CS1. The patterns are associated in advance. The MPU 41 is a normal jackpot fluctuation table shown in FIG. 10A when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is "5R normal jackpot", and when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" or "16R probability variation jackpot". Refers to the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table shown in FIG. 10 (B) and the deviation fluctuation table shown in FIG. 10 (C) when the lottery result is “out of” to specify the type of the special figure variation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in the normal jackpot fluctuation table and the probabilistic jackpot fluctuation table, the special figure fluctuation pattern “01” is set according to the value of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1. One of "03" is selected. Here, when the special figure variation pattern "01" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a normal reach effect pattern in which the variation display time is 30 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 or the like determines the normal reach effect pattern. A special game effect is executed according to the normal reach effect pattern. The normal reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the special figure game effect is the normal reach effect. Further, when the special figure variation pattern "02" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a super reach effect pattern in which the variation display time is 60 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 or the like determines the super reach effect pattern. A special game effect is executed according to the super reach effect pattern. The super reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the special figure game effect is the super reach effect. Further, when the special figure variation pattern "03" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a special reach effect pattern having the longest variation display time of 90s as the variation type (effect pattern), and the symbol display unit 341 or the like is determined. In, a special game effect is executed according to the special reach effect pattern. The special reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the special figure game effect is the special reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 10C, the deviation variation table corresponds to the stop display type of the decorative symbol at the time of deviation determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3 (front / rear deviation reach, reach other than front / rear deviation, complete deviation). Therefore, the correspondence between the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 and the special figure fluctuation pattern is defined. More specifically, when the stop display type at the time of disconnection is front / rear deviation reach or non-front / rear deviation reach, any of the special map fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" according to the value of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1. Is selected. On the other hand, when the stop display type at the time of disengagement is completely deviated, either the special figure fluctuation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1. When the special figure fluctuation pattern "04" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach effect pattern (7-second non-reach effect pattern) in which the variation display time is 7 s as the variation type (effect pattern type). Then, the special figure game effect is executed according to the 7-second non-reach effect pattern on the symbol display unit 341 or the like. Further, when the special figure fluctuation pattern "05" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach effect pattern (10-second non-reach effect pattern) in which the variation display time is 10 s as the variation type (effect pattern type). Then, the special figure game effect is executed according to the 10-second non-reach effect pattern on the symbol display unit 341 or the like.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, as the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the special figure variation pattern “04”, the variation display of the decorative symbol is a combination of the deviation symbols without accompanied by a notice effect such as displaying a character, a message, or the like. The variable display of the out-of-order pattern that is stopped and displayed is executed. Further, in the gaming machine 10, as a variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the special figure variation pattern "05", the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped by the combination of the deviation symbols with a notice effect such as displaying a character, a message, or the like. The variable display of the displayed deviation pattern is executed. Further, in the case of the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the special figure variation pattern "05", the player participation type operation effect reflecting the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed as the advance notice effect. be.

The type of the special figure fluctuation pattern is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 10 (A), 10 (B) and 10 (C).

For example, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reach effects having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as normal reach effects executed in the normal reach effect pattern corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern "01", and are selected from among them. One of the normal reach effects is executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of super reach effects having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as super reach effects executed in the super reach effect pattern corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern “02”. One of the super reach effects selected from is executed. The super reach production is a reach production with a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach production, and the probability (expectation) that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is higher than the normal reach production, and the big hit is won more than the special reach production. It is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) is low.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of special reach effects having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as special reach effects executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern "03". One of the special reach effects selected from is executed. The special reach effect is a reach effect having a longer variation time than the normal reach effect, and is an effect developed from, for example, a normal reach effect or a super reach effect. The special reach effect is executed when it is suggested to the player that the probability (expectation degree) of winning a big hit is higher than that of the normal reach effect or the special reach effect.

It should be noted that the effect pattern corresponding to the special figure variation pattern includes an operation effect in which the operation status of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, for example, a one-shot operation effect in which the one-shot operation is reflected in the effect, and an operation button by the player. A player participation type operation effect such as a continuous hit operation effect in which the continuous hit operation of 20 is reflected in the effect, and a long press operation effect in which the long press operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect may be included.

Then, when the MPU 41 specifies the variation display time of the special symbol (variation display time of the decorative symbol in the symbol display unit 341) on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36, The special figure fluctuation pattern command indicating the special figure fluctuation display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is input to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the MPU41 is a special figure in which "A" indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot is added in front of the special figure fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Output any of the fluctuation pattern commands "A01" to "A03". Further, in the MPU 41, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the special map fluctuation pattern in which "B" indicating that the lottery is a 5R probability variation jackpot is added in front of the special figure fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Output any of the commands "B01" to "B03". Further, in the MPU 41, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the special map fluctuation pattern in which "C" indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot is added in front of the special figure fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" is added. Output any of the commands "C01" to "C03". Further, when the lottery result is "off", the MPU 41 is a special figure fluctuation pattern command "D01" in which a "D" indicating that the lottery is out is added before the special figure fluctuation patterns "01" to "05". -Output any one of "D05". That is, the special figure fluctuation pattern command includes not only the special figure fluctuation pattern (time of the special figure game) which is the fluctuation display time of the special symbol, but also information for specifying the result of the jackpot lottery. Then, in the voice lamp control device 5, not only the special figure fluctuation pattern (time of the special figure game) which is the fluctuation display time of the special symbol but also the result of the big hit lottery can be determined based on the special figure fluctuation pattern command. It is possible, and based on the variable display time of the special symbol (time of the special symbol game) and the result of the big hit lottery, the variation type (effect pattern) displayed on the symbol display unit 341 etc. and the stop of the decorative symbol. Determine details such as display combinations. Then, based on the details such as the determined variation type (effect pattern), the voice lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to display the decorative symbol in a variable manner and stops, and also performs an image effect according to the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, the speaker 26 executes the voice effect according to the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the illumination unit 27 executes the illumination effect (lamp effect).

As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 executes a simple process of determining the variation display time of the decorative symbol in the symbol display unit 341 based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the variation table. It will be. Therefore, even when the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the jackpot lottery can be stably executed by the MPU 41. Further, since the details of the variation mode of the decorative symbol actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the voice lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variation modes as the variation mode. Is.

The variation tables shown in FIGS. 10A to 10C are commonly used in various gaming states (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, and probabilistic gaming state), but the variation table is individually used for each of the various gaming states. May be set, or a variable table may be set individually for the high frequency support mode (time saving game state and probability variation game state) and the low frequency support mode. In addition, when the fluctuation table is set individually for each game state or support mode, the average value of the fluctuation display time is, for example, the normal game state (low frequency support mode), the shorter game state and the probable change game state (higher). It is set longer than the frequency support mode). Further, when setting different fluctuation tables for the time-saving gaming state and the probabilistic gaming state, the average value of the fluctuation display time may be set longer in the time-saving gaming state than in the probabilistic gaming state, or in the probabilistic gaming state. It may be set longer than the time-saving game state.

Here, FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an example of the normal drawing reservation storage area 412c of the storage area of the main control device 4 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, the normal figure hold storage area 412c has the normal figure 1st hold area SE1, the normal figure 2 hold area SE2, the normal figure 3 hold area SE3, the normal figure 4 hold area SE4, and the normal figure fluctuation. Includes hold number storage area SNA and normal map execution area SAE.

The first holding area SE1 to the fourth holding area SE4 are the normal hit random number counter C4, which is acquired as the hit / miss information used in the hit / miss lottery when the game ball passes through the through gates 317L and 317R. , Is a storage area for storing the normal hit type random number counter C5 and the normal figure variation type counter CS2.

The normal figure fluctuation holding number storage area SNA stores the number of the normal figure 1st holding area SE1 to the normal figure 4th holding area SE4 in which the normal figure winning / failing information is stored. That is, the normal figure variable hold number storage area SNA is a storage area for storing the number of hold of the right to execute the normal figure game.

The normal symbol execution area SAE is a storage used to move the normal symbol hit / miss information of the normal symbol first holding area SE1 when the variable display of the normal symbol is started in the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36. It is an area. Then, the MPU 41 has numerical information (ordinary hit random number counter C4, ordinary hit type random number counter C5, and normal map variation type) stored as normal figure hit / miss information in the normal figure execution area SAE at the start of one normal figure game. Based on the value of the counter CS2), the hit / fail table for each normal figure (see FIGS. 12 (A) and 12 (B)) and the classification table for each type of normal figure (FIG. 12 (C) and FIG. 12) described below. (See (D)) is used to draw a lottery for each normal figure, and the normal figure fluctuation table (not shown) is used to determine the normal figure fluctuation display time for the normal symbol. At this time, when the normal map pass / fail information stored in the normal map first hold area SE1 is moved to the normal map execution area SAE, the normal map pass / fail information stored in the normal map second hold area SE2 is the normal map. The normal map hit / miss information shifted to the first hold area SE1 and stored in the normal figure 3 hold area SE3 is shifted to the normal figure 2 hold area SE2 and stored in the normal figure 4 hold area SE4. The information is shifted to the third reserved area SE3 in the normal map.

The normal hit random number counter C4 is periodically updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17, which will be described later, by adding one by one in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 299, and after reaching the maximum value. It is returned to 0. Then, in the normal figure 1st hold area to the normal figure 4 hold area SE1 to SE4 of the normal figure hold storage area 412c, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gates 317L and 317R is used. Stored. Further, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed for each normal figure as to whether or not the electric accessory 315b is opened for a predetermined time according to the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal figure reservation storage area 412c.

Here, FIGS. 12 (A) and 12 (B) are diagrams showing an example of a hit / miss table for a normal figure. In the present embodiment, there are two types of hit / miss tables for the normal map, a low frequency support mode hit / miss table shown in FIG. 12 (A) and a high frequency support mode hit / miss table shown in FIG. 12 (B). Is set. That is, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the probability of hitting a normal figure differs between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of hitting a normal figure than the low-frequency support mode. It is set.

The low-frequency support mode normal-figure hit / fail table shown in FIG. 12A is a table used in the normal-figure-per-normal lottery in the normal gaming state, which is the low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 12A, in the low frequency support mode normal figure hit / fail table, when the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure is 0, the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure is 1 to 299. In the case of, it is set to be off. That is, in the normal gaming state (low frequency support mode), the probability of hitting a normal figure is set to 1/300, and the operating frequency of the electric accessory 315b is low.

The high-frequency support mode normal-figure winning / failing table shown in FIG. 12B is a table used in the per-figure-per-drawing lottery in the probabilistic gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, which are the high-frequency support modes. As shown in FIG. 12B, in the high frequency support mode normal figure hit / fail table, contrary to the low frequency support mode normal figure hit / fail table, the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure deviates when the value is 0. When the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure is 1 to 299, it is set per normal figure. That is, in the probabilistic game state and the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode), the probability of hitting a normal figure is set to 299/300, and the probability of hitting a normal figure is set higher than that in the normal game state (low frequency support mode). At the same time, the operating frequency of the electric accessory 315b is increased.

The probability of hitting the low-frequency support mode and the probability of hitting the high-frequency support mode are not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, and can be changed as appropriate.

The normal hit type random number counter C5 is periodically updated and reaches the maximum value in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17 described later, for example, by adding one by one in order within the range of 0 to 199. It will be returned to 0 later. Then, in the normal figure 1st hold area to the normal figure 4 hold area SE1 to SE4 of the normal figure hold storage area 412c, the value of the normal hit type random number counter C5 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gates 317L and 317R. Is stored. Further, when the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal figure 1st hold area to the normal figure 4 hold area SE1 to SE4 is a normal figure hit, the normal figure 1 hold area to the normal figure 4 hold The type per normal figure (per short open normal figure and per long open normal figure), that is, the opening time of the electric accessory 315b is set by the value of the normal hit type random number counter C5 stored in the areas SE1 to SE4.

Here, FIGS. 12 (C) and 12 (D) are diagrams showing an example of a classification table for each type. In the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode per-map type distribution table shown in FIG. 12 (C) and the high-frequency support mode per-map type distribution table shown in FIG. 12 (D) are used as the per-figure type distribution table. Two types, a minute table, are set. That is, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the distribution probabilities of the types per normal map (per short open normal map and per long open normal map) differ between the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode.

Here, in the case of a short-opening normal drawing, the electric accessory 315b is opened for a short time (for example, 0.1 second), so that the game ball is opened for a short time (for example, 0.1 second) at the second winning opening 315. A short-opening game that allows you to enter the ball is executed. In this short-opening game, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning opening 315 because the opening time of the electric accessory 315b is short, and in many cases, the game ball does not enter the second winning opening 315. ..

On the other hand, in the case of a long-opening normal figure, the electric accessory 315b is opened for a longer time (for example, 6 seconds) than the short-opening normal-figure game, so that the second winning opening 315 is more than the short-opening normal-figure game. A long-opening normal game that allows the game ball to enter for a long time (for example, 6 seconds) is executed. In this long-opening game, since the opening time of the electric accessory 315b is long, it is easy for the game ball to enter the second winning opening 315, and the upper limit of the right to execute the second special figure game (for example, four). ) Can be withheld.

The low-frequency support mode per-figure type distribution table shown in FIG. 12C is a table used in the per-figure lottery in the normal gaming state, which is the low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 12 (C), in the low-frequency support mode per-figure type distribution table, when the value of the per-figure type random number counter C5 is 0 to 99, the short-opening per-figure type random number per per-figure When the value of the counter C5 is 100 to 199, it is set per long open normal figure. That is, in the normal game state (low frequency support mode), the distribution ratio between the short open normal map and the long open normal map is set to 1: 1. Of course, the distribution ratio between the short open normal map and the long open normal map in the normal game state (low frequency support mode) does not necessarily have to be 1: 1 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the long open normal map can be changed as appropriate. The distribution rate per figure is zero (the value of the normal hit type random number counter C5 per long open normal figure is zero) or approximately zero (the value of the normal hit type random number counter C5 per long open normal figure is one or two). It is also possible to set it to (pieces).

The high-frequency support mode per-figure type distribution table shown in FIG. 12 (D) is a table used in the per-figure lottery in the probabilistic game state and the time-saving game state, which are the high-frequency support modes. As shown in FIG. 12 (D), in the high-frequency support mode per-figure type random number counter C5, when the value of the per-figure type random number counter C5 is 0, the short-opening per-figure type random number counter C5 When the value of is 1 to 199, it is set per long open counter. That is, in the probabilistic game state and the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode), it is set so that it is easier to be distributed to the long-open normal map than to the short-open normal map. Of course, the distribution rate between the short-open normal map and the long-open normal map in the probabilistic game state and the short-time game state (high frequency support mode) is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 12 (D) and is appropriate. It can be changed, for example, the distribution rate per short open normal map can be set to zero (the value of the normal hit type random number counter C5 per short open normal map is zero).

It should be noted that the opening of the electric accessory 315b is not limited to once per game per game, and may be performed a plurality of times. In this case, the opening time and the opening interval (opening interval) of each opening of the electric accessory 315b in one game per normal drawing may be one kind or a plurality of kinds.

The normal figure variation type counter CS2 is updated at least once in step S1402 every time the main process of FIG. 21 described later is executed by adding 1 in order in the range of 0 to 99, for example. It is repeatedly updated in step S1414 even within the remaining time in the main process. Then, in the normal map 1st hold area to the normal figure 4 hold area SE1 to SE4 of the normal figure hold storage area 412c, the value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gates 317L and 317R. Is stored. Further, at a predetermined timing, the normal map fluctuation display time is determined with reference to the normal map fluctuation display table (not shown) based on the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 stored in the normal map reservation storage area 412c. To.

The normal map fluctuation display table (not shown) is, for example, the high frequency support mode normal map fluctuation table referred to when the high frequency support mode is used, and the low frequency support mode normal map referenced when the low frequency support mode is used. Includes variable display table. In the high frequency support mode normal map fluctuation display table and the low frequency support mode normal map fluctuation display table, for example, a plurality of normal map fluctuation display times are set corresponding to the values of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2. Further, normally, the high frequency support mode normal map fluctuation display table is set so that the average time of the normal map fluctuation display time is shorter than that of the low frequency support mode normal map fluctuation display table. For example, set a part of the variable display time set in the high frequency support mode normal map variation display table to be longer than a part of the variable display time set in the low frequency support mode normal map variation display table. It may be set so that all the fluctuation display times set in the high frequency support mode normal map fluctuation display table are longer than all the fluctuation display times set in the low frequency support mode normal map fluctuation display table. You may.

It should be noted that a common map fluctuation display table may be set for the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, and at least one of the high frequency support mode normal map variation display table and the low frequency support mode normal map variation display table may be set. On the other hand, the normal map fluctuation display time set in the normal map fluctuation display table may be one type. Further, the normal map fluctuation display time may be set according to the normal map fluctuation display time X. For example, the larger the normal map fluctuation hold number X, the shorter the normal map fluctuation display time may be set. , The smaller the number X for holding the fluctuation of the normal map, the longer the display time of the fluctuation of the normal map may be set.

Here, FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the game machine shown in FIG. The game information storage area 412d stores game information related to game history, ball ejection performance, and the like. In the present embodiment, in the game information storage area 412d, as game information, "number of out balls", "number of general winning opening payout balls", "first winning opening payout number", "second winning opening payout number" , "Variable winning slot payout number", "Set value", "Base information", "Continuous bonus ratio information", "Character ratio information", "Cumulative jackpot lottery count", "Unit jackpot lottery count", The "number of big hits" and the "number of consecutive misses" are stored. Of these game information, "game setting value", "base information", "continuous bonus ratio information", "feature ratio information", and "unit jackpot lottery count" are game information (performance information) related to ball ejection performance. ).

The “number of out balls” is an integrated value of the number of game balls fired on the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of out balls" is stored as a value obtained by counting the out balls detected by the out ball sensor 318a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17, which will be described later.

The "general winning opening payout number" is an integrated value of the game balls paid out for winning the general winning opening 313 in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of balls to be paid out from the general winning opening" is set as the prize ball command setting in step S1403 in the main process of FIG. When setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the prize in the general prize opening 313 in the processing, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out by this prize. ..

The "number of balls paid out from the first winning opening" is an integrated value of the game balls paid out for winning the first winning opening 314 in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of balls to be paid out from the first winning opening" is the winning ball in step S1403 in the main process of FIG. 21 described later when the winning to the first winning opening 314 is detected by the entry sensor 314a in the normal gaming state. A value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out from this prize when setting a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the prize to the first prize opening 314 in the command setting process. Update to.

The “second winning opening payout number” is an integrated value of the game balls paid out for winning the second winning opening 315 in the short-time game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode). This "number of balls to be paid out from the second winning opening" is the winning ball in step S1403 in the main process of FIG. 21 described later when the winning to the second winning opening 315 is detected by the entry sensor 315a in the time-saving gaming state. A value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out from this prize when setting a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the prize to the second prize opening 315 in the command setting process. Update to.

The "variable winning slot payout number" is an integrated value of the game balls paid out for winning the variable winning slot 316 in the jackpot game state. This "variable winning opening payout number" is set as the winning ball command setting in step S1403 in the main process of FIG. When setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the prize in the variable winning opening 316 in the processing, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out by this prize. ..

The "game setting value" is for selecting a low-probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 9A) and a high-probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 9B) used in the jackpot lottery (win / fail determination). .. In other words, the "game setting value" defines the jackpot probability in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In this embodiment, as will be described later, six-step setting values (six types of low-probability mode hit / miss tables with different jackpot probabilities (see FIG. 9 (A)) and high-probability mode hit / miss tables (see FIG. 9 (B))). Is being prepared. The "game setting value" is updated in the game setting value change process of FIG. 35, which will be described later.

The "base information" is information about the "base" which is the payout rate (ball output rate) in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and this "base" is the "number of out balls" in the normal game state. It is the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the "general winning opening payout number" and the "first winning opening payout number". When the "base" is expressed by a mathematical formula, "base" = 100 x ("general winning slot payout number" + "first winning slot payout number") / "out ball number". "Base information" includes information on the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2. Here, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 are updated every time the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36 described later (steps S2505 and S2506). Specifically, the "base" when the latest out ball number reaches 60,000 balls is the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the "base" when the previous out ball number reaches 60,000 balls is It is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM 412 as the 60,000 ball base B2 two times before. Further, until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls, it is calculated as the current base BL (step S1804), and the current base BL is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM 412. In addition, when the counter value of the number of out balls is calculated as the current base BL until the counter value reaches 60,000 balls, the "base information" includes the "general winning slot payout number" and the "first winning slot". In addition to the "number of payout balls" and "number of out balls", the "general winning opening payout number", "first winning opening payout number" and "out ball number" for base calculation are stored.

In this embodiment, the "base information" includes "current base BL", "previous 60,000 ball base B1" and "previous 60,000 ball base B2", and the past two 60,000 ball bases are history. However, you may leave the 60,000 ball base for the past three times or more as a history. Further, the "base information" may include the cumulative base from the time when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall to the present.

"Continuous prize ratio information" is the total number of balls to be paid out by winning all the winning openings (general winning opening 313, first winning opening 314, second winning opening 315 and variable winning opening 316) for which prize balls are paid out. This is information on the "continuous bonus ratio", which is the ratio of the number of balls to be paid out from the variable winning lots. When the "continuous bonus ratio" is expressed by a mathematical formula, "continuous bonus ratio" = 100 x "variable winning lot payout number" / "total payout number". The "continuous accessory ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the "continuous bonus ratio information" is stored as the cumulative continuous bonus ratio from the time when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall to the present. The "continuous bonus ratio information" is for a certain period (for example, a certain number of big hits (for example, 100 times), and a period until a certain number of big hit lottery (for example, 1000 times) is executed in a normal gaming state. , The ratio of continuous bonuses to a certain number of out balls (for example, the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls)) may be used. Of course, the "continuous bonus ratio information" may include both the cumulative continuous bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio over a certain number of periods.

"Character ratio information" is the total number of balls to be paid out by winning all the winning openings (general winning opening 313, first winning opening 314, second winning opening 315 and variable winning opening 316) for which prize balls are paid out. This is information on the "feature ratio", which is the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls of the second winning slot and the number of payout balls of the variable winning slot. When the "feature ratio" is expressed by a mathematical formula, "feature ratio" = 100 x ("second winning slot payout number" + "variable winning slot payout number") / "total payout number". The "accessory ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the "feature ratio information" is stored as the cumulative bonus ratio from the time when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall to the present. The "feature ratio information" is for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of big hits (for example, 100 times), and for a certain period until a certain number of big hit lottery (for example, 1000 times) is executed in a normal gaming state. It may be a bonus ratio to a certain number of out balls (for example, a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls)). Of course, the "continuous bonus ratio information" may include both the cumulative bonus ratio and the bonus ratio over a certain number of periods.

For the "cumulative jackpot lottery count", the jackpot lottery was performed in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) from the start of the gaming machine 10 before the opening of the game hall to the present. The number of times. In other words, the "cumulative jackpot lottery count" is executed by the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 of the main display unit 36, triggered by the winning of the first winning opening 314 in the normal gaming state. It is also the cumulative number of fluctuations displayed. The "cumulative jackpot lottery count" is determined by the first special symbol or the first special symbol display unit 362 of the main display unit 36 in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 in step S2106 in the special symbol fluctuation start processing of FIG. 28, which will be described later. 2 Every time the variable display of the special figure is started, 1 is added. Further, the "cumulative jackpot lottery count" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 by turning off the main power of the game machine 10.

The "number of unit jackpot lottery" is the number of times the jackpot lottery is received (main) when a certain number of negative difference balls are won in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) and the first winning opening 314 is won. The number of times the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display unit of the display unit 36 is executed). In the present embodiment, the fixed number is "250 balls", and the difference ball is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the "general winning opening payout number" and the "first winning opening payout number" from the "out ball number". In other words, the "unit jackpot lottery count" is the number of variable display times of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362, which is an average of 1000 yen (big hit), when 250 balls are rented for 1000 yen at the game hall. The number of times the lottery was received). The "unit jackpot lottery number" may be the number of times a jackpot lottery is received per a certain number of "out balls" in the normal gaming state. The "unit jackpot lottery count" is updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the "number of unit jackpot lottery" is stored as the cumulative number of unit jackpot lottery from the time the gaming machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall to the present. The "unit jackpot lottery number" is a period for a certain period (for example, a fixed number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), or a period until a certain number of jackpot lottery (for example, 1000 times) is executed in a normal gaming state. It may be for a certain number of out balls (for example, a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls)). Of course, as the "number of unit jackpot lottery", both the cumulative number of unit jackpot lottery and the number of unit jackpot lottery in a certain number of periods may be stored as game information.

The "number of big hits" is the number of times that the lottery result in the big hit lottery conducted from the start of the start of the gaming machine 10 before the opening of the game hall to the present is the number of big hits. The "number of big hits" is added by 1 each time the big hit game is started in, for example, the big hit game control process of FIG. 29, which will be described later. Further, the "number of big hits" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 by turning off the main power of the game machine 10.

The "number of consecutive misses" is the number of times that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is consecutively missed in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and is set to 0 when the lottery result is a jackpot. It will be cleared. The "number of consecutive deviations" is the first special figure or the second in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 in step S2106 in the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. 28, which will be described later. When starting the variation display of the special figure, if the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the low probability mode hit / miss table in step S2103 is out of order, 1 is added, and if the result of the hit / miss judgment is a big hit, it is cleared to 0 times. Will be done. In the present embodiment, the "number of consecutive disconnections" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 by turning off the main power of the game machine 10. Of course, the "number of consecutive disconnections" may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d by turning off the main power of the game machine 10.

Returning to the description of FIG. 14, the performance information display device 4A displays "base information" and "set value" stored as game information (performance information) in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. .. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a set value display unit 45, a set value change operation unit 46, and a ROM 47. Here, FIG. 15 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the performance information display device 4A.

As shown in FIG. 15, the performance display monitor 43 displays "base information" in the gaming machine 10, and is provided at a visible position when the inner frame 12 is unfolded (FIG. 3). reference). The performance display monitor 43 is composed of a plurality of (four in this embodiment) 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and is referred to as a 4-digit 7-segment display. The performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, but may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, and other components of the game other than the main control unit 331. It may be provided in. It is also conceivable to display "base information" by using the first special symbol display unit 362 and / or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36.

The 7-segment displays 431 to 434 can display the numbers "0" to "9" and the alphabets "A" to "F". In the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, when the alphabet "B" is displayed, a dot is lit to distinguish it from the number "8" and "8." is displayed, and the alphabet "D" is displayed. When displaying, a dot is lit to distinguish it from the number "0" and "0." is displayed. Further, when displaying any of the alphabets of the alphabets "A" to "F", it is conceivable to light the dots to clearly indicate that they are alphabets.

In the performance display monitor 43, the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 of the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are identification segments in which the "base type" is displayed by an abbreviation, and the right two 7-segment displays are displayed. The display 433 and 434 are ratio segments on which the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41 is displayed. For example, when the current base BL is 31%, the abbreviation "BL" of the current base BL is "8.", "L" in the two left 7-segment displays 431 and 432 which are the identification segments. Is displayed as, and the base value "31" is displayed as "3" and "1" on the right two 7-segment displays 433 and 434 which are ratio segments. That is, on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434, "8.", "L", "3", and "1" are displayed in order from the left.

The performance display switch 44 collectively switches the power on / off of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431 to 434) by a pressing operation, and is in a position where it is easy to operate when the inner frame 12 is expanded. Provided (see FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, the power is turned on by pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44, and the power is turned off by pressing the lower half. When the operation of turning on the power to the performance display switch 44 is performed, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are energized, and the base information can be displayed on the performance display monitor 43. On the other hand, when the power is turned off for the performance display switch 44, the energization of the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is cut off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. .. The performance display switch 44 may be provided in addition to the main control device 4.

Here, FIG. 15A is a display example on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in FIG. 15A, when the performance display switch 44 is off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are in the off state, so that the base information is not displayed. As shown in FIGS. 15B to 15D, when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off, as "base information", the current base BL → the previous 60,000. The ball base B1 → the previous 60,000 ball base B2 → the current base BL are looped in this order, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. In the example shown in FIG. 15B, the current base BL is 28%, and in the example shown in FIG. 15C, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 34%, and FIG. 15D shows. In the example shown in, it is shown that the 60,000 ball base B2 is 32% two times before. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15A, when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden.

A program required to display "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, for example, a program that calculates the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2, and the current base on the performance display monitor 43. A program for displaying BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 in order at regular time intervals is stored in a ROM 47 provided separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41 in the main control device 4. As a result, the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 can be reduced. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has a sufficient capacity, the ROM 411 may store a program necessary for displaying "base information" on the performance display monitor 43. Further, a program necessary for displaying "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main control device 4.

Further, in the performance display monitor 43, instead of the "base information" or in addition to the "base information", it is stored in the game information storage area 412d such as "continuous character ratio information" and "character ratio information". Other performance information may be displayed.

Further, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may be configured by other types of displays such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, and an organic EL display.

Returning to the description of FIG. 14, the set value display unit 45 selects the low probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 9A) and the high probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 9B) to be referred to in the jackpot lottery. The above-mentioned game setting value is displayed, and is composed of a 7-segment display. The set value display unit 45 is not limited to the 7-segment display, but may be configured by other types of displays such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, and an organic EL display, and the performance display monitor 43 may be used. The game setting value may be displayed.

The setting value changing operation unit 46 switches the power of the 7-segment display on and off by a pressing operation, and enables the setting value to be changed by rotating the 7-segment display when the power of the 7-segment display is on. The set value changing operation unit 46 has, for example, a function as a contact type switch that is turned on and off by a pressing operation, and a function as a rotary switch that switches contacts by a rotation operation (rotation of a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a display example on the set value display unit 45 of the main control device 4.

As shown in FIG. 16A, when the set value display unit 45 is in the off state and a pressing operation is performed on the set value change operation unit 46, the 7-segment display is energized and the set value display unit is energized. A number is displayed at 45. The numbers displayed at this time are set values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and indicate the current set values. In the illustrated example, the set value is "1". On the other hand, when the set value display unit 45 is in the lit state and a pressing operation is performed on the set value change operation unit 46, the energization of the 7-segment display is cut off and the set value display unit 45 is turned off. Become.

As shown in FIG. 16B, when the set value display unit 45 is in the lit state and a rotation operation is performed on the set value change operation unit 46, the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 is changed. .. In the illustrated example, the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 becomes larger when the set value display unit 45 is rotated clockwise, and the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 is displayed by rotating the set value display unit 45 counterclockwise. The number to be made becomes smaller. When the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 is changed by rotating the set value display unit 45, the changed number is stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 as the set value. Therefore, if the 7-segment display is turned off by pressing the set value change operation unit 46 while the number corresponding to the target set value is displayed on the set value display unit 45, the power is turned off. The number displayed immediately before is determined as the set value. As a result, the MPU 41 is selected according to the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. A jackpot lottery can be held based on (see).

The method of changing the set value is not limited to the method of rotating the set value changing operation unit 46 and then turning off the power of the set value display unit 45. For example, a method of determining a set value by rotating the set value changing operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1), or setting by repeatedly hitting or holding down the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1). A method of turning off the power of the set value display unit 45 after changing the number displayed on the value display unit 45, or inserting the key into the keyhole provided in the main control device 4 or the like and rotating the key to display the set value. A method of removing the key after changing the number displayed on the unit 45 may be used.

Here, the performance information display device 4A including the set value display unit 45 is provided in the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 in the control unit 33. Further, the control unit 33 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 and can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11. Therefore, the set value display unit 45 is provided on the back side of the gaming board 31, and by opening and closing the control unit 33 with respect to the front frame 11 together with the gaming board 31, the outside of the gaming machine 10 (front side of the front frame 11). ) Can be selected from a visible state and an invisible state. That is, by closing the game board 31 (control unit 33) with respect to the front frame 11, the set value display unit 45 cannot be visually recognized, while the game board 31 (control unit 33) is opened with respect to the front frame 11. The set value display unit 45 can be visually recognized with. As a result, when the player executes the game on the gaming machine 10, the setting value display unit 45 is not visually recognized unless the gaming board 31 is opened, so that the setting is set by the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45. It is prevented that the value is grasped by the player. Then, when the set value display unit 45 is in the lit state, the set value changing operation unit 46 is pressed to turn it off. Therefore, by maintaining the off state of the set value display unit 45 during the business hours of the game hall, the set value display unit 45 can be visually recognized by opening the game board 31 due to a jam in the gaming machine 10 or the like. Even if the state is set, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the set value by the set value display unit 45.

On the other hand, when the set value display unit 45 is in the off state, the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed to turn it on, and the numbers corresponding to the game set values are hidden. Therefore, outside the business hours of the game hall, the game board 31 is opened with respect to the front frame 11 and the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed to turn on the set value display unit 45. The game set value can be confirmed based on the number displayed on the set value display unit 45, and the game set value can be changed by the rotation operation of the set value change operation unit 46. As a result, it is possible to change the set value outside the business hours by a simple operation while ensuring the confidentiality of the set value during the business hours.

In the present embodiment, the performance information display device 4A is provided in the main control device 4, but the performance information display device 4A may be provided in the main control unit 331 separately from the main control device 4, and the control unit may be provided. 33 may be provided separately from the main control unit 331.

[Sub control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 7, the sub control unit 332 includes a voice lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and a symbol variation display and a symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331. Execute the effect display.

[Voice lamp control device 5]
The voice lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 51 has a built-in ROM 511 and RAM 512.

The ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. In addition, the ROM 511 also stores information such as voices used in special figure game effects, jackpot game effects, and lamp blinking patterns. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. The RAM 512 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

The voice lamp control device 5 commands the display control device 6 based on the command (control signal) input from the main control device 4 by executing the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51. (Control signal) is input to control the display of the symbol display unit 341. Further, the voice lamp control device 5 also controls the reproduced voice output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the reproduced voice output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 when executing the special figure game effect and the jackpot game effect described later.

The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the voice lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, commands such as a special figure fluctuation pattern command, a first special figure hold command, a second special figure hold command, and a special figure shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, the voice lamp control device 5 outputs a display fluctuation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. Another embodiment is also conceivable in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, another embodiment may be considered in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having both the functions of the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

Further, the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 controls the voice output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 based on the command input from the main control device 4. Further, an operation switch 20a is connected to the input / output I / F 52. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 has been operated, and based on the detection result, the image game effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 and the sound are output from the speaker 26. It is also possible to control the sound output effect, the lamp effect depending on the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, and the like.

The MPU 51 has a normal figure fluctuation pattern command, an electric accessory opening command, an electric accessory closing command, a special figure fluctuation pattern command, a first special figure hold command, a second special figure hold command, and a special figure input from the main control device 4. Figure shift command, jackpot game start command, opening start command, opening end command, open / close execution mode start command, round game start command, round game end command, interval start command, interval end command, open / close execution mode end command, ending start command , Ending end command, jackpot game end command, game setting value change command, and other commands to execute predetermined arithmetic processing.

Specifically, when the special map fluctuation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 determines the special map fluctuation pattern based on the special map fluctuation pattern command, and displays and controls the display fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the special map fluctuation pattern. It is transmitted to the device 6 (see step S3107 in the command determination process of FIG. 47), and the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is started. At this time, when the special figure variation pattern command indicates a deviation, the symbol display unit 341 displays a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on a command (control signal) input from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the voice lamp control device 5.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input / output I / F 62, and the like, and a voice lamp control device 5 and a symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input / output I / F 62. Bidirectional communication may be possible between the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 has a ROM 611 and a RAM 612 built-in. Further, the display control device 6 also has a built-in other circuit such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, a part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 stores a plurality of types of variable symbols such as decorative symbols used in the symbol variable display of the symbol display unit 341, advance notice effect images, reach effect images, jackpot effect images, and out-of-order effect images. ing. The image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 includes a still image and a moving image. Further, the ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes not only the type and display timing of the image to be used, but also the variable display time of the variable symbol. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays the image on the symbol display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the variation display pattern command, thereby realizing the symbol variation display and the effect display.

The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 61. The RAM 612 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input / output I / F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 71 has a built-in ROM 711 and RAM 712.

The ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 71. The RAM 712 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the input / output I / F 72 is connected to the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100.

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out the game ball from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and has a drive unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stop member for switching whether or not the game ball is paid out. It is provided with a payout sensor 132b that individually detects the game balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result by the payout sensor 132b. Further, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error such as a ball jam in the payout device 132 occurs.

The ball rental device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the gaming machine 10. Then, the ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to the operation of the ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the set amount and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal indicating that a predetermined number of game balls are to be paid out is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 to obtain a predetermined number of game balls. It will be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to the card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium having an IC chip built-in. Further, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls according to the cash by inserting cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the drive of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feed device 322 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated to launch the game ball stored in the upper plate 23 on the launch rail 321. Supply on. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the launch handle 22, and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation to direct the game ball on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. And fire. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal whose ON / OFF is switched at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, one gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area every 0.6 sec.

Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 22. As a result, the launch control IC 81 increases the firing intensity of the game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 32 as the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 22 increases, based on the voltage value input according to the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 22. Adjust the voltage applied to the solenoid 323 so that it becomes stronger.

Further, the launch handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily stop the launch of the game ball. Is provided. The launch control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 by the touch sensor 21a, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 32 is stopped. As a result, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a rotationally operated state, and the game is prevented in a situation where the player is not touching the firing handle 22. Further, the player can stop the firing of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b at an arbitrary timing with a thumb or the like while rotating the firing handle 22.

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a + 12V voltage for driving various sensors, a drive unit, and the like, a + 5V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated + 12V or + 5V voltage to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the emission control device 8, and the like.

The power control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the power of the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when the gaming machine 10 is returned to the initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 91 is ON.

Further, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means to be charged by the electric power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information of the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be driven by the power discharged from the secondary battery for a predetermined period.

Further, when it is determined that the power supply is cut off, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power supply control device 9 is in a power failure state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. Judge. When the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like receive the power failure signal from the power supply control device 9, the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like interrupt the control during execution and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main control device 4]
Next, the process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 41. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 is executed at the time of power-on, a start-up process, a main process executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process that is periodically started, and a power failure. Execute NMI interrupt processing and so on. In the present embodiment, the description of the start-up process, the NMI interrupt process, and the like will be omitted, and the main timer interrupt process and the main process will be described. Further, in the start-up process, it is confirmed whether or not the RAM 412 is operating normally, and the execution of the main timer interrupt process is permitted on condition that the RAM 412 is operating normally.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 17 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec. Hereinafter, the main timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 17, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process for determining a detection state of a sensor or the like connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection state of the ball entry sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, 317Ra, the out ball sensor 318a, and the like is determined. At this time, when the entry of the game ball into any of the entry sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, 317Ra is detected, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as the winning detection information. Further, when the out ball is detected by the out ball sensor 318a, the MPU 41 updates the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d by adding 1 to the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. do.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal hit random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal hit random number initial value counter CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. do.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the normal hit random number counter C4, and the normal hit type random number counter C5. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the normal hit random number counter C4, and the normal hit type random number counter C5, and counters them. When the value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes a start winning process (step S1004) associated with winning the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, and executes a firing control process (step S1005). The details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the launch control process, the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and the launch ball is launched on the condition that the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. Is a process to enable. Further, the launch control process invalidates the launch of the game ball when it is detected by the touch sensor 21a that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. It is a process to do. The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch the game ball when the launch of the game ball is effective.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, when the game ball passes through the through gates 317L and 317R, the MPU 41 executes a through gate process for updating the information stored in the normal drawing reservation storage area 412c of the RAM 412 by the MPU 41, and executes the through gate process. End the interrupt process. The details of the through gate processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Starting prize processing]
Here, FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Hereinafter, the start winning process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 18, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there has been a prize for the first winning opening 314. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that there has been a prize for the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and when it is determined that there has been no winning for the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first special figure hold number N stored in the first special figure hold number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the first special figure hold number N is the maximum hold number (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1106. On the other hand, in the MPU 41, if the first special figure hold number N is not the maximum hold number (step S1102: No), 1 is added to the first special figure hold number N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17, and step S1402 in the main process of FIG. 21 to be described later. And the counter value with the special figure variation type counter CS1 updated in S1414 is acquired, and the counter value is used as the first reserved area REA1 to 4 of the first special figure reserved storage area REA of the special figure reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412. Hold area Store in the first empty hold area of REA4.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 is before the special figure hit / miss information for the first special figure hold acquired in step S1104 is subject to the determination of the hit / miss in step S2102 or S2103 in the special figure change start process of FIG. 28, which will be described later. The content of the special figure hold command is confirmed, and the first special figure hold command setting process for setting the first special figure hold command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the confirmation result. The details of the first special figure hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there has been a prize for the second winning opening 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that there has been a prize for the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and when it is determined that there has been no winning for the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: No). ), The start winning process is completed.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second special figure hold number M stored in the second special figure hold number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the second special figure hold number M is the maximum hold number (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process. On the other hand, in the MPU 41, if the second special figure holding number M is not the maximum holding number (step S1107: No), 1 is added to the second special figure holding number M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in the main timer interruption process of FIG. 17, and step S1402 in the main process of FIG. 21 to be described later. And the counter value with the special figure variation type counter CS1 updated in S1414 is acquired, and the counter value is used as the first reserved area REB1 to 4 of the special figure reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412. Hold area Stores in the first empty hold area of REB4.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 is before the special figure hit / miss information for the second special figure hold acquired in step S1109 is subject to the determination of the hit / miss in step S2102 or S2103 in the special figure change start process of FIG. 28, which will be described later. The content of the special figure hold command is confirmed, and the second special figure hold command setting process for setting the second special figure hold command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the confirmation result. Here, since the second special figure hold command setting process is the same as the first special figure hold command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 19, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the second special figure hold command setting process, in the first special figure hold command setting process of FIG. 19, the "first special figure hold command" is changed to the "second special figure hold command" and the "first special figure hold command". The "number N" may be read as "the second special figure hold number M".

[1st special figure hold command setting process]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the first special figure hold command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the start winning process of FIG. The first special figure hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first special figure hold command, the result of the big hit lottery (big hit type or miss), the special figure change display time, and the first special figure hold. Information such as a number N is included. Hereinafter, the first special figure hold command setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 19, the MPU 41 reads the first special figure hold number N from the first special figure hold number storage area NAA of the first special figure hold storage area REA, and corresponds to each first special figure hold. The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is read from the RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in the high probability mode, and if it is in the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process shifts to step S1203. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 is not in the high probability mode (step S1202: No), that is, in the low probability mode, the process shifts to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in the high probability mode based on the probability variation game state flag. The probabilistic game state flag is a flag indicating whether or not the probabilistic game state is in the probabilistic game state, that is, whether or not the mode is in the high probability mode. This probabilistic game state flag is set to ON in step S2317 of FIG. 34 when the game state is changed from the probabilistic jackpot game state to the probabilistic game state in the game state transition process described later, and the game state is changed from the probabilistic game state. It is set to off in step S2309 of FIG. 33 when shifting to the probabilistic jackpot gaming state or the normal jackpot gaming state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads out the high-probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 9B) saved according to the game set value in step S2410 in the game set value change process of FIG. 35, which will be described later, and the high-probability mode thereof. Based on the winning / failing table, the winning / failing determination of whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads out the low probability mode hit / fail table (see FIG. 9A) saved according to the game set value in step S2410 in the game set value change process of FIG. Based on the probability mode winning / failing table, it is executed whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning.

In steps S1203 and S1204, the hit / fail determination is executed based on the high-probability mode hit / miss table or the low-probability mode hit / miss table saved according to the game set value in step S2410 in the game set value change process of FIG. 35, which will be described later. However, in step S1203 or S1204, after reading the game setting value saved in step S2408 in the game setting value change process of FIG. The mode pass / fail table may be selected one by one to make a pass / fail judgment.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: No), that is, when it is out of the range, the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special figure variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the special figure winning / failing information is stored in the third holding area REA3 in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. 18, the jackpot type counter included in the special drawing winning / failing information stored in the third holding area REA3. The counter values of C2 and the special figure variation type counter CS1 are read out. Of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4, the hold area in which the special figure winning / failing information is stored in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. 18 is stored in the first special figure hold number storage area NAA. It can be determined by the value of the number of holds N.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the first special figure hold number N in the first special figure hold command. As described above, since the first special figure hold command includes the first special figure hold number N read in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the first special figure hold command is the first. By referring to the number of holds N included in the 1 special figure hold command, the 1st special figure hold command corresponds to the 1st special figure pass / fail information stored in any of the 1st hold area REA1 to the 4th hold area REA4. It is possible to recognize what to do.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the special figure variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the first special figure hold number N in the first special figure hold command (step S1209).

The first special figure hold command set to be turned on in step S1207 or S1209 of the first special figure hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412 and is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. In step S1401 of the main process of 21, the command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 together with other commands and then erased. Further, the content of the first special figure hold command described here is only an example, and if it is possible for the voice lamp control device 5 to grasp the same content as the first special figure hold command, it will be described here. It is not limited to what you do. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the first special figure hold command is included in another command.

[Through gate processing]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the through gate process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1006 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. In the through-gate process, when the game ball passes through the through-gates 317L and 317R, the MPU 41 updates the information stored in the normal drawing reservation storage area 412c of the RAM 412. Hereinafter, the through gate process will be described with reference to FIG. 20.

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 20, in the through gate process, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the left through gate 317L (step S1301). Whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 317L is determined based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the left through gate 317L (step S1301: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1303, and when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the left through gate 317L. (Step S1301: No), the process proceeds to step S1302.

<Step S1302>
When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has not passed through the left through gate 317L (step S1301: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the right through gate 317R (step S1302). Whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 317R is determined based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the right through gate 317R (step S1302: Yes), the process shifts to step S1303, and when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the right through gate 317R. (Step S1302: No), the through gate process is terminated.

<Step S1303>
When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the left through gate 317L (step S1301: Yes), or when it determines that the game ball has passed through the right through gate 317R (step S1302: Yes), the RAM 412 It is determined whether or not the normal figure fluctuation hold number X stored in the normal figure change hold number storage area SNA set in the normal figure hold storage area 412c is the maximum hold number (4 in this embodiment) (step). S1303). The MPU 41 ends the through-gate processing when the normal figure fluctuation hold number X is the maximum hold number (step S1303: Yes), and when the normal figure change hold number X is not the maximum hold number (step S1303: No). The process proceeds to step S1304.

<Steps S1304 and S1305>
In the MPU 41, when the normal figure fluctuation hold number X is not the maximum hold number (step S1303: No), 1 is added to the normal figure change hold number X (step S1304), and in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. The counter values of the normal hit random number counter C4 and the normal hit type random number counter C5 to be updated, and the values of the normal figure variation type counter CS2 updated in the main processing steps S1402 and S1414 of FIG. 21 to be described later are acquired and the counters thereof. The value is stored in the first empty holding area of the normal drawing holding area SE1 to the normal drawing 4th holding area SE4 of the normal drawing holding storage area 412c in the RAM 412 (step S1305), and the through gate processing is terminated.

[Main processing of main control device 4]
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the main process executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 will be described. In the main processing, the main control processing for the progress of the normal drawing game, the special drawing game, and the jackpot game is executed. In the main process, the processes of steps S1401 to S1411 are executed as periodic processes of, for example, a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update processes of steps S1413 and S1414 are executed in the remaining time from the end of the processes of steps S1401 to S1411 to the next cycle. To.

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 21, in step S1401, the MPU 41 transfers output data such as a command set in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17 or the previous main process to a control device such as a sub control unit 332 or a peripheral control unit 140. Executes external output processing to be sent to. For example, in RAM412, a normal figure fluctuation pattern command, an electric bonus opening command, an electric bonus closing command, a special figure fluctuation pattern command, a first special figure hold command, a second special figure hold command, a special figure shift command, and a jackpot game start. Command, opening start command, opening end command, open / close execution mode start command, round game start command, round game end command, interval start command, interval end command, open / close execution mode end command, ending start command, ending end command, jackpot game If a command such as an end command or a game setting value change command is set, the command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, when the prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 updates the values of the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the normal figure variation type counter CS2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. ..

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 sets the prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a prize has been generated in the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, etc. based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. To judge. Then, when a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize is set in the RAM 412. At this time, the MPU 41 is stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when a prize is generated in the general winning opening 313 or the first winning opening 314 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). The number of general winning lots paid out or the number of first winning lots paid out is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of payouts due to the current winning. Further, the MPU 41 is a RAM 412 when a prize is generated in the second winning opening 315 in a time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or a probabilistic gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode). The number of balls to be paid out from the second winning opening stored in the game information storage area 412d is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out from this winning. Further, in the jackpot game state, when a prize is generated in the variable winning opening 316, the MPU 41 sets the number of variable winning opening payout balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 as the number of payout balls due to this winning. Is updated to the added value.

<Step S1404>
In step S1404, the MPU 41 executes a fuzu game control process that controls the progress of the fuzu game. The details of the normal game control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24.

<Step S1405>
In step S1405, the MPU 41 executes a game control process per game that controls the progress of the game per game, which is executed when the result of the lottery per game is a win. The details of the game control process per drawing will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

<Step S1406>
In step S1406, the MPU 41 executes a special figure game control process for controlling the progress of the special figure game. The details of the special symbol game control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28, but in the special symbol game control process, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is displayed. The special figure fluctuation pattern command required for is set. At this time, the MPU 41 is updated in the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interruption process of FIG. 17, and the special figure updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of this process. Based on each value of the variation type counter CS1, a special figure variation pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variation display time is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process that controls the progress of the jackpot game executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The details of the jackpot game control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for controlling the transition of various gaming states (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state, probabilistic jackpot gaming state, and normal jackpot gaming state). The details of the game state transition process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34.

<Step S1409>
In step S1409, the MPU 41 executes the game set value change process. In this game setting value change process, a process of displaying or hiding the set value or controlling the change of the game set value stored in the game information storage area 412d is executed according to the operation of the set value change operation unit 46. .. The details of the game setting value change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game setting value change process is executed in the main process, but the start-up process started when the power is turned on, or after the start-up process until the launch of the game ball is started. It may be executed in a limited way. As a result, after the game is started by the player, the game setting value cannot be changed until the next power is turned on, so that the game setting value is changed during the business hours of the game hall. Can be prevented.

<Step S1410>
In step S1410, the MPU 41 executes the specific performance information update process in the game information. In this embodiment, base information and the like are updated as specific performance information. The details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37.

<Step S1411>
In step S1411, the MPU 41 executes the display control process of the performance display monitor 43. In the display control process of the performance display monitor 43, a process of displaying the base information updated in the specific performance information update process of step S1410 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. The details of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41.

<Step S1412>
In step S1412, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1412: Yes), the process shifts to step S1401 and each process after S1401 described above is executed. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1412: No), the execution timing of the next main process is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process arrives. During the remaining time until it is reached, steps S1413 and S1414 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1412: Yes).

<Step S1413>
In step S1413, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal hit random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal hit random number initial value counter CIN2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is set to 0. clear.

<Step S1414>
In step S1414, the MPU 41 updates the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the normal figure variation type counter CS2. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter values of the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the normal figure variation type counter CS2, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the MPU 41 updates the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the normal map variation type counter CS2, and then returns the process to step S1412.

[Public game control process]
Here, FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal drawing game control process executed in step S1404 in the main process of FIG. 21. In the normal map game control process, a process of controlling the variation display and the stop display of the normal map on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 is executed. Hereinafter, the normal drawing game control process will be described with reference to FIG. 22.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 22, in the normal map game control process, first, in the MPU 41, whether or not the normal map variable display flag indicating that the normal symbol is variable display (the normal map game is being executed) is turned on. Is determined (step S1501). The normal symbol variation display flag is set to ON in step S1711 when the normal symbol variation display (normal diagram game) is started in the normal map variation start process of FIG. 24, which will be described later, and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (normal symbol variation display in progress flag). When the normal map game is completed), it is set to off in step S1510 in the normal map game control process.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1507 when the flag for displaying the fluctuation of the normal map is on (step S1501: Yes), that is, when the normal map game is being executed. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1502 when the flag for displaying the fluctuation of the normal map is off (step S1501: No), that is, when the normal map game is not being executed.

<Step S1502>
When the flag for displaying the fluctuation of the normal figure is off (step S1501: No), that is, when the normal figure game is not being executed, the MPU 41 is opening the electric accessory 315b (the game per normal figure is being executed). It is determined whether or not the flag indicating that the electric accessory is being opened is on (step S1502). The electric accessory opening flag is set to on in step S1811 when the electric accessory 315b is opened, and in step S1818 when the electric accessory 315b is closed in the game control process per drawing in FIG. 25, which will be described later. Set to off.

When the electric accessory opening flag is on (step S1502: Yes), that is, when the game per game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the game control process for the game. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1503 when the electric accessory opening flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, when the game per game is not being executed.

<Step S1503>
When the electric accessory opening flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, when the game per game is not being executed, the MPU 41 has the flag during the jackpot game indicating that the jackpot game is being executed. Whether or not it is determined (step S1503). In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, which will be described later, the jackpot gaming flag is set on in step S2206 when the jackpot game is started, and turned off in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1503: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the normal figure game control process when the jackpot game is being executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the normal drawing game is not started during the execution of the jackpot game.

Of course, the normal drawing game may be started during the execution of the jackpot game. In this case, according to the support mode type (different from the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode) before the big hit game is started, that is, according to the game state before the transition to the big hit game state, the normal figure holding storage area 412c Based on the hit / fail information (values of the random number counter C4 per normal figure, the random number counter C5 per normal figure, and the random number counter CS2 per normal figure) moved from the first hold area SE1 of the normal figure to the execution area SAE of the normal figure). The winning / failing determination for the winning lottery is executed. That is, when the game state before the jackpot game is executed is the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state in which the high-frequency support mode is used, the hit / miss table for the high-frequency support mode (see FIG. 12 (B)). Based on the normal map per type table (see Fig. 12 (D)) and the normal map fluctuation table (not shown), the normal map per lottery (per or out of the normal map) and the normal map per type (long open per map or short). (Per open table) and the variable display time of the table are set. On the other hand, when the game state before the big hit game is executed is the normal game state in which the low frequency support mode is executed, the normal game hit / fail table for the low frequency support mode (see FIG. 12 (A)) and the normal figure hit type. Based on the table (see Fig. 12 (C)) and the normal map fluctuation table (not shown), the lottery per normal map (per or off the normal map) and the type per normal map (per long open or short open map). ), And the normal map fluctuation display time is set.

On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1504 when the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed.

<Step S1504>
When the electric accessory opening flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, when the game per normal figure is not being executed, the MPU 41 stores the normal figure variable hold number set in the normal figure hold storage area 412c of the RAM 412. It is determined whether or not the number X for holding the fluctuation of the normal map stored in the area SNA is 0 (step S1504). The MPU 41 ends the normal figure game control process when the normal figure fluctuation hold number X is 0 (step S1504: Yes), and processes when the normal figure change hold number X is not 0 (step S1504: No). To step S1505.

<Step S1505>
When the normal figure fluctuation holding number X is not 0 (step S1504: No), the MPU 41 executes the normal figure data setting process for the normal figure winning / failing information stored in the normal figure holding storage area 412c (step S1505). The process proceeds to step S1506. The details of the normal map data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.

<Step S1506>
In step S1506, the MPU 41 executes a normal map fluctuation start process for causing the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 to execute the fluctuation display of the normal symbol based on the information stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area 412c. , Ends the game control process. The details of the normal map fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

<Step S1507>
When the normal map variation display flag is on (step S1501: Yes), that is, when the normal figure game is being executed, the MPU 41 has the big hit game in-progress flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed. It is determined whether or not (step S1507). In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, which will be described later, the jackpot gaming flag is set on in step S2206 when the jackpot game is started, and turned off in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1509 when the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1507: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508 when the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1507: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed.

<Step S1508>
When the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1507: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal map fluctuation display time has elapsed from the start of the normal map variation display (step S1507: No). Step S1508). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to stop the normal symbol that is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (end the normal symbol game).

The MPU 41 stops and displays (ends the normal map game) the normal symbol that is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 when the normal symbol variation display time has elapsed (step S1508: Yes). If there is, the process proceeds to step S1509. On the other hand, when the normal symbol variation display time has not elapsed (step S1508: No), the MPU 41 stops and displays the normal symbol that is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (ends the normal map game). ), The normal game control process is terminated.

<Steps S1509 to S1511>
When the flag during the jackpot game is on (step S1507: Yes) when the flag during the normal map fluctuation display is on (step S1501: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is started during the execution of the normal map game. Or, when the normal symbol variation display time of the normal symbol has elapsed (step S1508: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to stop and display the variable display normal symbol (end the normal map game), the MPU 41 performs the normal symbol game. The normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery per normal symbol (step S1509), and the flag indicating that the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the game is being executed). Is set to off (step S1510). Further, the MPU 41 sets the normal map fluctuation stop display flag indicating that the normal symbol has been stopped and displayed, that is, the normal map game has ended (step S1511), and ends the normal map game control process.

It should be noted that the normal map fluctuation stop display flag determines whether or not it is the timing to start the normal map per game (open the electric accessory 315b) in step S1801 of the normal map per game control process of FIG. 25, which will be described later. Referenced for.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the normal symbol game is not limited to the case where the normal symbol that is variablely displayed due to the passage of the normal symbol variable display time is stopped and displayed (the normal symbol game is ended). When the big hit game is started, the normal symbol that is displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed (the normal game is ended). That is, when the jackpot game is started, the normal symbol game is forcibly terminated before the normal symbol fluctuation display time elapses. Of course, even when the jackpot game is started, the normal symbol game may be continuously executed until the normal symbol fluctuation display time elapses.

[Public map data setting process]
Here, FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal map data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1505 of FIG. 22. In the normal map data setting process, the stored contents of the normal figure hold storage area 412c in the storage area of the main control device 4 of FIG. 11 are updated. Hereinafter, the normal map data setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 23.

<Steps S1601 to S1603>
As shown in FIG. 23, in the normal map data setting process, the MPU 41 first subtracts 1 from the normal map fluctuation hold number X stored in the normal map fluctuation hold number storage area SNA (step S1601), and then the normal map first. The normal map hit / miss information is moved from the hold area SE1 to the normal map execution area SAE (step S1602). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the normal map pass / fail information stored in the normal map second hold area SE2 to the normal figure fourth hold area SE4 one by one (step S1603). Specifically, in step S1603, the normal map pass / fail information of the normal map 2 hold area SE2 is moved to the normal map 1 hold area SE1, and the normal map pass / fail information of the normal map 3 hold area SE3 is transferred to the normal map 2 hold. It is moved to the area SE2, and the normal figure hit / miss information of the normal figure 4 holding area SE4 is moved to the normal figure 3 holding area SE3.

[Public map fluctuation start processing]
Here, FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal map fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1506 of FIG. 22. In the normal symbol variation start process, the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display unit 361 is started, and various commands and flags are set based on the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery. Hereinafter, the normal map fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 24.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 24, in the normal map fluctuation start processing, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the high frequency support mode flag indicating that the high frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time saving game state) is on. (Step S1701). The high-frequency support mode flag is set to be turned on in step S2313 of FIG. 34 when the jackpot game ends in the game state transition process described later, and the gaming state is changed from the probabilistic gaming state or the time-saving gaming state to the probabilistic jackpot gaming state or normal. It is set to off in step S2307 of FIG. 33 when shifting to the jackpot gaming state, or in step S2326 of FIG. 34 when the gaming state shifts from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1702 when the high frequency support mode flag is on (step S1701: Yes), that is, in the probabilistic game state or the time saving game state which is the high frequency support mode, and the high frequency support mode. When the flag is off (step S1701: No), that is, in the normal gaming state which is the low frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1703.

<Steps S1702 and S1703>
In the case of the probabilistic gaming state or the time-saving gaming state (step S1701: Yes), which is the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 makes a hit / miss determination based on the high-frequency support mode (step S1702). Specifically, the MPU 41 is based on a high-frequency support mode normal number per map hit / fail table (see FIG. 12 (B)) and a high frequency support mode normal figure per type distribution table (see FIG. 12 (D)). Whether the values of the normal hit random number counter C4 and the normal hit type random number counter C5 included as numerical information in the normal figure hit / miss information stored in the normal figure execution area SAE of the figure hold storage area 412c are the values corresponding to the normal figure hit. Whether it is right or wrong is judged.

On the other hand, in the case of the normal gaming state which is the low frequency support mode (step S1701: No), the hit / fail determination is performed based on the low frequency support mode (step S1703). Specifically, the MPU 41 is based on the low-frequency support mode normal number per map hit / fail table (see FIG. 12 (A)) and the low-frequency support mode normal figure per type distribution table (see FIG. 12 (C)). Whether or not the normal hit random number counter C4 and the normal hit type random number counter C5 included as numerical information in the normal figure hit / fail information stored in the normal figure execution area SAE of the figure hold storage area 412c are values corresponding to the normal figure winning. Whether it is right or wrong is judged.

<Steps S1704 and S1705>
When the MPU 41 makes a hit / fail determination (step S1702 or S1703), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination is a long-open normal figure in which the second winning opening 315 is long-opened (step S1702 or S1703). Step S1704). When the result of the hit / fail judgment is the long open normal figure (step S1704: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the long open normal figure hit flag indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is the long open normal figure to on (step S1704: Yes). Step S1705), the process proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1706 when the result of the hit / fail determination is not a long open normal figure (step S1704: No).

<Steps S1706 and S1707>
When the result of the hit / fail judgment is not a long open normal map (step S1704: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the hit / fail judgment is a short open normal map in which the second winning opening 315 is short-opened. (Step S1706). When the result of the hit / fail judgment is the short open normal figure (step S1706: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the short open normal figure hit flag indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is the short open normal figure to on (step S1706: Yes). Step S1707), the process proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1708 when the result of the hit / fail determination is not a short-open normal figure (step S1706: No), that is, when the result of the hit / fail determination is wrong.

<Steps S1708 and S1709>
When the long open normal map hit flag is set to on (step S1705), when the short open normal map hit flag is set to on (step S1707), or when the result of the pass / fail judgment is wrong (step S1706:). No), the MPU 41 sets the normal map fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 in the normal map game, with reference to the normal map fluctuation display table (not shown). Executes the normal map fluctuation pattern setting process. As described above, the normal map variation display table (not shown) is the high frequency support mode normal map variation table referred to when the high frequency support mode is used, and the low frequency reference when the low frequency support mode is used. Includes support mode with variable display table. Therefore, in the normal map fluctuation pattern setting process, the normal map fluctuation pattern is set based on the normal map fluctuation display table according to the support mode type. In addition, since the high frequency support mode normal map fluctuation display table is set so that the average time of the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is shorter than the low frequency support mode normal map fluctuation display table, the high frequency support mode Then, the time during which the normal game is executed is shorter than that in the low frequency support mode.

Then, in the MPU 41, in addition to the normal map fluctuation pattern set in step S1708, the result of the hit / fail determination in step S1702 or S1703 (result of the lottery per normal map) and the type of support mode (high frequency support mode and low frequency). A normal map fluctuation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the support mode) is set (step S1709), and the process proceeds to step S1710.

The normal map fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, in the voice lamp control device 5, based on the normal figure fluctuation pattern command, an effect corresponding to the normal figure game, for example, an effect indicating that the normal figure game is being executed is performed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like. And the production that shows the result of the lottery per drawing is executed.

Further, the normal map fluctuation pattern command may be at least a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the normal map fluctuation pattern, and the result of the lottery per normal map and the type of the support mode are not necessarily the normal map fluctuation pattern commands. It is not necessary to notify the voice lamp control device 5. For example, the result of the lottery per figure can be changed to the high frequency support mode or the low frequency support mode by setting the lottery result command per normal figure when the winning / fail determination is made in step S1702 or S1703. When the transition is made, the voice lamp control device 5 may be notified by setting a support mode type command that can identify the type of the support mode after the transition.

<Steps S1710 and S1711>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 starts variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (step S1710). Then, the MPU 41 sets the flag during the normal map fluctuation display indicating that the normal symbol is variablely displayed, that is, the normal map game is being executed, to be turned on (step S1711), and performs the normal map fluctuation start process. finish.

It should be noted that the flag for displaying the fluctuation of the normal map is referred to in step S1501 in the normal map game control process of FIG. 22 to determine whether the normal map game is being executed (during the variable display of the normal symbol).

[Game control processing per normal figure]
Here, FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game control process per normal figure executed in step S1405 in the main process of FIG. 21. In the game control process per normal figure, when the result of the lottery per normal figure is a hit, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 315b is performed to allow the game ball to enter the second winning opening 315. The process of switching between the restricted state and the restricted state is executed. Hereinafter, the game control process per normal drawing will be described with reference to FIG. 25.

<Step S1801>
As shown in FIG. 25, in the game control process per normal map, first, the MPU 41 has whether or not the normal map fluctuation stop display flag indicating that the normal symbol has been stopped and displayed (the normal map game has ended) is on. (Step S1801). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to start the game per normal figure. The normal map fluctuation stop display flag is set to ON in step S1511 when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal map game control process of FIG. 22.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1802 when the normal map fluctuation stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), that is, when it is time to start the game per normal map. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1812 when the normal map fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), that is, when it is not the timing at which the game per normal map can be started.

<Step S1802>
When the normal figure fluctuation stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), that is, when it is the timing when the normal figure hit game can be started, the MPU 41 has the big hit in-game flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed. It is determined whether or not it is on (step S1802). In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, which will be described later, the jackpot gaming flag is set on in step S2206 when the jackpot game is started, and turned off in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot game in-progress flag is on (step S1802: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the game control process per game. That is, in the present embodiment, when the big hit game is forcibly terminated by the start, the game per game is played even if the result of the lottery per lottery for the game is a game. Not started. That is, in the present embodiment, the game per hit is not started during the execution of the big hit game. Of course, a new Fuzu game may be started during the execution of the jackpot game.

On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1803 when the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1802: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed.

<Step S1803>
When the big hit game flag is off (step S1802: No), that is, when the big hit game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the long open normal figure hit flag is set to on (step S1803). .. The long-opening normal figure hit flag is a flag indicating that the result of the lottery per normal figure is the long-opening normal figure hit, and when the result of the lottery per normal figure is the long-opening normal figure hit, the normal figure in FIG. 24 Figure It is set to ON in step S1705 of the variation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the lottery for the completed Fuzu game is the long open Fuzu. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1804 when the long open normal map hit flag is set to on (step S1803: Yes), and when the long open normal map hit flag is set to off (step S1803: Yes). No), the process proceeds to step S1806.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
When the long open normal map hit flag is set to on (step S1803: Yes), that is, when the result of the normal map hit lottery for the completed normal map game is the long open normal map, the MPU 41 is a long open normal. A value corresponding to 6 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric accessory 315b in the game per figure (the time during which the game ball can enter the second winning opening 315), is set as the value of the opening time counter (step S1804). The opening time counter is referred to in step S1815 of the game control process per drawing in order to determine the return timing of the electric accessory 315b. Then, the MPU 41 sets the long open normal map hit flag to off (step S1805), and shifts the process to step S1809.

<Step S1806>
When the long open normal map hit flag is set to off (step S1803: No), that is, when the result of the normal map hit lottery for the completed normal map game is not the long open normal map hit, the MPU 41 is set to the short open normal map. It is determined whether or not the hit flag is set to ON (step S1806). The short-opening normal figure hit flag is a flag indicating that the result of the lottery per normal figure is a short-opening normal figure, and when the result of the lottery per normal figure is a short-opening normal figure, the normal figure in FIG. 24 Figure It is set to ON in step S1707 of the variation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the lottery for the completed Fuzu game is the short open Fuzu. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1807 when the short-open normal map hit flag is set to on (step S1806: Yes), and when the short-open normal map hit flag is set to off (step S1806: Yes). No), that is, if the result of the lottery for the completed Fuzu game is out of order, the process proceeds to step S1812.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
When the short-open normal-figure hit flag is set to on (step S1806: Yes), that is, when the result of the normal-figure-winning lottery for the completed fu-figure game is the short-open normal-figure hit, the MPU 41 is set to the short-open normal-figure. A value corresponding to 0.1 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric accessory 315b in the game per figure (the time during which the game ball can enter the second winning opening 315), is set as the value of the opening time counter (step S1807). .. Then, the MPU 41 sets the short-open normal map hit flag to off (step S1808), and shifts the process to step S1809.

<Steps S1809 to S1811>
When the flag indicating the type of the normal figure (long open normal figure hit flag or short open normal figure hit flag) is set to off when the result of the lottery per normal figure is a hit (step S1805 or S1808), the MPU 41 The electric accessory 315b is operated (step S1809). As a result, the second winning opening 315 is opened, and the ball is allowed to enter the second winning opening 315. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric accessory release command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the electric accessory 315b is open (step S1810), and indicates that the electric accessory 315b is open. The electric accessory opening flag is set to ON (step S1811), and the process proceeds to step S1812.

The electric accessory release command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can start an effect indicating that the electric accessory 315b is open to, for example, the symbol display unit 341, based on the electric accessory release command.

<Step S1812>
When the process of opening the electric accessory 315b is executed when the result of the lottery per normal figure is a hit (steps S1803 to S1811), or the flag for the long open normal figure and the flag for the short open normal figure are both turned off. If it is set (when the result of the lottery per normal figure is out of order) (step S1803 and step S1806 are both No), the MPU 41 indicates that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (the normal figure game is completed). The indicated normal map fluctuation stop display flag is set to off (step S1812), and the game control process per normal map is terminated.

<Step S1813>
When the normal map fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), the MPU 41 is set to be on when the electric bonus 315b is opened in step S1811 of the game control process for the normal map. It is determined whether or not the opening flag is set to ON (step S1813). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game per game is being executed. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1814 when the electric accessory opening flag is set to ON (step S1813: Yes), that is, when the game per normal figure is being executed. On the other hand, when the electric accessory opening flag is set to off (step S1813: No), that is, when the game per game is not being executed, the MPU 41 ends the game control process per game.

<Steps S1814 and S1815>
When the electric accessory opening flag is set to ON (step S1813: Yes), that is, when the game per game is being executed, the MPU 41 is set in step S1804 or S1807 of the game control process per game. 1 is subtracted from the value of the open time counter to be performed (step S1814), and it is determined whether or not the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to restore the electric accessory 315b. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1816 when the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to restore the electric accessory 315b. On the other hand, when the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1815: No), that is, when it is not the timing to restore the electric accessory 315b, the MPU 41 ends the game control process per normal figure.

<Steps S1816 to S1818>
When the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to restore the electric accessory 315b, the MPU 41 restores the electric accessory 315b (step S1816). As a result, the second winning opening 315 is closed, and the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening 315 is restricted. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric accessory closing command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the electric accessory 315b has been closed (step S1817), and at the same time, indicates that the electric accessory 315b is open. The character opening flag is set to off (step S1818), and the game control process for each normal figure is terminated.

The electric accessory closing command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can end the effect of indicating that the electric accessory is open, which is executed by, for example, the symbol display unit 341, based on the electric accessory closing command.

[Special figure game control processing]
Here, FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in step S1406 in the main process of FIG. 21. In the special figure game control process, the stored contents of the special figure reservation storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated, and the progress of the first special figure game or the second special figure game is controlled, for example, the first. 1 The variable display and stop display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363 are controlled. Hereinafter, the special figure game control process will be described with reference to FIG. 26.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 26, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game in-progress flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is on. In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, which will be described later, the jackpot gaming flag is set to be on in step S2206 when the jackpot game is started, and is set to off in step S2252 when the jackpot game is completed. ..

When the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1901: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the special figure game control process. That is, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is being executed, the special figure game is not started. Of course, the special figure game may be started during the execution of the jackpot game.

On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1902 when the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1901: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed.

<Step S1902>
When the big hit game flag is off (step S1901: No), that is, when the big hit game is not being executed, the MPU 41 is displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol in a variable manner (first special symbol game or first). 2 It is determined whether or not the special figure variation display flag indicating that the special figure game is being executed) is on (step S1902). The special figure change display flag is set to ON in step S2107 when the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the special figure change start process of FIG. 28, which will be described later, and the special figure game control. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the process, it is set to off in step S1909.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1906 when the special figure variation display flag is on (step S1902: Yes), that is, when the special symbol is variable display (execution of the special figure game). On the other hand, the MPU 41 processes when the special figure variation display flag is off (step S1902: No), that is, when the special symbol is not variable display (during execution of the special figure game) when the jackpot game is not being executed. To step S1903.

<Step S1903>
If the special figure variation display flag is off (step S1902: No), that is, if the special symbol is not variable display (during special figure game) when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 is holding the special figure. Both the first special figure hold number N stored in the first special figure hold number storage area NAA of the storage area 412b and the second special figure hold number M stored in the second special figure hold number storage area NAB. Is 0 or not (step S1903).

The MPU 41 holds the right to execute the first special figure game when both the first special figure hold number N and the second special figure hold number M are 0 (step S1903: Yes), and the second special figure hold. If there is no reservation of the right to execute the game, the special figure game control process is terminated. On the other hand, when either one of the first special figure hold number N and the second special figure hold number M is not 0 (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 holds the right to execute the first special figure game, and If there is at least one of the reservations of the right to execute the second special figure game, the process proceeds to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
If either one of the first special figure hold number N and the second special figure hold number M is not 0 (step S1903: No), that is, the right to execute the first special figure game is held, and the second special figure game is held. When there is at least one of the reservations of the right to execute the above, the MPU 41 executes the special figure data setting process regarding the special figure hit / miss information data (special figure data) stored in the special figure hold storage area 412b (special figure data). Step S1904), the process proceeds to step S1905. The details of the special figure data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

<Step S1905>
In step S1905, the MPU 41 starts variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363 (first special symbol game or second special). The special figure fluctuation start process for executing the figure game) is executed, and the special figure game control process is terminated. The details of the special map fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

<Step S1906>
When the special figure change display flag is on (step S1902: Yes), that is, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing display (during special figure game), the MPU 41 is the first special. From the start of the variation display of the symbol or the second special symbol game, the special symbol for the first special symbol or the second special symbol set in the special symbol variation pattern setting process of step S2104 in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 28, which will be described later. Figure It is determined whether or not the variation display time has elapsed (step S1906). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the special symbol in the variable display and end the special symbol game.

When the special symbol variation display time has elapsed from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1906: Yes), that is, the timing at which the special symbol being displayed in the variation is stopped and displayed to end the special symbol game. If is, the process proceeds to step S1907. On the other hand, the MPU 41 specializes in the case where the variation display time has not elapsed from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1906: No), that is, the special symbol being displayed in the variation is stopped and displayed. If it is not the timing to end the figure game, the special figure game control process is ended.

<Steps S1907 to S1909>
When the variation display time has elapsed from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1906: Yes), that is, at the timing when the special symbol being displayed in the variation is stopped and displayed to end the special symbol game. If there is, the MPU 41 causes the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 to stop and display the special symbol in an manner corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the special symbol game. (Step S1907). Then, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol fluctuation stop flag indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed to on (step S1908), and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed. The special figure variation display flag indicating that the special figure game is being executed is set to off (step S1909), and the special figure game control process is terminated.

[Special figure data setting process]
Here, FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1904 of FIG. 26. In the special figure data setting process, the stored contents of the special figure reservation storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated. Hereinafter, the special figure data setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 27.

<Step S2001>
As shown in FIG. 27, in step S2001, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second special figure reservation number M for the second special figure game is 0. The MPU 41 is when the second special figure hold number M is 0 (step S2001: Yes), that is, when there is no second special figure hold for the second special figure game and there is a first special figure hold for the first special figure game. (Refer to step S1903 in the special figure game control process of FIG. 26), the process shifts to step S2002. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2005 when the second special figure hold number M is not 0 (step S2001: No), that is, when there is a second special figure hold for the second special figure game. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second special figure hold number M for the second special figure game is 0, so that the second special figure game is started with priority over the first special figure game.

In this embodiment, the second special figure game is started with priority over the first special figure game, but the first special figure game is started with priority over the second special figure game. Also, the special figure game is started in the order of entry (holding order) of the game balls to the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, and either the first special figure game or the second special figure game is started. May be executed. In addition, the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed independently of each other without setting a priority for the start of the first special figure game and the second special figure game, and the first special figure game and the first special figure game are executed. The second special figure game may be executed at the same time (so-called simultaneous change of the special figure).

<Steps S2002 to S2004>
When the second special figure hold number M is 0 (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 is stored in the first special figure hold number storage area NAA of the first special figure hold storage area REA. The number N is subtracted by 1 (step S2002), and the special figure winning / failing information is moved from the first holding area REA1 of the first special figure holding storage area REA to the special figure execution area AE (step S2003). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special figure hit / miss information of the second reserved area REA2 to the fourth reserved area REA4 of the first special figure reserved storage area REA one by one (step S2004). Specifically, in step S2004, the special figure hit / miss information of the second hold area REA2 of the first special figure hold storage area REA is moved to the first hold area REA1, and the special figure hit / miss information of the third hold area REA3 is second. It is moved to the holding area REA2, and the special figure hit / miss information of the fourth holding area REA4 is moved to the third holding area REA3. When the process of step S2004 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2008.

<Steps S2005-S2007>
When the second special figure hold number M is not 0 (step S2001: No), the MPU 41 is the second special figure hold number stored in the second special figure hold number storage area NAB of the second special figure hold storage area REB. M is subtracted by 1 (step S2005), and the special figure winning / failing information is moved from the first holding area REB1 of the second special figure holding storage area REB to the special figure execution area AE (step S2006). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special figure hit / miss information of the second reserved area REB2 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second special figure reserved storage area REB one by one (step S2007). Specifically, in step S2007, the special figure winning / failing information of the second holding area REB2 is moved to the first holding area REB1, the special drawing winning / failing information of the third holding area REB3 is moved to the second holding area REB2, and the fourth The special figure accuracy information of the holding area REB4 is moved to the third holding area REB3. When the process of step S2007 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2008.

<Step S2008>
In step S2008, the MPU 41 is set to the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 of the first special figure hold storage area REA, or the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the second special figure hold storage area REB. A special figure shift command indicating that the special figure pass / fail information has been shifted is set in the RAM 412, and the special figure data setting process is terminated. This special figure shift command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 changes the display number of the hold display corresponding to the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold displayed on the symbol display unit 341 based on the special figure shift command. be able to.

[Special figure change start processing]
Here, FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1905 of FIG. 26. In the special symbol variation start processing, the first special game or the second special symbol is started by starting the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363. The game (special figure game) is started, and various processes associated with the start of the special figure game are executed. Hereinafter, the special figure fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 28.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 28, in step S2101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic gaming state in which the gaming state is a high probability mode. Whether or not it is in the high probability mode is determined by whether or not the probability change game state flag indicating that the game state is the probability change game state which is the high probability mode is set to ON. The probabilistic game state flag is set to be on when the game state is changed from the probabilistic jackpot game state to the probabilistic game state in step S2317 of FIG. 34 in the game state transition process described later, and the game state is set in step S2309 of FIG. 33. Is set to off when shifting from the probabilistic gaming state to the probabilistic jackpot gaming state or the normal jackpot gaming state.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2102 when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state in which the high probability mode is (step S2101: Yes), and when the gaming state is not the probabilistic gaming state in which the high probability mode is (step S2101: No). ), That is, when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state or the normal gaming state in which the low probability mode is set, the process proceeds to step S2103.

<Steps S2102 and S2103>
When the game state is a probabilistic game state in which the game state is a high probability mode (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 has a high probability of being saved according to the game set value in step S2410 in the game set value change process of FIG. 35, which will be described later. The mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 9B) is read out, and the winning / failing determination is executed based on the high-probability mode winning / failing table (step S2102).

On the other hand, when the gaming state is not the probabilistic gaming state which is the high probability mode (step S2101: No), that is, when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state or the normal gaming state where the gaming state is the low probability mode, the MPU 41 is described in FIG. 35, which will be described later. In step S2410 in the game setting value change process, the low-probability mode hit / fail table (see FIG. 9A) saved according to the game set value is read out, and the hit / fail determination is executed based on the low-probability mode hit / miss table. (Step S2103).

In steps S2102 and S2103, the hit / fail determination is executed based on the high-probability mode hit / miss table or the low-probability mode hit / miss table saved according to the game set value in step S2410 in the game set value change process of FIG. 35, which will be described later. However, in steps S2102 and S2103, after reading the game setting value saved in step S2408 in the game setting value change process of FIG. You may make a pass / fail judgment by selecting the probability mode pass / fail table one by one.

<Step S2104>
When the pass / fail determination is made in step S2102 or S2103, the MPU 41 performs the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 in the special symbol game. The variation display time of the symbol is set as the special symbol variation pattern (step S2104).

The fluctuation display time (special symbol fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is usually the special symbol variation type counter CS1 when the result of the hit / fail determination in step S2102 or S2103 is a normal jackpot. If it is set based on the jackpot variation table (see FIG. 10A) and the result of the hit / fail determination in step S2102 or S2103 is a probability variation jackpot, the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (FIG. 10 (B)), and if the result of the hit / fail judgment in step S2102 or S2103 is wrong, the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 and the wrong fluctuation table (see FIG. 10 (C)) are used. It is set based on.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 41 is a special figure fluctuation pattern command including the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the special figure game, which is the result of the hit / fail determination in step S2102 or S2103, and the special figure fluctuation pattern set in step S2104. Is set in RAM 412, and the process proceeds to step S2106. The special figure variation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute the special figure game effect on the symbol display unit 341 or the like based on the special figure fluctuation pattern command.

As described above, when the result of the big hit lottery is "normal big hit", the MPU 41 adds "A" indicating that it is a 5R normal big hit to the special figure fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Any one of "A01" to "A03" is set in RAM412 as a special figure fluctuation pattern command. Further, in the MPU 41, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "5R probability variation jackpot", "B01" to "B" indicating that the special figure fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" are 5R probability variation jackpots are added. One of "B03" is set in RAM412 as a special figure fluctuation pattern command. Further, in the MPU 41, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "16R probability variation jackpot", "C01" to "C01" indicating that the special figure fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" are 16R probability variation jackpots. One of "C03" is set in RAM412 as a special figure fluctuation pattern command. Further, the MPU 41 is any of "D01" to "D08" with "D" indicating that the special figure fluctuation patterns "01" to "08" are out of order when the result of the jackpot lottery is "out of place". Is set in RAM412 as a special figure fluctuation pattern command. Further, the MPU 41 includes information indicating the type of deviation (reach of front / rear deviation, reach other than front / rear deviation, complete deviation) in the special figure fluctuation pattern command when the result of the jackpot lottery is “out of”.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 41 starts the special symbol game by starting the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36, and the process is performed in step S2107. Move to.

When the variable display of the special symbol is started, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "cumulative jackpot lottery number" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. Further, when the result of the hit / fail determination based on the low probability mode hit / miss table in step S2103 is wrong, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "number of consecutive hits" stored in the game information storage area 412d, and the hit / miss result is a big hit. In a certain case, clear the "number of consecutive deviations" to 0 times.

<Step S2107>
In step S2107, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol variation display flag indicating that the special symbol is variable display (the special symbol game is being executed) to on, and shifts the process to step S2108. In the special figure variation display flag, in step S1902 in the special figure game control process of FIG. 26, the special symbol is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 (special symbol). It is referred to to determine whether or not the figure game is being executed).

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol fluctuation stop flag indicating that the special symbol has stopped fluctuating (the special symbol game has ended) to off, and shifts the process to step S2109. The special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON when the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 is stopped and displayed in step S1908 in the special figure game control process of FIG. It is referred to in step S2202 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, which will be described later, to determine whether or not it is the timing at which the jackpot game can be started.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time-saving game state flag indicating that the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) is on is on. The time-saving game state flag is set to be turned on when the normal jackpot game ends in step S2321 of FIG. 34 in the game state transition process described later, and the game state is changed to the time-saving game in step S2310 of FIG. 33 or step S2325 of FIG. It is set to off when shifting from the state to the jackpot gaming state or the normal gaming state.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2110 when the time-saving game state flag is on (step S2109: Yes), that is, when the time-saving game state is in the time-saving game state. On the other hand, when the time-saving game state flag is off (step S2109: Yes), that is, when the time-saving game state is not set, the MPU 41 ends the special figure change start process.

<Step S2110>
When the time-saving game state flag is on (step S2109: Yes), that is, when the time-saving game state is set, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving number counter indicating the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the time-saving game state. (Step S2110), the special figure change start process is terminated. The time reduction counter is set when the game state is changed from the jackpot game state to the time reduction game state in step S2320 in the game state transition process of FIG. 34, which will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the time reduction counter is set when the gaming state shifts from the jackpot gaming state to the time saving gaming state, but the time reduction counter shifts the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to the probabilistic gaming state. It may be set even if it is set when it is set. That is, the gaming machine 10 can be configured as a so-called ST machine by setting the maximum number of special figures executed in the probabilistic gaming state to a finite number of times.

Further, when the normal jackpot game executed based on the lottery result in the jackpot lottery ending is completed, the gaming machine 10 changes to the normal gaming state without shifting from the jackpot gaming state to the time-saving gaming state. It is also possible to set the transition, in which case the time reduction counter is not normally set after the end of the jackpot game.

[Big hit game control process]
Here, FIGS. 29 to 32 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in step S1407 in the main process of FIG. 21. In the jackpot game control process, a process of controlling the progress of the jackpot game such as opening / closing control of the opening / closing door 319 provided in the variable winning opening 316 is executed. Hereinafter, the jackpot game control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 29, in step S2201, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot gaming flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is on. The jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S2206 of the jackpot game control process when the jackpot game is started, and is set to off in step S2252 of the jackpot game control process when the jackpot game is ended.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2211 when the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S2201: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2202 when the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S2201: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed.

<Step S2202>
When the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S2201: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 has whether or not the special symbol fluctuation stop flag indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed is on. To judge. The special symbol fluctuation stop flag is set to ON in step S1908 in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 26 when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and when the special symbol variation display is started, FIG. 28 shows. It is set to off in step S2108 in the special figure variation start processing. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing at which the jackpot game can be started by determining whether or not the special figure game that was started when the jackpot game is not being executed has ended.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2203 when the special symbol fluctuation stop flag is on (step S2202: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game can be started because the special symbol is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process when the special symbol fluctuation stop flag is off (step S2202: No), that is, when the jackpot game cannot be started because the special symbol is displaying fluctuations.

In this embodiment, the jackpot game is not started (executed) when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (during the special symbol game), but the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (during the execution of the special symbol game). The jackpot game may be started (executed). For example, the jackpot game may be started (executed) during the variable display of the first special figure, and conversely, the jackpot game may be started (executed) during the variable display of the second special figure. Specifically, by making it possible to change the first special figure and the second special figure at the same time as described above, the second special figure game is executed during the execution of the jackpot game for the first special figure game. , The first special figure game may be executed during the execution of the jackpot game for the second special figure game. Further, the jackpot game for the first special figure game and the jackpot game for the second special figure game may be executed at the same time, or the jackpot game for the first special figure game and the jackpot game for the second special figure game. If the start condition of the other jackpot game is satisfied during the execution of one of the jackpot games, the other jackpot game may be started after the end of one jackpot game.

<Step S2203>
When the special symbol fluctuation stop flag is on (step S2202: Yes), that is, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, is the MPU 41 a jackpot result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed? Judge whether or not. Whether or not the result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game in which the special symbol is stopped is a big hit is determined, for example, for the big hit lottery stored in the special figure execution area AE of the special figure reservation storage area 412b set in the RAM 41. Judgment is made based on the special figure pass / fail information.

When the result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a big hit (step S2203: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2204. On the other hand, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process when the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is not a jackpot (step S2203: No), that is, when the result of the jackpot lottery is out of order. ..

<Step S2204>
When the result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a big hit (step S2203: Yes), the MPU 41 starts the big hit game and the type of the big hit game (probability variable big hit game or normal big hit game). ) Is set to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the jackpot game start command (step S2204), and the process proceeds to step S2205. The jackpot game start command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute the jackpot game effect according to the jackpot game type based on the jackpot game start command.

<Step S2205>
In step S2205, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag indicating that the jackpot game to start is turned on, and shifts the process to step S2206. The jackpot game start flag is referred to when it is determined in step S2301 in the game state transition process of FIG. 33, which will be described later, whether or not to shift the gaming state to the probabilistic jackpot gaming state or the normal jackpot gaming state.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game in progress flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed on, and shifts the process to step S2207. In order to determine whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, the jackpot game in progress flag is in addition to step S2201 of the jackpot game control process, step S1503 of the normal figure game control process of FIG. 22, and the special figure of FIG. 26. It is referred to in step S1901 of the game control process.

<Step S2207>
In step S2207, the MPU 41 sets a round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games in the open / close execution mode, and shifts the process to step S2208. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets "5" in the round number counter when the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variation jackpot and a 5R normal jackpot, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the round number counter. Set to "16".

<Step S2208>
In step S2208, the MPU 41 sets an opening start command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game is started, and shifts the process to step S2209. The opening start command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can start the opening effect on the symbol display unit 341 or the like based on the opening start command.

<Step S2209>
In step S2209, the MPU 41 sets an opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the opening, and shifts the process to step S2210. The opening time counter is referred to in step S2213 of FIG. 30 of the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether or not it is the timing to end the opening.

<Step S2210>
In step S2210, the MPU 41 sets the opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed to on, and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening flag is referred to in step S2211 in the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether or not the opening is in progress.

<Step S2211>
When the jackpot gaming flag is on (step S2201: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed is on. (Step S2211).

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2212 in FIG. 30 when the opening flag is on (step S2211: Yes), that is, when the opening is being executed. On the other hand, when the opening flag is off (step S2211: No), that is, when the opening is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S2222.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
When the opening flag is on (step S2211: Yes), that is, when the opening is being executed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the opening (as shown in FIG. 30). Step S2212), it is determined whether or not the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2213). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the opening.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2214 when the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2213: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the opening. On the other hand, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process when the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2213: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the opening.

<Steps S2214 and S2215>
When the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2213: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the opening, the MPU 41 notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game is completed. The opening end command is set (step S2214). The opening end command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can end the opening effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 or the like based on the opening end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed to off (step S2215), and shifts the process to step S2216.

<Step S2216>
In step S2216, the MPU 41 sets and processes an open / close execution mode start command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the open / close execution mode in which a plurality of (5 or 16 times) round games are executed is started. To step S2117. The open / close execution mode start command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can start the opening / closing execution mode effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 or the like based on the opening / closing execution mode start command.

<Step S2217>
In step S2217, the MPU 41 sets a round game start command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the round game is started, and shifts the process to step S2218. The round game start command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can start the round game effect corresponding to each round game including the round number display on the symbol display unit 341 or the like based on the round game start command.

In the present embodiment, the round game effect is executed individually in each round game, but in the round game effect, a series of one effect is executed in the open / close execution mode, and the number of rounds of the round game is executed in each round game. May be displayed. In this case, the interval effect may not be executed between the round games, or the effect of displaying the number of rounds of the next round game to be executed may be executed as the interval effect.

<Steps S2218 and S2219>
In step S2218, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games in the open / close execution mode, and further opens the variable winning opening 316 by operating the open / close door 319 (step S2219). To step S2220.

<Steps S2220 and S2221>
In step S2220, the MPU 41 sets the round game in-game flag indicating that the round game is being executed to ON, sets the round game time counter indicating the remaining time of the round game, and performs the jackpot game control process. finish. The round game time counter is the step of FIG. 31 of the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is the timing to end the round game (return the opening / closing door 319 and close the variable winning opening 316) after the lapse of the specified time. Seen in S2224.

<Step S2222>
Returning to FIG. 29, when the opening flag is off (step S2211: No), that is, when the opening is not being executed, the MPU 41 is set to turn on the round gaming flag indicating that the round game is being executed. It is determined whether or not (step S2222). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the round game is being executed.

When the round game in-progress flag is on (step S2222: Yes), that is, when the round game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2223 in FIG. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2226 when the round gaming flag is off (step S2222: No), that is, when the round gaming is not being executed.

<Steps S2223 and S2224>
When the round game in-game flag is on (step S2222: Yes), that is, when the round game is being executed, the MPU 41 is based on the value of the round game time counter indicating the remaining time of the round game, as shown in FIG. Subtract by 1. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2224). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the round game (close the variable winning opening by returning the opening / closing door 319) after the lapse of the specified time.

The MPU 41 determines when the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2224: Yes), that is, at the timing when the round game ends after the lapse of the specified time (the variable winning opening is closed by the return of the opening / closing door 319). If so, the process proceeds to step S2228. On the other hand, in the MPU 41, when the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2224: No), that is, the timing at which the round game is ended after the lapse of the specified time (the variable winning opening is closed by the return of the opening / closing door 319). If not, the process proceeds to step S2225.

<Step S2225>
If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2224: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the round game after the lapse of the specified time (close the variable winning opening by returning the opening / closing door 319), the MPU 41 , It is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the variable winning opening 316 (step S2225). Whether or not the game ball has entered the variable winning opening 316 is determined when the entry of the game ball into the entry sensor 316a is detected in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. The determination is made based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2226 when the game ball has entered the variable winning opening 316 (step S2225: Yes), and has not entered the game ball into the variable winning opening 316 (step S2225: Yes). No), the jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Steps S2226 and S2227>
When there is a game ball entering the variable winning opening 316 (step S2225: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the value of the entry number counter indicating the number of the game ball entered into the variable winning opening 316 in the round game. 1 is added (step S2226). Then, the MPU 41 ends the round game by whether or not the value of the number of balls entered counter after addition reaches 10 (step S2227), that is, by entering the maximum number of game balls into the variable winning opening 316 (opening / closing door). It is determined whether or not it is time to close the variable winning opening due to the return of 319.

The MPU 41 ends the round game when the value of the ball entry counter after addition reaches 10 (step S2227: Yes), that is, when the maximum number of game balls are entered into the variable winning opening 316 (opening / closing door 319). When it is time to close the variable winning opening due to the return of the above, the process proceeds to step S2228. On the other hand, the MPU 41 ends the round game when the value of the number of balls entered counter after addition has not reached 10 (step S2227: No), that is, when the maximum number of game balls are entered into the variable winning opening 316. If it is not the timing to close the variable winning opening due to the return of the door 319, the jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Step S2228>
When the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2224: Yes), or when the value of the ball entry counter reaches 10 (step S2227: Yes), the MPU 41 returns the open / close door 319. As a result, the variable winning opening is closed (step S2228), and the process proceeds to step S2229. That is, the MPU 41 closes the variable winning opening 316 and ends the round game when the specified time has elapsed or when it is the timing to end the round game due to the entry of the maximum number of game balls into the variable winning opening 316. ..

<Steps S2229 to S2231>
In step S2229, the MPU 41 sets a round game end command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the round game is finished. The round game end command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can end the round game effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 or the like based on the round game end command.

Then, the MPU 41 clears the number of balls entered counter indicating the number of balls entered into the variable winning opening 316 in the round game (step S2230), and is in the round game indicating that the round game is being executed. The flag is set to off (step S2230), and the process proceeds to step S2232.

<Step S2232>
In step S2232, the MPU 41 is whether or not the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games in the open / close execution mode is 0 (step S2232), that is, the timing at which the open / close execution mode is terminated (unexecuted round games). There is) or not.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2241 when the round number counter is 0 (step S2232: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the open / close execution mode. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2233 when the round number counter is not 0 (step S2232: No), that is, when there is an unexecuted round game.

<Step S2233>
When the round number counter is not 0 (step S2232: No), that is, when there is an unexecuted round game, the MPU 41 sets an interval start command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the interval between the round games is started. (Step S2233), and the process proceeds to step S2234. The interval start command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can start the interval effect on the symbol display unit 341 or the like based on the interval start command.

In the present embodiment, the interval effect is executed in the interval between the round games, but the interval effect may be omitted and the round game effect for the previously executed round game may be continuously executed in the interval. , Also, a round game effect for the next round game may be executed.

<Steps S2234 and S2235>
In step S2234, the MPU 41 sets the in-interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is in progress to on. Then, the MPU 41 sets an interval time counter indicating the remaining time of the interval (step S2235), and ends the jackpot game control process. The interval time counter is referred to in step S2238 of FIG. 32 in the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is the timing to end the interval (start the round game).

<Step S2236>
Returning to FIG. 29, when the round game in-game flag is off (step S2222: No), that is, when the round game is not being executed, the MPU 41 has an in-interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed. It is determined whether or not it is on (step S2236). The in-interval flag is set to on in step S2234 of FIG. 31 in the jackpot game control process when starting the interval and off in step S2240 of FIG. 32 in the jackpot game control process when ending the interval. Set.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2237 of FIG. 32 when the in-interval flag is on (step S2236: Yes), that is, when the interval between rounds is being executed. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2245 when the in-interval flag is off (step S2236: No), that is, when the interval between rounds is not being executed.

<Steps S2237 and S2238>
When the in-interval flag is on (step S2236: Yes), that is, when the interval between rounds is being executed, the MPU 41 is 1 from the value of the interval time counter indicating the remaining time of the interval, as shown in FIG. Subtract (step S2237). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2238), that is, whether or not it is the timing to end the interval (start the round game).

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2239 when the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2238: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the interval and start the round game. On the other hand, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process when the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2238: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the interval (start the round game).

<Steps S2239 and S2240>
When the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2238: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the interval and start the round game, the MPU 41 indicates that the interval ends. Set the interval end command to notify to. The interval end command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can end the interval effect executed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like based on the interval end command.
Then, the MPU 41 sets the in-interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed to off (step S2240), and shifts the process to the above-mentioned step S2217. By shifting the process to step S2217 of FIG. 30, the process of steps S2217 to S2221 regarding the start of the round game is executed, and the jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Step S2241>
Returning to FIG. 31, when the round number counter is 0 (step S2232: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the open / close execution mode, the MPU 41 indicates that the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game is terminated. The open / close execution mode end command to be notified to 5 is set (step S2241), and the process shifts to step S2242. The open / close execution mode end command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can end the interval effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 or the like based on the open / close execution mode end command.

<Step S2242>
In step S2242, the MPU 41 sets an ending start command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the ending of the jackpot game is to be started, and shifts the process to step S2243. The ending start command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 5, the ending effect can be started on the symbol display unit 341 or the like based on the ending start command.

<Steps S2243 and S2244>
In step S2243, the MPU 41 sets the ending flag indicating that the ending is being executed to on. Then, the MPU 41 sets an ending time counter indicating the remaining time of the ending (step S2244), and ends the jackpot game control process. The ending time counter is referred to in step S2247 in FIG. 32 of the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is the timing to end the ending (big hit game).

<Step S2245>
Returning to FIG. 29, if the in-interval flag is off (step S2236: No), that is, if the interval between rounds is not being executed, whether or not the in-ending flag indicating that the ending is being executed is on. Is determined (step S2245).

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2246 of FIG. 32 when the ending flag is on (step S2245: Yes), that is, when the ending is being executed. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2250 when the ending flag is off (step S2245: No), that is, when the ending is not being executed.

<Steps S2246 and S2247>
When the ending flag is on (step S2245: Yes), that is, when the ending is being executed, as shown in FIG. 32, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the ending time counter indicating the remaining time of the ending (step S2245: Yes). Step S2246). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2247). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the ending (big hit game).

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2248 when the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2247: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the ending (big hit game). On the other hand, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process when the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2247: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the ending (big hit game).

<Steps S2248 and S2249>
When the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2247: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the ending (big hit game), the MPU 41 indicates that the ending of the big hit game is finished. Set the ending end command to notify 5. The ending end command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can end the ending effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 or the like based on the ending end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the ending flag indicating that the ending is being executed to off (step S2249), and ends the jackpot game control process.

<Step S2250>
Returning to FIG. 29, when the ending flag is off (step S2245: No), that is, when it is not during the opening, the round game, the interval, or the ending, the MPU 41 voices that the jackpot game ends. The jackpot game end command to be notified to the lamp control device 5 is set (step S2250), and the process shifts to step S2251. The jackpot game end command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can end the jackpot game effect executed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like based on the jackpot game end command.

<Steps S2251 and S2252>
In step S2251, the jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game is finished is set to on. The jackpot game end flag is referred to in step S2312 of the game state transition process of FIG. 34, which will be described later, in order to determine whether or not to shift from the jackpot game state to the high frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state). The flag.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game in-progress flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed to off (step S2252), and ends the jackpot game control process.

[Game state transition process]
Here, FIGS. 33 and 34 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in step S1408 of the main process of FIG. 21. In the game state transition process, a process of controlling the transition of various gaming states (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state, probabilistic jackpot gaming state, and normal jackpot gaming state) is executed. Hereinafter, the game state transition process will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34.

<Step S2301>
As shown in FIG. 33, in step S2301, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game start flag indicating that the jackpot game is started is on. In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, the jackpot game start flag is set to on in step S2205 when the jackpot game is started, and is set to off in step S2252 when the jackpot game is completed.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2302 when the jackpot game start flag is on (step S2301: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start the jackpot game. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2312 of FIG. 34 when the jackpot game start flag is off (step S2301: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the jackpot game.

<Steps S2302 and S2303>
When the jackpot game start flag is on (step S2301: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is started, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag to off (step S2302), and the jackpot game to be started is a probable change jackpot game. It is determined whether or not there is (step S2303). Whether or not the jackpot game to be started is a probability variation jackpot game is determined based on the special figure hit / miss information stored in the special figure execution area AE (see FIG. 8) of the special figure reservation storage area 412b set in the RAM 412. To.

When the MPU 41 starts the probabilistic jackpot game (step S2303: Yes), the process shifts to step S2304. On the other hand, when the probabilistic jackpot game is not started (step S2303: No), that is, when the normal jackpot game is started, the process shifts to step S2305.

<Step S2304>
When starting the probabilistic jackpot game (step S2303: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the probabilistic jackpot game state flag indicating that the probabilistic jackpot game is in the probabilistic jackpot game state in which the probabilistic jackpot game is executed (step S2304), and performs processing. The process proceeds to step S2305. The probabilistic jackpot game state flag is set in step S2315 of FIG. 34 of the game state transition process in order to determine whether to shift the gaming state to the probabilistic gaming state or the normal gaming state when the jackpot game is terminated. See in.

<Steps S2305 and S2306>
In step S2305, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal game state flag indicating that the game is in the normal game state is on. The normal game state flag is set to be on in step S2324 of FIG. 34 of the game state transition process when shifting from the time-saving game state to the normal game state, and the normal game state is set to the jackpot game state (probability variation jackpot game state or normal jackpot). When shifting to the gaming state), it is set to off in step S2306 of the game state transition process.

When the normal game state flag is on (step S2305: Yes), that is, when the MPU 41 is in the normal game state, the normal game state flag is set to off (step S2306), and the game state transition process is terminated. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2307 when the normal game state flag is off (step S2305: No), that is, when it is in the high frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state) instead of the normal game state. do.

<Step S2307>
When the normal game state flag is off (step S2305: No), that is, when the high frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time saving game state) is set instead of the normal game state, the MPU 41 is in the high frequency support mode. The indicated high frequency support mode flag is set to off (step S2307), and the process proceeds to step S2308.

<Steps S2308 and S2309>
In step S2308, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the probabilistic gaming state flag indicating that the probabilistic gaming state is on is on. The probabilistic game state flag is set to be on in step S2317 of FIG. 34 when shifting from the probabilistic jackpot game state to the probabilistic game state in the game state transition process, and the probabilistic game state to the jackpot game state (probability change jackpot game state or It is set to off in step S2309 when shifting to the normal jackpot game state).

When the probabilistic game state flag is on (step S2308: Yes), that is, when the probabilistic game state flag is on, the MPU 41 sets the probabilistic game state flag to off (step S2309), and ends the game state transition process. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2310 when the probabilistic gaming state flag is off (step S2308: No), that is, when it is neither a normal gaming state nor a probabilistic gaming state but a time-saving gaming state.

<Steps S2310 and S2311>
When the probabilistic game state flag is off (step S2308: No), that is, when the time-saving game state is set, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state flag indicating that the time-saving game state is off (step S2310). Then, the MPU 41 clears the time reduction number counter indicating the remaining time reduction number of games that can be executed in the time reduction game state (step S2311), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S2312>
When the jackpot game start flag is off (step S2301: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the jackpot game, the MPU 41 turns on the jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game is ended, as shown in FIG. (Step S2312). The jackpot game end flag is set to on in step S2251 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 when the jackpot game ends.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2313 when the jackpot game end flag is on (step S2312: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is terminated. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2322 when the jackpot game end flag is off (step S2312: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the jackpot game.

<Steps S2313 and S2314>
When the jackpot game end flag is on (step S2312: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is terminated, the MPU 41 sets the high frequency support mode flag indicating that the high frequency support mode is on and sets the high frequency support mode flag to on (step S2313). ), The jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game is finished is set to off (step S2314), and the process proceeds to step S2315.

<Step S2315>
In step S2315, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the probabilistic jackpot game state flag indicating that the probabilistic jackpot game is executed is on. The probability variation jackpot game state flag is set to on in step S2304 of FIG. 33 when the probability variation game state, the normal gaming state, or the time-saving gaming state is shifted to the probability variation jackpot gaming state in the game state transition processing, and the probability variation jackpot game. It is set to off in step S2318 when shifting from the state to the probabilistic gaming state.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2316 when the probability variation jackpot gaming state flag is on (step S2315: Yes), that is, when the probability variation jackpot gaming state is set. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2319 when the probabilistic jackpot gaming state flag is off (step S2315: No), that is, when the probabilistic jackpot gaming state is not the probabilistic jackpot gaming state but the normal jackpot gaming state.

<Step S2316>
When the probability change jackpot game state flag is on (step S2315: Yes), that is, when the probability change jackpot game state is set, the MPU 41 sets a probability change game state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the probability change jackpot game state is in the probabilistic game state. (Step S2316), and the process proceeds to step S2317. The probabilistic game state command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute the special figure effect corresponding to the probabilistic game state on the symbol display unit 341 or the like based on the probabilistic game state command.

<Step S2317>
In step S2317, the MPU 41 sets the probabilistic gaming state flag indicating that it is in the probabilistic gaming state to on, and shifts the process to step S2318. The probabilistic game state flag is referred to in step S2308 of FIG. 33 in the game state transition process in order to specify the game state when the jackpot game is started.

<Step S2318>
In step S2318, the MPU 41 sets the probabilistic jackpot game state flag indicating that the probabilistic jackpot game state is off to off, and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S2319>
When the probabilistic jackpot gaming state flag is off (step S2315: No), that is, when the probabilistic jackpot gaming state is not the probabilistic jackpot gaming state but the normal jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that it is in the time-saving gaming state. The time saving game state command is set (step S2319), and the process shifts to step S2320. The time-saving game state command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute the special figure effect corresponding to the time-saving game state on the symbol display unit 341 or the like based on the time-saving game state command.

<Steps S2320 and S2321>
In step S2320, the MPU 41 sets a time reduction counter indicating the number of remaining special figures that can be executed in the time reduction gaming state. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets an upper limit value (100 times in this embodiment) of the number of special figures that can be executed in the time-saving game state in the time-saving number counter. Each time the special figure game is started in the time reduction game state, the time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 in step S2110 in the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 28, and the normal game is started from the time reduction game state by executing the special figure game a specified number of times. In order to determine whether or not to shift to the state, it is referred to in step S2323 of the game state transition process.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state flag indicating that it is in the time-saving game state to on (step S2321), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S2322>
When the jackpot game end flag is off (step S2312: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the jackpot game, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time-saving game state flag indicating that the time-saving game state is on is on. (Step S2322).

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2323 when the time-saving game state flag is on (step S2322: Yes), that is, when the time-saving game state is in the time-saving game state. On the other hand, when the time-saving game state flag is off (step S2322: No), that is, when the time-saving game state is not set, the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process.

<Step S2323>
When the time-saving game state flag is on (step S2322: Yes), that is, in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 has a value of the time-saving number counter indicating the remaining number of special figures that can be executed in the time-saving game state. It is determined whether or not (step S2323). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift from the time-saving game state to the normal game state by executing the special figure game a predetermined number of times.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2324 when the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S2323: Yes), that is, when the time reduction game state is changed to the normal game state by executing the special figure game a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process when the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 (step S2323: No), that is, when the time reduction game state does not shift to the normal game state.

<Steps S2324 to S2326>
When the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S2323: Yes), that is, when the game shifts from the time reduction game state to the normal game state by executing the special figure game a specified number of times, the MPU 41 indicates that the game state is the normal game state. The normal game state flag is set to on (step S2324). Then, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state flag indicating that it is in the time-saving game state to off (step S2325), and sets the high-frequency support mode flag indicating that it is in the high-frequency support mode to off (step S2326). ), The game state transition process is terminated.

[Game setting value change process]
Here, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting value changing process executed in step S1409 of the main process of FIG. In the game set value change process, a process of displaying or hiding the set value or controlling the change of the game set value stored in the game information storage area 412d is executed according to the operation of the set value change operation unit 46. Hereinafter, the setting value changing process will be described with reference to FIG. 35.

<Step S2401>
As shown in FIG. 35, in step S2401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game set value display flag indicating that the game set value is displayed on the set value display unit 45 is on. The game setting value display flag will be described later in the game setting value change process when the game setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45 by switching the power of the setting value display unit 45 from off to on. When the game set value is set to be on in step S2405 and the game set value is hidden in the set value display unit 45 by switching the power of the set value display unit 45 from on to off, in the game set value change process. It is set to off in step S2412 described later.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2406 when the game set value display flag is on (step S2401: Yes), that is, when the game set value is displayed on the set value display unit 45. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2402 when the game set value display flag is off (step S2401: No), that is, when the game set value is not displayed on the set value display unit 45.

<Step S2402>
When the game set value display flag is off (step S2401: No), that is, when the game set value is not displayed on the set value display unit 45, the MPU 41 turns the power of the set value display unit 45 from off to on. It is determined whether or not the switch has been made (step S2402), that is, whether or not the operation of turning on the power of the set value display unit 45 has been performed for the set value change operation unit 46.

When the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S2402: Yes), the MPU 41 is operated to turn on the power of the set value display unit 45 with respect to the set value change operation unit 46. If so, the process proceeds to step S2403. On the other hand, in the MPU 41, when the power of the set value display unit 45 cannot be switched from off to on (step S2402: No), that is, an operation of turning on the power of the set value display unit 45 with respect to the set value change operation unit 46. If is not done, the game setting value change process is terminated.

<Steps S2403 to S2405>
When the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S2402: Yes), the MPU 41 reads and reads the game set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S2403). A number indicating the game set value is displayed on the set value display unit 45 (step S2404). This makes it possible to confirm the current game setting value. Then, the MPU 41 sets the set value display flag indicating that the game set value is displayed on the set value display unit 45 to ON (step S2405), and ends the set value change process.

<Step S2406>
When the set value display flag is set to ON (step S2401: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the set value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S2406). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a rotation operation for changing the game set value has been performed. When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S2406: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2407, and when the set value change operation unit 46 is not rotated (step S2406: No). The process proceeds to step S2409.

<Steps S2407 and S2408>
When the set value changing operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S2406: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process of changing the display on the set value display unit 45 (step S2407). For example, the MPU 41 displays a number one larger than the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before the rotation when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle, and vice versa. When the set value changing operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the left, a number one smaller than the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 is displayed before the rotation.

If the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before rotation is "6" and the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the right, it is displayed on the set value display unit 45. When the number is changed to "1" and the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before rotation is "1" and the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the left, the setting is set. The number displayed on the value display unit 45 is changed to "6". Further, when the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 is "6", it is prevented from rotating further to the right, and the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 is "1". In addition, it may not rotate further to the left.

Then, the MPU 41 overwrites and saves the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 as the game set value in the game set value of the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S2408), and ends the set value change process. As a result, when the power of the setting value changing operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the game setting value saved in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off is finally used as a valid game setting value of the RAM 412. It is stored in the game information storage area 412d. Therefore, by changing the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 by rotating the set value change operation unit 46, the game set value stored in the RAM 412 is changed. Then, the game set value can be determined by turning off the power of the set value display unit 45 while the number corresponding to the target game set value is displayed on the set value display unit 45.

In step S2408, the MPU 41 sets a game setting value change command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value.

<Step S2409>
When the set value change operation unit 46 is not rotated by a predetermined angle (step S2406: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S2409), that is, the set value is changed. It is determined whether or not the operation unit 46 is operated to turn off the power of the set value display unit 45. When the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S2409: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2410, and the power of the set value display unit 45 is not switched from on to off. If (step S2409: No), the set value change process is terminated.

<Steps S2410 to S2412>
When the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S2409: Yes), the MPU 41 has a low probability mode hit / fail table according to the game set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (FIG. 9 (A)) and the high probability mode pass / fail table (see FIG. 9B) are selected and stored in the RAM 412 (step S2410).

Here, in step S2410, the low-probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 9A) and the high-probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 9B) according to the game set values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. ) Is selected. That is, since the winning / failing table of the same game setting value is selected between the low-probability mode winning / failing table and the high-probability mode winning / failing table, the operation of changing the game setting value is easy. However, the set value in the low probability mode and the game set value in the high probability mode may be individually changed. In this case, for example, the setting value of the low probability mode is set to "1" and the setting value of the high probability mode is set to "6". It will be possible to do.

Then, the MPU 41 hides the number corresponding to the game set value in the set value display unit 45 (step S2411), sets the set value display flag to off (step S2412), and changes the set value. To finish.

[Specific performance information update processing]
Here, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process executed in step S1410 in the main process of FIG. 21. In the specific performance information update process, specific performance information such as base information is updated. Further, FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36. Hereinafter, the specific performance information update process will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37.

<Steps S2501 to S2503>
As shown in FIG. 36, in step S2501, the MPU 41 has various numbers of payout balls for the current base calculation from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, for example, a "general prize" in a normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). The "number of payout balls" and the "number of payout balls of the first winning lot" are read out, and the "number of out balls" in the normal game state for the current base calculation is read out from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S2502). Then, the MPU 41 is based on the "general winning opening payout number", the "first winning opening payout number" and the "out ball number" in the normal gaming state for the current base calculation, and the "out ball number" in the normal gaming state. The "current base BL", which is the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the "general winning opening payout number" and the "first winning opening payout number", is calculated and stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The "current state base BL" is updated (step S2503), and the process shifts to step S2504.

<Step S2504>
In step S2504, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of out balls in the normal game state for the current base calculation read from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S2502 has reached 60,000 balls. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2505 when the number of out balls in the normal gaming state for the current base calculation has reached 60,000 balls (step S2504: Yes), and the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 balls. (Step S2504: No), the process proceeds to step S2509.

<Steps S2505 to S2508>
When the number of out balls has reached 60,000 in the normal game state for the current base calculation (step S2504: Yes), the MPU 41 updates various base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S2505). ~ S2507). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 37 (A) and 37 (B), the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base (step S2505) in the base information, and is based on the current situation. The BL is shifted to the 60,000 ball base B1 last time (step S2506), and the current base BL is cleared to 0 (step S2507).

Then, the MPU 41 clears the number of general winning opening payout balls, the first winning opening payout number, and the number of out balls in the normal game state for base calculation stored as the base information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to 0 balls. (Step S2508), and the process proceeds to step S2509.

<Step S2509>
When the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is updated (steps S2505 to S2508), or when the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 balls (step S2504: No), the MPU 51 is other than the base information. Other specific performance information (for example, the number of unit jackpot lottery, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio) is read from the game information storage area 412d, and then the other specific performance information is specified based on the read information. The performance information is calculated, the values of other specific performance information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 are updated (step S2509), and the specific performance information update process is terminated.

[Performance display monitor display control processing]
Here, FIGS. 38 to 41 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1411 of the main process of FIG. 21. Hereinafter, the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41.

<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 38, in step S2601, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the BL display flag indicating that the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 is set to ON. Here, the BL display flag is set to ON in step S2606 described later in the display control process or step S2630 in FIG. 41 when the display of the current base BL is started on the performance display monitor 43.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2608 of FIG. 39 when the BL display in-progress flag is set to ON (step S2601: Yes), that is, when the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2602 when the BL display in-progress flag is set to off (step S2601: No), that is, when the current base BL is not displayed on the performance display monitor 43.

<Step S2602>
When the BL display flag is set to off (step S2601: No), that is, when the current base BL is not displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 has the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43. It is determined whether or not the B1 display flag indicating that the display is displayed is set to ON (step S2602). Here, the B1 display flag is set to ON in step S2612 of FIG. 39, which will be described later, when the display of the 60,000 ball base B1 is started last time on the performance display monitor 43.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2617 of FIG. 40 when the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S2602: Yes), that is, when the performance display monitor 43 displays the 60,000 ball base B1 last time. do. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2603 when the B1 display flag is set to off (step S2602: No), that is, when the performance display monitor 43 does not display the 60,000 ball base B1 last time. ..

<Step S2603>
When the B1 display flag is set to off (step S2602: No), that is, when the performance display monitor 43 does not display the 60,000 ball base B1 last time, the MPU 41 sets the performance display monitor 43 to 60,000 balls two times before. It is determined whether or not the B2 display flag indicating that the base B2 is displayed is set to ON (step S2603). Here, the B2 display flag is set to ON in step S2621 of FIG. 40 described later in the display control process when the display of the 60,000 ball base B2 is started two times before on the performance display monitor 43.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2626 of FIG. 41 when the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S2603: Yes), that is, when the performance display monitor 43 displays the 60,000 ball base B2 two times before. do. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2604 when the B2 display flag is set to off (step S2603: No), that is, when the performance display monitor 43 does not display the 60,000 ball base B2 two times before. ..

<Step S2604>
When the B2 display flag is set to off (step S2603: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S2604). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S2604: Yes), the process shifts to step S2605, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from off to on (step S2604: No), the corresponding End the display control process.

<Steps S2605 to S2607>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S2604: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S2605). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 37 (A), "8.", "L", indicating that the current base BL is 29%, When "2" and "9" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43 and the base information is an example shown in FIG. 37 (B), the current base BL is 0%. "8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating that the above is displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag indicating that the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 to ON (step S2606). Further, the MPU 41 sets a BL display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 in order to display the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S2607), and controls the display. End the process.

<Steps S2608 and S2609>
When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S2601: Yes), that is, when the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, as shown in FIG. 39, the MPU 41 performs the BL display in step S2607 of FIG. The value of the BL display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the current base BL in the performance display monitor 43 set in is subtracted by 1 (step S2608), and whether or not the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 is determined. Determine (step S2609). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1.

The MPU 41 processes when the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2609: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1. To step S2610. On the other hand, the MPU 41 processes when the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2609: No), that is, when it is not the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1. To step S2614.

<Steps S2610 to S2613>
When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2609: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1, the MPU 41 performs. The BL display flag indicating that the current base BL is displayed on the display monitor 43 is set to off (step S2610), and the previous 60,000 ball base included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. B1 is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2611). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 37 (A), "8." and "1" indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 33%. , "3", "3" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is an example shown in FIG. 37 (B), the previous 60,000 balls "8.", "1", "2", and "9" indicating that the base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B1 was displayed last time on the performance display monitor 43 to be turned on (step S2612). Further, the MPU 41 sets a B1 display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 in order to display the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step). S2613), the display control process is terminated.

<Step S2614>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2609: No), that is, if it is not the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1, the MPU 41 is a performance display switch. It is determined whether or not 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2614). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2615 when the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2614: Yes), and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S2614: No). ), The display control process is terminated.

When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2614: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the energization of the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, thereby indicating the current base BL. And the numbers are turned off.

<Steps S2615 and S2616>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2614: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag indicating that the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 to off (step). S2615). Further, the MPU 41 clears the value of the BL display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 to 0 (step S2616), and ends the display control process.

<Steps S2617 and S2618>
Returning to FIG. 38, when the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S2602: Yes), that is, when the performance display monitor 43 previously displayed the 60,000 ball base B1, as shown in FIG. 40. The MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 set in step S2613 of FIG. 39 (step S2617), and the B1 display time after the subtraction. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter is 0 (step S2618). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base B2.

The MPU 41 is a timing when the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2618: Yes), that is, the display on the performance display monitor 43 is switched from the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base B2. If so, the process proceeds to step S2619. On the other hand, the MPU 41 is not the timing when the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2618: No), that is, the display on the performance display monitor 43 is switched from the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base B2. If so, the process proceeds to step S2623.

<Steps S2619 to S2622>
When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2618: Yes), that is, when the display on the performance display monitor 43 is switched from the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base B2, the MPU 41 Set the B1 display flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B1 was displayed last time on the performance display monitor 43 to off (step S2619), and is included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The 60,000-ball base B2 is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2620). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 37 (A), "8." and "2" indicating that the 60,000-ball base B2 two times before is 32%. , "3", "2" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is an example shown in FIG. 37 (B), 60,000 balls are used two times before. "8.", "2", "3", and "3" indicating that the base B2 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 is displayed two times before on the performance display monitor 43 to be turned on (step S2621). Further, the MPU 41 sets a B2 display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the 60,000 ball base B2 before the previous time on the performance display monitor 43 in order to display the 60,000 ball base B2 before the previous time on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step). S2622), the display control process is terminated.

<Step S2623>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2618: No), that is, if it is not the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base B2, the MPU 41 It is determined whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2623). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2623: Yes), the process shifts to step S2624, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S2623: No), the corresponding End the display control process.

When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2623: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the energization of the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, so that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 The alphabet and numbers indicating are turned off.

<Steps S2624 and S2625>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2623: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 to off. At the same time (step S2624), the value of the B1 display time counter is cleared to 0 (step S2625), and the display control process is terminated.

<Steps S2626 and S2627>
Returning to FIG. 38, when the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S2603: Yes), that is, when the performance display monitor 43 displays the 60,000 ball base B2 two times before, as shown in FIG. 41. The MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the 60,000 ball base B2 before the previous time in the performance display monitor 43 set in step S2622 of FIG. 40 (step S2626), and the B2 display time after the subtraction. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter is 0 (step S2627). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the 60,000 ball base B2 to the current base BL two times before.

The MPU 41 processes when the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2627: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the 60,000 ball base B2 to the current base BL two times before. To step S2628. On the other hand, the MPU 41 processes when the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2627: No), that is, when it is not the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the 60,000 ball base B2 to the current base BL two times before. To step S2632.

<Steps S2628 to S2631>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2627: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the 60,000 ball base B2 to the current base BL two times before, the MPU 41 performs. The B2 display flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 is displayed two times before is set to off on the display monitor 43 (step S2628), and the current base included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2629). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 37 (A), "8.", "L", and "8" indicating that the current base BL is 29%. 2 ”and“ 9 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is an example shown in FIG. 37 (B), the current base BL is 0%. "8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating the existence are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag indicating that the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 to on (step S2630), and causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL for a certain period of time. The BL display time counter is set (step S2631), and the display control process is terminated.

<Step S2632>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2627: No), that is, if it is not the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the 60,000 ball base B2 to the current base BL two times before, the MPU 41 is a performance display switch. It is determined whether or not 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2632). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2632: Yes), the process shifts to step S2633, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S2632: No), the corresponding End the display control process.

When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2632: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the energization of the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, so that the 60,000-ball base B2 is used two times before. The alphabet and numbers indicating are turned off.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, the base information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. May be displayed on the performance display monitor 43 while the power of the gaming machine 10 is on, or may be displayed on the performance display monitor 43 while the front frame 11 is open. good.

<Steps S2633 and S2634>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2632: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 two times before. (Step S2633). Further, the MPU 41 clears the value of the B2 display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the 60,000 ball base B2 two times before to 0 (step S2634), and ends the display control process.

[Processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Next, the process executed by the MPU 51 in the voice lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 54.

As another embodiment, it is considered that a part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 in the present embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. Further, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing of the speaker 26 and the lighting unit 27, startup processing at the time of starting up the voice lamp control device 5, NMI interruption processing at the time of a power failure, and the like. The description of those processes will be omitted.

[Secondary timer interrupt processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes, for example, the sub-timer interrupt process as a periodic process having a cycle of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 42, in the sub-timer interrupt process, the MPU 51 has a counter update process (step S2701), an operation detection process (step S2702), a command determination process (step S2703), and a special figure game effect control process (step S2704). ), And the jackpot game effect control process (step S2705) is executed.

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process (step S2701), the MPU 51 updates the effect pattern type counter, the first stop symbol type counter, the fluctuation display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the effect type counter and the first stop symbol type counter, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The effect pattern type counter is used to determine the variation type (effect pattern) based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. Further, the first stop symbol type counter is used to determine the type of the decorative symbol to be stopped first based on the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This fluctuation display counter is for measuring the fluctuation display time of the symbol display unit 341, and the counter value in the fluctuation display counter is set to be 0 when the remaining fluctuation display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining fluctuation display time, that the fluctuation is in progress, that the fluctuation display of the symbol display unit 341 is completed, and the like.

[Operation detection process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the operation detection process executed in step S2702 of the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42 will be described. Here, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection process.

As shown in FIG. 43, in the operation detection process, the MPU 41 performs an operation button operation detection process (step S2801), an operation detection pattern determination process (step S2802), a selection button operation detection process (step S2803), and a selection operation detection pattern determination. The process (step S2804), the decision button operation detection process (step S2805), and the decision operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection process]
In the operation button operation detection process (step S2801 of the operation detection process), the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 41, so that the operation button 20 is operated at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub-timer interrupt process. It will be judged whether or not there is. Here, FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process. Hereinafter, the operation button operation detection process will be described with reference to FIG. 44.

<Steps S2901 to S2903>
As shown in FIG. 44, in the operation button operation detection process, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag (step S2901). Next, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag (step S2902). After that, the MPU 41 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a in the third detection flag (step S2903), and ends the operation detection process.

As described above, in the operation button operation detection process, the processes of steps S2901 to S2903 are executed, so that the operation history of the operation button 20 includes the operation states of the most recent three times at 1 msec intervals from the first detection flag to the third detection. It is stored in RAM 512 as a flag. Specifically, the latest operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second detection flag, and the previous operation state is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation detection pattern judgment processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 43, in the operation detection pattern determination process of step S2802 in the operation detection process, the operation of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. An operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for the operation button 20 from the history is set. The operation pattern flag is composed of the first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by the combination of turning on and off the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation for the operation button 20 is continued (see FIG. 46 (A)). Further, when only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation for the operation button 20 has started (see FIG. 46 (A)). Further, when only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation for the operation button 20 is completed (see FIG. 46 (A)). When all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to off, it can be determined that the operation button 20 has not been operated (see FIG. 46 (A)). Here, FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process. Further, FIG. 46A is a table showing the relationship between the detection pattern for the operation button 20 and the operation status. Hereinafter, the operation button operation detection process will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 (A).

<Step S3001>
As shown in FIG. 60, in the operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON (step S3001). .. Here, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3002 when the first operation detection flag is on (step S3001: Yes), and performs the process when the first operation detection flag is off (step S3001: No). The process proceeds to step S3005.

<Step S3002>
When the first operation detection flag is on (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to on (step S3001: Yes). Step S3002). Here, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3003 when the second operation detection flag is on (step S3002: Yes), and performs the process when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3002: No). The process proceeds to step S3008.

<Step S3003>
When the second operation detection flag is on (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the latest operation button 20 is set to on (step S3003). ). Here, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3004 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S3003: Yes), and performs the process when the third operation detection flag is off (step S3003: No). The process proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3004>
When the third operation detection flag is on (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag on and the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off (step S3004). The operation detection pattern judgment process is terminated. That is, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states for the operation buttons 20 three times, and the second operation pattern. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 46 (A)). Then, the first operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the operation button 20 is continued. For example, when the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 may set the operation button operation continuation command in the RAM 412 and transmit this operation button operation continuation command to the voice lamp control device 5. .. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine that the operation for the operation button 20 is continuing, so that the operation button 20 is continuously operated based on the number of times the operation button operation continuation command is continuously transmitted. I can grasp the time. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not the operation button 20 has been long-pressed based on the time during which the operation button 20 is continuously operated. Therefore, the operation button effect based on the long-press operation is produced. Can be executed.

<Step S3005>
When the first operation detection flag is off (step S3001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on (step S3005). ). Here, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3006 when the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), and performs the process when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No). The process proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3006>
When the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the latest operation button 20 is on (step S3006). Here, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3007 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S3006: Yes), and performs the process when the third operation detection flag is off (step S3006: No). The process proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3007>
When the third operation detection flag is on (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag on and the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off (step S3007). That is, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" are generated as the operation states for the operation buttons 20 three times, and the first operation pattern. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 46A), and the operation detection pattern determination process is terminated. The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state by using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state for three times of the operation button 20 is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the start of operation of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S3008>
When the second operation detection flag is off (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the latest operation button 20 is on (step S3008). Here, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3010 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S3008: Yes), and performs the process when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No). The process proceeds to step S3009.

<Step S3009>
When the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No), the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag on and the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag off (step S3009). The operation detection pattern judgment process is terminated. That is, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" are generated as the operation states for the operation buttons 20 three times, and the first operation pattern. The flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 46 (A)). Then, the third operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 is completed). can.

<Step S3010>
When the third operation detection flag is off (step S3003: No), when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No), and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S3006: No). , Or when the third operation detection flag is on (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to off (step S3010). The operation detection pattern judgment process is terminated. That is, the MPU 41 turns off all the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state for three operation buttons 20. (See FIG. 46 (A)). The MPU 41 determines that the operation button 20 is in the non-operation state when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Select button operation detection process]
Returning to the description of FIG. 43, in the selection button operation detection process (step S2803), the MPU 41 executes the upper selection button operation process, the lower selection button operation process, the left selection button operation process, and the right selection button operation process.

<Upper selection button operation processing>
In the upper selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the upper selection button 211 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the upper selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 44, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the upper selection button operation processing, the "operation detection flag" may be read as "upper selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 44.

<Down selection button operation processing>
In the lower selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the lower selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 44, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the lower selection button operation processing, the "operation detection flag" may be read as "lower selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 44.

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the left selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 44, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the left selection button operation processing, the "operation detection flag" may be read as "left selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 44.

<Right selection button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the right selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 44, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the right selection button operation processing, the "operation detection flag" may be read as "right selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 44.

[Selection operation detection pattern judgment processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 43, in the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), the MPU 41 has an upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, a lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, a left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and a right selection operation detection process. Execute pattern judgment processing.

<Top selection operation detection pattern judgment processing>
In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 is above the operation history of the upper selection button 211 determined based on the first upper selection operation detection flag, the second upper selection operation detection flag, and the third upper selection operation detection flag. The upper operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for the selection button 211 is set. Here, since the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 45, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 45, the "operation detection flag" is the "upper selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" is the "upper selection operation pattern". It should be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 46B, in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 has "ON", "ON", and "ON" operation patterns as the operation states for the upper selection button 211 three times. When it occurs, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the first upper selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the upper selection button 211 continues.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation state for three times of the upper selection button 211, and the second upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON. 1 Set the upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag to off. The second upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has been started). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the operation state for three times of the upper selection button 211, and the third 1 Set the upper selection operation pattern flag and the second upper selection operation pattern flag to off. Then, the third upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 is completed). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state for three times of the upper selection button 211. Set all to off. The MPU 41 determines that the upper selection button 211 is in the non-operation state when all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Down selection operation detection pattern judgment processing>
In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 is a lower selection button from the operation history of the lower selection button 212 determined based on the first lower selection operation detection flag, the second lower selection operation detection flag, and the lower selection operation detection flag. Set the lower operation pattern flag to determine the operation status for 212. Here, since the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 45, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 45, the "operation detection flag" is the "lower selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" is the "lower selection operation pattern". It should be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 46 (C), in the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 has "ON", "ON", and "ON" operation patterns as the operation states for the lower selection button 212 three times. When it occurs, the first lower selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the first lower selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the lower selection button 212 continues.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state for three times of the lower selection button 212, and sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON. 1 Set the lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag to off. The second lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has been started). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state for three times of the lower selection button 212, and sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON. 1 Set the lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag to off. The third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has been completed). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the first to third lower selection operation detection flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times. Set all to off. The MPU 41 determines that the lower selection button 212 is in the non-operation state when all of the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Left selection operation detection pattern judgment processing>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 is a left selection button from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. A left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 213 is set. Here, since the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 45, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 45, the "operation detection flag" is set to the "left selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" is set to the "left selection operation pattern". It should be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 46 (D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 has "ON", "ON", and "ON" operation patterns as the operation states for the left selection button 213 three times. When it occurs, the first left selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the first left selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the left selection button 213 is continued.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states for the left selection button 213 three times, and the second is 1 Set the left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag to off. The second left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has been started). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the operation state for three times of the left selection button 213, and sets the third. 1 Set the left selection operation pattern flag and the second left selection operation pattern flag to off. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 is completed). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the first to third left selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state for three times of the left selection button 213. Set all to off. The MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 is in the non-operation state when all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Right selection operation detection pattern judgment processing>
In the right-selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 is a right-selection button from the operation history of the right-selection button 214, which is determined based on the first right-selection operation detection flag, the second right-selection operation detection flag, and the right-selection operation detection flag. Set the right operation pattern flag to determine the operation status for 214. Here, since the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 45, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 45, the "operation detection flag" is set to the "right selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" is set to the "right selection operation pattern". It should be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 46 (E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 has "ON", "ON", and "ON" operation patterns as the operation states for the right selection button 214 three times. When it occurs, the first right selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the first right selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continued.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", or "ON" occurs as the operation state for three times of the right selection button 214, and sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON. 1 Set the right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag to off. The second right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has been started). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the operation state for three times of the right selection button 214, and sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON. 1 Set the right selection operation pattern flag and the second right selection operation pattern flag to off. The third right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has been completed). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the first to third right selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times. Set all to off. The MPU 41 determines that the right selection button 214 is in the non-operation state when all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are off.

[Enter button operation detection process]
Returning to the description of FIG. 43, in the decision button operation detection process (step S2805), the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the decision button 21B and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the decision button operation detection process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 44, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the decision button operation detection process, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "decision button operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 57.

[Decision operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the decision operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806), the MPU 41 determines from the operation history of the decision button 21B determined based on the first decision operation detection flag, the second decision operation detection flag, and the third decision operation detection flag. An operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 21B is set. Here, since the determination operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 45, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "determination operation detection flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 45.

Here, as shown in FIG. 46 (F), in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 generated "ON", "ON", and "ON" operation patterns as the operation states for the determination button 21B three times. In this case, the first determination operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second determination operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the first determination operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the determination button 21B is continuing.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the second determination operation pattern flag to ON when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state for three times of the determination button 21B, and makes the first determination. Set the operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag to off. The second decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the decision button 21B has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the decision button 21B has been started). ..

Further, the MPU 41 sets the third determination operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" are generated as the operation states for the three times of the determination button 21B, and makes the first determination. Set the operation pattern flag and the second determination operation pattern flag to off. Then, the third decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the decision button 21B has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the decision button 21B is completed). ..

In addition, the MPU 41 has all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state for three times of the decision button 21B. Is set to off. The MPU 41 determines that the determination button 21B is in the non-operation state when all of the first to third determination operation pattern flags are off.

[Command judgment processing]
Next, an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2703 of the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42 will be described. Here, FIGS. 47 and 48 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process.

<Step S3101>
As shown in FIG. 47, in the command determination process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control device 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S3101: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3102. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received the command (step S3101: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process.

The command received from the main control device 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. Further, the command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have received the command in this step S3101, and when it becomes the target of processing, it is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area. For example, the processing work storage area. Is remembered in.

<Step S3102>
When a command is received (step S3101: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S3102). The special figure fluctuation pattern command is a command indicating the fluctuation display time (special figure fluctuation pattern) of the special symbol in the special figure game and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery.

Here, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3103 when the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S3102: Yes), and when the received command is not a special figure variation pattern command (step S3102: No). , The process proceeds to step S3107.

<Steps S3103 and S3104>
When the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S3102: Yes), the MPU 51 performs variation type (effect pattern) setting process (step S3103) based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. And the stop symbol combination setting process (step S3104) is executed. Hereinafter, the details of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process and the stop symbol combination setting process will be described.

[Variation type (effect pattern) setting process]
In the variation type (effect pattern) setting process, the special figure game effect to be executed by various effect means (design display unit 341, speaker 26, illumination unit 27, movable accessory member 39, sub-movable display unit 38) in the special figure game. Is set. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the variation type (effect pattern) and the variation display time with reference to the variation type table (see FIG. 49) based on the special figure variation pattern command, and further, the variation type (effect pattern). ), The effect pattern type is set based on the effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 50).

Here, FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table referred to by the MPU 51 when determining a variation type (effect pattern).

As shown in FIG. 49, in the variation type table, the contents of the variation display time and the variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the special figure variation pattern command are defined. For example, the special figure fluctuation pattern command "A01" in which the lottery result is "normal jackpot" and the special figure fluctuation pattern is "01" is associated with the fluctuation display time "30s" and the fluctuation type "normal reach effect pattern". ing. In addition, the variation display time "60s" and the variation type "super reach effect pattern" correspond to the special map variation pattern command "B02" whose lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" and the special map variation pattern is "02". The special figure fluctuation pattern command "C03", which has a lottery result of "16R probability variation jackpot" and a special map fluctuation pattern of "03", has a variation display time "90s" and a variation type "special reach effect pattern". Are associated with each other. Further, the special figure fluctuation pattern command "D04" in which the lottery result is "off" and the special figure fluctuation pattern is "04" is associated with the fluctuation display time "7s" and the fluctuation type "non-reach effect pattern". The special figure fluctuation pattern command "D05" whose lottery result is "off" and the special figure fluctuation pattern is "05" is associated with the fluctuation display time "10s" and the fluctuation type "non-reach effect pattern". Has been done.

Further, FIGS. 50A to 50C are diagrams showing an example of an effect pattern type selection table. The effect pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (effect pattern). Specifically, FIG. 50 (A) is a normal reach effect pattern type selection table referred to when the final individual effect type in the special figure game effect is the normal reach effect, and FIG. 50 (B) is the special figure game effect. It is a super reach effect pattern type selection table referred to when the final individual effect type is a super reach effect, and FIG. 50 (C) shows a case where the final individual effect type in the special figure game effect is a special reach effect. It is a reference special reach effect pattern type selection table.

In this embodiment, the case where there are five types of effects corresponding to each of the variable types will be described as an example, but the types of effects may be six or more. Further, in FIG. 50, the effect type table when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 50 (A), the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and deviation). "Direction pattern X1" to "Direction pattern X5" are defined as. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the normal reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected from the normal reach effect pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. select. Here, the effect patterns X1 to the effect pattern X3 included in the normal reach effect pattern type selection table are, for example, an effect in which the normal reach effect in which the decorative symbol is in the reach state is executed after the high-speed fluctuation effect in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed is completed. , The final individual production type is a normal reach production.

Further, in the super reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 50 (B), "effect pattern Y1" to "effect pattern Y5" are determined as the effect pattern types corresponding to the counter values of the effect pattern type counters according to the lottery result. Has been done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the super reach effect pattern, the MPU 51 selects the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Select from the table. Here, for the effect patterns Y1 to Y3 included in the super reach effect pattern type selection table, for example, the normal reach effect is executed after the high-speed fluctuation effect is completed, and the final individual effect type is higher than the normal reach effect. It is a production that develops into a super reach production that is high and has a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. The super reach effect pattern type selection table may include a super reach effect pattern effect that develops into a super reach effect after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect without going through the normal reach effect.

Further, in the special reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 50 (C), "effect pattern Z1" to "effect pattern Z5" are defined as the effect pattern types corresponding to the counter values of the effect pattern type counters according to the lottery result. Has been done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the special reach effect pattern, the MPU 51 selects the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Select from the table. Here, for the effect patterns Z1 to Z3 included in the special reach effect pattern type selection table, for example, the normal reach effect and the super reach effect are executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect, and the normal reach effect and the super are further as the final individual effect type. It is a production that develops into a special reach production that has a higher expectation of big hits than the reach production and has a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. The special reach effect pattern type selection table includes a special reach effect pattern that develops into a special reach effect after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect or the normal reach effect, without going through at least one of the normal reach effect and the super reach effect. You may.

[Stop symbol combination setting process]
In the stop symbol combination setting process, a symbol combination is set when a plurality of decorative symbols (for example, three) that are variablely displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are stopped and displayed on the effective line in the special symbol game. Specifically, in the MPU 51, the stop symbol combination is set with reference to the first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 51 (B)) based on the special symbol variation pattern command.

Here, FIG. 51 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the decorative symbol type and the color of the decorative symbol. As shown in FIG. 51 (A), in the present embodiment, the numbers "1" to "9" are set as decorative patterns, and among these numbers, "3" and "7" are red. , "1", "5" and "9" are green, and "2", "4", "6" and "8" are red. Then, in the present embodiment, the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game is notified by the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on one or a plurality of effective lines set in the symbol display unit 341. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit, the decorative symbol with the same number is stopped and displayed on the effective line, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, the decorative symbol is doublet on the effective line. It is stopped and displayed in other than.

It is also conceivable to make a difference in the player's advantage in the type (number, color) of the decorative pattern. For example, odd numbers are more advantageous to players than even numbers, and red "3" and "7" are more advantageous to players than green "1", "5" and "9" among odd numbers. It is conceivable to do. In this case, for example, when the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, the big hit type may be clearly indicated or suggested by the combination of the decorative symbols displayed to be stopped. For example, when the stop symbol combination is "777", it is clearly indicated that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and when the stop symbol combination is "333", it is clearly indicated that it is a probability variation jackpot, and the stop symbol combination is an even number. If getting doublet, it may suggest that it is a 5R normal jackpot. In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, it is expected that the result of the jackpot lottery for a specific hold of the special figure game executed after the special figure game will be a big hit due to the combination of the decorative symbols displayed to be stopped. The degree (big hit expectation) may be specified or suggested. For example, in the special figure game until the special figure game for a specific hold is executed, the spots of the same color are stopped and displayed as so-called chance eyes, and the jackpot expectation is expressed by the color of the spots (chance eyes), so-called look-ahead effect. It may be explicitly stated or suggested as. Specifically, the jackpot expectation of the special game for a specific hold is the highest for the red ones (chance eyes), the next highest for the green ones (chance eyes), and the lowest for the blue ones. It may be set so that the variation pattern of the special figure game for a specific hold and the color variation (chance eye) according to the winning / failing information are stopped and displayed.

In the present embodiment, the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol includes a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is a decorative symbol that is first stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the second stop symbol is a decorative symbol that is second stopped and displayed, and the final stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed. It is a design.

Here, FIG. 51 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 51 (B), in the first stop symbol selection table, a decorative symbol (first stop symbol) to be first stopped and displayed in the symbol display unit 341 is defined. In addition, FIG. 51 (B) is a symbol combination showing that the decorative symbols are "1" to "9" and "333" is a probability variable jackpot (either 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot), "777". Is a symbol combination indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and that the doublet other than "333" and "777" is a symbol combination indicating that it is either a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot, or a 16R probability variation jackpot. It is assumed.

If the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", there is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol has a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols other than "3" and "7". It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the symbol combination of "333" or "777" indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", "7" is not distributed as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined from the decorative symbols other than "7" with a predetermined probability. That is, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the symbol combination of "777" indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot is not stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", doublet symbol combinations other than the symbol combination of "333" indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot may be stopped and displayed. That is, even when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", doublet symbol combinations other than the symbol combination of "333" whose decorative symbol stop display result suggests 5R normal jackpot can be stopped and displayed. Then, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" and a decorative symbol other than "3" excluding "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 is a 5R probability variation jackpot in the jackpot game. Execute the 5R probability change promotion effect to be specified.

Furthermore, if the lottery result is "16 probability variation jackpot", there is a distribution for all decorative symbols "1" to "9", and the first stop is made with a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols "1" to "9". The design is decided. That is, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", doublet symbol combinations other than the symbol combination of "777" indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot may be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the doublet symbol combination other than the symbol combination of "777" which indicates the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 5R normal jackpot is stopped and displayed. Can be doublet. Then, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" and "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 16R probability variation promotion effect that clearly indicates that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot in the jackpot game. ..

Then, when the first stop symbol is determined when the lottery result is a big hit, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbols as the previously determined first stop symbol. As a result, the stop symbol combination to be stopped and displayed on the effective line of the symbol display unit 341 in the special symbol game is determined.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is "missing", there is a distribution for all the decorative symbols "1" to "9", and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols "1" to "9". Will be done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is "out", the out-of-order type selected based on the out-of-type table (FIG. 9 (D)) and the previously determined first stop symbol are used. The second stop symbol is determined based on the symbol. For example, when the deviation type is front-rear deviation reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. Further, when the deviation type is reach other than front and rear deviation, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the symbols before and after the first stop symbol and the first stop symbol. It is decided by the design. When the deviation type is completely out, the second stop symbol is determined to be a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. The stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols may be determined by the display control device 6, only the first stop symbol is determined by the voice lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined by the display control device 6. You may decide.

<Step S3105>
Returning to the description of the command determination process of FIG. 47, in step S3105, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time corresponding to the received special figure variation pattern command in the variation display counter. The fluctuation display time is determined according to the fluctuation pattern information included in the special figure fluctuation pattern command. Then, the fluctuation display counter is decremented one by one in the counter update processing of step S2701 in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. It is possible to determine the remaining time of the display time. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display has ended when the variation display counter becomes 0.

<Step S3106>
In step S3106, the MPU 51 displays a display variation pattern command for specifying the content of the effect pattern type set in step S3103 of the command determination process and the content of the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol determined in step S3104. Output to 6 and end the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the effect pattern type and the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores a variation image of a decorative pattern and an effect image corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the effect display on the symbol display unit 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type, and the effect type.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols (for example, three) until the preset variable display time elapses, and a plurality of decorative symbols are displayed. The fluctuation of the decorative pattern of is stopped and displayed in order. During the variation display of the decorative symbol, various effects corresponding to the contents of the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like. ..

Further, when the MPU 51 outputs the display fluctuation pattern command to the display control device 6, for example, the special figure game effect in-progress flag is set to ON. This special figure game effect in progress flag is a flag indicating that the special figure game effect is being executed.

<Step S3107>
If the received command is not a special figure variation pattern command (step S3102: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a special figure shift command (step S3107). The special figure shift command is the first of the first special figure hold storage area REA when the first special figure hold number N or the second special figure hold number M decreases due to the start of the special figure game (variation display of the special figure). 1 Reservation area REA1 to 4 Reservation area REA4, or 2nd special figure reservation storage area REB 1st reservation area REB1 to 4th reservation area REB4 (see FIG. 8). This command indicates that the information has been shifted.

When the received command is a special figure shift command (step S3107: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3108, and when the received command is not a special figure shift command (step S3107: No), the process is performed in step S3110. Move to.

<Steps S3108 and S3109>
When the received command is a special figure shift command (step S3107: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the special figure data setting process (step S3108) and the special figure data image display process (step S3109), and performs the command determination process. finish.

Here, the special figure data setting process executed in step S3108 is the data of the special figure hit / miss information stored in the special figure hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) set in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5. It is a process of shifting (updating) the figure data). The special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) corresponds to the special drawing holding storage area 412b (see FIG. 8) set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4, and is equivalent to the special drawing holding storage area 412b. Special figure data is stored. The special figure hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) is the first special figure hold storage area REA, the second special figure hold storage area REB, and the special figure execution area AE (see FIG. 8) of the special figure hold storage area 412b. The first special figure reservation storage area corresponding area, the second special figure reservation storage area corresponding area, and the special figure execution area corresponding area corresponding to each are included. Further, the first special figure reservation storage area corresponding area corresponds to the first to fourth reservation areas REA1 to REA4 (see FIG. 8) of the first special figure reservation storage area REA in the special figure reservation storage area 412b. The area corresponding to the first to fourth reserved areas (not shown) is included. Further, the second special figure hold storage area corresponding area corresponds to the first to fourth hold areas REB1 to REB4 (see FIG. 8) of the second special figure hold storage area REB in the special figure hold storage area 412b. Figures 1 to 4 include areas corresponding to the reserved areas.

On the other hand, the special figure data image display process executed in step S3109 is based on the special figure data stored in the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the RAM 512 shifted (updated) in step S3108. This is a process of shifting an image (special figure data image) (see FIGS. 52 and 53) related to the special figure data displayed on the display unit 341.

Here, FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure data image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 before and after receiving the special figure shift command. Specifically, FIGS. 52 (A1) and 52 (A2) are diagrams showing an example of a special figure data image before receiving the special figure shift command, and FIG. 52 (B1) is shown in FIG. 52 (A1). FIG. 52 (B2) is an example of the special figure data image after receiving the special figure shift command for the first special figure game in the display state of the special figure data image shown, and FIG. 52 (B2) is the special figure data image shown in FIG. 52 (A2). This is an example of a special figure data image after receiving a special figure shift command for the second special figure game in the display state of.

As shown in FIGS. 52 (A1) and 52 (A2), the special figure data image is displayed on the special figure data image display units 75, 76, 77 set in the symbol display unit 341. The special figure data image display units 75, 76, 77 correspond to the first special figure hold storage area corresponding area and the second special figure hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the above-mentioned special figure hold storage area corresponding area set in the RAM 512. Corresponding to the area and the above-mentioned special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown), the special figure variable image display area 75, the first special figure holding image display area 76, and the second special figure holding image display area 77 are provided. include.

The special figure variation image display area 75 is the above-mentioned special figure hold storage area corresponding area corresponding to the special figure execution area AE (see FIG. 8) of the special figure hold storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4. Special figure execution area This is an area for displaying the special figure game image for the special figure game based on the special figure data stored in the corresponding area (not shown). Then, in the special figure variation image display area 75, when the special figure data is stored in the special figure execution area corresponding area, the special figure game image is displayed, while the special figure execution area corresponding area is special. If the figure data is not stored, the special figure game image is not displayed. That is, the special symbol game image is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and is hidden by the stop display of the special symbol. In other words, the special figure game image is displayed to indicate that the special figure game is being executed, and the special figure game image is hidden to indicate the end of the special figure game. ..

In the examples shown in FIGS. 52 (A1) and 52 (A2), the special figure data is stored in the special figure execution area corresponding area, and the special figure game image (cross) is stored in the special figure variation image display area 75. The hatched circle part) is displayed.

The first special figure hold image display area 76 corresponds to the first special figure hold storage area REA (see FIG. 8) of the special figure hold storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4. This is an area for displaying the first special figure reserved image for the first special figure game based on the special figure data stored in the first special figure reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) in the area corresponding area. The first special figure reserved image display area 76 is in the first special figure reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the first special figure reserved storage area corresponding area in the above-mentioned special figure reserved storage area corresponding area. Correspondingly, the first special figure first reserved image display area 761, the first special figure second reserved image display area 762, the first special figure third reserved image display area 763, and the first special figure fourth reserved image display. Includes area 764. When the special figure data is stored in any of the areas corresponding to the first to fourth reserved areas (not shown) in the first special figure reserved image display area 76, the first special figure is reserved. While the image is displayed, the first special figure reserved image is not displayed when the special figure data is not stored in any of the areas corresponding to the first to fourth reserved areas (not shown). That is, the first special figure hold image is displayed as many as the number corresponding to the first special figure hold number N when there is a hold for the first special figure game, and when there is no hold for the first special figure game, there is no hold. Do not show. In other words, the first special figure holding number N for the first special figure game is specified based on the display number of the first special figure holding image.

In the example shown in FIG. 52 (A1), the first special figure reserved image is displayed in the first special figure first to third reserved image display areas 761 to 763, and the first special figure fourth reserved image display area 764. The first special figure reserved image is not displayed in. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (A1), the special figure data is stored in the first special figure 1st to 3rd reserved area corresponding areas in the first special figure 1st to 4th reserved area corresponding areas (not shown). It is stored, and the special figure data is not stored in the area corresponding to the 4th reserved area of the 1st special figure, indicating that the number N of the 1st special figure reserved for the 1st special figure game is 3.

The second special figure hold image display area 77 corresponds to the second special figure hold storage area REB (see FIG. 8) of the special figure hold storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4. This is an area for displaying the second special figure reserved image for the second special figure game based on the special figure data stored in the second special figure reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) in the area corresponding area. The second special figure reserved image display area 77 is set in the second special figure reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) in the second special figure reserved storage area corresponding area in the above-mentioned special figure reserved storage area corresponding area. Correspondingly, the second special figure first reserved image display area 771, the second special figure second reserved image display area 772, the second special figure third reserved image display area 773, and the second special figure fourth reserved image display. Includes area 774. Then, when the special figure data is stored in any of the areas corresponding to the first to fourth reserved areas (not shown) of the second special figure in the second special figure reserved image display area 77, the second special figure is held. While the image is displayed, the second special figure reserved image is not displayed when the special figure data is not stored in any of the areas corresponding to the first to fourth reserved areas (not shown) of the second special figure. That is, when there is a hold for the second special figure game, the number of the second special figure hold image is displayed as many as the number corresponding to the second special figure hold number M, and when there is no hold for the second special figure game, there is no hold. Do not show. In other words, the second special figure holding number M for the second special figure game is specified based on the display number of the second special figure holding image.

In the example shown in FIG. 52 (A2), the second special figure reserved image is displayed in the second special figure first to second reserved image display areas 771 to 772, and the second special figure third to fourth reserved image is displayed. The second special figure reserved image is not displayed in the display areas 773 to 774. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (A2), the special figure data is stored in the second special figure 1st to 2nd reserved area corresponding areas in the second special figure 1st to 4th reserved area corresponding areas (not shown). It is stored, and the special figure data is not stored in the area corresponding to the 3rd to 4th holding areas of the 2nd special figure, and it is shown that the 2nd special figure holding number M for the 2nd special figure game is 2. There is.

Then, in the special figure data image display processing, when the received special figure shift command is for the first special figure, that is, when the first special figure game is started, the special figure execution of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area The special figure game image is displayed in the special figure variation image display area 75 based on the special figure data stored in the area corresponding area (not shown), and further, the first special figure holding of the special figure holding storage area corresponding area is held. The first special figure reserved image is displayed in the first special figure reserved image display area 76 based on the special figure data stored in the storage area corresponding area (not shown). For example, the special figure game ends in a state where the first special figure hold number N for the first special figure shown in FIG. 52 (A1) is three and the second special figure hold number M for the second special figure is zero. When a new first special figure game is started by doing so, as shown in FIG. 52 (B1), the special figure game image is displayed in the special figure variation image display area 75, and the first special figure is displayed. The first special figure reserved image is displayed in the first special figure first to second reserved image display areas 761 to 762 of the reserved image display area 76. That is, as shown in FIGS. 52 (A1) and 52 (B1), by starting a new first special figure game, the first special figure reserved image display area is before the start of the first special figure game. The first special figure reserved image displayed in the first special figure first reserved image display area 761 of 76 is shifted to the special figure variable image display area 75 as the special figure game image, and the first special figure game Each of the first special figure reserved images displayed in the first special figure second to third reserved image display areas 762 to 763 of the first special figure reserved image display area 76 before the start is displayed as the first special figure reserved image. The area 76 is shifted to the first and second reserved image display areas 761 to 762 of the first special drawing.

On the other hand, in the special figure data image display processing, when the received special figure shift command is for the second special figure, that is, when the second special figure game is started, the special figure execution of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area The special figure game image is displayed in the special figure variation image display area 75 based on the special figure data stored in the area corresponding area (not shown), and further, the special figure holding storage area corresponding area is held for the second special figure. The second special figure reserved image is displayed in the second special figure reserved image display area 77 based on the special figure data stored in the storage area corresponding area (not shown). For example, the special figure game ends in a state where the first special figure hold number N for the second special figure shown in FIG. 52 (A2) is one and the second special figure hold number M for the second special figure is two. When a new second special figure game is started by doing so, as shown in FIG. 52 (B2), the special figure game image is displayed in the special figure variation image display area 75, and the second special figure is displayed. The second special figure reserved image is displayed in the second special figure first reserved image display area 771 of the reserved image display area 77. That is, as shown in FIGS. 52 (A2) and 52 (B2), by starting a new second special figure game, the second special figure reserved image display area is before the start of the second special figure game. The second special figure reserved image displayed in the second special figure first reserved image display area 771 of 77 is shifted to the special figure variable image display area 75 as the special figure game image, and the second special figure game The second special figure reserved image displayed in the second special figure second reserved image display area 772 of the second special figure reserved image display area 77 before the start is the second special figure of the second special figure reserved image display area 77. It is shifted to the first reserved image display area 771.

The special figure data image in the special figure data image display units 75, 76, 77 may be continuously displayed from the start of the special figure game to the end of the special figure game, but the special figure game is being executed. It may be hidden for a part of the period. For example, when a super reach effect or a special reach effect is executed in the special figure game, the special figure data image is not displayed so as not to obstruct the visibility of these effects while the super reach effect or the special reach effect is being executed. It may be displayed. In this case, the special figure data image may be redisplayed before or after the end of the super reach effect or the special reach effect, or the non-display state may be continued as it is. When the special figure data image is hidden, the first special figure hold number N for the first special figure game and the second special figure for the second special figure game are hidden while the special figure data image is hidden. It is also conceivable to display an image such as a number that clearly indicates the number of holds M.

The special figure data image in the special figure data image display units 75, 76, 77 is expected to be a big hit as a result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game or the reserved special figure game depending on the display mode (big hit expectation). Degree) may be explicitly stated or suggested. For example, as a special figure data image, a plurality of display modes (color, shape, pattern, effect, a form such as a combination of two or more of these) corresponding to the jackpot expectation are set, and a plurality of display modes are set based on the result of the jackpot lottery. A predetermined display mode for the special figure data image may be set from the display mode. Then, when the jackpot expectation degree is clearly or suggested based on the display mode of the special figure data image, the display mode of the special figure data image is changed (so-called pending change) until the special figure game for the special figure data image is completed. ) May be made. In this case, the change in the display mode of the special figure data image is executed so that the jackpot expectation is equal to or higher (promoted), and the change in which the jackpot expectation is lower (demoted) is not executed. Of course, when a change (demotion change) in the display mode of the special figure data image that lowers the jackpot expectation is executed, it is conceivable to conversely raise the jackpot expectation. Further, the timing for changing the display mode of the special figure data image is not particularly limited, and at the start of the special figure game (timing at which the special figure data image shifts), after a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the special figure game ( For example, from the start of the special figure game to the start of the reach production, during the execution of the reach production, before and after the development to the reach production with a higher expectation of a big hit).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 52, the special figure data image display units 75, 76, 77 include the special figure variable image display area 75, the first special figure reserved image display area 76, and the second special figure reserved image display area 77. Although three types are set, it is conceivable that the display contents of the special figure data image display units 75, 76, and 77 may be changed according to the game state. For example, in the normal game state, the second special figure reserved image display area 77 is not displayed, but the special figure variable image display area 75 and the first special figure reserved image display area 76 are displayed, and the probabilistic game state and the time-saving game are displayed. In the state, it is conceivable that the first special figure reserved image display area 76 is not displayed, and the special figure variable image display area 75 and the second special figure reserved image display area 77 are displayed.

<Step S3110>
Returning to the description of FIG. 47, when the received command is not the special figure shift command (step S3107: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is the first special figure hold command (step S3110). The first special figure hold command is for the information indicating that the first special figure hold number N for the first special figure game is increased, the information regarding the first special figure hold number N after the increase, and the increasing first hold. Includes information on the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time) and the result of the jackpot lottery.

When the received command is the first special figure hold command (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3111, and when the received command is not the first special figure hold command (step S3110: No). The process proceeds to step S3113.

<Steps S3111 and S3112>
When the received command is the first special figure hold command (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the first special figure hold information update process (step S3111) and the first special figure hold image display process (step S3112). Then, the command determination process is terminated.

Here, the first special figure hold information update process executed in step S3111 is the data of the special figure hold information (not shown) in the first special figure hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the above-mentioned special figure hold storage area corresponding area. It is a process to add (update) special figure data). Specifically, in the first special figure hold information update process, the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 of the first special figure hold storage area REA of the special figure hold storage area 412b in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 ( The special figure data corresponding to the special figure hit / miss information stored in the first empty hold area in (see FIG. 8) corresponds to the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 in which the special figure hit / fail information is stored. It is stored in the area corresponding to the first to fourth reserved areas (not shown) set in the first special drawing. For example, when the special figure hold / fail information is stored in the second hold area REA2 (see FIG. 8) of the first special figure hold storage area REA in the special figure hold storage area 412b, it corresponds to the second hold area REA2. The special figure data is stored in the area corresponding to the second reserved area of the first special figure (not shown).

On the other hand, the first special figure reservation image display process executed in step S3112 is based on the special figure data added (updated) to the first special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) in step S3112. The process of adding the first special figure reserved image to the special figure reserved image display area 76 is executed.

Here, FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure data image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 before and after receiving the first special figure hold command or the second special figure hold command. Specifically, FIG. 53 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure data image before receiving the first special figure hold command or the second special figure hold command, and FIG. 53 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the special figure data image. This is an example of the special figure data image after receiving the first special figure hold command for the first special figure game in the display state of the special figure data image shown in A).

FIG. 53A shows a state in which the special figure fluctuation image is displayed, one first special figure reserved image and two second special figure reserved images are displayed. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 53 (A), the special figure game is being executed, the number N of the first special figure hold for the first special figure game is one, and the second special figure hold for the second special figure game. It shows that the number M is two.

Then, in the first special figure hold image display process executed when the first special figure hold command is received in the display state of the special figure data shown in FIG. 53 (A), that is, the hold for the first special figure game increases. When the number is two, it is based on the special figure data stored in the first special figure second holding area corresponding area (not shown) of the first special figure holding storage area corresponding area in the special figure holding storage area corresponding area. As shown in FIG. 53 (B), the first special figure reserved image is displayed in the first special figure second reserved image display area 762 of the first special figure reserved image display area 76.

<Step S3113>
If the received command is not the first special figure hold command (step S3110: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is the second special figure hold command (step S3113). The second special figure hold command is for the information indicating that the second special figure hold number M for the second special figure game is increased, the information regarding the second special figure hold number M after the increase, and the increasing second hold. Includes information on the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time) and the result of the jackpot lottery.

When the received command is the second special figure hold command (step S3113: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3114, and when the received command is not the second special figure hold command (step S3113: No). The process proceeds to step S3116.

<Steps S3114 and S3115>
When the received command is the second special figure hold command (step S3113: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second special figure hold information update process (step S3114) and the second special figure hold image display process (step S3115). Then, the command determination process is terminated.

Here, the second special figure hold information update process executed in step S3114 is performed in the second special figure hold storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the above-mentioned special figure hold storage area corresponding area (not shown). It is a process to add (update) special figure data). Specifically, in the second special figure hold information update process, the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the second special figure hold storage area REB of the special figure hold storage area 412b in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 ( Of (see FIG. 8), the special figure data corresponding to the special figure hit / miss information stored in the first empty hold area corresponds to the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 in which the special figure hit / miss information is stored. It is stored in the area corresponding to the first to fourth reserved areas (not shown) of the second special figure set in the above. For example, when the special figure hold / fail information is stored in the third hold area REB3 (see FIG. 8) of the second special figure hold storage area REB in the special figure hold storage area 412b, it corresponds to the third hold area REB3. The special figure data is stored in the area corresponding to the third reserved area of the first special figure (not shown).

On the other hand, the second special figure reservation image display process executed in step S3115 is based on the special figure data added (updated) to the second special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) in step S3114. The process of adding the second special figure reserved image to the special figure reserved image display area 77 is executed.

Here, FIG. 53 (C) is an example of the special figure data image after receiving the second special figure hold command for the second special figure game in the display state of the special figure data image shown in FIG. 53 (A).

In the second special figure hold image display process executed when the second special figure hold command is received in the display state of the special figure data shown in FIG. 53 (A), that is, the hold for the second special figure game increases. When the number is 3, the figure is based on the special figure data stored in the 2nd special figure 3rd reserved area corresponding area (not shown) of the 2nd special figure holding storage area corresponding area in the special figure holding storage area corresponding area. As shown in 53 (C), the second special figure reserved image is displayed in the second special figure third reserved image display area 773 of the second special figure reserved image display area 77.

<Step S3116>
When the received command is not the second special figure hold command (step S3113: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S3116). The jackpot game start command is a command indicating to start the jackpot game, and is set when the jackpot game is started in step S2204 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. ..

When the received command is the jackpot game start command (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3117, and when the received command is not the jackpot game start command (step S3116: No), the process is performed in step S3119. Move to.

<Steps S3117 and S3118>
When the jackpot game start command is received (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the jackpot game effect setting process (step S3117), sets the jackpot game in progress flag to on (step S3118), and performs the command determination process. To finish.

In the jackpot game effect setting process, a process of setting a jackpot effect including an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode effect (round game effect and interval effect), and an ending effect executed in the jackpot game is executed.

Further, the jackpot game in progress flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, and whether or not the jackpot game is being executed in step S3201 in the jackpot game effect control process of FIG. 54, which will be described later. It is referred to to determine whether or not to control the progress of the jackpot game effect.

<Step S3119>
If the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an opening start command (step S3119). The opening start command is a command indicating to start the opening of the jackpot game, and is set when the opening is started in step S2208 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. ..

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3120 when the received command is the opening start command (step S3119: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3121 when the received command is not the opening start command (step S3119: No). do.

<Step S3120>
When the opening start command is received (step S3119: Yes), the MPU 52 sets the opening effect start flag to on (step S3120), and ends the command determination process. The opening effect start flag is a flag for starting the opening effect of the jackpot game, and is referred to for determining whether or not to start the opening effect in step S3202 in the jackpot game effect control process of FIG. 54, which will be described later. ..

<Step S3121>
If the received command is not an opening start command (step S3119: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an opening end command (step S3121). The opening end command is a command indicating to end the opening of the jackpot game, and is set when the opening is terminated in step S2214 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 30 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. ..

When the received command is the opening end command (step S3121: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3122, and when the received command is not the opening end command (step S3121: No), the process is the step of FIG. 48. Move to S3123.

<Step S3122>
When the opening end command is received (step S3121: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the opening effect end flag to on (step S3122), and ends the command determination process. The opening effect end flag is a flag for ending the opening effect of the jackpot game, and is referred to for determining whether or not to end the opening effect in step S3205 in the jackpot game effect control process of FIG. 54, which will be described later. ..

<Step S3123>
If the received command is not an opening end command (step S3121: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command (step S3123), as shown in FIG. 48. The round game start command is a command indicating the start of the round game in the open / close execution mode and the number of rounds of the round game executed this time, and is a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game executed this time. It is set when starting a round game in the open / close execution mode in step S2217 in the control process.

When the received command is a round game start command (step S3123: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3124, and when the received command is not a round game start command (step S3123: No), the process is performed in step S3126. Move to.

<Steps S3124 and S3125>
When the round game start command is received (step S3123: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game production start flag to on (step S3124), and RAM 512 contains information on the number of rounds indicating which round the round game is. (Step S3125), and the command determination process is terminated. The round game effect start flag is referred to in order to determine whether or not to start each round game effect of the open / close execution mode effect in step S3208 of the jackpot game effect control process of FIG. 54, which will be described later.

<Step S3126>
If the received command is not a round game start command (step S3123: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game end command (step S3126). The round game end command is a command indicating to end the round game in the open / close execution mode, and is a case where the round game is ended in step S2229 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 31 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Is set to.

When the received command is a round game end command (step S3126: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3127, and when the received command is not a round game end command (step S3126: No), the process is performed in step S3128. Move to.

<Step S3127>
When the round game end command is received (step S3126: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to on (step S3127), and ends the command determination process. The round game end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the round game effect in step S3211 in the jackpot game effect control process of FIG. 54, which will be described later.

<Step S3128>
If the received command is not a round game end command (step S3126: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an interval start command (step S3128). The interval start command is a command indicating to start the interval between the round games in the open / close execution mode, and starts the interval in step S2233 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 31 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Set in case.

Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3129 when the received command is an interval start command (step S3128: Yes), and steps the process when the received command is not an interval start command (step S3128: No). Move to S3130.

<Step S3129>
When the received command is an interval start command (step S3128: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval effect start flag to on (step S3129), and ends the command determination process. The interval effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the interval effect in step S3214 in the jackpot game effect control process of FIG. 54, which will be described later.

<Step S3130>
If the received command is not an interval start command (step S3128: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an interval end command (step S3130). The interval end command is a command indicating to end the interval between round games in the open / close execution mode, and ends the interval in step S2239 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 32 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Set in case.

Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3131 when the received command is an interval end command (step S3130: Yes), and steps the process when the received command is not an interval end command (step S3130: No). Move to S3132.

<Step S3131>
When the received command is an interval end command (step S3130: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval effect end flag to on (step S3131), and ends the command determination process. The interval effect end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the interval effect in step S3217 in the jackpot game effect control process of FIG. 54, which will be described later.

<Step S3132>
If the received command is not an interval end command (step S3130: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command (step S3132). The ending start command is a command indicating to start the ending in the jackpot game, and is set when the ending is started in step S2242 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 31 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. ..

Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3133 when the received command is the ending start command (step S3132: Yes), and steps the process when the received command is not the ending start command (step S3132: No). Move to S3134.

<Step S3133>
When the received command is an ending start command (step S3132: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending effect start flag to on (step S3133), and ends the command determination process. The ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the ending effect in step S3220 of the jackpot game effect control process of FIG. 54, which will be described later.

<Step S3134>
When the received command is not the ending start command (step S3132: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is the ending end command (step S3134). The ending end command is a command indicating that the ending of the jackpot game is terminated, and is set when the ending is terminated in step S2248 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 32 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. ..

Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3135 when the received command is the ending end command (step S3134: Yes), and steps the process when the received command is not the ending end command (step S3134: No). Move to S3136.

<Step S3135>
When the received command is an ending end command (step S3134: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending effect end flag to on (step S3135), and ends the command determination process. The ending effect end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the ending effect in step S3223 of the jackpot game effect control process of FIG. 54, which will be described later.

<Step S3136>
If the received command is not an ending end command (step S3134: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S3136). The jackpot game end command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is terminated, and is set when the jackpot game is terminated in step S2250 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. ..

Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3137 when the received command is the jackpot game end command (step S3136: Yes), and processes when the received command is not the jackpot game end command (step S3136: No). To step S3139.

<Step S3137>
When the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S3136: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game in progress flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed to off (step S3137), and performs the command determination process. finish.

<Step S3138>
If the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S3136: No), the MPU 51 executes a process based on another command received from the main control device 4 (step S3138), and ends the command determination process.

[Big hit game production control process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect control process executed in step S2705 of the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42 will be described. In the jackpot game effect control process, a process of controlling the jackpot game effect according to the progress of the jackpot game is executed based on the jackpot game effect set in the jackpot game effect setting process of step S3117 in the command determination process of FIG. 47. Will be done. Here, FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect control process. Hereinafter, the jackpot game effect control process will be described with reference to FIG. 54.

<Step S3201>
As shown in FIG. 54, in the jackpot game effect control process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the jackpot gaming flag is set to ON (step S3201). The jackpot game in progress flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, and is set to ON when the jackpot game start command is received in step S3118 in the command determination process of FIG. 47. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game is being executed.

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3202 when the jackpot game in progress flag is set to on (step S3201: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed. On the other hand, when the jackpot game in-progress flag is set to off (step S3201: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 51 ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S3202>
When the jackpot game in progress flag is set to on (step S3201: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the opening effect start flag is set to on (step). S3202). The opening effect start flag is a flag for starting the opening effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the opening start command is received in step S3120 in the command determination process of FIG. 47. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to start the opening effect.

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3203 when the opening effect start flag is set to on (step S3202: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start the opening effect. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3205 when the opening effect start flag is set to off (step S3202: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the opening effect.

<Steps S3203 and S3204>
When the opening effect start flag is set to on (step S3202: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start the opening effect, the MPU 51 performs the jackpot game effect setting process in step S3117 in the command determination process of FIG. 47. The process of starting the set opening effect is executed (step S3203). Then, the MPU 51 sets the opening effect start flag to off (step S3204), and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S3205>
When the opening effect start flag is set to off (step S3202: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the opening effect, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the opening effect end flag is set to on (step). S3205). The opening effect end flag is a flag for ending the opening effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the opening end command is received in step S3122 in the command determination process of FIG. 47. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the opening effect.

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3206 when the opening effect end flag is set to on (step S3205: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the opening effect. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3208 when the opening effect end flag is set to off (step S3205: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the opening effect.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
When the opening effect end flag is set to on (step S3205: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the opening effect, the MPU 51 executes a process of ending the opening effect (step S3206). Then, the MPU 51 sets the opening effect end flag to off (step S3207), and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S3208>
When the opening effect end flag is set to off (step S3205: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the opening effect, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game effect start flag is set to on (step S3205: No). Step S3208). The round game effect start flag is a flag for starting the round game effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the round game start command is received in step S3124 in the command determination process of FIG. 48. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to start the round game production.

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3209 when the round game effect start flag is set to on (step S3208: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start the round game effect. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3211 when the round game effect start flag is set to off (step S3208: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the round game effect.

<Steps S3209 and S3210>
When the round game effect start flag is set to on (step S3208: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start the round game effect, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect in step S3117 in the command determination process of FIG. 47. The process of starting the round game effect of the jackpot game effect set in the process is executed (step S3209). Then, the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to off (step S3210), and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S3211>
When the round game effect start flag is set to off (step S3208: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the round game effect, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game effect end flag is set to on. (Step S3211). The round game effect end flag is a flag for ending the round game effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the round game end command is received in step S3127 in the command determination process of FIG. 48. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the round game effect.

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3212 when the round game effect end flag is set to on (step S3211: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the round game effect. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3214 when the round game effect end flag is set to off (step S3211: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the round game effect.

<Steps S3212 and S3213>
When the round game effect end flag is set to on (step S3211: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the round game effect, the MPU 51 executes a process of ending the round game effect (step S3212). Then, the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to off (step S3213), and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S3214>
When the round game effect end flag is set to off (step S3211: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the round game effect, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the interval effect start flag is set to on. (Step S3214). The interval effect start flag is a flag for starting the interval effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the interval start command is received in step S3129 in the command determination process of FIG. 48. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to start the round game production.

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3215 when the interval effect start flag is set to on (step S3214: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start the interval effect. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3217 when the interval effect start flag is set to off (step S3214: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the interval effect.

<Steps S3215 and S3216>
When the interval effect start flag is set to on (step S3214: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start the interval effect, the MPU 51 performs the jackpot game effect setting process in step S3117 in the command determination process of FIG. 47. The process of starting the interval effect of the set jackpot game effect is executed (step S3215). Then, the MPU 51 sets the interval effect start flag to off (step S3216), and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S3217>
When the interval effect start flag is set to off (step S3214: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the interval effect, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the interval effect end flag is set to on (step). S3217). The interval effect end flag is a flag for ending the interval effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the interval end command is received in step S3131 in the command determination process of FIG. 48. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the interval effect.

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3218 when the interval effect end flag is set to on (step S3217: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the interval effect. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3220 when the interval effect end flag is set to off (step S3217: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the interval effect.

<Steps S3218 and S3219>
When the interval effect end flag is set to on (step S3217: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the interval effect, the MPU 51 executes a process of ending the interval effect (step S3218). Then, the MPU 51 sets the interval effect end flag to off (step S3219), and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S3220>
When the interval effect end flag is set to off (step S3217: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the interval effect, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending effect start flag is set to on (step). S3220). The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the ending effect start command is received in step S3133 in the command determination process of FIG. 48. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to start the ending effect.

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3221 when the ending effect start flag is set to on (step S3220: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start the ending effect. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3223 when the ending effect start flag is set to off (step S3220: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the ending effect.

<Steps S3221 and S3222>
When the ending effect start flag is set to on (step S3220: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start the ending effect, the MPU 51 performs the jackpot game effect setting process in step S3117 in the command determination process of FIG. 47. The process of starting the ending effect of the set jackpot game effect is executed (step S3221). Then, the MPU 51 sets the ending effect start flag to off (step S3222), and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S3223>
When the ending effect start flag is set to off (step S3220: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the ending effect, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending effect end flag is set to on (step). S3223). The ending effect end flag is a flag for ending the ending effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the ending effect end command is received in step S3135 in the command determination process of FIG. 48. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the ending effect.

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3224 when the ending effect end flag is set to on (step S3223: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the ending effect. On the other hand, the MPU 51 ends the jackpot game effect control process when the ending effect end flag is set to off (step S3223: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the ending effect.

<Steps S3224 and S3225>
When the ending effect end flag is set to on (step S3223: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the ending effect, the MPU 51 executes a process of ending the ending effect (step S3224). Then, the MPU 51 sets the ending effect end flag to off (step S3225), and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

[Other embodiments]
Hereinafter, other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. Further, in the following other embodiments, the description of the same configuration as that of the gaming machine 10 described in the above-mentioned first embodiment and the same steps as the processing procedure will be omitted. It is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine the configurations and processing functions of the first embodiment described above and the other embodiments described below.

[Second Embodiment]
As described above, as a gaming machine, there is one that reserves the right to execute a game according to the first special figure (first special figure game) triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined hold (for example, a hold in which the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot or a hold with a long variable display time) occurs, the jackpot lottery result for the predetermined hold is a jackpot. A predetermined number of first special figure games for a predetermined number of holds at the time when the predetermined hold occurs, such as the same, the same type, or the same system (holding continuous effect) that clearly or suggests the degree of expectation (big hit expectation). There is something that runs continuously.

Further, as described above, the gaming machine is provided with a second winning opening in which a gaming ball can be entered by opening an electric accessory such as an electric tulip, and the gaming ball enters the second winning opening. In some cases, the game based on the second special figure (second special figure game) triggered by the above is prioritized over the first special figure game for the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening. Here, the reason why the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game is that the second special figure game has a greater benefit to the player than the first special figure game (for example, the probability of probability change is higher). (High, large number of average round games) may be given, while the first special figure game may have disadvantages (for example, falling to the normal game state) that the second special figure game does not have. be.

In such a gaming machine, a privilege (for example, execution of a probabilistic jackpot game after the end of the second special figure game) is given when the jackpot symbol stops or a reach occurs in the second special figure game. There are some that express or suggest an effect (second special figure special effect).

However, in a gaming machine in which the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game and the second special figure special effect is executed in the second special figure game, as shown in FIG. 55 (A). As shown in FIG. 55 (B), when the hold continuous effect is scheduled to be continuously executed in a plurality of first special figure games (special 1 said variation + special 1 hold 1 + special 1 hold 2). In addition, when a game ball enters the second winning opening during the execution of the special 1 change, the hold continuous effect is executed as shown in FIG. 55 (C) (special 1 the change). ) Is executed, the second special figure game is executed, and the second special figure special effect is executed in the second special figure game, so that the hold continuous effect is interrupted in the middle.

Then, as shown in FIG. 55 (D), when the first special figure game is executed after the end of the second special figure game, it is assumed that the scheduled continuous effect of holding the first special figure game is not performed. (Pattern 1) When the player remembers that the hold continuous effect was executed before the execution of the second special figure special effect, he / she feels uncomfortable that the hold continuous effect is not executed, and the game There is concern that the interest will decline. In particular, when the number of executions of the second special figure game (second special figure special effect) is small, the player remembers that the hold continuous effect was executed before the execution of the second special figure special effect. Since there is a high possibility that the hold continuous effect is not executed after the end of the second special figure game (second special figure special effect), there is a high possibility that the player feels uncomfortable.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (E), when the first special figure game is executed after the end of the second special figure game and the hold continuous effect is resumed (pattern 2), the second special figure special effect is performed. If the player forgets that the hold continuous effect was executed before the execution, the player may feel uncomfortable with the hold continuous effect being executed, and there is a concern that the interest of the game may be reduced. In particular, when the second special figure game (second special figure special effect) is executed many times, it takes a long time to restart the hold continuous effect, so that the hold is held before the execution of the second special figure special effect. There is a high possibility that the player has forgotten that the continuous production has been executed, and the game is against the fact that the pending continuous production is resumed after the end of the second special figure game (second special figure special production). There is a high possibility that a person will feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as an opening mode of the second winning opening by the electric accessory, the first opening (a short opening in which it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second winning opening), which is the first time. ) And the second opening, which is the second time in which the opening time of the second winning opening by the electric accessory is longer than the first hour (long opening in which the game ball can easily enter the second winning opening). ing.

Then, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game as the variation, the hold continuous effect is continuously performed on the next held first special figure game. (For example, special 1 relevant fluctuation + special 1 hold 1 + special 1 hold 2 (see Fig. 55 (A))) When the game ball enters, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), in the second special figure game executed after the end of the first special figure game as the variation, the hold executed in the first special figure game. Continuous production is continuously executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game as the variation, the hold continuous effect is continuously executed in the next reserved first special figure game. If this is planned, even if a game ball enters the second winning opening due to the short opening of the second winning opening, the second winning opening when the second winning opening is short-opened. In the second special figure game by entering the game ball into, the second special figure special effect is not executed, and the hold continuous effect is continuously executed. Therefore, when the player is executing the hold continuous effect in the first special figure game as the variation, the hold continuous effect is continuously executed in the next reserved first special figure game. When is scheduled, the hold continuous production will not be executed after the end of the second special figure game, which is executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening at the time of short opening of the second winning opening. On the other hand, I don't feel any discomfort. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the hold continuous effect is not executed in the first special figure game executed after the end of the second special figure game.

In particular, when the second winning opening is short-opened, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning opening (the number of winning balls is small) compared to when the second winning opening is long-opened, and before the second special figure game is executed. Since it is highly possible that the player remembers that the hold continuous production was executed, the second special feature due to the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening when the second winning opening is short-opened. In the figure game, the effect of continuously executing the hold continuous effect without executing the second special figure special effect is high.

In addition, in the short opening where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning opening, it is assumed that the number of game balls entering the second winning opening is small, so that the second winning opening is short opening. Even if the hold continuous effect is continuously executed in the second special figure game by entering the game ball into the second winning opening, the number of consecutive executions of the hold continuous effect does not increase significantly, so that the second special It is unlikely that you will feel uncomfortable with the continuous execution of the pending continuous production in the figure game. On the contrary, by continuously executing the hold continuous effect in the second special figure game, the hold continuous effect can be effectively utilized in the second special figure game.

In this embodiment, when the second winning opening is short-opened, the second special drawing special effect is not executed in the second special figure game by entering the game ball into the second winning opening, and the continuous production is held. Is continuously executed, the hold continuous effect is restarted in the first special figure game executed after the end of the second special figure game, but the hold continuous effect does not have to be restarted in the first special figure game. ..

By the way, the hold continuous effect may be executed as an effect to clearly indicate that the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit. For example, when a predetermined pending continuous effect is continuously executed for a predetermined number of special figure games (for example, four times), it is clearly shown that the jackpot lottery result for the predetermined number of special figure games is a jackpot. There is. On the other hand, in the second special figure game by entering the game ball into the second winning opening when the second winning opening is short-opened, the second special figure special effect is not executed and the hold continuous effect is continuously executed. If so, there is a possibility that the hold continuous effect will be executed in the special figure game more than a predetermined number of times. Therefore, in the second special figure game by entering the game ball into the second winning opening when the second winning opening is short-opened, the second special figure special effect is not executed and the hold continuous effect is continuously executed. In this case, if the hold continuous effect corresponds to a predetermined hold continuous effect, the predetermined hold continuous effect is executed more than a predetermined number of times. That is, when the predetermined hold continuous effect is scheduled to be continuously executed in the plurality of first special figure games, and the predetermined hold continuous effect is continuously executed in the second special figure game, There is a possibility that a contradiction may occur between the result of the jackpot lottery (being a jackpot) specified by the predetermined pending continuous production and the result of the actual jackpot lottery.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, there is a contradiction between the result of the jackpot lottery (being a jackpot) specified by the predetermined pending continuous production and the result of the actual jackpot lottery. , A process is executed in which the number of consecutive special figure games in which the predetermined pending continuous effect is executed does not reach the predetermined number of times. For example, in the special figure game before the continuous number of times of the special figure game in which the predetermined hold continuous effect is executed reaches the predetermined number of times, or in the special figure game in which the predetermined number of times is reached, the predetermined hold continuous effect is not executed. It is executed by changing to a hold continuous effect other than the predetermined hold continuous effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when there is a contradiction between the result of the jackpot lottery (being a jackpot) specified by the predetermined pending continuous production and the result of the actual jackpot lottery. By changing the type of the hold continuous effect so that the number of consecutive times of the special figure game in which the predetermined hold continuous effect is executed is not reached, the jackpot lottery specified by the predetermined hold continuous effect is executed. It is possible to prevent a contradiction between the result (being a big hit) and the actual result of the big hit lottery.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the hold continuous effect is scheduled to be continuously executed in a plurality of first special figure games (for example, special 1 said variation + special 1 hold 1 + special 1 hold 2 (Fig.) 55 (A))), when the game ball enters the second winning opening due to the long opening of the second winning opening, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), the first special figure game (special 1 relevant variation). In the second special figure game executed after the end, the second special figure special effect is performed, but when the second special figure special effect is executed, the hold continuous effect is executed before the execution of the second special figure special effect. Is explicitly or suggested. For example, in the image display means in which the second special figure special effect is displayed as an image, the type of the hold continuous effect that was executed before the execution of the second special figure special effect is displayed as a captured image or the like. Of course, when the second special figure special effect is executed, the indication or suggestion that the hold continuous effect was executed before the execution of the second special figure special effect is to display the captured image of the hold continuous effect on the image display means. The method is not limited to the above, and other methods may be used as described later.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is clearly or suggested that the hold continuous effect was executed before the execution of the second special figure special effect at the time of executing the second special figure special effect. It is prevented from the player forgetting that the hold continuous effect was executed before the execution of the special figure special effect, and the player can restart the hold continuous effect after the end of the second special figure special effect. Can be grasped. Therefore, even if the hold continuous effect is resumed after the end of the second special figure special effect, it feels strange that the hold continuous effect is executed after the end of the second special figure special effect. Is significantly reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the restart of the hold continuous effect that was executed before the execution of the second special figure special effect after the end of the second special figure special effect.

In particular, when the second winning opening is long-opened in the long-opening normal-figure game, the player has the second winning opening as compared with the case where the second winning opening is short-opened in the short-opening general-figure game. I am crazy about whether or not a game ball is inserted for a long time. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the player forgets that the hold continuous effect was executed before the execution of the second special figure game. In addition, when the second winning opening is long-opened in the game per long-opening normal drawing, the game ball is opened in the second winning opening as compared with the case where the second winning opening is short-opened in the game per short-opening normal drawing. The second special figure special effect is executed because it is easy to enter the ball (the number of balls entered is large). The number of times the second special figure game is executed is large (the execution time of the second special figure special effect is long). Therefore, the time from the end of the hold continuous effect before the execution of the second special figure special effect (the start of the second special figure special effect) to the restart of the hold continuous effect due to the end of the second special figure special effect. In addition to being longer, the player's judgment as to whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special figure game in which the second special figure special effect is executed is a jackpot compared to the case where the first special figure game is executed. High degree of attention. In this way, when the second winning opening 315 is long-opened in the game per long-opening normal map, the second special feature is compared with the case where the second winning opening 315 is short-opened in the game per short-opening normal map. Since it is more likely that the player forgets that the hold continuous effect was executed before the execution of the figure game, it is more likely that the player forgets that the hold continuous effect was executed. The effect of clearly or suggesting that the hold continuous effect was executed in the first special figure game is high.

Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 81, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the above-mentioned first embodiment.

[Distribution table]
The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above was configured as a so-called loop probabilistic machine, but the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as an ST machine. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a different distribution table used in the main control device 4 for distributing the jackpot types when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Here, FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of a distribution table used in the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

In the example shown in FIG. 57, when the type of the special figure game is the first special figure game triggered by the winning of the first winning opening 314, the number of random numbers for the 5R probability variation jackpot is 10 from 0 to 9. Yes, the number of random numbers that are 16R probability variation jackpots is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that are 5R normal jackpots is 5 from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of the special figure game is the second special figure game triggered by winning the second winning opening 315, the number of random numbers that become the 5R probability variation jackpot is 10 from 0 to 9, and the 16R probability variation jackpot. The number of random numbers to be is 10 from 10 to 19, and there is no random number that is usually a big hit in 5R. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of the probabilistic jackpot in the first special figure game is 75%, while the probability of the probabilistic jackpot in the second special figure game is 100%. Therefore, in the second special figure game for the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 when the second winning opening 315 is opened for a long time due to the long opening normal drawing, when the big hit lottery result is a big hit. Is a 100% probable change jackpot. That is, when the jackpot is notified during the hold charge opening (see FIGS. 61 (B) and 61 (C)), which will be described later, the hold for the second special figure game for the long open normal figure hit is released, the probability change jackpot. Will be.

Then, in both the first special figure game and the second special figure game, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a probabilistic jackpot, the probabilistic game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) is set after the jackpot game is completed. Transition. In the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, an upper limit value (100 times in the present embodiment) is set for the number of special figure games (ST number of times) that can be executed in the probabilistic game state. If the result of the big hit lottery does not become a big hit within the number of special figure games of the upper limit value, the game shifts to the normal game state after the special figure game of the upper limit value is executed. The number of special figure games in the probabilistic game state is not limited to 100, and may be another number.

If the result of the big hit lottery is a normal big hit, the game shifts to a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the big hit game is completed. In this embodiment, an upper limit value (100 times in this embodiment) is set for the number of special figure games that can be executed in the time saving game state (time saving number of times), and a big hit lottery is made within the number of special figure games of this upper limit value. If the result of is not a big hit, the game shifts to the normal game state after the special figure game of the upper limit value is executed. The number of special figure games in the time-saving game state is not limited to 100, and may be another number.

It should be noted that the transition from the probabilistic gaming state to the normal gaming state is not limited to the case where the special figure game of the upper limit value is executed, and may be executed, for example, when the state transition lottery (falling lottery) is won. ..

[Processing of audio lamp control device 5]
In the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 5 executes the sub-timer interrupt process or the like as in the first embodiment described above, but the command determination process of the present embodiment is the first embodiment described above. The procedure is partially different from. Hereinafter, the command determination process of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60, focusing on the differences from the command determination process of the first embodiment described above.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process of the present embodiment, a process of controlling an effect to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 or the like is executed according to the type of the received command.

Here, FIGS. 58 to 60 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process of the present embodiment.

<Step S3301>
As shown in FIG. 58, in the command determination process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a command has been received (step S3301). When the MPU 51 receives a command (step S3301: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3302, and when the command is not received (step S3301: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process.

<Step S3302>
When a command is received (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a normal map variation pattern command (step S3302). When the MPU 51 receives the normal map variation pattern command (step S3302: Yes), the process shifts to step S3303, and when the received command is not the normal map variation pattern command (step S3302: No), the process moves to step S3307. Transition.

In addition, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern command provides information on the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 361, the lottery result in the lottery per normal symbol, and the type of support mode (high frequency support mode, low frequency support mode). include.

<Step S3303>
When the normal map fluctuation pattern command is received (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 51 is based on the information regarding the type of support mode (whether high frequency support mode or low frequency support mode) included in the received normal map fluctuation pattern command. Then, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set (step S3303).

When the MPU 51 is in the high frequency support mode (step S3303: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. When the MPU 51 is in the high-frequency support mode (step S3303: Yes), even if the high-frequency support mode flag indicating that the MPU 51 is in the high-frequency support mode is set to ON and then the command determination process is terminated. good.

On the other hand, when the MPU 41 is not in the high frequency support mode (step S3303: No), that is, in the low frequency support mode, the process shifts to step S3304. When the MPU 51 is in the low frequency support mode (step S3303: No), when the high frequency support mode flag is set to on, the high frequency support mode flag is set to off, and then the command is given. The determination process may be terminated.

<Step S3304>
When not in the high frequency support mode (step S3303: No), that is, in the low frequency support mode, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game in-game flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set to on. (Step S3304). In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, the jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S2206 when the jackpot game is started, and is set to off in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

The MPU 51 ends the command determination process when the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S3304: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts to step S3305 when the jackpot game in progress flag is set to off (step S3304: No), that is, the process in which the jackpot game is not being executed is performed.

<Step S3305>
When the jackpot in-game flag is set to off (step S3304: No), the MPU 51 starts this time based on the information about the result of the lottery per map included in the received map variation pattern command. It is determined whether or not the result of the lottery for the game is a long-opening (step S3305).

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3306 when the result of the lottery for the normal map game to be started this time is a long open hit (step S3305: Yes). On the other hand, the MPU 51 is applicable when the result of the lottery for the normal figure game started this time is not a long open hit (step S3305: No), that is, when the result of the lottery per normal figure is a short open hit or a miss. Ends the command judgment process.

<Step S3306>
When the result of the lottery for the normal drawing game to be started this time is a long opening (step S3305: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the long opening flag to on (S3306) and ends the command determination process. .. That is, the long open flag is the result of the lottery for the normal game in the normal game state (low frequency support mode) that is neither the big hit game nor the high frequency support mode (probability change game state, time saving game state). It is a flag indicating that it is a long-opening hit in which a long-opening normal drawing game that allows the game ball 99 to enter the second winning opening 315 by the long-opening of the accessory 315b is executed. This long opening flag is referred to in step S3308 described later when it is determined whether or not the opening mode of the second winning opening 315 in the normal game per game is long opening.

<Step S3307>
When the received command is not a normal figure fluctuation pattern command (step S3302: No), the MPU 51 allows the received command to enter the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 by opening the electric accessory 315b. It is determined whether or not it is an electric accessory opening command indicating that (the game is started per normal figure) (step S3307).

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3308 when the received command is a normal map variation pattern command (step S3307: Yes), and performs the process when the received command is not a normal map variation pattern command (step S3307: No). The process proceeds to step S3312 of FIG. 59.

<Step S3308>
When the received command is a normal map fluctuation pattern command (step S3307: Yes), whether or not the long open flag indicating that the lottery result in the normal map lottery is a long open flag is set to ON in the MPU 51. (Step S3308).

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3309 when the long open flag is set to on (step S3308: Yes), that is, when the lottery result in the lottery per drawing is per long open. On the other hand, the MPU 51 ends the command determination process when the long opening flag is set to off (step S3308: No), that is, when the lottery result in the lottery per drawing is a short opening.

<Steps S3309 and S3310>
When the long release flag is set to on (step S3308: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the long release flag to off (step S3309), and executes a process for starting the effect during the opening of the electric accessory length. (Step S3310), the process proceeds to step S3311.

The effect of opening the electric accessory length is an effect of clearly indicating to the player that the electric accessory 315b is open for a long time on the symbol display unit 341 or the like. Here, FIG. 61A is a diagram showing a screen example of the symbol display unit 341 during the effect of opening the electric accessory length. In the example of FIG. 61 (A), the character image of "hold charge chance in progress" indicating that the second winning opening 315 is long-opened in the symbol display unit 341 during the execution of the effect of opening the electric accessory length. And, a character image of "Put a ball in the tulip below" that urges the player to launch the game ball 99 toward the second winning opening 315 is displayed. Of course, the effect during the opening of the electric accessory length is not limited to the example of FIG. 61 (A), and may be another mode. For example, the effect during the opening of the electric accessory length may be to display another image such as a character image in place of or in addition to the character image, and in place of or in addition to the effect in the symbol display unit 341. , The speaker 26 may perform a voice effect.

It should be noted that the effect start processing during the opening of the electric accessory length is executed when the long opening flag is set to ON, but as described above, the long opening flag is set to the jackpot game state, the probabilistic game state, and the time reduction. It is not set to on in the game state (high frequency support mode). That is, the effect during the opening of the electric accessory length is executed when the second winning opening 315 is opened for a long time in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and is executed in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency). When the second winning opening 315 is short-opened in the support mode), it is not executed in the jackpot game state, the probability variation game state or the time-saving game state which is the high frequency support mode. Of course, the effect during the opening of the electric accessory length is executed in the case where the second winning opening 315 is shortly opened in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), as well as in the probabilistic game state or the time saving game state. May be good.

<Step S3311>
Returning to the description of FIG. 58, in step S3311, the MPU 51 sets the electric accessory length opening flag indicating that the electric accessory length 315b is long open to on, and ends the command determination process. In addition, when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315, the electric accessory length open flag determines whether the winning ball is for the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. Therefore, it is referred to in step S3319 of FIG. 59 described later.

<Step S3312>
If the received command is not a normal map variation pattern command (step S3307: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special figure shift command, as shown in FIG. 59 (step S3312). As described above, the special figure shift command is stored in the first special figure hold when the first special figure hold number N or the second special figure hold number M decreases due to the start of the special figure game (variation display of the special figure). The lottery results in the jackpot lottery in the 1st holding area REA1 to 4th holding area REA4 of the area REA or the 1st holding area REB1 to the 4th holding area REB4 (see FIG. 8) of the 2nd special figure holding storage area REB. This is a command that indicates that the special figure pass / fail information to be shown has shifted.

When the received command is a special figure shift command (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3313, and when the received command is not a special figure shift command (step S3312: No), the process is performed in step S3317. Move to.

<Steps S3313 and S3314>
When the received command is a special figure shift command (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the special figure data setting process (step S3313) and the special figure data image display process (step S3314), and processes the process in step S3315. Transition. The special figure data setting process (step S3313) and the special figure data image display process (step S3314) of the present embodiment are the special figure data setting process (step S3314) in the command determination process of FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above. It is executed in the same manner as in step S3108) and the special figure data image display process (step S3109).

<Steps S3315 and S3316>
In step S3315, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the long open winning counter is 0. The value of the long-open winning counter is triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 while the second winning opening 315 is long-opened (during the game per long-opening normal drawing). Of the second special figure games to be played, the number of unexecuted second special figure games is shown.

The MPU 51 has a second winning opening when the value of the long opening winning counter is 0 (step S3315: Yes), that is, while the second winning opening 315 is long open (during the game per long opening normal drawing). If there is no unexecuted second special figure game among the second special figure games triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into 315, the process proceeds to step S3317. On the other hand, in the MPU 51, when the value of the long-open winning counter is not 0 (step S3315: No), that is, while the second winning opening 315 is long-opened (during the game per long-opening normal drawing), the second winning is won. If there is an unexecuted second special figure game among the second special figure games triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the mouth 315, 1 is subtracted from the value of the long open winning counter (step S3316). Ends the command judgment process.

<Steps S3317 and S3318>
When the value of the long-open winning counter is 0 (step S3315: Yes), that is, while the second winning opening 315 is long-opened (during the game per long-opening normal drawing), the second winning opening 315 is entered. If there is no unexecuted second special figure game among the second special figure games triggered by the entry of the game ball 99, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the short open winning counter is 0 (). Step S3317). The value of the short-open winning counter is triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 while the second winning opening 315 is short-opened (during the game per short-opening normal drawing). Of the second special figure games to be played, the number of unexecuted second special figure games is shown.

The MPU 51 has a second winning opening when the value of the short opening winning counter is 0 (step S3317: Yes), that is, while the second winning opening 315 is short-opened (during the game per short opening normal drawing). If there is no unexecuted second special figure game among the second special figure games triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into 315, the command determination process is terminated. On the other hand, in the MPU 51, when the value of the short-open winning counter is not 0 (step S3317: No), that is, while the second winning opening 315 is short-opened (during the execution of the game per short-opening normal figure), the second winning is won. If there is an unexecuted second special figure game among the second special figure games triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the mouth 315, 1 is subtracted from the value of the short open winning counter (step S3318). Ends the command judgment process.

<Step S3319>
If the received command is not a special figure shift command (step S3312: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is the first special figure hold command (step S3319). As described above, the first special figure hold command has information indicating that the first special figure hold number N for the first special figure increases, information regarding the hold number N after the increase, and a fluctuation pattern for the increasing hold (the first special figure hold command). Information on the variable display time and the result of the jackpot lottery) is included.

When the received command is the first special figure hold command (step S3319: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3320, and when the received command is not the first special figure hold command (step S3319: No). The process proceeds to step S3323.

<Steps S3320 to S3322>
When the received command is the first special figure hold command (step S3319: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the first special figure hold information update process (step S3320) and the first special figure hold image display process (step S3321). do. The first special figure reservation information update process (step S3320) and the first special figure hold image display process (step S3321) in the present embodiment are the command determination processes of FIG. 47 in the above-mentioned first embodiment. The first special figure reservation information update process (step S3111) and the first special figure hold image display process (step S3112) are executed in the same manner.

Further, the MPU 51 executes the hold continuous effect setting process (step S3322), and ends the command determination process.

Here, the hold continuous effect setting process is the same, the same type, or the same system that clearly or suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit with respect to the predetermined hold in the first special figure hold. The production is performed in a predetermined number of first special figure games up to the first special figure game in which the predetermined hold is the variation, or in a second special figure game for a predetermined number of holds executed prior to the predetermined hold. , It is a process of setting a hold continuous effect to be executed continuously. The details of the hold continuous effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the hold continuous effect is continuously executed for a predetermined number of the first special figure games, the effect executed in each first special figure game is executed before the predetermined hold. The case where the game is executed in one first special figure game for one hold is not exactly "continuous effect", but is included in the hold continuous effect for convenience.

<Step S3323>
If the received command is not the first special figure hold command (step S3319: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is the second special figure hold command (step S3323). As described above, the second special figure hold command includes information indicating that the second special figure hold number M for the second special figure game increases, information regarding the hold number M after the increase, and fluctuations with respect to the increase hold. Includes information about patterns (variable display times and jackpot lottery results).

When the received command is the second special figure hold command (step S3323: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3324, and when the received command is not the second special figure hold command (step S3323: No). The process proceeds to step S3330 of FIG.

<Steps S3324 and S3325>
When the received command is the second special figure hold command (step S3323: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second special figure hold information update process (step S3324) and the second special figure hold image display process (step S3325). Then, the process is transferred to S3326. The second special figure hold information update process (step S3324) and the second special figure hold image display process (step S3325) in the present embodiment are the command determination processes of FIG. 47 in the above-mentioned first embodiment. The second special figure hold information update process (step S3114) and the second special figure hold image display process (step S3115) are executed in the same manner.

<Step S3326>
In step S3326, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the electric accessory length opening flag is set to ON. The electric accessory length open flag is a flag indicating that the second winning opening 315 is long open (a game is executed per long open normal figure). Therefore, when the MPU 51 receives the second special figure hold command and the electric accessory length opening flag is set to ON, the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315. 2 It can be determined that this is triggered by the long opening of the winning opening 315 (execution of the game per long opening normal map). On the other hand, in the MPU 51, when the electric accessory length opening flag is set to off when the second special figure hold command is received, the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315. 2 It is not triggered by the long opening of the winning opening 315 (execution of the game per long opening normal map), that is, by the short opening of the second winning opening 315 (execution of the game per short opening normal map). Can be judged.

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3327 when the electric accessory length opening flag is set to on (step S3326: Yes), and when the electric accessory length opening flag is set to off (step S3326: Yes). S3326: No), the process proceeds to step S3329.

<Step S3327>
When the electric accessory length opening flag is set to ON (step S3326: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the long opening winning counter (step S3327), and shifts the process to step S3328. In this way, the value of the long-open winning counter reaches the upper limit of the number of reservations M for the second special drawing game when the second winning opening 315 is long-opened (the game per long-opening normal drawing is executed). If the game ball 99 is inserted into the second winning opening 315 in a state where the game ball 99 is not inserted, 1 is added. On the other hand, as described above, the value of the long-open winning counter is set by the second special figure game triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 when the second winning opening 315 is long-opened. When executed, it is subtracted by 1 (step S3316). That is, the value of the long-open winning counter is triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 while the second winning opening 315 is long-opened (during the game per long-opening normal drawing). Of the second special figure games to be played, the number of unexecuted second special figure games is shown.

<Step S3328>
In step S3328, the MPU 51 executes the second special figure special effect setting process for executing the second special figure special effect in the second special figure game.

Here, the second special figure special effect is executed on condition that the flag for opening the electric accessory length is set to ON. On the other hand, as described above, the electric accessory length open flag is not set to ON in the jackpot game state, the probability variation game state, and the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode), and is not set to the normal game state (low probability mode and low). It is set to ON when the result of the lottery per drawing in the frequency support mode) is a long opening. In other words, the second special figure special effect is a game per long open normal game that is executed based on the result of the lottery per normal game in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). In the second winning opening 315, the game ball 99 is executed as an opportunity.

Of course, during the short opening of the second winning opening 315 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), the production during the opening of the electric accessory length is the second winning opening 315 in the probabilistic gaming state or the short-time gaming state. It may be executed based on the game ball 99 entering the second winning opening 315 during the opening of the game.

Here, FIGS. 61B and 61C are diagrams showing screen examples in the symbol display unit 341 during execution of the second special drawing special effect. Specifically, FIG. 61B is a screen example of the symbol display unit 341 during the execution of the second special figure special effect when the hold continuous effect is not executed after the execution of the second special figure special effect. In C), when the hold continuous effect is executed before the execution of the second special figure special effect and the hold continuous effect is executed after the execution of the second special figure special effect (see FIG. 56B), the second special figure special effect is executed. This is an example of a screen in the symbol display unit 341 during production.

In the examples of FIGS. 61B and 61C, when the character image of "holding charge is being released" and the character image of "holding charge being released" are hit on the symbol display unit 341 during the execution of the second special drawing special effect. The text image of "Probability change rush!" Is displayed.

The character image of "hold charge is being released" indicates that the game ball 99 has entered the second winning opening 315 when the second winning opening 315 is long-opened in the long-opening normal game in the normal game state. It is intended to clearly indicate to the player that the variable display is being executed as an opportunity. The character image of "holding charge is being released" obstructs the variable display of the decorative symbol adjacent to the upper part of the above-mentioned special symbol variable image display area 75 and the second special symbol reserved image display area 77 in the symbol display unit 341. It is displayed in the area that does not. As a result, the special figure data image (the special figure game image and the second special figure) displayed in the special figure variable image display area 75 and the second special figure reserved image display area 77 without disturbing the variable display of the decorative symbol. To clearly indicate or suggest to the player that the second special figure game corresponding to the figure reserved image) is the second special figure game for the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 at the time of long opening. Will be possible.

The character image of "If you hit a jackpot while the hold charge is open, you will enter a certain change!" Is a jackpot when the condition is satisfied, provided that the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol (for example, doublet) in the special figure game. It is intended to clearly indicate to the player that the type is a probabilistic jackpot. The character image of "Probability change rushes when a big hit is made while the hold charge is open!" Is displayed in an area adjacent to the upper part of the symbol display unit 341 and which does not hinder the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the jackpot lottery executed with the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 as a trigger, there is no normal jackpot distribution when the lottery result is a jackpot. , It will always be a probable change jackpot (see Fig. 57). Therefore, in the present embodiment, a lottery in the big hit game is performed as a second special figure special effect executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening 315 in the long open normal game in the normal game state. When the result is a big hit, it becomes possible to clearly indicate that the big hit type is a probable variable big hit without disturbing the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 61 (B) and 61 (C), when the second special figure special effect is executed, the special figure variation image display area 75 and the second special figure hold image display are displayed on the symbol display unit 341. The special figure data image (the special figure game image and the second special figure hold image) is displayed in the area 77. The special figure game image displayed in the special figure variation image display area 75 of the special figure data image indicates that it is a variation display for the second special figure game, and is the first of the special figure data images. 2 The second special figure reserved image displayed in the special figure reserved image display area 77 indicates that the right to execute the second special figure game is reserved. The special figure data image displayed in the special figure variable image display area 75 and the second special figure reserved image display area 77 shall be displayed in a manner different from the special figure data image when the second special figure special effect is not executed. Can be considered. That is, the special figure data image when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 at the time of long opening is different from the special drawing data image when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 at the time of short opening. It is conceivable to display in an embodiment. In this case, not only the second special figure special effect is executed, but also the variation display for the game ball 99 entering the second winning opening 315 at the time of long opening, depending on the display mode of the special figure data image. And since it becomes possible to clearly indicate to the player that the game is on hold, it becomes easy to distinguish the variable display and the hold on the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 at the time of short opening. ..

Further, the second special figure special effect shown in FIG. 61 (C) is different from the second special figure special effect shown in FIG. 61 (B), and is a lower left region that does not hinder the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display unit 341. The captured image 78 is displayed in (the area adjacent to the variable display area of the decorative pattern).

The captured image 78 is an effect screen of the hold continuous effect that was executed in the symbol display unit 341 in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect, which will be described later. The effect screen is displayed as a reduced image (an image whose size is changed) while maintaining the aspect. In this captured image 78, the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect, and the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game after the execution of the second special figure special effect. It is displayed when it is displayed (see FIG. 56 (B)). That is, in the captured image 78, the hold continuous effect was executed in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect, and the hold continuous effect was executed in the first special figure game after the execution of the second special figure special effect. It is clearly or suggested that the effect is executed during the execution of the second special figure special effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the captured image 78 has executed the hold continuous effect in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect, and the second special figure after the execution of the second special figure special effect. Since it is clearly or suggested that the hold continuous effect is executed in the 1 special figure game, the player forgets that the hold continuous effect was executed in the 1st special figure game before the execution of the 2nd special figure special effect. It can be grasped that the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game after the execution of the second special figure special effect. Therefore, even if the hold continuous effect is restarted in the first special figure game after the execution of the second special figure special effect, the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game after the execution of the second special figure special effect. It is significantly reduced that the player feels uncomfortable with what is done. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the restart of the hold continuous effect that was executed before the execution of the second special figure special effect after the end of the second special figure special effect.

In particular, when the second winning opening 315 is long-opened in the long-opening normal-figure game, the player is second compared to the case where the second winning opening 315 is short-opened in the short-opening normal-figure game. I am crazy about whether or not the game ball 99 is inserted into the winning opening 315 for a long time. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the player forgets that the hold continuous effect was executed before the execution of the second special figure game. Further, when the second winning opening 315 is long-opened in the game per long-opening normal drawing, the second winning opening 315 is compared with the case where the second winning opening 315 is short-opened in the game per short-opening normal drawing. Since the game ball 99 is easy to enter (the number of balls entered is large), the second special figure special effect is executed many times (the execution time of the second special figure special effect is long). Therefore, the time from the end of the hold continuous effect before the execution of the second special figure special effect (the start of the second special figure special effect) to the restart of the hold continuous effect due to the end of the second special figure special effect. In addition to being longer, the player's judgment as to whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special figure game in which the second special figure special effect is executed is a jackpot compared to the case where the first special figure game is executed. High degree of attention. In this way, when the second winning opening 315 is long-opened in the game per long-opening normal map, the second special feature is compared with the case where the second winning opening 315 is short-opened in the game per short-opening normal map. Since it is more likely that the player forgets that the hold continuous effect was executed before the execution of the figure game, it is more likely that the player forgets that the hold continuous effect was executed. The effect of clearly or suggesting that the hold continuous effect was executed in the first special figure game is high.

Further, since the image is a reduced screen of the hold continuous effect executed in the symbol display unit 341 in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect, the image before the execution of the second special figure special effect is obtained. The type of the hold continuous effect executed in the first special figure game is specified or suggested, and the type of the hold continuous effect executed in the first special figure game after the end of the second special figure special effect is specified or suggested. To. For example, in the present embodiment, although details will be described later, four types of hold continuous effect are set: the same color pattern effect, chance eye effect, mini character effect, and zone effect (mode effect) (FIG. 64). And FIG. 65), in the captured image 78 shown in FIG. (See FIG. 65), it is clearly or suggested that the chance eye effect that is stopped and displayed has been executed. As a result, the player has executed the hold continuous effect in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect, and the hold continuous effect in the first special figure game after the execution of the second special figure special effect. Not only can you grasp that the production is executed, but you can also grasp the type of pending continuous production. Therefore, it is further reduced that the player feels uncomfortable with the resumption of the hold continuous effect in the first special figure game after the execution of the second special figure special effect, and after the end of the second special figure special effect. , It is possible to further prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the hold continuous effect that was executed before the execution of the second special figure special effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the captured image 78 is reduced and displayed in the lower left area of the symbol display unit 341, but is held continuously executed at the end of the second special figure special effect and after the end of the second special figure special effect. It is preferable to display the captured image on the entire symbol display unit 341 for a certain period of one or both at the start of the effect. For example, the captured image may be displayed as a so-called stage change effect in which the stage effect (background effect) in the previous special figure game is changed in the current special figure game. In this way, the captured image is captured on the entire symbol display unit 341 for a certain period of one or both at the end of the second special figure special effect and at the start of the hold continuous effect executed after the end of the second special figure special effect. Is displayed, the execution of the second special figure special effect in the second special figure game to the execution of the hold continuous effect in the first special figure game can be smoothly performed without discomfort.

In the present embodiment, the captured image 78 is reduced and displayed as a reduced image in the lower left region of the symbol display unit 341, but is outside the region where the decorative symbol other than the lower left region is variablely displayed. It may be displayed. In this way, by displaying the captured image 78 as a reduced image outside the area where the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, it is possible to prevent the display of the captured image 78 from obstructing the visual recognition of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Further, the captured image 78 may be displayed as it is without being displayed as a reduced image as long as the visual recognition of the variable display of the decorative pattern is not hindered. For example, as described later, when the hold continuous effect is executed by the stop display of a specific complete deviation (same color symbol) or a predetermined complete deviation (chance eye), the specific complete deviation (same color symbol) is executed. ) And a predetermined complete deviation (chance eye) are displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern, so that even if the captured image 78 is displayed as it is without being reduced, the visual recognition of the variable display of the decorative pattern is hindered. It is prevented from being done. Then, when the captured image 78 is displayed as it is without being reduced, the size of the captured image 78 is set large, so that the player can easily understand that the captured image 78 is displayed. It will be possible.

Further, the captured image 78 is preferably captured as an image having a lower density (for example, at least one of lightness and saturation) than the image of the first special figure continuous effect, for example, a lower density image than the decorative pattern. The image of the layer below the image 78 may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the second special figure game as an image having a visible density or a visible density on the back side of the captured image 78. That is, the captured image 78 may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as a variation of the image of the hold continuous effect executed in the first special figure game, as in the case where the captured image 78 is displayed as a reduced image. In this way, the captured image 78 is displayed as an image having a lower density than the image of the first special figure continuous effect, that is, the image of the hold continuous effect executed in the first special figure game is changed. By displaying the captured image 78, the captured image 78 can be displayed without being restricted by the variable display area of the decorative symbol on the symbol display unit 341. As a result, not only outside the variable area of the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the second special symbol game, but also the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed on the symbol display unit 341 and the captured image 78 are displayed in an overlapping manner. Will be possible. Then, by displaying the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed on the symbol display unit 341 and the captured image 78 in an overlapping manner, the captured image 78 is displayed to the player even when the player is watching the variable display of the decorative symbol. It can be easily visually recognized.

Further, the captured image 78 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the second special figure game as an image having a density at which the image of the layer below the captured image 78 can be visually recognized or an image having a density at which the back side of the captured image 78 can be visually recognized. By displaying the image 78, even if the captured image 78 is displayed on the front side or the back side of the decorative pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern can be visually recognized. As a result, even when the player gazes at the variable display of the decorative pattern, the player can easily visually recognize the captured image 78.

Further, since the captured image 78 can be displayed without being restricted by the variable display area of the decorative symbol on the symbol display unit 341, the variable display of the decorative symbol can be displayed even if the reduction ratio of the captured image 78 is set high. It is possible to visually recognize the captured image 78, and even when the captured image 78 is displayed as it is without being reduced, it is possible to visually recognize the variable display of the decorative pattern. As a result, even when the captured image 78 is displayed as an image having a lower density than the image of the first special figure continuous effect, the size of the captured image 78 can be set to be large, so that the visibility of the captured image 78 can be improved. It will be possible to secure enough.

The captured image 78 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the second special figure game as an image having a visible density of an image of a layer lower than the captured image 78 or an image having a visible density of the back side of the captured image 78. In that case, it is also possible to display only the outline of the captured image 78. For example, when the first special symbol continuous effect is displayed by a combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed as in the chance eye effect or the same color symbol effect (see FIG. 65), the captured image 78 can recognize the type of the decorative symbol. Only the outline (only the outline of the number) may be displayed. In this way, when the captured image 78 is displayed as a recognizable outline of the type of the decorative symbol, even if the captured image 78 is displayed on the front side or the back side of the decorative symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol is visually recognized. Will be possible. As a result, even when the player gazes at the variable display of the decorative pattern, the player can easily visually recognize the captured image 78.

Further, in the captured image 78, the hold continuous effect was executed in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect, and the hold continuous effect was executed in the first special figure game after the execution of the second special figure special effect. The capture timing in the hold continuous effect is not particularly limited as long as it can be clearly or suggested that the effect is executed. For example, the capture timing in the hold continuous effect is either at the start of the hold continuous effect (when the change of the decorative symbol starts), during execution (during the change display of the decorative symbol), or at the end (when the change of the decorative symbol stops). You may.

In addition, the hold continuous effect was executed in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect, and the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game after the execution of the second special figure special effect. The clarification or suggestion of this is not limited to the display of the captured image 78, and other methods may be used as long as the variable display of the decorative pattern can be visually recognized. For example, the indication or suggestion is held in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect, and in the first special figure game after the execution of the second special figure special effect. The execution of the continuous effect may be displayed as a specific image different from the captured image 78, such as a character image, an icon image, a character image, and an image in which two or more of these are combined. That is, the manifestation or suggestion may be displayed as an image changed to an image different from the effect image of the hold continuous effect executed in the first special figure game. In this way, the explicit or suggestion is displayed as an image changed to an image different from the effect image of the hold continuous effect executed in the first special figure game, so that the decorative symbol on the symbol display unit 341 is displayed. It is possible to display at various positions on the symbol display unit 341 without obstructing the visual recognition of the variable display of.

In addition, the type of the specific image may correspond to the type of the pending continuous effect. In this way, by associating the type of the specific image with the type of the hold continuous effect, not only the hold continuous effect was executed in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect, but also. , It is possible to grasp the type of the pending continuous effect executed in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect depending on the type of the displayed specific image.

In addition, the hold continuous effect was executed in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect, and the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game after the execution of the second special figure special effect. Even when the clarification or suggestion of the fact is executed by displaying the specific image, the specific image is a low image having a density lower than that of the decorative pattern, preferably the image of the lower layer than the captured image 78 has a visible density. Alternatively, the back side of the captured image 78 may be displayed as an image having a visible density or as an image having only a contour, and further, when displaying a specific image in these display modes, the specific image is a second image. It may be displayed on the front surface or the back surface of the decorative symbol by superimposing it on the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed in the special figure game, or may be displayed outside the variable region of the decorative symbol.

Further, the captured image 78 and the specific image may be displayed during the entire period during the execution of the second special figure game, but a part of the period during the execution of the second special figure game, for example, the second special figure game. It may be displayed only for a certain period from the start, only for a certain period before the end of the second special figure game, and for both a certain period from the start of the second special figure game and a certain period before the end of the second special figure game. The display period of the captured image 78 or the specific image is not particularly limited. Further, the captured image 78 and the specific image do not need to be displayed in all the second special figure games when the second special figure game is executed a plurality of times in succession, for example, the second special figure executed a plurality of times. Only the first special figure game executed first, only the second special figure game executed last, and the second special figure game executed at the beginning and the end may be displayed and captured. The number of times of the second special figure game in which the image 78 or the specific image is displayed may be different from the number of times of the second special figure game in which the second special figure special effect is executed.

Further, the second special drawing special effect is not limited to the examples of FIGS. 61 (B) and 61 (C), and may be in other embodiments. For example, the second special figure special effect may be to display another image such as a character image in place of or in addition to the character image, and in place of or in addition to the effect in the symbol display unit 341. A speaker 26 may be used to perform a predetermined audio effect.

Further, the second special figure special effect may be an effect that clearly or suggests that the player is given a privilege when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the decorative symbol is not necessarily a doublet symbol (for example, doublet). It is not necessary that the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot when the condition is satisfied on condition that the doublet is displayed. Predetermined conditions include, for example, that the decorative pattern reaches the reach, that a specific effect is performed, and the like. In other words, the present invention is applied to other than the gaming machine in which the jackpot type when the jackpot lottery result triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the second winning opening 315 is a jackpot is always a probability variation jackpot. can. For example, the present invention is a probabilistic jackpot as a result of a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into a second winning opening 315, in addition to a loop probabilistic machine such as the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above. It is also applicable to ST machines such as V-ST machines and other types of machines, including hits other than the above.

<Step S3329>
Returning to the description of FIG. 59, when the electric accessory length opening flag is set to off (step S3326: No), that is, the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 is short opening (short opening). When the game is executed per normal figure), 1 is added to the value of the short open winning counter (step S3329), and the command determination process is terminated. In this way, the value of the short-open winning counter reaches the upper limit of the number M held for the second special drawing game when the second winning opening 315 is short-opened (the game per short-opening normal drawing is executed). If the game ball 99 is inserted into the second winning opening 315 in a state where the game ball 99 is not inserted, 1 is added. On the other hand, the value of the short-open winning counter will be described in detail later, but it is inconvenient due to the continuous execution of the chance-eye effect as a hold continuous effect in four or more special figure games (the result of the big hit lottery is out of order). In order to avoid the occurrence of the jackpot confirmation effect in a certain case), the number of special figure games in which the hold continuous effect is executed by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 at the time of short opening. Is used in the variation type (effect pattern) for setting the variation type (effect pattern) to be executed in the special figure game (see step S3655 in FIG. 71 and step S3664 in FIG. 72).

<Step S3330>
When the received command is not the second special figure hold command (step S3323: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is an electric accessory closing command, as shown in FIG. 60. The electric accessory closing command is a command indicating that the electric accessory 315b is closed, and is executed by the main control device 4 when the electric accessory 315b is closed. It is set in step S1817 of.

When the received command is the electric accessory closing command (step S3330: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3331, and when the received command is not the electric accessory closing command (step S3330: No), the process is performed. The process proceeds to step S3335.

<Step S3331>
When the received command is the electric accessory closing command (step S3330: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the electric accessory length opening flag is set to ON (step S3331). It is a flag indicating that the electric accessory length is being opened for a long time due to the execution of the game per long opening, and when the electric accessory release command is received, in step S3311 of the command determination process. Set to on.

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3332 when the electric accessory length opening flag is set to on (step S3331: Yes), and when the electric accessory length opening flag is set to off (step S3331: Yes). S3331: No), the process proceeds to step S3334.

<Steps S3332 and S3333>
When the electric accessory length opening flag is set to on (step S3331: Yes), the MPU 51 clearly indicates to the player that the electric accessory 315b is long-opened by executing the game per long-opening normal map. Alternatively, the process of ending the suggested electric accessory length opening effect (see FIG. 61 (A)) is executed (step S3332), the electric accessory length opening flag is set to off (step S3333), and the command determination is made. End the process.

<Step S3334>
When the electric accessory length opening flag is set to off (step S3331: No), the MPU 51 sets the short open-closed flag on (step S3334), and ends the command determination process. The short-open closed flag is a flag indicating that the electric accessory 315b, which has been short-opened in the short-open open-closed game, has been closed. This short-open closed flag is set four times in step S3652 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of FIG. 71 when the game ball 99 is inserted into the second winning opening 315 by the short-opening of the electric accessory 315b. It is used to determine whether or not the chance eye effect is continuously executed in the above special figure game.

<Step S3335>
When the received command is not the electric accessory closing command (step S3330: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a special figure variation pattern command. When the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S3335: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3336. On the other hand, when the received command is not a special figure fluctuation pattern command (step S3335: No), the MPU 51 executes a process based on another command (step S3340), and ends the command determination process.

<Step S3335>
When the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S3335: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a variation type (effect pattern) setting process for setting a variation type (effect pattern) to be executed in the special figure game (effect pattern). Step S3336), the process proceeds to step S3337. The details of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 67 to 72.

<Step S3337>
In step S3337, the MPU 51 executes a stop symbol combination setting process for setting a stop display combination of decorative symbols in the special symbol game, and shifts the process to step S3338. The details of the stop symbol combination setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74.

<Step S3338>
In step S3338, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command in the variation display counter, and shifts the process to step S3339. The variation display time is determined according to the variation pattern information included in the variation pattern command. Then, the fluctuation display counter is decremented one by one in the counter update processing of step S2701 in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. It is possible to determine the remaining time of the display time. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display has ended when the variation display counter becomes 0.

<Step S3339>
In step S3339, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command for specifying the variation type (effect pattern type) in the symbol display unit 341 and the content of the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol to the display control device 6, and determines the command. End the process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the variation type (effect pattern type) set in step S3336 and the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol set in step S3337. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores an effect image corresponding to each display variation pattern command, a variation image of a decorative pattern, and the like. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the effect display and the variation display on the symbol display unit 341 according to the variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the display variation pattern command and the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols (for example, three) until the preset variable display time elapses, and a plurality of decorative symbols are displayed. The change of the decorative pattern of is stopped and displayed in order. During the variation display of the decorative symbol, various effects corresponding to the contents of the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like. ..

[Holding continuous production setting processing]
Next, an example of the procedure of the hold continuous effect setting process executed in step S3322 of the command determination process of FIG. 59 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65. The hold continuous effect setting process is a process of setting the type of the hold continuous effect in a situation where the hold continuous effect can be started. Here, FIGS. 62 and 63 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the hold continuous effect setting process.

<Step S3401>
In the hold continuous effect setting process, in step S3401, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the jackpot game in progress flag, that is, whether or not the first special figure game is in a feasible state. The jackpot game in progress flag is set to on when it is determined that the jackpot game start command has been received in the command determination process (step S3118 in FIG. 47), and is turned off when it is determined that the jackpot game end command has been received. Is set to (step S3137 in FIG. 48).

When the jackpot gaming flag is set to ON (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the pending continuous effect setting process. On the other hand, when the jackpot gaming flag is set to off (step S3401: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3402.

<Step S3402>
When the jackpot game is not in progress (step S3401: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the high frequency support mode flag indicating that the high frequency support mode is set is set to on (step S3402). That is, in this step S3402, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode.

The high-frequency support mode flag is set to on in step S2313 of FIG. 34 when the jackpot game ends in the game state transition process, and the gaming state is changed from the probabilistic gaming state or the time-saving gaming state to the probabilistic jackpot gaming state or normal. It is set to off in step S2307 of FIG. 33 when shifting to the jackpot gaming state, or in step S2326 of FIG. 34 when the gaming state shifts from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Here, in this step S3402, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode is used, that the hold continuous effect is executed in the normal gaming state which is the low-frequency support mode, and the probabilistic gaming state which is the high-frequency support mode and the probabilistic gaming state. This is to set it so that it is not executed in the time-saving game state. Of course, the hold continuous effect may be executed in one or both of the probabilistic game state and the time-saving game state, which are the high-frequency support modes.

When the high-frequency support mode flag is set to ON (step S3402: Yes), that is, when the high-frequency support mode is set, the MPU 51 ends the pending continuous effect setting process. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3403 when the high frequency support mode flag is set to off (step S3402: No), that is, when the low frequency support mode is used instead of the high frequency support mode.

<Step S3403>
When the frequency support mode flag is set to off (step S3402: No), that is, when the low frequency support mode is set instead of the high frequency support mode, the MPU 51 determines whether the hold continuous effect execution flag is set to on. (Step S3403). The hold continuous effect execution flag is a flag indicating that the hold continuous effect has been started, and is held in the first special figure game that is continuously executed after the first special figure game in which the hold continuous effect is started. When the continuous effect is scheduled to be executed, it is set to ON in step S3611 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of FIG. 68, which will be described later.

When the hold continuous effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 51 does not need to set the hold continuous effect because the hold continuous effect is executed, so that the hold continuous effect setting process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when the hold continuous effect execution flag is set to off (step S3403: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3404.

<Step S3404>
When the hold continuous effect execution flag is set to off (step S3403: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second special figure special effect execution flag is set to on (step S3404). The second special figure special effect execution flag is a flag indicating that the second special figure special effect is started, and is continuously executed after the second special figure game in which the second special figure special effect is started. When the second special figure special effect is scheduled to be executed in the second special figure game to be performed, it is set to be turned on in step S3636 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of FIG. 68 of FIG. 70, which will be described later. The flag.

When the second special figure special effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3404: Yes), the MPU 51 does not need to set the hold continuous effect because the second special figure special effect is being executed. The pending continuous effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the second special figure special effect execution flag is set to off (step S3404: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3405.

<Step S3405>
When the second special figure special effect execution flag is set to off (step S3404: No), the MPU 51 has the right to execute the first special figure game by entering the game ball 99 into the first winning opening 314. When the number of holds increases, it is determined whether or not the first special figure hold number N after the increase is 2 or more. That is, the MPU 51 sets the hold continuous effect on condition that there is a hold for at least one first special figure game when the game ball 99 enters the first winning opening 314.

When the number N of the first special figure hold after the increase is 2 or more (step S3405: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3406. That is, the hold continuous effect can be started with the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning opening 314 in a state where the first special figure hold number N is 1 to 3.

On the other hand, when the first special figure hold number N after the increase due to the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning opening 314 is not 2 or more (step S3405: No), the MPU 51 ends the hold continuous effect setting process. .. That is, the hold continuous effect is not started when the game ball 99 enters the first winning opening 314 in a state where the hold number N is 0.

<Step S3406>
When the first special figure hold number N after the increase is 2 or more (step S3405: Yes), the MPU 51 determines the fluctuation pattern (variation display time and the result of the jackpot lottery) for the increasing hold included in the first special figure hold command. ), It is determined whether or not the variable display time of the reserved first special figure game is 30 seconds or more. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the hold that can trigger the start of the hold continuous effect is the first special figure game in which the effect accompanied by the reach should be executed.

In the MPU 51, when the variable display time of the first special figure game corresponding to the increased hold is 30 seconds or more (step S3406: Yes), that is, the first special figure game corresponding to the increased hold is produced with reach. If is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S3407.

On the other hand, in the MPU 51, when the variation display time of the first special figure game corresponding to the increased hold is not 30 seconds or more (step S3406: No), that is, the first special figure game corresponding to the increased hold is not accompanied by reach. If the effect of complete deviation is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S3410.

<Steps S3407 to S3409>
When the variation display time of the first special figure game corresponding to the increased hold is 30 seconds or more (step S3406: Yes), that is, the effect accompanied by the reach is executed for the first special figure game corresponding to the increased hold. If it should, the MPU 51 responds to the increased hold based on the information about the variation pattern (variation display time and result of the jackpot lottery) for the increasing hold contained in the first special figure hold command. Figure It is determined whether or not the result of the big hit lottery of the game is a big hit (step S3407).

When the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special figure game corresponding to the increased hold is a jackpot (step S3407: Yes), the MPU 51 is held continuously for the jackpot effect described later according to the first special figure hold number N. The hold continuous effect setting process based on the effect pattern type setting table (see FIG. 64) is executed (step S3408), and the process shifts to step S3411 of FIG. 63.

On the other hand, when the result of the big hit lottery of the first special figure game corresponding to the increased hold is not a big hit (step S3407: No), that is, when the off-reach effect should be executed, the MPU 51 is the first special figure. Depending on the number of holds N, the hold continuous effect setting process based on the hold continuous effect pattern type setting table (see FIG. 64) for out-of-reach described later is executed (step S3409), and the process shifts to step S3411 of FIG. ..

<Step S3410>
When the variation display time of the first special figure game corresponding to the increased hold is not 30 seconds or more (step S3406: No), that is, the first special figure game corresponding to the increased hold is completely out of reach without reach. When it should be executed, the MPU 51 performs a hold continuous effect setting process based on the hold continuous effect pattern type setting table (see FIG. 64) for complete off reach, which will be described later, according to the first special figure hold number N. It is executed (step S3410), and the process proceeds to step S3411 of FIG.

Here, FIGS. 64 (A) to 64 (C) are diagrams showing an example of a hold continuous effect pattern type setting table. Specifically, FIG. 64 (A) is a hold continuous effect pattern type setting table used when the first special figure hold number N after increase is 4, and FIG. 64 (B) is after increase. 1 is a hold continuous effect pattern type setting table used when the first special figure hold number N is 3, and FIG. 64 (C) shows the case where the increased first special figure hold number N is 2. It is a hold continuous effect pattern type setting table to be used.

As shown in FIGS. 64 (A) to 64 (C), four types of hold continuous effect patterns are set: same color pattern effect, chance eye effect, mini character effect, and zone effect (mode effect). .. In addition, in FIGS. 64 (A) to 64 (C), "same color symbol 3 times" means that the same color symbol effect is executed consecutively in 3 times of the first special figure game, and "same color symbol" is executed. "Twice" means that the same color symbol effect is executed in succession in two first special figure games, and "one time with the same color symbol" means that the same color symbol effect is executed once in the first special figure game. Means only run. Similarly, "X times of chance" (X is an integer of 1 to 4), "X times of mini character production" (X is an integer of 1 to 3) and "X times of zone production" (X is an integer of 1 to 3). Means that the chance eye effect, the mini character effect, or the zone effect is executed in the first special figure game of the Xth time. That is, "○○ X times" means that a single type of hold continuous effect is continuously executed in the first special figure game a predetermined number of times. Of course, the hold continuous effect is not limited to the case where a single type of hold continuous effect is continuously executed in the first special figure game of a predetermined number of times, and if it is a combination that can be executed as an effect, the first special effect once. In the figure game, a plurality of types of hold continuous effects (for example, a mini character effect and a zone effect) may be executed at the same time.

As the hold continuous effect, regardless of the number N of the first special figure hold, the chance eye effect is set most easily as compared with other hold continuous effects such as the same color symbol effect. On the other hand, the zone effect (mode effect) is set to be the most difficult to set in the hold continuous effect.

Further, in FIGS. 64 (A) to 64 (C), “−” means that the hold continuous effect is not set. "-" In which the hold continuous effect is not set occupies most of the distribution of random numbers regardless of the number N of the first special figure hold. Therefore, the frequency (probability) of executing the hold continuous effect is lower than the frequency (probability) of not executing the hold continuous effect. Further, for "-" in which the hold continuous effect is not set, the smaller the number N of the first special figure hold, the more random numbers are set. That is, the smaller the first special figure hold number N, the lower the frequency (probability) of executing the hold continuous effect, and the larger the first special figure hold number N, the lower the frequency (probability) of executing the hold continuous effect. expensive.

Here, in the same color pattern production, chance eye production, mini character production, and zone production (mode production), the result of the big hit lottery in the first special figure game for the hold that triggered the start of the hold continuous production is a big hit. It is a production that clearly or suggests the degree of expectation. For example, in the "chance eye 4 times" in which the chance eye effect is executed consecutively in the 1st special figure game of 4 times, the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit when the 1st special figure hold number N is 4. It can be set only in a certain case (see Fig. 64 (A)), and it is not set when the result of the jackpot lottery is out of order (out of reach or complete out of reach). "Is a big hit confirmation production that clearly shows that the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit. On the other hand, all the continuous productions on hold other than "4th chance" are productions that suggest the degree of expectation of big hits. That is, even if the same color pattern production, mini character production, and zone production (mode production), which are continuous productions other than "4 chances", are executed 4 times or more than 4 times, the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit. It is not a big hit confirmation production that clearly shows that there is.

In this way, the hold continuous effect is an effect that clearly or suggests the degree of expectation that the result of the big hit lottery in the first special figure game for the hold that triggered the start of the hold continuous effect is a big hit. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that is displayed, and if the hold continuous effect is displayed, pay attention to whether the result of the jackpot lottery shifts to the special game state. Since you can enjoy the progress, the fun of the game is improved.

In addition, except for the "4 chances" that clearly indicate the jackpot, the jackpot expectation of the hold continuous effect is the highest when the number of times of the first special figure game in which the hold continuous effect is executed is the same, for example, the mini character effect. It is set low, the same color symbol effect and the chance eye effect are set to the same degree (same or substantially the same), and the zone effect (mode effect) is set to the highest.

By the way, in the present embodiment, when the hold continuous effect is scheduled to be continuously executed in a plurality of first special figure games, the game to the second winning opening 315 by executing the game per short open normal figure. In the second special figure game executed based on the entry of the ball 99, the hold continuous effect is continuously executed without executing the second special figure special effect. In this case, when the number of times of the first special figure game in which the hold continuous effect is executed and the number of times of the second special figure game in which the hold continuous effect is executed are added, the number of special figure games in which the hold continuous effect is executed is executed. May be 4 times or more.

Here, when the chance eye effect is executed as the hold continuous effect, when the number of special figure games in which the hold continuous effect is executed is 4 times or more, as described above, the hold continuous effect is the result of the big hit lottery. It will be a big hit confirmation production that clearly shows that it is a big hit. Therefore, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game executed from the fourth time onward after the start of the chance-eye effect as the predetermined hold continuous effect does not include the jackpot, the chance-eye effect is continued. If it is executed four or more times in a row, an inconsistency will occur between the result of the big hit lottery and the content specified by the hold continuous production.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the number of times of the special figure game in which the hold continuous effect is executed is 4 times or more when the chance eye effect is executed as the hold continuous effect, the chance eye effect is 4 times. Even if the hold continuous effect is executed for an effect other than the chance eye effect, for example, 4 times or more than 4 times before being executed continuously in the game, the big hit confirmation clearly indicating that the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit. Change to the same color pattern production that does not become a production. This prevents inconsistencies between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content specified by the hold continuous production.

In addition, as described above, even if the production other than the chance eye production is continuously executed as the pending continuous production in the first special figure game four times or more, the jackpot confirmation production is not obtained, suggesting the degree of expectation of the jackpot. It is executed as a production to do. Therefore, even if the number of special figure games in which the hold continuous effect is executed is four or more, if an effect other than the chance eye effect is executed as the hold continuous effect, the type of the hold continuous effect is The same kind of hold continuous effect is continuously executed without making any changes. Of course, even if it is a type of hold continuous production that does not cause any inconvenience even if it is continuously executed in the special figure game more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times), before the scheduled number of special figure games are executed. In addition, the type of pending continuous production may be changed.

Here, the jackpot expectation between the chance eye effect, which is a predetermined hold continuous effect before the change, and the same color symbol effect, which is a specific hold continuous effect after the change, is set to be the same or substantially the same. For example, the difference in the jackpot expectation between the chance-eye effect and the same-color symbol effect is set to -5% or more and + 5% or less, and the difference in the jackpot expectation between the chance-eye effect and the same-color symbol effect is -2.5%. It is set to +2, 5% or less. That is, in the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation degree of the predetermined hold continuous effect before the change and the specific hold continuous effect after the change is set to be the same or substantially the same.

In this way, when the jackpot expectation of the predetermined hold continuous effect before the change and the specific hold continuous effect after the change is set to be the same or substantially the same, the type of the hold continuous effect is changed. For example, when the chance eye effect is changed to the same color pattern effect, the jackpot expectation of the changed hold continuous effect does not decrease significantly, so the change of the hold continuous effect to the jackpot expectation reduces the jackpot expectation. The resulting decrease in the player's interest is prevented, and the decrease in the interest in the game is prevented.

Here, as described above, the selection rate of the chance eye effect, which is a predetermined hold continuous effect, is set higher than the selection rate of the same color symbol effect, which is a specific hold continuous effect. That is, in the present embodiment, the selection rate of the predetermined hold continuous effect before the change is set higher than the selection rate of the specific hold continuous effect after the change. In this way, the selection rate of the predetermined hold continuous effect before the change is set higher than the selection rate of the specific hold continuous effect after the change, so that the predetermined hold continuous effect having a high probability of causing inconvenience ( For example, the occurrence of inconvenience is appropriately avoided when the chance eye effect) is continuously displayed.

Also, not only when changing the type of hold continuous effect in order to prevent inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content specified by the hold continuous effect, but also changing the type of hold continuous effect. When the variable display time for the hold of the first special figure game that triggered the start of the hold continuous production is long, that is, the lottery result in the big hit lottery for the hold is a big hit, or the big hit expectation is high. When the reach effect is executed, the type of the hold continuous effect after the change is higher than the type of the predetermined hold continuous effect before the change so that the jackpot expectation is higher. You may make changes. For example, if the predetermined hold continuous effect before the change is the mini character effect with the lowest jackpot expectation, as a specific hold continuous effect after the change, the chance eye effect, the same color pattern effect, or the same color pattern effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the mini character effect, is used. A zone effect (mode effect) may be set, and if the predetermined hold continuous effect before the change is a chance eye effect or the same color symbol effect, the chance eye effect and the same color symbol effect are set as the specific hold continuous effect after the change. A zone effect (mode effect) with a higher expectation of a big hit may be set. In this case, the difference in the jackpot expectation between the specific hold continuous effect after the change and the predetermined hold continuous effect before the change is set to, for example, 10% or more, preferably 25% or more.

In this way, by changing the type of the hold continuous effect so that the specific hold continuous effect after the change has a higher expectation of big hit than the predetermined hold continuous effect before the change, the type of the hold continuous effect By changing, the jackpot expectation suggested to the player is improved. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the type of the specific hold continuous effect is changed when the predetermined hold continuous effect is displayed, and the predetermined hold continuous effect can be enjoyed. When the type of hold continuous effect is changed to a specific hold continuous effect, it is highly expected that the result of the big hit lottery will be a big hit in the special figure game in which the changed specific hold continuous effect is executed. Since you can enjoy the progress of the special figure game while hugging it, the interest of the game will be improved.

Here, in the present embodiment, the zone effect (mode effect) having the highest expectation of a big hit has the lowest selection rate among the hold continuous effects. That is, in the present embodiment, the type of the hold continuous effect is changed from the chance eye effect or the same color symbol effect, which is a predetermined hold continuous effect, to the zone effect (mode effect), which is a specific hold continuous effect. , When the type of hold continuous effect is changed to a specific hold continuous effect with high jackpot expectation, the selection rate of the predetermined hold continuous effect with low jackpot expectation before the change is high, and the jackpot expectation after change is high. High It is conceivable to set a high selection rate for specific pending continuous effects.

By setting a high selection rate of a predetermined hold continuous effect with a low jackpot expectation before the change and a high selection rate of a specific hold continuous effect with a high expectation of a big hit after the change, the predetermined hold continuation before the change is set. By setting a high selection rate of the effect, the frequency of executing the predetermined hold continuous effect before the change increases, so that the hold continuous effect is changed to a specific hold continuous effect with a high expectation of a big hit. The interest of the game is further improved because the player has more opportunities to expect, and the selection rate of the specific pending continuous production after the change is set low, so that the specific holding continuous production with a high jackpot expectation is set. Is executed less frequently, so that the player's joy when the game is changed to a specific hold continuous production with a high expectation of a big hit is further enhanced, and the interest of the game is further improved.

The timing for changing the type of the hold continuous effect may be any time as long as there is no inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content specified by the predetermined hold continuous effect, for example, the result of the jackpot lottery and the hold continuous effect. From the special figure game executed after the special figure game executed at the stage when it is found that inconsistency may occur with the content specified by, the result of the jackpot lottery and the pending continuous production will be specified. It may be between the special figure game in which an inconsistency occurs with the content (for example, the special figure game executed for the fourth time from the start of the predetermined hold continuous effect). That is, if the timing of changing the type of the hold continuous effect is such that there is no inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content specified by the hold continuous effect, the first special figure game and the second special figure game It may be any of.

Here, when the change timing of the type of the hold continuous effect is the first special figure game, in the first special figure game that is restarted after the end of the second special figure game by continuously executing the hold continuous effect. When an inconvenience occurs, the occurrence of the inconvenience is avoided.

In addition, when the type of the hold continuous effect is changed in the first special figure game that is restarted after the end of the second special figure game, inconvenience may occur by continuously executing the hold continuous effect before the change. , The number of special figure games in which the pending continuous effect before the change is displayed continuously is secured as much as possible. In this way, when the number of special figure games in which the hold continuous effect before the change is continuously displayed is secured to the maximum, inconvenience may occur by continuously executing the hold continuous effect before the change. Even so, the player can enjoy the pending continuous production before the change to the maximum.

On the other hand, when the change timing of the type of the hold continuous effect is the second special figure game, the inconvenience occurs in the second special figure game when the inconvenience occurs due to the continuous execution of the predetermined hold continuous effect before the change. Even if inconvenience occurs in the first special figure game that is restarted after the end of the second special figure game, the occurrence of inconvenience is avoided, and even if the inconvenience occurs in the first special figure game, it is performed in advance before the first special figure game is restarted. Occurrence of inconvenience is avoided.

In addition, after the special figure game executed at the stage when it is found that the timing of changing the type of the hold continuous effect may cause an inconsistency between the result of the big hit lottery and the content displayed by the predetermined hold continuous effect. In the case of the special figure game to be executed in the above, the occurrence of the inconvenience is immediately avoided after it is understood that the inconvenience is caused by continuously executing the predetermined hold continuous effect.

On the other hand, if the timing of changing the type of the hold continuous effect is a special figure game in which the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the predetermined hold continuous effect are inconsistent, the predetermined hold continuous effect is continuously performed. It is possible to maximize the expectations of the player by being displayed. Therefore, since the decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the change of the predetermined hold continuous effect to the specific hold continuous effect is reduced, the decrease in the interest in the game is prevented.

Of course, even when the number of special figure games in which the hold continuous effect is executed is a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times) or more when the hold continuous effect other than the chance eye effect is executed, the type of the hold continuous effect is You may make changes. That is, even if no inconvenience occurs even if a single type of hold continuous effect is continuously executed a predetermined number of times or more, the type of hold continuous effect may be changed. In this way, if there is no inconvenience even if a single type of hold continuous effect is continuously executed more than a predetermined number of times, the type of hold continuous effect is changed, so that a single type of hold continuous effect can be produced in many special cases. Since the player is prevented from feeling bored when the game is continuously executed, the interest of the game is caused by the continuous execution of a single type of reserved continuous effect in many special figure games. Is prevented from decreasing.

In addition, the combination of the type of the pending continuous effect before the change and the type of the pending continuous effect after the change is not limited, but it should be decided within the range where there is no inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the pending continuous effect. For example, when the same color symbol effect is set as the hold continuous effect, and the number of special figure games in which the hold continuous effect is executed is a predetermined four times or more, the hold continuous effect is other than the same color symbol effect. It may be changed to a production, for example, a chance eye production.

Further, the change of the hold continuous effect is not limited to once, and may be performed a plurality of times.

Here, in the same color symbol effect, the colors of all the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed are the same color, and the combination of the decorative symbols is the jackpot symbol combination (for example, doublet where all the decorative symbols are the same) and the out-of-reach. (For example, a combination of symbols in which the left and right symbols are the same but only the middle symbol is different) This is an effect in which a specific doublet other than the eyes is stopped and displayed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 51 (A) described above, the decorative symbols of "3" and "7" are red, and the odd decorative symbols other than "3" and "7" are "1" and "5". And when the decorative pattern of "9" is set to green and the decorative pattern of even-numbered decorative patterns "2", "4", "6" and "8" is set to blue, the same color pattern of the completely odd number is set. Although there are many combinations, it is preferable that the combination of the same color symbols as a specific completely odd number that is stopped and displayed in the same color symbol effect is a characteristic symbol combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 65, as a combination of the same color symbols as a specific completely out-of-order display that is stopped and displayed in the same color symbol effect, the left symbol and the middle symbol have the same number, and the right symbol is the left symbol and the middle. A combination of symbols different from the symbols can be considered. In this way, the player can easily grasp that the same color symbol effect has been executed because the specific complete deviation as a combination of the same color symbols that is stopped and displayed in the same color symbol effect is a characteristic combination. Can be done. Further, in the same color symbol effect, when the combination of the same color symbols as a specific complete deviation is stopped and displayed, the speaker 26 may output a specific special sound peculiar to the execution of the same color symbol effect. .. Also with this, the player can easily grasp that the same color pattern production has been executed.

The chance eye effect is an effect in which the chance eye, which is a predetermined completely missed eye whose decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is not the same color, is stopped and displayed. The predetermined completely missed stitch (chance stitch) that is stopped and displayed in the chance stitch effect is preferably a characteristic symbol combination for the same reason as in the case of the same color symbol effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 65, as a predetermined completely missed eye (chance eye) that is stopped and displayed in the chance eye effect, all the decorative symbols are odd numbers, and the left symbol and the middle symbol are the same number. , A combination of symbols whose right symbol is different from that of the left symbol and the middle symbol can be considered. Further, also in the chance eye effect, the speaker 26 displays the chance eye effect when a predetermined complete deviation (chance eye) is stopped and displayed so that the player can easily grasp that the chance eye effect has been executed. It is also possible to output a predetermined special sound peculiar to the execution of.

The mini character effect is an effect in which a mini character (mini character) is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. The mini-character is, for example, a miniaturized representation of a character appearing in the production of the gaming machine 10, or a large head of the character, such as two heads. In the mini-character effect, the display mode of the mini-character is not particularly limited, but when the mini-character effect is executed in an effect other than the hold continuous effect, it is preferably displayed in a form that can be distinguished from other mini-character effects. Examples of the mini character effect of the hold continuous effect include an effect in which the mini character crosses the symbol display unit 341 left and right, up and down, or diagonally, and a hold display image is displayed for the first hold of the first special figure game. In this case, by displaying a mini character in the vicinity of the hold display image, it may be suggested that the mini character effect is an effect related to the first hold for the first special figure game.

The zone effect (mode effect) is a special background effect (for example, "○○") that is executed in the zone effect (mode effect) as the background effect of the decorative pattern that the reach effect or the effect with high expectation of big hit is executed. It is an effect suggested by executing a background effect including a character image such as "zone" ("○○ mode").

Here, in the present embodiment, the hold continuous effect includes the same color pattern effect and the chance eye effect. The same-color pattern effect and the chance eye effect are effects in which the decorative pattern (for example, a number) is stopped and displayed at a specific complete deviation as the same color pattern or a predetermined deviation as the chance eye, and the decoration is stopped and displayed. Since the player can easily grasp that the hold continuous effect is executed by the combination of symbols, while expecting that the hold continuous effect is continuously executed when the hold continuous effect is executed. Since you can enjoy the progress of the game, the interest of the game is improved.

Further, when the hold continuous effect is executed by stopping and displaying a specific complete deviation or a predetermined complete deviation, as described above, in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect. When the display of the captured image 78 clearly indicates or suggests that the hold continuous effect has been executed, the captured image 78 is displayed in various modes without obstructing the visual recognition of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern in the second special figure game. Will be possible. For example, as the captured image 78, the image of the hold continuous effect in the first special figure game can be displayed as it is, and the image and the density obtained by reducing the image of the hold continuous effect in the first special figure game can be displayed. It becomes possible to display it as a lowered image, a contour image, or the like. As a result, it is possible to clearly or suggest that the hold continuous effect was executed in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect by various effects, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. It is possible to improve the fun of the game.

<Step S3411>
Returning to the description of the procedure of the hold continuous effect setting process, when the setting process of any one of steps S3408 to S3410 is completed, as shown in FIG. 63, the MPU 51 is set to execute the hold continuous effect in the setting process. It is determined whether or not this has been done (step S3411). When the MPU 51 is set to execute the hold continuous effect (step S3411: Yes), the process shifts to step S3412, and when the hold continuous effect is not set to be executed (step S3411: No). , Ends the pending continuous effect setting process.

<Step S3412>
When the setting to execute the hold continuous effect is made (step S3411: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the hold continuous effect setting flag indicating that the setting to execute the hold continuous effect has been made to on (step). S3412), the process proceeds to step S3413. The hold continuous effect setting flag is referred to in step S3602 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of FIG. 67 to determine whether or not it is the first special figure game to start the hold continuous effect.

<Step S3413>
In step S3413, the MPU 51 sets a hold continuous effect execution count counter indicating the number of remaining first special figure games for executing the hold continuous effect. For example, the MPU 51 sets "X" as the value of the hold continuous effect execution count counter when "chance eye X times" (X is a positive integer of 1 to 4) is set as the hold continuous effect.

<Steps S3414 and S3415>
When the hold continuous effect execution count counter is set, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the chance eye effect is set as the hold continuous effect (step S3414). In the MPU 51, when the chance eye effect is set as the hold continuous effect (step S3414: Yes), the chance eye flag indicating that the chance eye effect is set as the hold continuous effect is set to on (step S3415). , Ends the pending continuous effect setting process. On the other hand, when the chance eye effect is not set as the hold continuous effect (step S3414: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3416.

<Steps S3416 and S3417>
When the chance eye effect is not set as the hold continuous effect (step S3414: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the same color symbol effect is set as the hold continuous effect (step S3416). When the same color symbol effect is set as the hold continuous effect (step S3416: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the same color symbol flag indicating that the same color symbol effect is set as the hold continuous effect on (step S3417). , Ends the pending continuous effect setting process. On the other hand, in the MPU 51, when the same color symbol effect is not set as the hold continuous effect (step S3416: No), that is, when the mini character effect or the zone effect (mode effect) is set as the hold continuous effect, the hold continuous effect is set. End the setting process.

[2nd special figure special effect setting process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the second special figure special effect setting process executed in step S3228 of the command determination process of FIG. 59 will be described with reference to FIG. 66. In the second special figure special effect setting process, the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 due to the long opening of the electric accessory 315b in the long open normal game in the normal game state which is the low frequency support mode. This is a process for enabling the start of the second special figure special effect in the second special figure game executed in the case. Here, FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the second special figure special effect setting process.

<Step S4201>
As shown in FIG. 66, in the second special figure special effect setting process, in step S3501, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to ON. The second special figure special effect setting flag is a flag for enabling the start of the second special figure special effect in the second special figure game, and is set to on in step S3503 described later. Further, the second special figure special effect setting flag determines whether or not to start the second special figure special effect in the second special figure game in step S3635 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of FIG. 70, which will be described later. Referenced to.

When the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to on (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the second special figure special effect setting process and turns off the second special figure special effect setting flag. If it is set (step S3501: No), the process proceeds to step S3502.

<Steps S3502 and S3503>
When the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to off (step S3501: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second special figure special effect execution flag is set to on (step S3502). .. The second special figure special effect execution flag is a flag indicating that the second special figure special effect is started, and will be described later when the second special figure special effect is executed in the next second special figure game. It is set to ON in step S3636 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of FIG. 70.

When the second special figure special effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3502: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the second special figure special effect setting process. On the other hand, in the MPU 51, when the second special figure special effect execution flag is set to off (step S3502: No), the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to on (step S3503), and the second special effect is said. Figure Ends the special effect setting process. In this way, by setting the second special figure special effect setting flag to ON, in step S3642 in the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of FIG. 70, which will be described later, a long open normal game in a normal game state. In, the second special figure special effect can be set for the second special figure game executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 due to the long opening of the electric accessory 315b. It will be possible.

[Variation type (effect pattern) setting process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process executed in step S3336 of the command determination process of FIG. 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 72. The variation type (effect pattern) setting process is a process of setting a variation type (effect pattern) for the first special figure game or the second special figure game, which is executed when the variation pattern command is received. Here, FIGS. 67 to 72 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the variation type (effect pattern).

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 67, in the variation type (effect pattern) setting process, in step S3601, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the second special figure hold number M for the second special figure game is 0. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, when there is a hold for the second special figure game, the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game. That is, by determining whether or not the second special figure reservation number M for the second special figure game is 0, it is determined whether to execute the second special figure game or the first special figure. Then, when the second special figure holding number M for the second special figure game is 0 (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3602 and sets the effect for the first special figure game. To execute. On the other hand, when the second special figure holding number M for the second special figure game is not 0 (step S3601: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3635 of FIG. 70 and sets the effect for the second special figure game. Execute the process.

<Step S3602>
When the second special figure hold number M for the second special figure game is 0 (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the hold continuous effect setting flag is set to on (step S3602). The hold continuous effect setting flag is a flag indicating that the hold continuous effect is set to be executed, and is held in the hold continuous effect setting process of FIG. 63, which is executed when the first special figure hold command is received. When the setting to execute the continuous effect is made, it is set to on in step S3412.

Then, when the hold continuous effect setting flag is set to ON (step S3602: Yes), that is, when the first hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game, the MPU 51 processes the process in step S3605 of FIG. Move to. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3603 when the hold continuous effect setting flag is set to off (step S3602: No), that is, when the first hold continuous effect is not executed in the first special figure game.

<Step S3603>
When the hold continuous effect setting flag is set to off (step S3602: No), that is, when the first hold continuous effect is not executed in the first special figure game, the MPU 51 is set to turn on the hold continuous effect execution flag. It is determined whether or not it is (step S3603). The hold continuous effect execution flag is a flag indicating that the hold continuous effect has been started, and is held in the first special figure game that is continuously executed after the first special figure game in which the hold continuous effect is started. When the continuous effect is scheduled to be executed, it is set to ON in step S3611 described later in the variation (effect pattern) type setting process of FIG. 68.

Then, the MPU 51 processes the process when the hold continuous effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3603: Yes), that is, when the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game executed as the variation. The process proceeds to step S3620 of 69. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3604 when the hold continuous effect execution flag is set to off (step S3603: No), that is, when the hold continuous effect is not executed in the first special figure game.

<Step S3604>
When the hold continuous effect execution flag is set to off (step S3603: No), that is, when the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game, the normal effect is set, that is, with the above-mentioned first embodiment. A similar variation type (effect pattern type) is set, and the variation type (effect pattern) setting process is terminated.

<Steps S3605-S3608>
When the hold continuous effect setting flag is set to on (step S3602: Yes), that is, when the first hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game, as shown in FIG. 68, the MPU 51 is held continuously. The effect setting flag is set to off (step S3605), and as the hold continuous effect for the first special figure game executed as the special figure game, the hold continuous effect set in any one of steps S3408 to S3410 of FIG. 62 is performed. Set (step S3606). Then, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the hold continuous effect execution count counter indicating the remaining number of executions of the hold continuous effect (step S3607), and whether or not the value of the hold continuous effect execution count counter after the subtraction is 0. Is determined (step S3608). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first special figure game executed as the special figure game is the last first special figure game in which the hold continuous effect is executed.

Then, in the MPU 51, when the value of the hold continuous effect execution count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3608: Yes), that is, the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game executed as the special figure game. In the case of the final first special figure game, the process proceeds to step S3614. On the other hand, in the MPU 51, when the value of the hold continuous effect execution count counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3608: No), that is, the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game executed as the special figure game. If it is not the final first special figure game, the process proceeds to step S3609.

<Steps S3609 and S3610>
When the value of the hold continuous effect execution count counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3608: No), that is, the first special figure game executed as the special figure game is the last first special feature in which the hold continuous effect is executed. If it is not a figure game, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the result of the big hit lottery for the first special figure game executed as the special figure game is a big hit (step S3609). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot game is executed or the reserved first special figure game is executed after the end of the special figure game.

Then, in the MPU 51, when the result of the big hit lottery for the first special figure game executed as the special figure game is a big hit (step S3609: Yes), that is, when the big hit game is executed after the end of the special figure game. , In order to make the first special figure game executed as the special figure game the last first special figure game in which the hold continuous effect is executed, the number of hold continuous effect executions indicating the remaining number of executions of the hold continuous effect. The counter is cleared (step S3610), and the process proceeds to step S3614. On the other hand, in the MPU 51, when the result of the big hit lottery for the first special figure game executed as the special figure game is not a big hit (step S3609: No), that is, the first special figure game held after the end of the special figure game. Is executed, the process proceeds to step S3611.

<Step S3611>
When the result of the big hit lottery for the first special figure game executed as the special figure game is not a big hit (step S3609: No), that is, when the reserved first special figure game is executed after the end of the special figure game. , MPU 51 sets the hold continuous effect execution flag indicating that the hold continuous effect has started turned on (step S3611), and shifts the process to step S3612.

<Steps S3612 and S3613>
When the hold continuous effect execution flag indicating that the hold continuous effect has been started is set to on, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the chance eye flag is set to on (step S3612). The chance eye flag is a flag indicating that the chance eye effect is set as the hold continuous effect, and in step S3415 of the hold continuous effect setting process of FIG. 63 executed when the first special figure hold command is received. It is set to on when the chance eye effect is set as the hold continuous effect.

Then, when the chance eye flag is set to ON (step S3612: Yes), the MPU 51 is set to the value of the chance eye count counter indicating the number of times of the first special figure game of the chance eye effect executed as the hold continuous effect. 1 is added (step S3613), and the variation type (effect pattern) setting process is completed.

Here, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times of the first special figure game of the chance eye effect to be continuously executed is the hold jackpot lottery for the first special figure game that triggered the execution of the hold continuous effect. If the result of is a big hit, it is 4 times, and if it is a miss, it is 3 times (see FIG. 64). Therefore, by referring to the value of the chance eye count counter, the result of the hold jackpot lottery for the first special figure game that triggered the execution of the hold continuous effect, and the chance eye effect is executed as the hold continuous effect. 1 Inconsistency in the number of special figure games is prevented.

On the other hand, when the chance eye flag is set to off (step S3612: No), the MPU 51 ends the variation type (effect pattern) setting process.

<Steps S3614 to S3616>
When the first special figure game executed as the special figure game is the last first special figure game in which the hold continuous effect is executed (step S3608 or step S3610), that is, the remaining number of executions of the hold continuous effect. When the value of the hold continuous effect execution count counter indicating the above is 0, it is determined whether or not the chance eye flag indicating that the chance eye effect is set as the hold continuous effect is set to ON (step S3614). ..

When the chance eye flag is set to on (step S3614: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the chance eye flag to off (step S3615), and at the same time, the chance eye effect to be executed as a hold continuous effect in the special figure game is The final chance eye flag indicating that it is the final chance eye effect is set to on (step S3616), and the variation type (effect pattern) setting process is terminated. The final chance eye flag is referred to in step S3702 in the stop symbol combination setting process of FIG. 73, which will be described later, in order to determine whether or not to set the chance eye as the stop symbol combination.

On the other hand, when the chance eye flag is set to off (step S3614: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3617.

<Steps S3617-S3619>
When the chance eye flag is set to off (step S3614: No), it is determined whether or not the same color symbol flag indicating that the same color symbol effect is set as the hold continuous effect is set to on (step). S3617). When the same color symbol flag is set to on (step S3617: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the same color symbol flag to off (step S3618), and at the same time, the same color symbol effect to be executed as a hold continuous effect in the special figure game is performed. The final same-color symbol flag indicating that it is the last same-color symbol effect is set to on (step S3619), and the variation type (effect pattern) setting process is terminated. The final same-color symbol flag is referred to in step S3706 in the stop symbol combination setting process of FIG. 73, which will be described later, in order to determine whether or not to set the same-color symbol as the stop symbol combination.

On the other hand, in the MPU 51, when the same color symbol flag is set to off (step S3617: No), that is, when the last pending continuous effect executed in the special symbol game is not the chance eye effect and the same color symbol effect. The variable type (effect pattern) setting process is terminated.

<Step S3620>
When the hold continuous effect execution flag indicating that the hold continuous effect has been started is set to on (step S3603: Yes), that is, in the first special figure game executed as the special figure game, the hold continuous effect is performed. When executed, as shown in FIG. 69, the MPU 51 sets a hold continuous effect for the special figure game (step S3620), and shifts the process to step S3621.

As the hold continuous effect for the special figure game, the hold continuous effect set in any one of steps S3408 to S3410 of the hold continuous effect setting process of FIG. 62 is set. However, as will be described later, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game is out of order, but the fourth chance effect to be executed as the jackpot confirmation effect can be set, the result of the jackpot lottery. In order to prevent inconsistency between the hold continuous effect and the hold continuous effect, a process of changing the hold continuous effect executed for the special figure game from the chance eye effect to the same color symbol effect is executed (FIG. 72). Step S3662).

<Step S3621>
When the hold continuous effect for the special figure game is set (step S3620), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the chance eye flag indicating that the chance eye effect is set as the hold continuous effect is set to on. (Step S3621), when the chance eye flag is set to on (step S3621: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3622, and when the chance eye flag is set to off (step S3621: No). The process proceeds to step S3625.

<Steps S3622 to S3624>
When the chance eye flag indicating that the chance eye effect is set as the hold continuous effect is set to on (step S3621: Yes), the MPU 51 is the first special feature in which the chance eye effect is executed as the hold continuous effect. Figure 1 is added to the value of the chance eye count counter indicating the number of games (step S3622), and it is determined whether or not the value of the chance eye count counter after the addition is 4 (step S3623). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the special figure game is the first special figure game in which the fourth chance-th effect is executed as the hold continuous effect.

When the value of the chance eye count counter after addition is 4 (step S3623: Yes), the chance eye temporary stop flag is set to on (step S3624), and the process proceeds to step S3628. On the other hand, when the value of the chance eye count counter after addition is not 4 (step S3623: No), the process proceeds to step S3625.

Here, as described above, the upper limit of the value of the chance eye count counter (the number of times of the first special figure game in which the chance eye effect is continuously executed as the hold continuous effect) is the chance eye effect as the hold continuous effect. This is four times when the result of the pending jackpot lottery for the first special figure game that triggered the execution is a jackpot. On the other hand, the upper limit of the hold for the first special figure game is 4, and the number of the first special figure games in which the hold continuous effect is continuously executed is also 4. If the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the same doublet, and cannot be stopped and displayed at the chance. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to execute the chances consecutively in the four first special figure games, for example, in the fourth first special figure game for notifying that the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit. In the high-speed variable game before the reach effect is executed, the chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the stop is displayed by the doublet via the reach effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the hold jackpot lottery for the first special figure game that triggered the execution of the hold continuous effect is a big hit, and the chance eye effect as the hold continuous effect is the fourth. When continuously executed in one special figure game, in the fourth first special figure game, the chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in doublet. Therefore, in this step S3624, the chance eye temporary stop flag is set to on in order to display the chance eye as a temporary stop before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in doublet. This chance eye temporary stop flag sets the stop display combination of the decorative symbol for the fourth first special figure game when the chance eye effect as the hold continuous effect is continuously executed in the four first special figure games. In setting, it is referred to in step S3709 of FIG.

<Step S3625>
When the chance eye flag is set to off (step S3621: No), or when the value of the chance eye count counter after addition is not 4 (step S3623: No), the MPU 51 is the first special figure game. It is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game is a jackpot (step S3625). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot game is executed or the reserved first special figure game is executed after the end of the special figure game, as in step S3609 of FIG. 68 described above.

Then, in the MPU 51, when the result of the big hit lottery for the first special figure game executed as the special figure game is a big hit (step S3625: Yes), that is, when the big hit game is executed after the end of the special figure game. , The process proceeds to step S3628. On the other hand, in the MPU 51, when the result of the big hit lottery for the first special figure game executed as the special figure game is not a big hit (step S3625: No), that is, the first special figure game held after the end of the special figure game. Is executed, the process proceeds to step S3626.

<Steps S3626 and S3627>
When the result of the big hit lottery for the first special figure game executed as the special figure game is not a big hit (step S3625: No), that is, when the first special figure game suspended after the end of the special figure game is executed. , MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the hold continuous effect execution count counter indicating the remaining number of executions of the hold continuous effect (step S3626). Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the hold continuous effect execution count counter after subtraction is 0, that is, the first special figure game executed as the special figure game is the last one in which the hold continuous effect is executed. 1 It is determined whether or not the game is a special figure game (step S3627).

Then, in the MPU 51, when the value of the hold continuous effect execution count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3627: Yes), that is, the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game executed as the special figure game. In the case of the final first special figure game, the process proceeds to step S3629. On the other hand, in the MPU 51, when the value of the hold continuous effect execution count counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3627: No), that is, the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game executed as the special figure game. If it is not the last first special figure game, the variation type (effect pattern) setting process is terminated.

<Step S3628>
When the result of the big hit lottery for the first special figure game executed as the special figure game is a big hit (step S3625: Yes), that is, when the big hit game is executed after the end of the special figure game, the MPU 51 is concerned. In order to make the first special figure game executed as the special figure game the last first special figure game in which the hold continuous effect is executed, a hold continuous effect execution count counter indicating the remaining number of executions of the hold continuous effect is set. It is cleared (step S3628), and the process proceeds to step S3629.

<Step S3629>
When the value of the hold continuous effect execution count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3627: Yes), or when the hold continuous effect execution count counter indicating the remaining number of executions of the hold continuous effect is cleared (step S3628), that is. When the first special figure game executed as the special figure game is the last first special figure game in which the hold continuous effect is executed, the MPU 51 indicates that the hold continuous effect has been started. The execution flag is set to off (step S3629), and the process proceeds to step S3630.

<Step S3630>
In step S3630, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the chance eye flag indicating that the chance eye effect is set as the hold continuous effect is set to on. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3631 when the chance eye flag is set to on (step S3630: Yes), and steps the process when the chance eye flag is set to off (step S3630: No). Move to S3633.

<Steps S3631 and S3632>
When the chance eye flag is set to on (step S3630: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the chance eye flag to off (step S3631), clears the chance eye count counter (step S3632), and changes the variation type. (Effect pattern) End the setting process.

<Steps S3633 and S3634>
When the chance eye flag is set to off (step S3630: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the same color symbol flag indicating that the same color symbol effect is set as the hold continuous effect is set to on. (Step S3633). When the same color symbol flag is set to on (step S3633: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the same color symbol flag to off (step S3634), and ends the variation type (effect pattern) setting process.

On the other hand, in the MPU 51, when the same color symbol flag is set to off (step S3633: No), that is, when the hold continuous effect is not a chance eye effect and the same color symbol effect, but a mini character effect or a zone effect (mode effect). , Ends the variation type (effect pattern) setting process.

<Step S3635>
When it is determined in step S3601 of FIG. 67 that the number M of the second special figure hold for the second special figure game is not 0 (step S3601: No), that is, when there is a hold for the second special figure game, it is shown in FIG. 70. As described above, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to ON (step S3635). The second special figure special effect setting flag is a flag for starting the second special figure special effect (see FIGS. 61B and 61C) in the second special figure executed as the special figure game. be. This second special figure special effect setting flag is transmitted when the game ball 99 is inserted into the second winning opening 315 due to the long opening of the second winning opening 315 in the long-opening normal drawing game. When the second special figure hold command is received, it is set to ON in step S3503 of the second special figure special effect setting process of FIG.

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3636 when the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to on (step S3635: Yes), and when the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to off. (Step S3635: No), the process proceeds to step S3641.

<Steps S3636 and S3637>
When the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to on (step S3635: Yes), the MPU 51 turns on the second special figure special effect execution flag indicating that the second special figure special effect has been started. (Step S3636), the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to off (step S3637), and the process proceeds to step S3638.

<Step S3638>
In step S3638, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the electric accessory length opening flag indicating that the second winning opening 315 is long open (the game is executed per the long open normal figure) is set to ON. .. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3639 when the electric accessory length opening flag is set to on (step S3638: Yes), and when the electric accessory length opening flag is set to off (step S3638: Yes). S3638: No), the process proceeds to step S3642.

<Steps S3369 and S3640>
When the electric accessory length opening flag is set to on (step S3638: Yes), the MPU 51 also executes a process of ending the electric accessory length opening effect (see FIG. 87 (A)) (step S3369). ), The electric accessory length opening flag is set to off (step S3640), and the process proceeds to step S3642. That is, the electric accessory length opening effect (see FIG. 87 (A)) satisfies either the condition of the start of the second special figure (see FIG. 61 (A)) and the chain of the electric accessory 315b. If it ends. That is, the second special figure special effect is executed with priority over the electric accessory length opening effect.

<Step S3641>
When it is determined in step S3635 that the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to off (step S3635: No), the MPU 51 is turned on in step S3636 when the second special figure special effect is started. It is determined whether or not the set second special figure special effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3641).

Then, when the second special figure special effect execution flag is set to on (step S3641: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3642, and the second special figure special effect execution flag is set to off. If so (step S3641: No), the process proceeds to step S3652 in FIG.

<Steps S3642 and S3643>
In step S3642, the MPU 51 sets the second special figure game effect for the second special figure game executed as the special figure game. Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the hold continuous effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3643). The hold continuous effect execution flag is a flag indicating that the hold continuous effect has started, and the hold continuous effect is performed in the first special figure game executed after the first special figure game in which the hold continuous effect is executed. If it is scheduled to be executed, it is set to on in step S3611 of FIG. 68 described above. That is, in this step S3643, it is determined whether or not the hold continuous effect is restarted in the first special figure game executed after the end of all the second special figure games in which the second special figure special effect is executed. ..

Then, when the hold continuous effect execution flag is set to on (step S3643: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3644, and when the hold continuous effect execution flag is set to off (step S3643:). No), the process proceeds to step S3645.

<Step S3644>
When the hold continuous effect execution flag is set to on (step S3643: Yes), the MPU 51 performs all the second special effects on the symbol display unit 341 in the second special image game effect. A voice lamp control device for displaying a captured image 78 (see FIG. 61 (C)) that clearly or suggests that the hold continuous effect is resumed in the first special figure game executed after the end of the special figure game. The captured image display information is set in the display variation pattern command transmitted from 5 to the display control device 6 (step S3644), and the process proceeds to step S3645. As a result, the captured image 78 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the second special figure game effect (see FIG. 61 (C)).

When the hold continuous effect execution flag is set to off (step S3643: No), that is, the first special figure executed after the end of all the second special figure games in which the second special figure special effect is executed. If the hold continuous effect is not executed in the game, the process of step S3644 is skipped. Therefore, in the first special figure game executed after the end of all the second special figure games in which the second special figure special effect is executed, if the hold continuous effect is not executed, the symbol in the second special figure game effect is executed. The captured image 78 is not displayed on the display unit 341 (see FIG. 61 (B)).

Here, the captured image is displayed as a reduced image of the screen of the hold continuous effect executed in the symbol display unit 341 in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect. In this captured image 78, the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect, and the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game after the execution of the second special figure special effect. It is displayed when it is displayed (see FIG. 61 (B)). That is, in the captured image 78, the hold continuous effect was executed in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect, and the hold continuous effect was executed in the first special figure game after the execution of the second special figure special effect. It is explicitly or suggested that the effect is executed during the execution of the second special figure special effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the captured image 78 has executed the hold continuous effect in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect, and the second special figure after the execution of the second special figure special effect. Since it is clearly or suggested that the hold continuous effect is executed in the 1 special figure game, the player forgets that the hold continuous effect was executed in the 1st special figure game before the execution of the 2nd special figure special effect. It can be grasped that the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game after the execution of the second special figure special effect. Therefore, even if the hold continuous effect is restarted in the first special figure game after the execution of the second special figure special effect, the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game after the execution of the second special figure special effect. It is significantly reduced that the player feels uncomfortable with what is done. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the restart of the hold continuous effect that was executed before the execution of the second special figure special effect after the end of the second special figure special effect.

In particular, when the second winning opening 315 is long-opened in the long-opening normal-figure game, the player is second compared to the case where the second winning opening 315 is short-opened in the short-opening normal-figure game. I am crazy about whether or not the game ball 99 is inserted into the winning opening 315 for a long time. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the player forgets that the hold continuous effect was executed before the execution of the second special figure game. Further, when the second winning opening 315 is long-opened in the game per long-opening normal drawing, the second winning opening 315 is compared with the case where the second winning opening 315 is short-opened in the game per short-opening normal drawing. Since the game ball 99 is easy to enter (the number of balls entered is large), the second special figure special effect is executed many times (the execution time of the second special figure special effect is long). Therefore, the time from the end of the hold continuous effect before the execution of the second special figure special effect (the start of the second special figure special effect) to the restart of the hold continuous effect due to the end of the second special figure special effect. In addition to being longer, the player's judgment as to whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special figure game in which the second special figure special effect is executed is a jackpot compared to the case where the first special figure game is executed. High degree of attention. In this way, when the second winning opening 315 is long-opened in the game per long-opening normal map, the second special feature is compared with the case where the second winning opening 315 is short-opened in the game per short-opening normal map. Since it is more likely that the player forgets that the hold continuous effect was executed before the execution of the figure game, it is more likely that the player forgets that the hold continuous effect was executed. The effect of clearly or suggesting that the hold continuous effect was executed in the first special figure game is high.

Further, the captured image 78 is displayed as a reduced image of the screen of the hold continuous effect executed in the symbol display unit 341 in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect. The type of the hold continuous effect that was executed in the first special figure game before the execution of the special effect is specified or suggested, and the hold continuous effect that is executed in the first special figure game after the end of the second special figure special effect is specified. The type is specified or suggested. For example, in the present embodiment, four types of hold continuous effect are set: same color pattern effect, chance eye effect, mini character effect, and zone effect (mode effect) (see FIG. 64), but FIG. 61 (see FIG. 64). In the captured image 78 shown in C), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "113" (see FIG. 65), which is a chance eye, as a hold continuous effect in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect. It is clearly or suggested that the chance-eye effect was executed. As a result, the player has executed the hold continuous effect in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect, and the hold continuous effect in the first special figure game after the execution of the second special figure special effect. Not only can it be understood that the production is executed, but it is also possible to grasp the type of the pending continuous production. Therefore, it is further reduced that the player feels uncomfortable with the resumption of the hold continuous effect in the first special figure game after the execution of the second special figure special effect, and after the end of the second special figure special effect. , It is possible to further prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the hold continuous effect that was executed before the execution of the second special figure special effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the captured image 78 is reduced and displayed in the lower left area of the symbol display unit 341, but is held continuously executed at the end of the second special figure special effect and after the end of the second special figure special effect. The captured image may be displayed on the entire symbol display unit 341 for a certain period of one or both at the start of the effect. For example, the captured image may be displayed as a so-called stage change effect in which the stage effect (background effect) in the previous special figure game is changed in the current special figure game. In this way, the captured image is captured on the entire symbol display unit 341 for a certain period of one or both at the end of the second special figure special effect and at the start of the hold continuous effect executed after the end of the second special figure special effect. Is displayed, the execution of the second special figure special effect in the second special figure game to the execution of the hold continuous effect in the first special figure game can be smoothly performed without discomfort.

<Step S3645>
When the hold continuous effect execution flag is set to off (step S3643: No), or when the hold continuous effect execution flag is set to on (step S3643: Yes), the MPU 51 is set to the display variation pattern command. When the captured image display information is set (step S3644), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the result of the big hit lottery for the second special figure game executed as the special figure game is a big hit (step S3645). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game is executed after the execution of the second special figure game executed as the special figure game.

Then, in the MPU 51, when the result of the big hit lottery for the second special figure game executed as the special figure game is a big hit (step S3645: Yes), that is, the big hit game is executed after the end of the second special figure game. If so, the process proceeds to step S3646. On the other hand, in the MPU 51, when the result of the big hit lottery for the second special figure game executed as the special figure game is not a big hit (step S3645: No), that is, when the big hit game is not executed after the end of the second special figure game. , The process proceeds to step S3649.

<Step S3646>
When the result of the big hit lottery for the second special figure game executed as the special figure game is a big hit (step S3645: Yes), the MPU 51 clears the long open winning counter (step S3646), and the process is set to step S3647. Transition. Here, the value of the long-open winning counter is triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 while the second winning opening 315 is long-opened (during the game per long-opening normal drawing). Of the second special figure games to be assumed, the number of unexecuted second special figure games is shown. That is, when the jackpot game is executed after the end of the second special figure game executed as the special figure game, the MPU 51 sets the number of unexecuted second special figure games to 0.

<Steps S3647 and S3648>
In step S3647, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the hold continuous effect execution flag indicating that the hold continuous effect has been started is set to ON (step S3647). Then, when the hold continuous effect execution flag is set to on (step S3647: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the hold continuous effect execution flag to off (step S3648), shifts the process to step S3651, and holds the hold continuous effect. When the effect execution flag is set to off (step S3648: No), the process proceeds to step S3651.

<Steps S3649 and S3650>
When the result of the big hit lottery for the second special figure game executed as the special figure game is not a big hit (step S3645: No), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the long open winning counter (step S3649), and after the subtraction. It is determined whether or not the value of the long open winning counter is 0 (step S3650). The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3651 when the value of the long open winning counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3650: Yes), and when the value of the long open winning counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3650: No). ), The effect setting process is terminated.

Here, when the value of the long open winning counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3650: Yes), that is, the second special figure game as the special figure game is the last time the second special figure special effect is executed. In the case of the second special figure game of the above, when the process of steps S3647 and S3648 is not executed and the process is shifted to step S3651, the hold continuous effect execution flag is set to ON. The hold continuous effect execution flag is not set to off. As a result, in the first special figure game executed after the last second special figure game in which the second special figure special effect is executed, the hold continuous effect is resumed.

In the present embodiment, in the first special figure game executed after the last second special figure game in which the second special figure special effect is executed, the hold continuous effect is restarted, but the length after subtraction is performed. When the value of the open winning counter is 0 (step S3650: Yes), by shifting the process to step S3647, the second special figure special effect is executed after the last second special figure game. In the first special figure game, the hold continuous effect may not be restarted.

<Step S3651>
In step S3651, the MPU 51 sets the special effect execution flag indicating that the second special figure special effect has been started to off, and ends the variation type (effect pattern) setting process. As a result, the second special figure special effect executed in the second special figure game executed as the special figure game is executed as the final second special figure special effect.

<Steps S3652 and S3653>
When it is determined in step S3641 that the second special figure special effect execution flag is set to off (step S3641: No), the MPU 51 is short-opened in the short-opened open-closed game as shown in FIG. 71. It is determined whether or not the short open-closed flag indicating that the electric accessory 315b has been closed is set to ON (step S3652). That is, the MPU 51 is in a state in which the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 is restricted by the end of the game per short open normal figure, and the number of entering the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 does not increase. Judge whether or not it has become.

Then, when the short open closed flag is set to on (step S3652: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the short open closed flag to off (step S3653), and shifts the process to step S3654. On the other hand, when the short open-closed flag is set to off (step S3652: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3658 in FIG.

<Step S3654>
When the short open closed flag is set to on (step S3652: Yes), when the short open closed flag is set to off (step S3653), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the chance eye flag is set to on. Is determined (step S3654). The chance eye flag is a flag indicating that the chance eye effect is set as the hold continuous effect. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the chance eye effect is set as the hold continuous effect when the electric accessory 315b, which has been short-opened in the short-open normal game, is closed. It is determined whether or not the chance eye effect is executed as the hold continuous effect in the second special figure game executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 in the game per normal figure.

Then, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3655 when the chance eye flag is set to on (step S3654: Yes), and processes when the chance eye flag is set to off (step S3654: No). To step S3658 of FIG. 72.

<Steps S3655 and S3656>
When the chance eye flag is set to on (step S3654: Yes), the MPU 51 adds the value of the chance eye count counter, the value of the hold continuous effect count counter, and the value of the short open winning counter (step S3654: Yes). Step S3655), it is determined whether or not the added value is 4 or more (step S3656).

Here, the value of the chance eye count counter is the number of times of the first special figure game in which the chance eye effect is executed as the hold continuous effect, and the value of the hold continuous effect number counter is the remaining first remaining hold continuous effect is executed. This is the number of special game games. Therefore, the total value of the value of the chance eye number counter and the value of the hold continuous effect number counter is the number of times of the first special figure game in which the initially set hold continuous effect is executed. Further, the value of the short-open winning counter is the number of times of the second special drawing game executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 in the short-opening normal drawing game, and is held continuously. It is the number of times of the second special figure game in which the production is executed. Therefore, the value obtained by adding the value of the chance eye count counter, the value of the hold continuous effect count counter, and the value of the short open winning counter is the maximum feature that the chance eye effect as the hold continuous effect is continuously executed. It is the number of times of the figure game (the first special figure game, the second special figure game).

On the other hand, as described above, when the chance eye effect is continuously executed in the special figure game four or more times as the hold continuous effect, the big hit confirmation effect clearly indicates that it is a big hit. Therefore, when the chance eye effect is set as the hold continuous effect, the second special figure game is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 in the short open normal figure game. In that case, if the result of the jackpot lottery for each special figure game in which the chance eye effect is executed is out of order, the result clearly indicated by the continuous execution of the chance eye effect as a pending continuous effect, and Inconsistencies may occur with the results of the jackpot lottery.

Therefore, when the chance eye effect is set as the hold continuous effect, the addition value of the value of the chance eye number counter, the value of the hold continuous effect number counter, and the value of the short open winning counter is 4 or more. By determining whether or not, it is determined in advance whether or not there may be an inconsistency between the result specified by the continuous execution of the chance eye effect as the pending continuous effect and the result of the jackpot lottery. Will be possible.

Then, when the sum of the value of the chance eye count counter, the value of the hold continuous effect count counter, and the value of the short open winning counter is 4 or more (step S3656: Yes), the MPU 51 performs the process in step S3657. If the addition value is not 4 or more (step S3656: No), the process proceeds to step S3658 in FIG. 72.

<Step S3657>
When the sum of the value of the chance eye number counter, the value of the hold continuous effect number counter, and the value of the short open winning counter is 4 or more (step S3656: Yes), the MPU 51 is executed as the special figure game. It is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for all the special figure games executed thereafter including the second special figure game is out of order (step S3657). In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a jackpot is included in the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game executed thereafter, including the second special figure game executed as the special figure game. ..

Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery for all the special figure games executed thereafter including the second special figure game executed as the special figure game is out of order, the MPU 51 performs the process (step S3657: Yes). The process proceeds to step S3660 of FIG. On the other hand, in the MPU 51, when the result of the jackpot lottery for all the special figure games executed thereafter including the second special figure game executed as the special figure game is not deviated (step S3657: No), the special figure If a jackpot is included in the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game executed thereafter including the second special figure game executed as the game, the process shifts to step S3658 of FIG. 72.

<Steps S3658 and S3569>
When the short open-closed flag is set to off (step S3652: No), when the chance eye flag is set to off (step S3654: No), the value of the chance eye count counter and the hold continuous effect count counter. When the addition value of the value of and the value of the short open winning counter is not 4 or more (step S3656: No), or when the second special figure game executed as the special figure game is included, all the subsequent executions are performed. When the jackpot is included in the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game (step S3657: No), as shown in FIG. 72, the MPU 51 executes the process of step S3658. That is, the MPU 51 determines that the hold continuous effect is started in step S3658 when the inconvenience that the chance eye effect is continuously executed in the special figure game four or more times as the hold continuous effect does not occur. Judges whether or not the pending continuous effect execution flag shown is set to on. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to set the hold continuous effect as the effect for the second special figure game executed as the variation.

Then, when the hold continuous effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3658: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the hold continuous effect as an effect for the second special figure game executed as the special figure game (step S3569). ), The processes of steps S3625 to S3634 of FIG. 69 described above are executed.

On the other hand, in the MPU 51, when the hold continuous effect execution flag is set to off (step S3658: No), that is, when the hold continuous effect is not set as the effect for the second special figure game executed as the special figure game, the hold continuous effect is not set. The process is shifted to step S3604 of FIG. 67, and a normal effect is set as an effect for the second special figure game executed as the special figure game (the effect is set in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above). Then, the setting of the variation type (effect pattern) is completed.

In this way, when the hold continuous effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3658: Yes), by setting the hold continuous effect as the effect for the second special figure game executed as the special figure game (step). S3569), when the hold continuous effect is being executed in the first special figure game as the special figure game, the hold continuous effect is scheduled to be continuously executed in the next reserved first special figure game. Even if the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 due to the short opening of the second winning opening 315, the second winning opening when the second winning opening 315 is short-opened. In the second special figure game in which the game ball 99 enters the 315, the second special figure special effect is not executed, and the hold continuous effect is continuously executed. Therefore, when the player is executing the hold continuous effect in the first special figure game as the variation, the hold continuous effect is continuously executed in the next reserved first special figure game. Is scheduled, the hold continuous production is executed after the end of the second special figure game, which is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 at the time of short opening of the second winning opening 315. I don't feel uncomfortable about not being done. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the hold continuous effect is not executed in the first special figure game executed after the end of the second special figure game.

In particular, when the second winning opening 5 is short-opened, it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning opening 315 (the number of balls entered is small) as compared with the long opening of the second winning opening 315. Since it is highly possible that the player remembers that the hold continuous effect was executed before the game was executed, the game ball 99 to the second winning opening 315 when the second winning opening 315 is short-opened. In the second special figure game due to the entry of the ball, the effect of continuously executing the hold continuous effect without executing the second special figure special effect is high.

Further, in the short opening where it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning opening 315, it is assumed that the number of the game balls 99 entering the second winning opening 315 is small, so that the second winning opening 315 is short. Even if the hold continuous effect is continuously executed in the second special figure game due to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 in the case of opening, the number of continuous executions of the hold continuous effect may be greatly increased. Therefore, it is unlikely that the player feels uncomfortable with the continuous execution of the hold continuous effect in the second special figure game. On the contrary, by continuously executing the hold continuous effect in the second special figure game, the hold continuous effect can be effectively utilized in the second special figure game.

<Steps S3660 and S3661>
When the result of the jackpot lottery for all the special figure games executed thereafter including the second special figure game executed as the special figure game is out of order (step S3657: Yes in FIG. 71), that is, the hold continuous effect. If there may be an inconsistency between the result manifested by the continuous execution of the chance eye effect and the result of the jackpot lottery, the MPU 51 sets the channel eye flag to off (step S3660). By clearing the value of the chance eye count counter (step S3661), the continuous execution of the chance eye effect is restricted.

<Steps S3662 and S3663>
When the process for limiting the continuous execution of the chance eye effect is executed (steps S3660 and S3661), the MPU 51 has the same color as the hold continuous effect for the second special figure game executed as the special figure game. Along with setting the symbol effect (step S3662), the same color symbol indicating that the same color symbol is set as the hold continuous effect is set to on (step S3663), and the process proceeds to step S3664. That is, the MPU 51 changes the hold continuous effect for the second special figure game executed as the special figure game from the chance eye effect to the same color symbol effect.

Here, the chance-eye effect is a big hit confirmation effect when it is continuously executed in four or more special figure games as described above. Therefore, if the hold continuous effect for the second special figure game executed as the special figure game is changed from the chance eye effect to the same color symbol effect, the chance eye effect is continuously executed in four or more special figure games. Is avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent inconsistency between the result specified by continuously executing the chance eye effect as the hold continuous effect and the result of the jackpot lottery. On the other hand, the same-color symbol effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit as described above, and even if it is continuously executed in four or more special figure games, it is not a definite big hit effect. Therefore, by changing the hold continuous effect for the second special figure game executed as the special figure game from the chance eye effect to the same color symbol effect, the same color symbol effect is continuously executed in four or more special figure games. Even if this is the case, since the result of the jackpot lottery is not clearly indicated by the hold continuous effect, there is no inconsistency between the hold continuous effect and the result of the jackpot lottery.

In the present embodiment, when the hold continuous effect is changed from the chance eye effect to the same color symbol effect, the hold continuous effect is continuously executed for a plurality of special figure games, but the chance eye effect is changed to the same color symbol effect. By executing a special figure game in which an image of a chance eye and a completely out-of-order image that is not the same color pattern is displayed until the change is made, the hold continuous effect may be interrupted. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the continuous execution of the hold continuous effect in the special figure game four or more times. Further, by interrupting the hold continuous effect, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the same color pattern effect as a new hold continuous effect is started after the chance eye effect as the hold continuous effect is completed. As a result, it is possible to smoothly execute the change from the chance eye effect to the same color pattern effect without discomfort, and it is possible to disguise as if the change from the chance eye effect to the same color pattern effect was not made. Then, by disguising that the switch from the chance eye effect to the same color pattern effect was not performed, the inconvenience caused by the continuous execution of the chance eye effect is avoided without the player's understanding. can. By the way, when the chance eye effect is changed to the same color symbol effect in order to avoid the inconvenience when the chance eye effect is continuously executed in the special figure game four or more times, the same color after the change is made. The result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game in which the design effect is executed is out of the question. Therefore, if the change from the chance eye effect to the same color pattern effect is made, there is a concern that the player will realize that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game in which the changed same color pattern effect is executed is out of order. To. Therefore, by disguising that the change from the chance eye effect to the same color pattern effect was not made, the player can tell that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game in which the changed same color pattern effect is executed is out of order. It is prevented from being realized by.

<Step S3664>
When the hold continuous effect for the second special figure game executed as the special figure game is changed from the chance eye effect to the same color symbol effect, the MPU 51 adds the value of the short open winning counter to the value of the hold continuous effect execution count counter. (Step S3664).

Here, the value of the hold continuous effect execution count counter indicates the number of remaining special figure games in which the hold continuous effect is executed. Further, as for the value of the short-open winning counter, when the second winning opening 315 is short-opened (the game per short-opening normal figure is executed), the number M of the hold for the second special figure game has not reached the upper limit. It is the number of balls of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 in the state. Therefore, the MPU 51 is a value of the hold continuous effect execution number counter indicating the number of remaining special figure games in which the hold continuous effect is executed by adding the value of the short open winning counter to the value of the hold continuous effect execution number counter. Is reset to a value including the number of pending continuous effects executed in the second special figure game.

<Steps S3665 and S3666>
When the value of the hold continuous effect execution count counter is reset (step S3664), the MPU 51 clears the value of the short open winning counter (step S3665) and sets the short open closed flag to off (step S3666). The process of steps S3625 to S3634 of FIG. 69 is executed, and the effect type setting process is terminated.

[Stop symbol combination setting process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process executed in step S3337 of the command determination process of FIG. 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. The stop symbol combination setting process is a process of setting a symbol combination when the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is stopped and displayed. Here, FIGS. 73 and 74 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process.

<Step S3701>
As shown in FIG. 73, in the stop symbol combination setting process, in step S3701, whether or not the MPU 51 is set to turn on the chance eye flag indicating that the chance eye effect is first set as the hold continuous effect. to decide. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to set a chance eye (see FIG. 65) as a stop symbol combination.

Then, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3704 when the chance eye flag is set to on (step S3701: Yes), and processes when the chance eye flag is set to off (step S3701: No). To step S3702.

<Steps S3702 and S3703>
When the chance eye flag is set to off (step S3701: No), the MPU 51 indicates that the chance eye effect executed as the hold continuous effect in the special figure game is the final chance eye effect. Determines whether or not is set to on (step S3702).

Then, when the final chance eye flag is set to on (step S3702: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the final chance eye flag to off (step S3703), and shifts the process to step S3704. On the other hand, when the final chance eye flag is set to off (step S3702: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3705.

<Step S3704>
When the chance eye flag is set to on (step S3701: Yes), or when the final chance eye flag set to on is set to off (step S3703), the MPU 51 is a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed. As a chance eye (see FIG. 65), the stop symbol combination setting process is terminated.

For the type of chance eye to be stopped and displayed in the special figure game, for example, a chance eye type selection table corresponding to the chance eye type counter and the individual chance eye is set, and when the stop symbol combination is set. It is conceivable to set the chance eye from the chance item type selection table based on the value of the chance item type counter.

<Step S3705>
When the chance eye flag and the final chance eye flag are set to off (step S3702: No), the MPU 51 is set to turn on the same color symbol flag indicating that the same color symbol effect is set as the hold continuous effect. It is determined whether or not it is present (step S3705). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to set the same color symbol (see FIG. 65) as the stop symbol combination.

Then, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3708 when the same color symbol flag is set to on (step S3705: Yes), and processes when the same color symbol flag is set to off (step S3705: No). To step S3706.

<Steps S3706 and S3707>
When the same color symbol flag is set to off (step S3705: No), the MPU 51 is the final same color symbol flag indicating that the same color symbol effect executed as the hold continuous effect in the special symbol game is the last same color symbol effect. Determines whether or not is set to on (step S3706).

Then, when the final same color symbol flag is set to on (step S3706: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the final same color symbol flag to off (step S3707), and shifts the process to step S3708. On the other hand, when the final same color symbol flag is set to off (step S3706: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3709 in FIG. 74.

<Step S3708>
When the same color symbol flag is set to on (step S3705: Yes), or when the final same color symbol flag set to on is set to off (step S3707), the MPU 51 is a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed. The same color symbol (see FIG. 65) is set (step S3708), and the stop symbol combination setting process is terminated.

As the type of the same color symbol to be stopped and displayed in the fluctuation, for example, the same color symbol type selection table corresponding to the same color symbol type counter and the individual same color symbol is set, and the same color symbol at the time of setting the stop symbol combination is set. It is conceivable to set the same color symbol from the same color symbol type selection table based on the value of the type counter.

<Step S3709>
When the chance eye and the same color symbol are not set as the combination of the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the chance eye temporary stop flag is set to ON as shown in FIG. 74 (step S3709). The chance eye temporary stop flag is displayed as a stop when the result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game is a big hit and the fourth chance eye effect is executed as a hold continuous effect in the special figure game. This is a flag for temporarily stopping the chance eye before (for example, when the decorative pattern before reaching is fluctuating at high speed).

Then, when the chance eye temporary stop flag is set to on (step S3709: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3710, and when the chance eye temporary stop flag is set to off (step S3709: Yes). No), the process proceeds to step S3713.

<Steps S3710 to S3712>
When the chance eye temporary stop flag is set to on (step S3709: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the chance eye as a combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped (step S3710), and is a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed. The doublet is set as (step S3711). Then, the MPU 51 sets the chance eye temporary stop flag to off (step S3712), and ends the stop symbol combination setting process.

The chance to display the temporary stop can be set in the same manner as in step S3704 described above. The doublet to be stopped and displayed can be set in the same manner as in step S3104 of the command determination process of FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above.

<Step S3713>
If the chance eye and the same color symbol are not set as the combination of the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed, and the chance eye is not set as the combination of the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped, the MPU 51 normally sets the combination of the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed (described above). The combination of decorative symbols is set in the same manner as in the first embodiment), and the stop symbol combination setting process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as the opening mode of the second winning opening 315 by the electric accessory 315b, the short opening that makes it difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning opening 315 and the electric accessory 315b. The opening time of the second winning opening 315 is longer than that of the short opening, and the long opening is set so that the game ball 99 can easily enter the second winning opening 315. Further, in the present embodiment, the second special figure for the second hold is executed with priority over the first special figure game for the first hold.

Then, in the present embodiment, when the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game as the variation, the hold continuous effect is continuously executed in the next reserved first special figure game. When the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 due to the short opening of the second winning opening 315, the second special figure executed after the end of the first special figure game as the variation is scheduled. In the game, the hold continuous effect that was executed in the first special figure game is continuously executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game as the variation, the hold continuous effect is continuously executed in the next reserved first special figure game. If the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 due to the short opening of the second winning opening 315, the second winning opening 315 is short-opened. 2 In the second special figure game in which the game ball 99 enters the winning opening 315, the second special figure special effect is not executed, and the hold continuous effect is continuously executed. Therefore, when the player is executing the hold continuous effect in the first special figure game as the variation, the hold continuous effect is continuously executed in the next reserved first special figure game. Is scheduled, the hold continuous production is executed after the end of the second special figure game, which is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 at the time of short opening of the second winning opening 315. I don't feel uncomfortable about not being done. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the hold continuous effect is not executed in the first special figure game executed after the end of the second special figure game.

In particular, when the second winning opening 5 is short-opened, it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning opening 315 (the number of balls entered is small) as compared with the long opening of the second winning opening 315. Since it is highly possible that the player remembers that the hold continuous effect was executed before the game was executed, the game ball 99 to the second winning opening 315 when the second winning opening 315 is short-opened. In the second special figure game due to the entry of the ball, the effect of continuously executing the hold continuous effect without executing the second special figure special effect is high.

Further, in the short opening where it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning opening 315, it is assumed that the number of the game balls 99 entering the second winning opening 315 is small, so that the second winning opening 315 is short. Even if the hold continuous effect is continuously executed in the second special figure game due to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 in the case of opening, the number of continuous executions of the hold continuous effect may be greatly increased. Therefore, it is unlikely that the player feels uncomfortable with the continuous execution of the hold continuous effect in the second special figure game. On the contrary, by continuously executing the hold continuous effect in the second special figure game, the hold continuous effect can be effectively utilized in the second special figure game.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the chance eye effect, which is a big hit confirmation effect when continuously executed in four or more special figure games, is continuously executed in four or more special figure games. In that case, if the results of the jackpot lottery for the 4th and subsequent special figure games from the 1st special figure game in which the chance eye effect is started are all out of order, the number of special figure games in which the chance eye effect is executed is 4 times. Before this, the hold continuous effect is changed from the chance eye effect to the same color pattern effect that does not become a big hit confirmed effect even when it is continuously executed in four or more special figure games. As a result, the result that the chance eye effect is continuously executed as the hold continuous effect by avoiding the continuous execution of the chance eye effect in the special figure game four or more times, and the result clearly shown. It is possible to prevent inconsistencies from occurring with the result of the jackpot lottery.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game as the variation, the hold continuous effect is continuously executed in the next reserved first special figure game. When the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 due to the long opening of the second winning opening 315, the second special figure executed after the end of the first special figure game as the variation is scheduled. The second special figure special effect is executed in the game, and the captured image 78 of the hold continuous effect executed in the first special figure game is displayed. That is, according to the captured image 78, the hold continuous effect was executed in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect, and the hold continuous effect was executed in the first special figure game after the execution of the second special figure special effect. It is explicitly or suggested that the production will be performed. As a result, the possibility that the player forgets that the hold continuous effect was executed in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect is significantly reduced, and after the execution of the second special figure special effect. It is possible to grasp that the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game of. Therefore, even if the hold continuous effect is restarted in the first special figure game after the execution of the second special figure special effect, the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game after the execution of the second special figure special effect. It is significantly reduced that the player feels uncomfortable with what is done. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the restart of the hold continuous effect that was executed before the execution of the second special figure special effect after the end of the second special figure special effect.

In particular, when the second winning opening 315 is long-opened in the long-opening normal-figure game, the player is second compared to the case where the second winning opening 315 is short-opened in the short-opening normal-figure game. I am crazy about whether or not the game ball 99 is inserted into the winning opening 315 for a long time. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the player forgets that the hold continuous effect was executed before the execution of the second special figure game. Further, when the second winning opening 315 is long-opened in the game per long-opening normal drawing, the second winning opening 315 is compared with the case where the second winning opening 315 is short-opened in the game per short-opening normal drawing. Since the game ball 99 is easy to enter (the number of balls entered is large), the second special figure special effect is executed many times (the execution time of the second special figure special effect is long). Therefore, the time from the end of the hold continuous effect before the execution of the second special figure special effect (the start of the second special figure special effect) to the restart of the hold continuous effect due to the end of the second special figure special effect. In addition to being longer, the player's judgment as to whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special figure game in which the second special figure special effect is executed is a jackpot compared to the case where the first special figure game is executed. High degree of attention. In this way, when the second winning opening 315 is long-opened in the game per long-opening normal map, the second special feature is compared with the case where the second winning opening 315 is short-opened in the game per short-opening normal map. Since it is more likely that the player forgets that the hold continuous effect was executed before the execution of the figure game, it is more likely that the player forgets that the hold continuous effect was executed. The effect of clearly or suggesting that the hold continuous effect was executed in the first special figure game is high.

In this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the above-mentioned first embodiment can be made to the extent applicable.

[Third Embodiment]
In the above-mentioned second embodiment, as the opening mode of the second winning opening by the electric accessory, the first opening (short opening) which is the first time and the opening time of the second winning opening by the electric accessory are the first. In a gaming machine in which a second opening (long opening), which is a second time longer than the time, is set, it is planned that the hold continuous effect is continuously executed for a predetermined number of first special figure games. If a game ball enters the second winning opening, the holding continuous production is continuously executed in the second special figure game by entering the game ball into the second winning opening when the game is short-opened. On the other hand, in the second special figure game by entering the game ball into the second winning opening in the case of long opening, the second special figure special effect is executed and the second special figure special effect is executed. It is clearly or suggested that the hold continuous effect was executed before the execution of the second special figure special effect.

However, as the opening mode of the second winning opening by the electric accessory in the gaming machine, there are various opening modes other than the short opening and the long opening. For example, as an opening mode of the second winning opening, an opening mode in which the opening time of the second winning opening is one type, an opening mode in which the second winning opening is opened a plurality of times for one normal drawing, and a low mode. There are opening modes in which the opening time of the second winning opening differs between the frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, and short opening and long opening are not always set as the opening mode of the second winning opening.

Further, in a gaming machine, as an opening mode of the second winning opening, it is general that a mode in which a gaming ball is easily entered into the second winning opening is included as in the long opening of the second embodiment described above. be. On the other hand, even during the game, the game ball may not flow down in the game area of the game board. For example, when the reach effect is executed, the player interrupts the launch of the game ball when the hold for the first special figure has reached the upper limit, or the game is played due to a poor launch of the game ball. If the game ball does not reach the game area of the board, the game ball does not flow down the game area of the game board. Therefore, even if the second winning opening is opened in a manner that makes it easy for the game ball to enter, the second winning opening may be due to a delay in launching the game ball by the player or due to a poor launch of the game ball. The number of game balls entering the game may be reduced. For example, even if the second winning opening is opened so that the hold for the second special figure game can reach the upper limit number, the hold for the second special figure game does not reach the upper limit number, and the second prize opening is opened. The number of game balls entered into the winning opening may be as small as two or less, which is the same as the number of balls entered in the second winning opening at the time of short opening.

Here, in the above-mentioned second embodiment, when the opening mode of the second winning opening is long opening, the opening mode of the second winning opening is long regardless of the number of balls entered into the second winning opening. Corresponding to the opening, the second special figure special effect is executed in the second special figure game by the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening. On the other hand, as described above, even if the opening mode of the second winning opening is long opening, the number of balls entered into the second winning opening without reaching the upper limit of the number of reservations for the second special figure game. However, the number of balls may be as small as two or less, which is the same as the number of balls entered into the second winning opening at the time of short opening. Therefore, even though the opening mode of the second winning opening is short opening, the situation is similar to that in the case where the opening mode of the second winning opening is long opening. That is, substantially, an inconsistency occurs between the opening mode of the second winning opening and the effect.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the hold continuous effect is being executed in the first special figure game as the special figure game, the hold continuous effect is continuously performed on the next reserved first special figure game. (For example, special 1 relevant fluctuation + special 1 hold 1 + special 1 hold 2 (see FIG. 55 (A))), regardless of the opening mode of the electric accessory, the second prize is won. When a game ball enters the second winning opening due to the opening of the mouth, the number of balls entering the second winning opening is more than 0 and less than a predetermined number (for example, one or two), and the second winning opening. When the number of balls entered into the game exceeds a predetermined number (three or more), the effect in the second special figure game executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 75 (A), when the number of balls entered into the second winning opening is more than 0 and less than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, 1 or 2), the above-mentioned second winning opening is used. Similar to the short opening of the second winning opening of the embodiment, the hold continuous effect is continuously executed in the second special figure game. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 75 (B), when the number of balls entered into the second winning opening exceeds a predetermined number (three or more), the second winning opening of the above-mentioned second embodiment is opened for a long time. As in the case, the second special figure special effect was executed in the second special figure game, and the hold continuous effect was executed before the execution of the second special figure special effect when the second special figure special effect was executed. Is explicitly or suggested.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the hold continuous effect is scheduled to be continuously executed for a predetermined number of first special figure games, the game is played in the second winning opening by opening the second winning opening. When a ball enters, the number of balls entered into the second winning opening is less than or equal to a predetermined number exceeding 0, and the number of balls entered into the second winning opening exceeds a predetermined number. Due to the different effects performed in the game, the opening mode of the second winning opening by the electric accessory is a short opening in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning opening and a game ball entering the second winning opening. In addition to the game machine in which the easy-to-use long opening is set, that is, regardless of the opening / closing mode of the second winning opening, the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game executed after the end of the second special figure game. In addition to preventing the decline in the interest of the game due to not being played, after the end of the second special figure special effect, the pending continuous effect that was executed before the execution of the second special figure special effect will be resumed. The resulting decline in the enjoyment of the game is prevented.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game as the variation, the hold continuous effect is continuously executed in the next reserved first special figure game. When a game ball enters the second winning opening due to the opening of the second winning opening, the number of balls entered into the second winning opening is more than 0 and less than a predetermined number, and the first 2 When the number of balls entered into the winning opening exceeds a predetermined number, the second winning opening is opened in an opening / closing mode in which the game ball is easy to enter because the effect performed in the second special figure game is different. In some cases, it is possible to deal with the case where the number of game balls entered into the second winning opening is small.

Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, focusing on the differences from the above-mentioned second embodiment.

In this embodiment, when the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game as the special figure game, the hold continuous effect is continuously executed in the next reserved first special figure game. If a game ball enters the second winning opening due to the opening of the second winning opening, the number of balls entered into the second winning opening exceeds 0 and is less than the predetermined number, regardless of the opening mode. In the case of (for example, 1 or 2) and the case where the number of balls entered in the 2nd winning opening exceeds a predetermined number (3 or more), the entry of the game ball into the 2nd winning opening is an opportunity. It differs from the above-mentioned second embodiment in that the effect in the second special figure game to be executed is set to be different. Therefore, in this embodiment, a part of the procedure of the command determination process, the second special figure special effect setting process, and the effect type setting process is different from the above-mentioned second embodiment.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process of the present embodiment, the process when the second special figure hold command and the electric accessory closing command are received is different from the second embodiment described above.

Here, FIGS. 76 and 77 are flowcharts for explaining the differences from the above-mentioned second embodiment in the command determination process.

<Step S3801>
As shown in FIG. 76, in the command determination process of the present embodiment, when the second special figure hold command is received (step S3323: Yes), the second special figure hold information is the same as in the above-mentioned second embodiment. When the update process (step S3324) and the second special figure reserved image display process (step S3325) are executed, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the electric service open winning counter (step S3801), and ends the command determination process. do. That is, in the command determination process of the present embodiment, the number of balls entered into the second winning opening 315 is counted by distinguishing between the case of short opening and the case of long opening as in the second embodiment described above. Instead, the number of balls entered into the second winning opening 315 is counted by the electric service opening winning counter without distinguishing between the case of short opening and the case of long opening. Further, in the present embodiment, unlike the second embodiment described above, the second special figure special effect setting process is not executed even when the second special figure hold command is received, and the electric accessory closing command is not executed. Is executed in step S3802 of FIG. 77, which will be described later, on condition that the above is received (step S3330: Yes).

It should be noted that the electric service open winning counter is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the second special figure special effect in step S3901 of the second special figure special effect setting process of FIG. 78, which will be described later.

<Step S3802>
As shown in FIG. 77, in the command determination process of the present embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives the electric accessory closing command (step S3330: Yes), it distinguishes between the case of short opening and the case of long opening. When the electric accessory is closed, the second special figure special effect setting process is executed (step S3802). That is, in the present embodiment, when the second special figure special effect setting process executed when the second special figure hold command is received in the second embodiment described above receives the electric accessory closing command. Set.

[2nd special figure special effect setting process]
In the second special figure special effect setting process of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the second special figure special effect based on the number of balls entered into the second winning opening 315 until the electric accessory 315b is closed. In that respect, it is different from the above-mentioned second embodiment in which it is determined whether or not to execute the second special figure special effect depending on whether it is a short opening or a long opening.

Here, FIG. 78 is a flowchart for explaining the difference from the above-mentioned second embodiment in the second special figure special effect setting process of the present embodiment.

<Steps S3901 to S3903>
As shown in FIG. 78, when both the second special figure special effect setting flag and the second special figure special effect execution flag are set to off when the electric accessory 315b is closed (steps S3501 and S3502). Both No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the electric service open winning counter indicating the number of the game balls 99 entering the second winning opening 315 is 3 or more (step S3901).

When the value of the electric service open winning counter is 3 or more (step S3901: Yes), the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to on in order to start the second special figure special effect (step S3902). The second special figure special effect setting process is terminated.

When the value of the electric service open prize counter is not 3 or more (step S3901: No), that is, when the value of the electric service open prize counter is 2 or less, the second special figure indicates that the special effect of the second special figure is not started. The special effect non-setting flag is set to on (step S3903), and the second special figure special effect setting process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the second special figure special effect is executed when the value of the electric service opening winning counter is 3 or more, but when the value of the electric service opening winning counter is 4 or more, the electric service opening is performed. The second special figure special effect may be executed when the value of the winning counter is 2 or more.

[Variation type (effect pattern) setting process]
The variation type (effect pattern) setting process of the present embodiment is performed when the number of the game balls 99 entered into the second winning opening 315 is 3 or more regardless of the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 315b. In that the second special figure special effect is set for the second special figure game as a figure game, the electric accessory 315b is long regardless of the number of the game balls 99 entered into the second winning opening 315. It is different from the above-mentioned second embodiment in which the second special figure special effect is set for the second special figure game as the special figure when it is opened.

Here, FIGS. 79 to 81 are flowcharts for explaining the differences from the above-mentioned second embodiment in the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of the present embodiment.

<Steps S4001 to S4003>
As shown in FIG. 79, when the second special figure special effect is set for the second special figure game as the special figure game, the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special figure game as the special figure is In the case of a big hit (step S3645: Yes), the MPU 51 clears the value of the electric service open winning counter (step S4001). On the other hand, when the result of the big hit lottery for the second special figure game as the special figure game is not a big hit (step S3645: No), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the electric service open winning counter (step S4002), and after the subtraction. It is determined whether or not the value of the electric service open winning counter is 0 (step S4003).

That is, in the present embodiment, instead of the short-open winning counter and the long-open winning counter of the second embodiment described above, a common electric service opening winning counter is provided for both short-opening and long-opening. Therefore, in the present embodiment, instead of the process relating to the long open winning counter in the second embodiment described above, the processing of steps S4001 to S4003 relating to the electric service open winning counter is executed.

<Step S4004>
When it is determined in step S3641 that the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to off (step S3641: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4004 of FIG. 80, and the second special figure special effect It is determined whether or not the second special figure special effect non-setting flag indicating that is not started is set to on. That is, the MPU 51 is the second special figure game to be executed first when the second special figure game as the special figure game has two or less game balls 99 entered into the second winning opening 315. Determine if it exists.

Then, in the MPU 51, when the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to on (step S4004: Yes), that is, the second special figure game as the special figure game is a game to the second winning opening 315. When the second special figure game is executed first when the number of balls 99 is two or less, the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to off (step S4005), and the process is set to step S3654. Transition.

On the other hand, in the MPU 51, when the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to off (step S4004: No), that is, the second special figure game as the special figure game is a game to the second winning opening 315. If it is not the second special figure game to be executed first when the number of balls 99 is two or less, the process proceeds to step S3658 of FIG. 81, and the process is the same as that of the second embodiment described above. To execute.

<Step S4005 to Step S4008>
When the second special figure special effect non-setting flag indicating that the second special figure special effect is not started is set to on (step S4004: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the second special figure special effect setting flag. By setting (step S4005) and shifting the process to step S3654, the same process as that of the second embodiment described above is executed below.

However, in the present embodiment, as described above, instead of the short-open winning counter and the long-open winning counter of the second embodiment described above, a common electric service opening winning counter is provided for both short-opening and long-opening. There is. Therefore, in the present embodiment, instead of the processing related to the long open winning counter in the second embodiment described above, the processing of step S4006 relating to the electric service open winning counter and the processing of steps S4007 and S4008 of FIG. 81 are executed. To.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of balls entered into the second winning opening 315 is more than 0 and less than a predetermined number (for example, one or two), the first of the above-mentioned second embodiment. 2 As in the case of the short opening of the winning opening 315, the hold continuous effect is continuously executed in the second special figure game. On the other hand, when the number of balls entered into the second winning opening 315 exceeds a predetermined number (three or more), the second special feature is the same as when the second winning opening 315 of the second embodiment is opened for a long time. The second special figure special effect is executed in the figure game. Therefore, as an opening mode of the second winning opening 315 by the electric accessory 315b, a short opening that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning opening 315 and a long opening that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second winning opening 315. This is due to the fact that the hold continuous effect is not executed in the first special figure game executed after the end of the second special figure game, regardless of the opening / closing mode of the second winning opening 315, other than the game machine in which is set. The game is prevented from deteriorating the interest of the game to be played, and after the end of the second special figure special effect, the hold continuous effect that was executed before the execution of the second special figure special effect is resumed. The decline in interest is prevented.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game as the special figure game, the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 by opening the second winning opening 315. In the second special figure game, there are cases where the number of balls entered into the second winning opening 315 is more than 0 and less than a predetermined number, and cases where the number of balls entered into the second winning opening 315 exceeds a predetermined number. By different productions, it is possible to deal with the case where the number of game balls entering the second winning opening 315 is small when the second winning opening 315 is opened in an opening / closing mode in which the game ball is easy to enter. It will be possible.

In this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the above-mentioned first and second embodiments can be made to the extent applicable.

Further, in the above-mentioned second and third embodiments, various changes can be made. For example, in the above-mentioned second and third embodiments, a reduced image of the image of the hold continuous effect executed in the first special figure game is displayed in the lower left area of the symbol display unit 341 as the captured image 78. However, the captured image 78 may be displayed by another method as long as the variable display of the decorative pattern can be visually recognized. For example, the captured image 78 may be displayed on the back side of the decorative design as a background effect on the entire design display unit 341, or the decorative design may be displayed with a visible density (transparency) on the front side of the decorative design. Often, only the outline may be displayed on the front side or the back side of the decorative pattern.

In addition, the hold continuous effect was executed in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect, and the hold continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game after the execution of the second special figure special effect. The clarification or suggestion of this is not limited to the display of the captured image 78, and other methods may be used as long as the variable display of the decorative pattern can be visually recognized. For example, the indication or suggestion is held in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect, and in the first special figure game after the execution of the second special figure special effect. The execution of the continuous effect may be displayed as a specific image different from the captured image 78, such as an icon image, a character image, and an image in which two or more of these are combined.

Further, the captured image 78 may be displayed during the entire period during the execution of the second special figure game, but is constant from a part of the period during the execution of the second special figure game, for example, from the start of the second special figure game. It may be displayed only for a period, only for a certain period before the end of the second special figure game, for a certain period from the start of the second special figure game and for a certain period before the end of the second special figure game, and the captured image may be displayed. There is no particular limitation on the display period of 78. Further, the captured image 78 does not need to be displayed in all the second special figure games when the second special figure game is executed a plurality of times in succession, for example, among the second special figure games executed a plurality of times. Only the second special figure game executed first, only the second special figure game executed last, may be displayed in the second special figure game executed first and last, and the captured image 78 is displayed. The number of times of the second special figure game and the number of times of the second special figure game in which the second special figure special effect is executed may be different.

In addition, the hold continuous effect was executed in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect such as the captured image, and the hold continuous effect was executed in the first special figure game after the execution of the second special figure special effect. The clarification or suggestion that is executed may be displayed by a display means other than the symbol display unit 341 in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. For example, the explicit or suggestion may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 that displays the non-set value that is the game set value other than the set value that is the game set value set in the game machine 10. When a display means for executing an image effect such as a sub liquid crystal display unit other than the symbol display unit 341 on which a variable display of a symbol or an image effect is executed is provided, it may be displayed on the display means such as this sub liquid crystal display unit. .. In this way, the hold continuous effect was executed in the first special figure game before the execution of the second special figure special effect, and the hold continuous effect was executed in the first special figure game after the execution of the second special figure special effect. By using other display means such as a sub-liquid crystal display unit different from the symbol display unit 341 on which the image effect is executed, the explicit or suggestion of the fact that the image is displayed can be changed or displayed as a decorative symbol on the symbol display unit 341. The manifestation or suggestion can be displayed by other display means without disturbing the display of the effect. Thereby, both the variable display and the image effect and the explicit or suggestive can be surely and appropriately displayed without obstructing each other's visual recognition.

Further, the second special drawing special effect is not limited to the examples of FIGS. 61 (B) and 61 (C), and may be in other embodiments. For example, the second special figure special effect may be to display another image such as a character image in place of or in addition to the character image, and in place of or in addition to the effect in the symbol display unit 341. A speaker 26 may be used to perform a predetermined audio effect.

Further, the second special figure special effect may be an effect that clearly or suggests that the player is given a privilege when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the decorative symbol is not necessarily a doublet symbol (for example, doublet). It is not necessary that the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot when the condition is satisfied, provided that it is stopped and displayed. Predetermined conditions include, for example, that the decorative pattern reaches the reach, that a specific effect is performed, and the like. In other words, the present invention also applies to machines other than those in which the jackpot type when the jackpot lottery result triggered by the entry of the gaming ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 is a jackpot is always a probable variable jackpot. Applicable. For example, the present invention is a probabilistic jackpot as a result of a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into a second winning opening 315, in addition to a loop probabilistic machine such as the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above. It is also applicable to ST machines such as V-ST machines and other types of machines, including hits other than the above.

Further, in the above-mentioned second and third embodiments, the hold continuous effect and the second special figure special effect are executed in the normal game state which is the low frequency support mode, and the probabilistic game state and the time saving game which are the high frequency support mode. Although it was set so that the hold continuous effect and the second special figure special effect are not executed in the state, the hold continuous effect and the second special effect are performed in both or one of the probabilistic game state and the time-saving game state, which are the high-frequency support modes. The special figure special effect may be executed.

Further, in the second and third embodiments described above, when the hold continuous effect is continuously executed in the first special figure game of a predetermined time, the chance eye effect is continuously performed in the special figure game four or more times. With the exception of avoiding the occurrence of inconsistencies in execution, a single type of hold continuous effect is executed in each first special figure game, but different hold continuous effects are performed in each first special figure game. It may be executed, and if it is a combination that can be executed as an effect, a plurality of types of hold continuous effects (for example, a mini character effect and a zone effect) may be executed at the same time in one first special figure game.

Further, in the above-mentioned second and third embodiments, the timing of changing the type of the hold continuous effect is the timing at which the result of the jackpot lottery and the content specified by the predetermined hold continuous effect do not cause inconsistency. Anyway, for example, a special figure game executed after the special figure game executed at the stage when it is found that an inconsistency may occur between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content specified by the hold continuous production. To the special figure game in which there is an inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content specified by the hold continuous effect (for example, the special figure game executed for the fourth time from the start of the predetermined hold continuous effect). All you need is. That is, the timing of changing the type of the hold continuous effect is the timing in which there is no inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content specified by the hold continuous effect, the first special figure game and the second special figure game. It may be any of.

Of course, even when the number of special figure games in which the hold continuous effect is executed is a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times) or more when the hold continuous effect other than the chance eye effect is executed, the type of the hold continuous effect is You may make changes. That is, even if no inconvenience occurs even if a single type of hold continuous effect is continuously executed a predetermined number of times or more, the type of hold continuous effect may be changed. In this way, if there is no inconvenience even if a single type of hold continuous effect is continuously executed more than a predetermined number of times, the type of hold continuous effect is changed, so that a single type of hold continuous effect can be produced in many special cases. Since the player is prevented from feeling bored when the game is continuously executed, the interest of the game is caused by the continuous execution of a single type of reserved continuous effect in many special figure games. Is prevented from decreasing.

Also, not only when changing the type of hold continuous effect in order to prevent inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content specified by the hold continuous effect, but also changing the type of hold continuous effect. When the variable display time for the hold of the first special figure game that triggered the start of the hold continuous production is long, that is, the lottery result in the big hit lottery for the hold is a big hit, or the big hit expectation is high. When the reach effect is executed, the type of the hold continuous effect after the change is higher than the type of the predetermined hold continuous effect before the change so that the jackpot expectation is higher. You may make changes. For example, if the predetermined hold continuous effect before the change is the mini character effect with the lowest jackpot expectation, as a specific hold continuous effect after the change, the chance eye effect, the same color pattern effect, or the same color pattern effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the mini character effect, is used. A zone effect (mode effect) may be set, and if the predetermined hold continuous effect before the change is a chance eye effect or the same color symbol effect, the chance eye effect and the same color symbol effect are set as the specific hold continuous effect after the change. A zone effect (mode effect) with a higher expectation of a big hit may be set. In this case, the difference in the jackpot expectation between the specific hold continuous effect after the change and the predetermined hold continuous effect before the change is set to, for example, 10% or more, preferably 25% or more.

Further, the change of the hold continuous effect is not limited to once, and may be performed a plurality of times.

Further, in each embodiment, the matters described in other embodiments can be applied to the extent applicable.

[Other variants]
In each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the outer frame 14 included in the gaming machine 10 is generally made of wood, but may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or steel (carbon steel). ), Cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel and the like. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the inner frame 12 included in the gaming machine 10 may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or the like. It may be made of metal such as cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the front frame 11 included in the gaming machine 10 may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or the like. It may be made of metal such as cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11, and the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12. The inner frame 12 may be locked to the front frame 11 inseparably, the back pack unit 13 may be locked to the inner frame 12 inseparably by a locking means such as one cylinder lock, and the inner frame 12 may be locked to the front. A locking means that makes it impossible to open the frame 11 and a locking means that makes the back pack unit 13 unable to open the inner frame 12 may be provided separately. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the inner frame 12 in front view. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by rotatably supporting the right end portion of the inner frame 12 in front view by the front frame 11. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the back pack unit 13 in front view by the inner frame 12. However, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by rotatably supporting the right end of the back pack unit 13 when viewed from the front. You may. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the game board 31 included in the game machine 10 may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or the like. It may be made of metal such as cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the gaming machine 10 adopts the configuration in which the upper plate 23 and the lower plate 24 are provided, but the lower plate 24 is omitted and the configuration in which only the upper plate 23 is provided may be adopted. good. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the configuration in which the launch handle 22 is provided on the right side of the front view is adopted, but the configuration in which the launch handle 22 is provided in another portion such as the left side of the front view is adopted. May be good. Further, a configuration in which a plurality of launch handles 22 are provided may be adopted, such as a configuration in which the launch handles 22 are provided on both the right side and the left side of the front view. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the touch sensor 21a capable of detecting whether or not the player is touching the firing handle 22 (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the firing handle 22) is fired. Although the configuration provided on the handle 22 is adopted, the configuration in which the touch sensor 21a is omitted may be adopted as the firing handle 22. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the launching means capable of launching the game ball, for example, a configuration in which the game ball is launched by using an elastic force such as a spring. , A configuration in which a game ball is launched by using the wind pressure when the compressed gas is ejected may be adopted. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, in a state where the firing handle 22 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, for example, one game ball (100 game balls per minute) is generated every 0.6 sec. Although it is configured to be fired, it may be configured to fire less than 100 (eg, 60) game balls per minute, and 100 or more (eg, 200) per minute. It may be configured in which a game ball is fired. Further, the game ball may be launched in a state where the firing handle 22 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount. Further, the game balls may be fired one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the configuration including the speaker 26 as a means capable of outputting sound is adopted, but a configuration including an earphone jack in addition to the speaker 26 or in place of the speaker 26 may be adopted. good. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones brought by the gaming ball to the earphone jack, the gaming ball is not disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding gaming machines 10 and can listen to the sounds of the gaming machine 10 being played by itself. It will be possible to fully enjoy it. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that starts the variable display based on the fact that the game ball enters the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 is displayed. A configuration including a 7-segment display device is adopted as a possible means, but another configuration can be adopted as a means capable of displaying the first special symbol and / or the second special symbol, for example, a plurality of LED lamps may be arranged in a row. A configuration arranged in a matrix, a configuration including a display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device, a configuration including a halogen lamp, and the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-mentioned second and third embodiments, the predetermined suggestion information is the captured image 78 or the like displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, but the predetermined suggestive information is the symbol display. It may be displayed by a display means other than the unit 341. In this case, it is conceivable to set a dedicated display means for displaying predetermined suggestion information as the display means, but it is conceivable to use the display means already provided in the gaming machine 10. That is, the predetermined suggestion information is, for example, a 7-segment display unit 39 that displays a non-set value that is a game set value other than a set value that is a game set value set in the game machine 10, or a main display unit 36 (normally). It may be displayed on the symbol display unit 361, the first special symbol display unit 362, the second special symbol display unit 363, the first reserved special number display unit 364, the second special symbol reserved number display unit 365), and the like. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, a configuration including two LED lamps is adopted as a means capable of displaying a normal symbol that starts a variable display based on the passage of a game ball through the through gates 317L and 317R. However, other configurations can be adopted as means capable of displaying ordinary symbols, for example, a configuration in which three or more LED lamps are arranged in a row or a matrix, a 7-segment display device, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display device. A configuration including a display device such as, a configuration including a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the display means such as the symbol display unit 341 capable of displaying the decorative symbol, and for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. An LED display device, a plasma display device, a drum rotary display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, a configuration in which two or more of these are combined, and the like may be adopted. Further, in the second and third embodiments described above, the predetermined suggestion information is continued by continuously displaying the captured image 78 displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed. However, the suggestion information to be displayed is not limited to the captured image 78 and may be other information. For example, it may be the one displayed in the first special figure game in which the chance eye effect is continuously displayed or the first special figure game immediately before the second special figure game is executed, and the first special figure game may be used. The entire screen of the above or the image displayed on the screen may be explained in characters. In that case, regardless of the effect that was continuously displayed, the type of effect that was continuously displayed at that time, the number of big hits, the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit, the number of reserved balls, the number of fired balls, etc. There may be a plurality of combinations thereof, or one of them. Further, in the above-mentioned second and third embodiments, a combination of stop symbols such as a chance eye effect is used as the hold continuous effect, but the player is not limited to this and the continuity of the effect can be visually recognized. Anything is fine. For example, the display object displayed on the back side of the changing symbol may be continuously displayed in a plurality of first special figure games, for example, a specific character is continuously displayed. It may be a character suggesting that, a display body displayed as a part of the background image, or the background itself. Further, the effect to be changed is also the same, as long as the player can visually recognize that the continuous effect has been changed, for example, the effect may be changed to display a specific character. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, but various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, and combinations of two or more thereof can be adopted. For example, as the decorative pattern, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, combinations of two or more of these may be adopted. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. When a configuration in which one symbol row of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration in which a big hit is won when a specific decorative symbol (for example, "7") is stopped may be adopted. In addition, when a configuration in which two or four or more rows of decorative symbols are adopted, for example, a configuration in which a big hit is won when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line (effective line) is adopted. May be good. Further, in the above-mentioned second and third embodiments, the zone effect (mode effect) having a high expectation of big hit is set as the hold continuous effect, but the hold continuous effect is other than the zone effect (mode effect). It may include a background effect. That is, a plurality of background effects may be set as the hold continuous effect, and in this case, it is conceivable to set different jackpot expectations for the plurality of background effects. Then, when a plurality of background effects having different jackpot expectations are set as the hold continuous effect, and when a low expectation background effect having a low jackpot expectation is executed as the hold continuous effect, the low expectation background effect is changed to a larger hit. It is also conceivable to change to a high-expectation background production with high expectations. Of course, a plurality of background effects having the same degree of jackpot expectation, for example, a plurality of low-expectation background effects having a low jackpot expectation may be set, and the background effects may be changed between the low-expectation background effects. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory such as the opening / closing door 319 that opens and closes the large winning opening such as the variable winning opening 316, for example, below the plate-shaped member. A rotation axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided, and the plate-shaped member can be rotated forward around the rotation axis to open the large winning opening, or a plate that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board 31. A configuration in which the large winning opening is opened and closed by a shaped member, a configuration in which the feather member is rotated in the left-right direction (clockwise direction and counterclockwise direction) to open and close the large winning opening, and the like may be adopted. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the so-called loop probabilistic machine has been described. In a gaming machine that shifts to a more advantageous gaming state, a V winning opening is provided in a large winning opening such as a variable winning opening 316. The V winning opening may be one that can always win a prize when the large winning opening is opened, but a configuration that is opened when a specific condition is satisfied may be adopted. Specific conditions include, for example, execution of a specific round game (for example, a first round game, a final round game). Further, when the V winning opening is configured to be opened when a specific condition is satisfied, a movable member capable of opening and closing the V winning opening is provided in the V winning opening, and the operation of the movable member is controlled to control the V. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the winning opening is opened and closed. Further, when the V winning opening is opened when a specific condition is satisfied, a configuration may be adopted in which a game ball enters the V winning opening or the V winning opening is closed after a certain period of time has elapsed. .. In addition, the effect to be changed (holding continuous effect) may be the type of decorative pattern used in the first special figure game, or may be the background color tone of the first special figure game, and the first special figure game. It may be a part of the background of the figure game, or may be the whole background of the first special figure game. Further, the timing of the change may be at the start of the fluctuation of the first special figure game or may be in the middle of the fluctuation, and a specific event (for example, reach establishment, super reach development, special reach development) in the fluctuation may occur. It may be the timing when the pattern is stopped, or it may be the time when the symbol is stopped. For example, a part or the whole effect (specific effect image) of the background before a specific event occurs has a different type of background (for example, the timing at which a specific event (for example, reach establishment, super reach development, special reach development) occurs). It may be changed to a predetermined effect image). Further, a plurality of large winning openings may be provided, and for example, a large winning opening having a V winning opening and a large winning opening not having a V winning opening may be provided separately. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, various ordinary electric accessories such as the electric accessory 315b for switching whether or not the entry to the starting winning opening such as the second winning opening 315 of the game ball is restricted are various. A configuration can be adopted, for example, a tulip-type ordinary electric accessory (so-called electric chew) in which a pair of movable valves (wing members) can be opened to the left and right, and a rotation axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction below the plate-shaped member are provided. The start winning opening can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation axis, and the starting winning opening can be opened and closed by the plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board 31. , The starting winning opening may be opened and closed by rotating the feather member in the left-right direction (clockwise direction and counterclockwise direction). Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the number of prize balls set in each winning opening (general winning opening 313, first winning opening 314, second winning opening 315, variable winning opening 316, etc.) is an example. By appropriately changing the number of prize balls set in each winning opening, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of gaming machines 10 having different specifications.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a so-called loop probabilistic machine, which is a type 1 gaming machine, has been described. By the way, as a gaming machine, in addition to a loop probabilistic machine, there are a type 1 type 2 type mixer and the like. In the 1-type and 2-type mixer, two types of jackpot games, a 1-type jackpot game and a 2-type jackpot game, can be executed. The type 1 jackpot game is executed after the end of the special figure game that clearly indicates that the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, for example, when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot. In addition, after the end of the type 1 jackpot game, the game shifts to a time-saving game state in which the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening is facilitated as a profit state. On the other hand, in the type 2 big hit game, when the big hit lottery result triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening in the short-time game state is a small hit, the small hit game based on the small hit is predetermined. It is executed on condition that a game ball is inserted into the winning opening.

Further, in a gaming machine having various specifications, it is conceivable to shift to a time-saving gaming state on condition that the result of the big hit lottery is out of order. For example, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order, the type of outlier is that the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, or the predetermined number of times in the low probability mode (for example, 2.5 of the jackpot probability denominator). It is conceivable that the lottery results will be continuously missed (so-called ceiling) in the big hit lottery (double to triple).

In a gaming machine, it is important to increase the degree of attention and interest in the game to improve the player's motivation to play. That is, when a configuration is adopted in which the conditions for the time-saving game are satisfied and the game shifts to the time-saving game state when the time-saving symbol is out of stop, it is possible to increase the attention and interest in the game and improve the player's motivation to play. It is important to give new playability that can be done.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, the gaming machine is provided with "satisfaction of game conditions" as a first or second opportunity, and is provided with a "profit state" as a predetermined state executed by a predetermined state executing means. Further, the state executing means has a "low profit state" as a feasible first state and a "high profit state" as a second state, and has a "high profit condition established state" as a specific state.

The first opportunity and the second opportunity may be such that the conditions of the game are satisfied at different timings. As the first and second triggers, for example, a predetermined result is obtained in a predetermined lottery, a game ball enters a predetermined area, and the game ball enters a predetermined area to detect it by a detector. The lottery is performed, the opportunity for the predetermined lottery is established, the predetermined gaming state is established, the specific gaming state is generated by the establishment of the predetermined gaming state, and the specific gaming state is Ending, any combination of them, etc.

The predetermined state may be a profit state that gives a profit in a predetermined period or a profit state that is likely to give a profit. The predetermined states include, for example, a predetermined number of time-saving gaming states, a predetermined number of probable-changing gaming states, a predetermined period of time-saving gaming state, a predetermined period of probabilistic gaming state, a predetermined period of specific jackpot state, and a predetermined period of small-hit states. Any combination of the above can be mentioned.

The first state and the second state are at least high and low of a state in which a predetermined event is controlled in a manner advantageous to the player and a state in which the predetermined event is controlled in a manner more advantageous to the player than this state. It suffices as long as it is controlled by two profit states and there is a relative difference in profit to the player. As the first state and the second state, for example, a predetermined movable object is made to perform a predetermined motion, a predetermined movable object is made to perform a predetermined motion, and a predetermined movable object is made to perform a predetermined motion. %, A lottery for a predetermined movable object to perform a predetermined operation with a predetermined probability, an improvement in the time for a predetermined movable object to perform a predetermined operation, an arbitrary combination thereof, and the like.

Further, in this gaming machine, a specific value is determined when the second trigger is established in a predetermined state. The specific value may be a numerical value whose execution period can be determined by the specific value. Examples of the specific value include the number of times a predetermined gaming state is executed, a reference value that is the basis for executing the predetermined game state, specific time data, a specific random number value, and any combination thereof.

The specific state may be a state in which a high profit condition can be determined so that it can be determined that a profit is given with a high profit when a predetermined profit is given. The high profit condition is that the predetermined number of times exceeds or falls below the threshold value, the predetermined time exceeds or falls below the threshold value, the predetermined determination result is obtained, and the predetermined information is stored. And so on. Further, the method for determining whether or not the high profit condition is satisfied may be any method, such as discrimination by software, discrimination by a hardware circuit, or a combination thereof, as long as it is feasible.

The execution period may be any one whose period is determined based on a specific value. The execution period includes, for example, the number of special figure games, the game execution period, the number of times the game ball is won in various winning openings, the number of times the through gate game ball passes, the number of times the variable winning opening is opened, and the variation time of various variable symbols. , Display time of stop result of various variable symbols, time of granting profit as a stop result of various variable symbols, arbitrary combination thereof, and the like.

Here, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes big hits, small hits, and misses as a result of the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening that can be won by the support of the electric accessory. .. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as the time-saving gaming state, the short opening time-shortening gaming state (second time-saving gaming state) as the low profit state in which the opening time of the electric accessory is short and the opening time of the electric accessory are long. It includes a long open time-shortened game state (third time-shortened game state) as a high profit state.

The short-open short-time game state (second short-time game state) is shifted to the condition of the second short-time game after the end of the type 1 jackpot game in the normal game state (non-time-short game state), and the profit state is the first. 2 The opening time of the winning opening is set to a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning opening. In this way, in the short open time short game state (second short time game state), it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second winning opening, so it is difficult to receive the second special figure big hit lottery, so the small hit game is played. Not only is it difficult to execute, but it is a low profit state in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to enter in the V winning opening that provides an opportunity to execute the two types of big hit games in the small hit game. As a result, in the short open time short game state, the two-kind jackpot game is difficult to be executed or is not substantially executed.

On the other hand, the long open time short game state (third time short game state) is shifted to the case where the predetermined condition described later is satisfied in the short open time short game state (second time short game state), and the opening time of the second winning opening is changed. It is set for a long time (for example, 3 seconds) so that the game ball can easily enter the second winning opening. In this way, in the long open time short game state, it is easy for the game ball to enter the second winning opening, so that it is easy to receive the second special figure big hit lottery, so that the small hit game is not only easy to be executed. , It is said that a game ball can enter the V winning opening that provides an opportunity to execute a two-kind big hit game in a small hit game. Therefore, the long-open time-short game state is a high-profit state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the short-open time-short game state, in which the two-kind jackpot game is easily executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the result of the second special figure big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening, the big hit, the small hit and the miss are included as described above, but as a miss, the said After the end of the second special symbol game, the time-reduced symbol that can be shifted to the long-time-reduced game state is stopped and displayed. When this time-saving symbol stop off is set, there is a possibility that the conditions for the time-saving game are satisfied and the game shifts to the time-saving state.

Here, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned predetermined state in which the short open time short game state (second time short game state) as a low profit state is shifted to the long open time short game state (third time short game state) which is a high profit state. The conditions of the first are that the result of the jackpot lottery in the short-open time-saving game state is the time-saving symbol stop-out, and second, the number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state set for the time-saving symbol stop-out. The specific value) is larger than the number of remaining time-reduced games (predetermined unexecuted value) in the short-open time-reduced game state (the specific condition is satisfied). In this case, the high profit condition is satisfied and the state shifts to the long open time short game state (third time short game state) which is the high profit state. For example, if the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop is 50 times, and the remaining number of time-saving games in the short-opening time-saving game state is 49 times or less, the profit condition is high. While the state is established and the state is shifted to the long-time short-time game state (second state), which is a high-profit state, the high-profit condition is obtained if the number of remaining time-saving games in the short-open time-short game state is 50 or more. It does not become the established state of, and stays in the short-time short-time game state (second short-time game state) as a low profit state without shifting to the long-time short-time game state.

As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the time-saving gaming state (in the present embodiment, the long-opening time-saving gaming state), which is a high-profit state in which the two-kind big-hit game via the small-hit game can be executed, is the third time-saving. In order to shift to the game state), the time-saving game state as a low-profit state (in the present embodiment, the second time-saving game state, which is the short-open time-shortening game state), which is a low-profit state in which the conditions for the time-saving game are satisfied after the end of the type 1 jackpot game, is entered. The transition to the game state) is a condition, and the result of the big hit lottery in the short open time-shortened game state (second time-shortened game state) as a low profit state is the time-saving symbol stop off, and the time-saving symbol stop off. When the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the set number of time-saving games is larger than the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), the condition of the high profit state is satisfied and the transition is made. .. That is, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has stricter conditions for shifting to the long-opening time-shortening gaming state, which is a high-profit state capable of executing the two-kind jackpot game, as compared with the conventional one-kind two-kind mixing machine. Further, a new game property is given by using the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time-saving game number set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation. As a result, in the present embodiment, the game is expected to be stopped and displayed in the short-open time-saving game state as a low-profit state in which the conditions for the time-saving game are satisfied after the end of the type 1 jackpot game. You can enjoy the progress of the game, and if the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, pay attention to whether or not the game progresses to the long-open time-shortening game state, which is a high-profit state where you can execute the two-kind jackpot game. Can be enjoyed. As a result, in the 1-type and 2-type mixer, it is possible to increase the degree of attention and interest in the game and improve the player's motivation to play.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the short opening time shortening gaming state (second time saving gaming state) as a low profit state is shifted to the long opening time saving gaming state (third time saving gaming state) which is a high profit state. The condition is that the result of the jackpot lottery in the short-open time-shortening game state as a low profit state is the time-saving symbol stop off, and the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time-saving game number set for the time-saving symbol stop off is the relevant. It means that the condition of high profit state is satisfied, which is larger than the number of remaining time-saving games in the short-opening time-shortening game state. In this way, the result of the big hit lottery in the short-open time-shortening game state as a low profit state is the time-saving symbol stop off, and the upper limit of the number of time-saving games as a specific value set for the time-saving symbol stop off (specified). When the number of times) is greater than the number of remaining time-saving games in the short-opening time-shortening game state, the condition of the high-profit state is satisfied and the short-opening time-shortening gaming state as the low-profit state is changed to the high-profit state. When shifting to a certain long-open time-short game state, the smaller the number of remaining time-short games in the short-open time-short game state as a low profit state (the greater the number of executions of the special figure game in the short-open time-short game state). The game property that it is easy to shift to the long open time short game state, which is a high profit state, is given. As a result, as the number of remaining time-saving games in the short-open time-saving game state as a low profit state decreases (as the number of executions of the special figure game in the second time-saving game increases), the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed. Since attention will be further raised to expectations for and whether or not the game will shift to the long-opening time-short game state, which is a high-profit state, the degree of attention and interest in the game will be further increased, and the player's willingness to play will be further improved. be able to.

Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 113, focusing on the differences from the above-mentioned first embodiment. However, important matters in this embodiment may be described again even if they have already been described in the first embodiment described above.

[Structure of gaming machine 10]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. Here, FIG. 82 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIGS. 83 and 84 are the feather accessory devices 83 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 82. It is sectional drawing which shows the main part.

As shown in FIG. 82, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with two through gates 317L and 317R as in the first embodiment described above. The through gate 317L is provided in the left side area of the game board 31, and a game ball launched in the left side area of the game board 31 can pass through. The left through gate 317L has a ball entry sensor 317La (see FIG. 7), and the entry sensor 317La determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the through gate 317L. The through gate 317R is provided in the right side area of the game board 31, and a game ball launched in the right side area of the game board 31 can pass through. The through gate 317R on the right side has a ball entry sensor 317Ra (see FIG. 7), and the entry sensor 317Ra determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the through gate 317R.

In this way, by providing the through gates 317L and 317R in the left side region and the right side region of the game board 31, the game ball is launched into either the left side region of the game board 31 or the right side area of the game board 31. Also, based on the fact that the game ball passes through the through gates 317L and 317R, the conditions for the game of the regular drawing lottery are satisfied, and the lottery per drawing is executed. Then, when the lottery result in the lottery per figure is a hit, the game per normal figure is executed, and the electric accessory 315b is released in this game per normal figure, so that the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening 315. 99 is allowed to enter the ball. That is, in the present embodiment, not only in the short-time game state in the high-frequency support mode, but also in the normal game state in the low-frequency support mode by launching the game ball 99 in the left region of the game board 31, the second winning opening It is possible to put a game ball into 315.

Further, unlike the first embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured as a type 1 and type 2 mixing machine instead of a loop probabilistic machine, and is provided in the right region of the gaming board 31. The feather accessory device 83 is provided. The feather accessory device 83 is operated in the small hit game executed when the result of the big hit lottery in the second special figure game is a small hit, and goes to the V winning opening 833 described later in the small hit game. It provides an opportunity to execute a two-kind jackpot game by entering the game ball of.

The feather accessory device 83 is provided above the variable winning device 316 and on the right side of the symbol display unit 341. As shown in FIG. 83, the vane accessory device 83 has an introduction port 831 for introducing the game ball 99 inside the feather accessory device 83, and a closed position for closing the introduction port 831 (the position of the solid line in FIG. 83). It has a movable vane 832 that is rotated by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown) between the opening position (the position of the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 83) for opening the introduction port 831. When the introduction port 831 is closed by the movable wing portion 832 because the movable wing portion 832 is in the standby position, the game ball 99 is not introduced into the wing accessory device 83. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 84 (A) and 84 (B), when the introduction port 831 is opened due to the movable wing portion 832 being in the open position, the movable wing portion 832 receives the game ball 99. It is possible. The game ball 99 received by the movable vane portion 832 can be introduced into the inside of the feather accessory device 83 via the introduction port 831. The movable vane 832 is operated to the open position when the lottery result in the big hit lottery triggered by the winning of the second starting port 315 is a small hit (see FIGS. 87 (A) and 87 (B)). The introduction port 831 is opened for a predetermined time, for example, a time (1.8 seconds or less) when one to three game balls 99 enter the vane device 83. Of course, the opening time of the introduction port 831 at the time of a small hit may be set as appropriate, and is not limited to the time shown above.

Inside the feather accessory device 83, a V winning opening 833, a normal winning opening 834, and a V winning opening opening / closing portion 835 are provided. Each of the V winning opening 833 and the normal winning opening 834 is provided with a ball winning sensor (not shown), and it is detected by these winning sensors that a game ball has won a prize in the V winning opening 833 or the normal winning opening 834. Will be done. The V winning opening opening / closing unit 835 is located between a closed position in which the V winning opening 833 is closed (see FIG. 84 (A)) and an open position in which the V winning opening 833 is opened (see FIG. 84 (B)). It is rotated by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown). The V winning opening opening / closing unit 835 normally stands by at a closed position that closes the V winning opening 833, and when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a small hit, it is operated at a predetermined timing to V. The winning opening 833 is opened.

Here, the predetermined timing at which the V winning opening opening / closing unit 835 is operated is set according to the game state in which the big hit lottery in which the lottery result is a small hit is executed as described later. Specifically, the predetermined timing is when the result of the big hit lottery in the short open time short game state (first time short game state and second time short game state) described later is a small hit (FIG. 87 (A)). (See), set to the opening (first opening) of the first small hit game executed by the small hit (see FIGS. 91 (A) and 91 (C)). The first opening of the first small hit game is executed before the execution of the movable vane operating game in which the introduction port 831 is opened by operating the movable vane portion 832. Therefore, when the predetermined timing at which the V winning opening opening / closing portion 835 in the first small hit game is operated is set to the first opening, the game ball 99 is not inserted into the V winning opening 833. Therefore, in the first small hit game executed when the result of the big hit lottery in the first short time game state and the second short time game state is a small hit, the game ball 99 is not entered in the V winning opening 833. In the short open time short game state (first time short game state and second time short game state), the two types of big hit games described later are not executed based on the result of the big hit lottery being a small hit.

On the other hand, the predetermined timing at which the V winning opening opening / closing portion 835 is activated is when the result of the big hit lottery in the long opening time short game state (third time short game state) described later is a small hit (FIG. 87 (B)). (See), which is set to the movable vane operating game of the second small hit game executed by the small hit (see FIGS. 91 (B) and 91 (C)). In the movable vane operation game, the introduction port 831 is opened by operating the movable vane portion 832, and the game ball 99 can enter the inside of the feather accessory device 83 via the introduction port 831. Therefore, when the predetermined timing at which the V winning opening opening / closing portion 835 is operated is set for the movable vane operating game, the game ball 99 that has entered the inside of the vane accessory device 83 can enter the V winning opening 833. Will be. Therefore, in the second small hit game executed when the result of the big hit lottery in the long open time short game state (third time short game state) is a small hit, the game ball 99 can enter the V winning opening 833. Yes, in the third short-time game state, the two types of big hit games described later can be executed based on the result of the big hit lottery being a small hit.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, various tables and the like used in the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87.

[Performance table, etc.]
Here, FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of a hit / miss table or the like. In the present embodiment, two types of the hit / miss table for the normal game state shown in FIG. 85 (A) and the time-saving game state hit / miss table shown in FIG. 85 (B) are set. Has been done. That is, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the probability of hitting a normal figure differs between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and the probability of hitting a normal figure is set higher in the time-saving game state than in the normal game state. ..

The normal game state normal game hit / fail table shown in FIG. 85 (A) is a table used in the normal game state normal game hit lottery in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 85 (A), in the normal game state hit / fail table, when the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure is 0, the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure is 1 to 299. If set to off. That is, in the normal game state (low frequency support mode), the probability of hitting a normal figure in the lottery for a normal figure is set to 1/300, and the second winning opening 315 is a low profit state in which it is difficult to open.

The time-saving game state normal figure hit / fail table shown in FIG. 85 (B) is a table used in the normal figure hit lottery in the time-saving game state which is the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 85 (B), in the time-saving game state normal figure hit / fail table, contrary to the normal game state normal figure hit / fail table, when the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure is 0, it deviates, and the normal figure When the value of the hit random number counter C4 is 1 to 299, it is set per normal figure. That is, in the short-time game state (high frequency support mode), the probability of hitting a normal figure in the lottery per figure is set to 299/300, and the probability of hitting a normal figure is set higher than that in the normal game state (low frequency support mode). At the same time, the second winning opening 315 is in a high profit state where it is easy to open.

As described above, in the gaming state which is the low frequency support mode, it is difficult for the second winning opening 315 to be opened, so that it is unlikely that the player will obtain a special profit by opening the second winning opening 315.

In the present embodiment, as described later, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state are set as the time-saving game state, but any of the first to third time-saving game states. Also, the probability of hitting a normal figure is set to be the same. Of course, the probability of hitting a normal figure may be set differently depending on the type of the time-saving gaming state. Further, the probability of hitting a normal figure in a normal gaming state (low frequency support mode) and the probability of hitting a normal figure in a time-saving gaming state (high frequency support mode) are shown in FIGS. 85 (A) and 85 (B). It is not limited to the example and can be changed as appropriate. Further, as the game state in which the hit / miss table for the short game state is referred to, it may be referred to in the case of the special figure probability fluctuation state or in the case of the short game state.

Here, FIG. 85 (C) shows the type of the game state and the opening mode (opening) of the electric accessory 315b in the game per normal figure executed when the lottery result in the lottery per normal figure is a hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship with time).

As shown in FIG. 85 (C), when the lottery result per normal figure is a hit, the electric accessory 315b is opened in the game per normal figure as described above, so that the second winning opening 315 is reached. Although the game ball 99 can be entered, the open form (opening time) of the electric accessory 315b in the game per normal figure is set according to the game state in which the lottery per normal figure is executed.

Specifically, the normal game state, which is a low-frequency support mode, the first time-saving game state (see FIG. 96), which shifts when the time-saving symbol stops off in the normal game state, and the first type jackpot, which shifts. In the two-hour short game state (see FIG. 96), the opening time of the electric accessory 315b is set to 0.6 seconds (short opening), which is the same as the firing interval of the game ball 99. In this short opening, the expected number of balls to be entered when the game balls 99 are continuously launched is set to 1 or less, for example, 1 in the 2nd winning opening 315 for 3 to 5 times of normal drawing. A game ball 99, which is about the size of a ball, is inserted.

On the other hand, in the third time-shortening gaming state (see FIG. 96), which can be shifted to the second time-shortening gaming state, the opening time of the electric accessory 315b is 3 seconds (long opening), which is five times the firing interval of the game ball 99. It is a high profit state set in. In this long opening, the expected number of balls to be entered when the game balls 99 are continuously launched is set to one or more. For example, one ball to three in the second winning opening 315 for one normal drawing. A game ball 99, which is about the size of a ball, is inserted.

Further, even if the game state at the time of entering the game ball 99 into the through gates 317L and 317R is the normal game state (low frequency support mode), the game state when the variation display of the normal symbol is started is various time reductions. In the game state, the fluctuation time and the opening time of the electric accessory 315b are determined by the conditions of the time-saving game state. Further, even if the game state at the time of entering the game ball 99 into the through gates 317L and 317R is various time-saving game states, the game state when starting the variation display of the normal symbol is the normal game state (low frequency support). In the mode), the fluctuation time and the opening time of the electric accessory 315b are determined by the conditions of the normal gaming state.

For example, when the game ball 99 enters the through gates 317L and 317R and one hold occurs during the change of the normal symbol in the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode), when the already changing normal symbol stops. If the game state of is still in the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode), the fluctuation of the normal symbol corresponding to the held game ball is various lottery under the condition in the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode). Is performed and the fluctuation is started. However, if the game state is switched to the normal game state (low frequency support mode) before the changing normal symbol stops, the change of the normal symbol corresponding to the reserved game ball is the normal game. Various lottery is performed under the condition of the state (low frequency support mode) and the fluctuation starts.

In addition, when the game ball 99 enters the through gates 317L and 317R and one hold occurs during the change of the normal symbol in the normal game state (low frequency support mode), when the changing normal symbol stops. If the game state of is still in the normal game state (low frequency support mode), the fluctuation of the normal symbol corresponding to the held game ball is in the normal game state (low frequency support mode) in which the profit state is low. Various lottery is performed under the conditions and the fluctuation starts. However, if the high profit condition is established in which the game state has been switched to the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode) before the fluctuating normal symbol stops, it corresponds to the held game ball. Various lottery is performed and the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started under the condition of the short-time game state (high frequency support mode) in which the profit is high.

The opening time of the electric accessory 315b in the normal game state, the first time-shortened game state, the second time-shortened game state, and the third time-shortened game state is limited to the example shown in FIG. 85 (C). It is not possible to change it as appropriate.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 85C, only one type of opening time of the electric accessory 315b is set as a game per normal drawing for each game state, but the normal game state and the first time-saving game state are set. , A plurality of types of opening times of the electric accessory 315b in the game per normal figure may be set for at least one of the second time-shortening gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state.

[1st special figure jackpot winning / failing table]
The first special figure jackpot winning / losing table is used for the first special figure jackpot lottery that is executed when the game condition of the special figure lottery is satisfied when the game ball 99 enters the first winning opening 314. Here, FIG. 86 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the first special figure jackpot winning / failing table.

As shown in FIG. 86 (A), the first special figure jackpot winning / failing table includes six jackpot winning / failing tables corresponding to six stages of game setting values 1 to 6. In each jackpot win / loss table, either jackpot or miss is selected according to the value (random number value) of the jackpot random number counter C1 as the lottery result in the first special figure jackpot lottery. Further, in the first special figure jackpot winning / failing table, the game setting value 6, the game setting value 5, the game setting value 4, the game setting value 3, the game setting value 2, and the game setting value 1 are in that order (the value of the game setting value is large). (In order), there is a high probability that the lottery result in the first special figure big hit lottery will be a big hit, which is advantageous to the player.

In the first special figure jackpot hit / fail table of the game setting value 1, 206 random number values of 0 to 205 correspond to the jackpot among the values (random number values) of 65536 jackpot random number counters C1 from 0 to 65535, and others. The random number value of is corresponding to the deviation, and the jackpot probability is set to about 1 / 318.1 (206/65536).

In the first special figure jackpot hit / fail table of the game setting value 2, out of 65536 jackpot random number counters C1 values (random numbers) from 0 to 65535, 202 random numbers from 0 to 211 correspond to jackpots, and others. The random number value of is corresponding to the deviation, and the jackpot probability is set to about 1 / 309.1 (212/65536).

In the first special figure jackpot hit / fail table of the game setting value 3, of the 65536 jackpot random number counters C1 values (random numbers) from 0 to 65535, 218 random numbers from 0 to 217 correspond to the jackpot, and others. The random number value of is corresponding to the deviation, and the jackpot probability is set to about 1 / 300.6 (218/65536).

In the first special figure jackpot hit / fail table of the game setting value 4, of the 65536 jackpot random number counters C1 values (random number values) from 0 to 65535, 224 random number values from 0 to 223 correspond to the jackpot, and others. The random number value of is corresponding to the deviation, and the jackpot probability is set to about 1 / 292.6 (224/65536).

In the first special figure jackpot hit / fail table of the game setting value 5, 230 random numbers from 0 to 229 correspond to jackpots among the 65536 jackpot random number counters C1 values (random numbers) from 0 to 65535, and others. The random number value of is corresponding to the deviation, and the jackpot probability is set to about 1 / 284.9 (230 / 65536).

In the first special figure jackpot hit / fail table of the game setting value 6, of the 65536 jackpot random number counters C1 values (random numbers) from 0 to 65535, 236 random numbers from 0 to 235 correspond to the jackpot, and others. The random number value of is corresponding to the deviation, and the jackpot probability is set to about 1 / 277.7 (236/65536).

Then, when the first special figure jackpot lottery is performed based on the jackpot winning / failing table selected according to the game set value, the jackpot game is executed when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a jackpot.

In the first special figure jackpot hit / fail table of the present embodiment, the jackpot random numbers are continuous values, but the jackpot random numbers may not be continuous values but may be partially or wholly discrete values.

Further, although six first special figure game jackpot winning / failing tables are provided according to the game setting values of six stages, at least one first special figure game jackpot winning / failing table is sufficient, and the game setting value is six. Not limited to stages.

[1st special figure 1 type jackpot type distribution table]
The 1st special figure 1 type big hit type distribution table is used to sort the 1st special figure 1 type big hit type when the lottery result in the 1st special figure big hit lottery is a big hit. Here, FIG. 86B is a diagram showing an example of the first special figure type 1 jackpot type distribution table.

As shown in FIG. 86 (B), in the first special figure type 1 jackpot type distribution table, 19 of 0 to 18 out of 20 jackpot type counters C2 values (random values) from 0 to 19. The random number value is a 2R short open time short jackpot, and one random number value of 19 is a 16R short open time short jackpot. That is, in the present embodiment, two types of 2R short-open time-short jackpot and 16R short-open time-short jackpot are set as the first special figure type 1 jackpot, and the distribution rate of the 2R short-open time-short jackpot is set to 95%. , 16R Short opening time Short jackpot distribution rate is set to 5%.

Here, if the lottery result in the 1st special figure big hit lottery is a 2R short open time short big hit, the condition of the big hit game is satisfied, and the variable winning opening 316 is opened as a profit state for the big hit winning twice. When the repeated opening / closing execution mode is executed and the lottery result in the first special figure big hit lottery is 16R short opening time short big hit, the condition of the big hit game is satisfied, and the variable winning opening 316 is opened as a profit state for the big hit winning. The open / close execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times is executed. Then, in both the 2R short-open time-short jackpot and the 16R short-open time-short jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game executed based on these jackpots, the second short-time game, which is one of the high-frequency support modes as a profit state, is performed. It is transferred to the state. Further, during any of the big hits, the execution period such as the variable display time and the fixed display time of the normal symbol or the opening time of the electric accessory 315b is controlled in the low frequency support mode. In this second short-time game state, the electric accessory 315b is opened because there is a high probability that the result of the lottery per drawing, which is executed when the game ball 99 passes through the through gates 317L and 317R, will be a hit. Although it is frequently played (see FIG. 85 (B)), many game balls 99 enter the second winning opening 315 due to the short opening time of the electric accessory 315b (0.6 seconds). Is a short open time short game state that cannot be expected (see FIG. 85 (C)).

Further, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, which is transferred after the end of the jackpot game based on the first special figure type 1 jackpot, is acquired by the player, for example, by the 2R short-opening time-saving jackpot game. It is set to the number of times that can be executed by the possible game balls (expected value of ball output or expected value of difference ball). As a result, the player can execute the specified number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state with the game ball acquired by the player by the 2R short-open time-saving jackpot game without significantly reducing the number of balls held. Therefore, it is possible to shift to the second type big hit game state via the small hit game state while preventing a big disadvantage to the player due to the shift to the second time short game state, which will be described later. It becomes possible to give a chance to shift to the game state.

When the upper limit of the number of winning balls to the variable winning opening 316 in each round game is set to 10, and the number of winning balls to the variable winning opening 316 is set to 10. The expected value of 200 balls in the 2R short opening time short jackpot game is 200. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is set to 100 times, which is the number of times that can be executed by launching about 150 to 200 game balls. There is.

In this way, when the result of the first special figure jackpot lottery executed with the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning opening 314 is a jackpot, a predetermined number of profit states are given to the jackpot winning. The first-class jackpot game in which the round game is executed is executed, and the second short-time game state occurs after the end of the first-class jackpot game.

[1st special figure fluctuation table]
The first special figure fluctuation table is a special figure of the first special figure in the first special figure game executed for the first special figure big hit lottery when the lottery result in the first special figure big hit lottery is a big hit. Figure Used to set the variation pattern (variation display time). Here, FIG. 86 (C) is a diagram showing an example of the first special figure variation table.

As shown in FIG. 86 (C), in the first special figure variation table, the special figure variation pattern is associated in advance according to the value of the special figure variation type counter CS1. In this first special figure fluctuation table, one of the special figure fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value (random value) of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special figure fluctuation table, among the values of the 200 special figure fluctuation type counters CS1 from 0 to 199, the fluctuation display time is 30 seconds for the 10 random values from 0 to 9. The special figure fluctuation pattern "01" corresponds to the 110 random values from 10 to 119, and the special figure fluctuation pattern "02" whose fluctuation display time is 60 seconds corresponds to the 80 random values from 120 to 199. Corresponds to the special figure fluctuation pattern "03" in which the fluctuation display time is 90 seconds.

Here, when the special figure variation pattern "01" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a normal reach effect pattern in which the special figure variation display time is 30 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 In such cases, the normal reach effect pattern is executed. The normal reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the special figure game effect is the normal reach effect. When the special figure variation pattern "02" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a super reach effect pattern in which the special figure variation display time is 60 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 In such cases, the super reach effect pattern is executed. The super reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the special figure game effect is the super reach effect. Further, when the special figure variation pattern "03" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a special reach effect pattern having the longest special figure variation display time of 90s as the variation type (effect pattern), and the symbol display unit. A special reach effect pattern is executed at 341 or the like. The special reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the special figure game effect is the special reach effect.

[Distribution table for the first special figure out of order]
The first special figure off-type distribution table is used to sort out the off-type when the lottery result in the first special figure big hit lottery is out of order. Here, FIG. 86 (D) is a diagram showing an example of the first special figure out-of-drawing type distribution table.

As shown in FIG. 86 (D), in the first special figure deviation type distribution table, the deviation type is defined according to the value (random number value) of the reach random number counter C3. Specifically, in the first special figure out-of-specification type distribution table, out of the values of the 239 reach random number counters C3 from 0 to 238, 9 random number values from 0 to 8 are out-of-front and backward reach, and 9 to Thirty random number values of 38 are reach other than front and back deviation, 199 random number values of 39 to 237 are completely out of alignment, and one random number value of 238 is out of time saving symbol stop.

Here, the reach is a state in which a combination of decorative symbols indicating that a big hit has been won is likely to occur between the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the symbol display unit 341 and the stop display of the decorative symbol. Is the fluctuating state shown. In one example, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the effective line in the symbol display unit 341, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position changes. Further, while the reach of the symbol display unit 341 is in a fluctuating state, a story effect process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest an expectation level, or an operation by a player on an operation button 20 is reflected in the effect. Person participation type operation effect processing and the like are executed. It is conceivable that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden, reduced or enlarged, and displayed during the execution of these effect processing.

The front-back off reach is a miss in which the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach by the decorative symbol occurs, and the reach other than the front-back off is the final after the reach by the decorative symbol occurs. The stop symbol is off to stop except before and after the reach symbol. In addition, complete disengagement and time-saving symbol stop disengagement are disengagements in which reach by decorative symbols does not occur (non-reach disengagement). Further, the time-saving symbol stop loss is an deviation in which a specific symbol combination (time-saving symbol combination) (see FIG. 112) among the non-reach symbol combinations is stopped and displayed, and the specific symbol combination (time-saving symbol combination) is stopped. After it is displayed, it shifts to the first time saving game state described later. This first time-shortening game state is one of the high-frequency support modes, but is a short-time short-time game state in which the opening time of the electric accessory 315b is short (see FIGS. 85B and 85C). In addition, the complete deviation is an deviation in which the symbol combinations other than the specific symbol combination (time saving symbol combination) among the non-reach symbol combinations are stopped and displayed.

[1st special figure out-of-bounds fluctuation table]
The 1st special figure deviation table is the first special figure in the 1st special figure game executed for the 1st special figure big hit lottery when the lottery result in the 1st special figure big hit lottery is out of order. It is used to set the special figure fluctuation pattern (variation display time). Here, FIG. 86 (E) is a diagram showing an example of the first special figure out-of-figure fluctuation table.

As shown in FIG. 86 (E), in the first special figure deviation variation table, the special figure variation pattern (variation display time) of the first special figure is obtained according to the value (random value) of the deviation type and the special figure variation type counter CS1. ) Is stipulated. This 1st special figure deviation table is the 1st special figure deviation table for the deviation reach (reach other than the front-rear reach and the reach other than the front-rear), the 1st special figure deviation table for the complete deviation, and the time-saving symbol stop-off. 1 Includes a special chart deviation table.

In the out-of-order 1st special figure out-of-bounds fluctuation table for out-of-bounds reach (front-back out-of-front reach and non-front-back out-of-bounds reach), the special figure fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" are set according to the value (random value) of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1. One is selected. Specifically, in the deviated first special figure deviated fluctuation table for deviated reach (reach other than front and rear deviated and reach other than front and rear deviated), 0 to 99 out of the values of 200 special figure fluctuation type counters CS1 from 0 to 199. The special figure fluctuation pattern "01" corresponding to 100 random values has a special figure fluctuation display time of 30 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation display time of 60 seconds corresponds to 50 random values from 100 to 149. The figure variation pattern "02" corresponds to the special figure variation pattern "03" in which the special figure variation display time is 90 seconds for 50 random values from 150 to 199.

In the first special figure deviation variation table for complete deviation, one of the special figure variation patterns "04" and "05" is selected according to the value (random value) of the special figure variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special figure deviation fluctuation table for complete deviation, among the values of 200 special figure fluctuation type counters CS1 from 0 to 199, 150 random values from 0 to 149 are displayed as special figure fluctuations. The special figure fluctuation pattern "04" having a time of 7 seconds corresponds to the special figure fluctuation pattern "05" having a special figure fluctuation display time of 10 seconds corresponding to 50 random values from 150 to 199. ..

In the first special symbol deviation variation table for time saving symbol stop deviation, one of the special symbol variation patterns "04" to "07" is selected according to the value (random value) of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special symbol deviation fluctuation table for time saving symbol stop deviation, among the values of 200 special symbol fluctuation type counter CS1 from 0 to 199, 100 random values from 0 to 99 are special figures. The special figure variation pattern "04" having a variation display time of 7 seconds corresponds to the special figure variation pattern "05" having a special map variation display time of 10 seconds corresponding to 50 random values from 100 to 149. , The special figure fluctuation pattern "06" in which the special figure fluctuation display time is 15 seconds corresponds to the 30 random numbers of 150 to 179, and the special figure fluctuation display time corresponds to the 20 random values of 180 to 199. The special figure fluctuation pattern "05", which is 20 seconds, corresponds to it. That is, in the case where the time-saving symbol is out of stop, the special symbol fluctuation pattern having a shorter special symbol variation display time is more likely to be selected.

Here, after the end of the first special figure game in which the lottery result in the first special figure jackpot lottery is out of the time saving symbol stop, the normal game state is changed to the first time saving game state (see FIG. 96). Then, in the first special symbol deviation variation table for time saving symbol stop deviation, the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) set according to the value (random value) of the special symbol variation type counter CS1 is supported. The upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the first time-saving game state, which is the short-opening time-shortening game state, is specified. Specifically, in the first special symbol deviation variation table for time-saving symbol stop deviation, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the first time-saving game state is 5 for the special symbol variation pattern "04". Times correspond, 10 times correspond to the special figure fluctuation pattern "05", 20 times correspond to the special figure fluctuation pattern "06", and 20 times correspond to the special figure fluctuation pattern "07". It corresponds to 30 times. As described above, when the time-saving symbol is out of stop, the special figure fluctuation pattern with a shorter special figure fluctuation display time is more likely to be selected. The smaller the number of times, the easier it is to select. In addition, as a result of the lottery in the 1st special figure jackpot lottery, by including the time saving symbol stop loss, the 1st time saving game state (short) which is the high frequency support mode is changed from the normal game state which is the low frequency support mode. It becomes possible to shift to the open time shortened game state). In this way, by being able to shift from the normal gaming state to the first short-time gaming state (short-opening short-time gaming state), which is a high-frequency support mode, the progress of the game tends to be monotonous in the normal gaming state. Since it is possible to reduce monotony, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

In this way, when the result of the first special figure big hit lottery executed when the game ball 99 enters the first winning opening 314 is out of the time saving symbol, the lottery result in the first special figure big hit lottery is After the end of the first special figure game, which is out of the time saving symbol stop, the first time saving game state occurs.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the first time-saving game state is specified by the first special figure deviation fluctuation table for time-saving symbol stop deviation, but the upper limit value (specified number of times). ) May be set by a distribution table provided separately from the first special symbol deviation variation table for time saving symbol stop deviation. Further, in the present embodiment, the type of the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time) when the time-saving symbol is out of stop and the specified number of times of the time-saving game correspond to each other. The specified number of time-saving games may be set regardless of the display time). In addition, as a loss as a result of the lottery in the first special figure jackpot lottery, the time-saving symbol stop loss may be excluded.

[Short opening 2nd special figure jackpot winning / failing table]
The short-open second special figure game jackpot winning / failing table is used for the second special figure jackpot lottery, which is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 314 due to the short opening of the electric accessory 315b. used. That is, the short-open second special figure jackpot winning / failing table is a second prize based on the lottery results in the normal game state, the first time-short game state, and the second time-short game state. It is used for the second special figure big hit lottery executed when the game ball 99 enters the mouth 314. Here, FIG. 87 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a short-open second special figure jackpot hit / fail table.

As shown in FIG. 87 (A), the short-open second special figure jackpot hit / fail table is set in common for the game setting values 1 to 6 in 6 stages. In the short-open second special figure big hit hit / miss table, one of big hit, small hit, and miss is selected according to the value (random number value) of the big hit random number counter C1 as the lottery result in the second special figure big hit lottery. .. That is, in the second special figure big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 in the short opening, the first one triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning opening 314. Unlike the special figure big hit lottery, the lottery result includes a small hit in which the feather accessory device 83 (see FIGS. 83 and 84) is activated. Specifically, in the short-open second special figure jackpot hit / fail table, among the values (random number values) of 65536 jackpot random number counters C1 from 0 to 65535, 0 to 205 correspond to jackpots and 206 to 58980 are small. Corresponding to the hit, 58981 to 65535 correspond to the disengagement. That is, in the second special figure jackpot lottery executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 314 due to the short opening of the electric accessory 315b, the jackpot probability is about 1 / 318.1. The small hit probability is set to about 1 / 1.15, and the miss probability is set to about 1/10.

[Long-open second special figure jackpot winning / failing table]
The long opening 2nd special figure jackpot winning / failing table is used for the 2nd special figure jackpot lottery executed when the game ball 99 enters the 2nd winning opening 314 due to the long opening of the electric accessory 315b. Will be done. That is, in the long-open second special figure jackpot winning / failing table, the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 314 based on the fact that the lottery result in the normal drawing per lottery in the third short game state is a normal drawing. It is used for the second special figure jackpot lottery that is executed with this as an opportunity. Here, FIG. 87 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a long-open second special figure jackpot hit / fail table.

As shown in FIG. 87 (B), the long-open second special figure jackpot winning / failing table is set in common for the game setting values 1 to 6 in 6 stages. In the long-open second special figure jackpot winning / failing table, one of jackpot, small hit, and miss is selected according to the value (random number value) of the jackpot random number counter C1 as the lottery result in the second special figure jackpot lottery. .. That is, in the second special figure jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 at the long opening, the first one triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning opening 314. Unlike the special figure big hit lottery, the lottery result includes a small hit in which the feather accessory device 83 (see FIGS. 83 and 84) is activated. Specifically, in the long-open second special figure jackpot hit / fail table, among the values (random number values) of 65536 jackpot random number counters C1 from 0 to 65535, 0 to 205 correspond to jackpots and 206 to 65559 are small. Corresponding to the hit, 65530 to 65535 correspond to the disengagement. That is, in the second special figure jackpot lottery, which is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 314 due to the long opening of the electric accessory 315b, the jackpot probability is about 1 / 318.1. The small hit probability is set to about 1 / 1.003, the miss probability is set to about 1 / 318.1, and the miss probability is set to about 1 / 318.1. It is set low, and the probability of small hits is set high accordingly.

In this embodiment, the short opening 2nd special figure big hit winning / failing table and the long opening 2nd special drawing big hit winning / failing table are provided in common for the 6 game setting values, but the short opening second One or both of the special figure jackpot winning / failing table and the long open second special figure jackpot winning / failing table may be set for each game setting value. It is also conceivable to set one second special figure big hit hit / miss table by sharing the short open second special figure big hit hit / miss table and the long open second special figure big hit hit / miss table.

[Variation table per 2nd special figure]
The second special figure per variation table is applicable when the lottery result in the second special figure big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 314 is a win (big hit or small hit). It is used to set the special map variation pattern (special map variation display time) of the second special map in the second special map game executed for the second special map jackpot lottery. Here, FIG. 87 (C) is a diagram showing an example of a variation table per second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 87 (C), the second special figure per variation table is provided according to the hit type (big hit and small hit), and the second special figure per variation table for big hit and the small hit first. 2 Includes a fluctuation table per special figure.

In the second special figure per variation table for big hits, the special map variation pattern is associated in advance according to the value of the special map variation type counter CS1. In the second special figure per variation table for big hits, either the special figure variation pattern "01" or "06" is selected according to the value (random value) of the special figure variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the second special figure per variation table for big hits, among the values of 200 special figure fluctuation type counters CS1 from 0 to 199, 100 random values from 0 to 99 have the special figure fluctuation display time. The special figure fluctuation pattern "01" having a value of 30 seconds corresponds to the special figure fluctuation pattern "06" having a special figure fluctuation display time of 15 seconds corresponding to 100 random values from 100 to 199.

In the second special figure per variation table for small hits, the special figure variation pattern "05" is selected regardless of the value (random value) of the special figure variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the second special map variation table for small hits, all the values of the 200 special map variation type counters CS1 from 0 to 199 have a special map variation display time of 10 seconds. "05" corresponds.

In the second special figure per variation table of the present embodiment, the special map variation pattern (special map variation display time) of the second special map when the lottery result in the second special map big hit lottery is a small hit is 1. Although the types have been set, a plurality of types of the special map fluctuation pattern (special map fluctuation display time) may be set.

[2nd special figure out-of-bounds fluctuation table]
The 2nd special figure out-of-order variable table is set in the 2nd special figure big hit lottery when the lottery result in the 2nd special figure big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the 2nd winning opening 314 is out of order. It is used to set the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time) of the second special figure in the second special figure game executed for. Here, FIG. 87 (D) is a diagram showing an example of the second special figure out-of-figure fluctuation table.

As shown in FIG. 87 (D), in the second special figure deviation fluctuation table, the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time) is associated with the value (random value) of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1. Therefore, one of the special figure fluctuation patterns "04" to "07" is selected according to the value (random value) of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the second special figure deviation variation table, among the values of the 239 special figure fluctuation type counters CS1 from 0 to 238, the special figure fluctuation display time is 7 for the 167 random values from 0 to 166. The special figure fluctuation pattern "04" which is a second corresponds, and the special figure fluctuation pattern "05" whose special figure fluctuation display time is 10 seconds corresponds to 36 random values of 167 to 202, and 203 to 226. The special figure fluctuation pattern "06" corresponding to the 24 random numbers has a special figure variation display time of 15 seconds, and the 12 random numbers from 227 to 238 have a special figure variation display time of 20 seconds. Figure Fluctuation pattern "07" corresponds.

In addition, in the 2nd special figure deviation variation table of this embodiment, there are 4 types of special figure variation patterns (special figure variation display time) of the 2nd special figure when the lottery result in the 2nd special figure jackpot lottery is out of order. Although it has been set, the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time) may be set to one type other than four types, for example.

[Time saving game frequency distribution table]
As will be described later, the time-saving game frequency distribution table is out of the lottery result in the second special figure jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 314 in the second time-saving game state. In this case, it is used to determine whether or not to shift to the third time-saving game state after the end of the second special figure game executed for the second special figure jackpot lottery, and in the third time-saving game state. It is used to set the upper limit (specified number of times) for the number of time-saving games. Here, FIG. 87 (E) is a diagram showing an example of a time-saving game number distribution table.

As shown in FIG. 87 (E), in the time-saving game number distribution table, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time-saving game number is associated with the value (random value) of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1. One of 10, 30, 50, and 100 times is selected according to the value (random value) of the special figure variation type counter CS1. Then, in the time-saving game number distribution table, in order to set the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time-saving game number, the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 for setting the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time) is used. , The upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time-saving game is associated with the type of the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time).

Specifically, in the time-saving game number distribution table, among the values of the 239 special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 from 0 to 238, the special figure fluctuation display time is 7 seconds for the 167 random values from 0 to 166. The special figure fluctuation pattern "04" corresponds to 10 times as the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games, and the special figure fluctuation display time is 10 seconds for 36 random numbers from 167 to 202. The special figure variation pattern "05" corresponds to 30 times as the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games, and the special figure variation display time is 15 seconds for 24 random values from 203 to 226. 50 times correspond to the fluctuation pattern "06" as the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games, and the special figure fluctuation display time is 20 seconds for the 12 random numbers from 227 to 238. 100 times correspond to "07" as the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games. That is, the upper limit of the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) is set to about 70% for 10 times, about 15% for 30 times, about 10% for 50 times, and about 5% for 100 times, and the specified number of times is set. The more it is, the harder it is to be selected.

In the time-saving game number distribution table of the present embodiment, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time-saving game number is set according to the type of the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time), but the time-saving game The upper limit of the number of times (specified number of times) does not have to correspond to the type of the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time). Further, in the time-saving game frequency distribution table of the present embodiment, when the result of the second special figure jackpot lottery is out of order, the time-saving symbol is always out of stop, but when the result of the second special figure jackpot lottery is out of order. A part of the time saving symbol may be out of stop.

Further, in the time-saving game number distribution table of the present embodiment, four types of upper limit values (specified number of times) for the number of time-saving games are set according to the value (random value) of the special figure variation type counter CS1. The upper limit of the number of games (specified number of times) may be set to one type other than four types, for example.

Further, in the time-saving game number distribution table of the present embodiment, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time-saving game number is associated with the value (random number value) of the special figure variation type counter CS1, and the variation type counter is used. The upper limit of the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) is set by using it, but a distribution counter for distributing the number of time-saving games is set, and the upper limit of the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) is set using this distribution counter. May be set.

[Third short game state jackpot type distribution table]
The third time-short game state jackpot type distribution table is used to sort the jackpot types in the third time-short game state. As a big hit in the 3rd short game state, it is executed when the lottery result in the 2nd special figure big hit lottery is a big hit and the lottery result in the 2nd special figure big hit lottery is a small hit. In the small hit game to be played, a type 2 jackpot generated by the game ball 99 entering the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 is included, and in the third short game state, the type 1 jackpot and the type 2 jackpot are included. The common third time-saving game state jackpot type distribution table is used for the distribution of the type (of the number of rounds). Here, FIG. 87 (F) is a diagram showing an example of a third time-saving gaming state jackpot type distribution table.

As shown in FIG. 87 (F), in the third time-saving game state per type distribution table, 5 random values of 0 to 4 out of 20 big hit type counters C2 values (random values) of 0 to 19 are used. The numerical value is a 16R long open time short jackpot, and 15 random values from 5 to 19 are 5R long open time short jackpots. That is, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot in the third time-shortening game state, two types of jackpots, 16R long opening time-shortening jackpot and 5R long-opening time-shortening jackpot, are set for both the 1st type jackpot and the 2nd type jackpot. The jackpot distribution rate is set to 25%, and the 5R long open time short jackpot distribution rate is set to 75%.

Here, when the jackpot type is 16R long opening time shortening jackpot, the opening / closing execution mode in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is repeated 16 times is executed in the jackpot game, and the jackpot type is 5R long opening time shortening. In the case of a big hit, in the big hit game, an open / close execution mode in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is repeated five times is executed. Then, in both the 16R long open time-shortening jackpot and the 5R long-opening time-shortening jackpot, after the jackpot game executed based on these jackpots is completed, the game returns to the third time-saving gaming state, which is one of the high-frequency support modes. do. In this third time-saving game state, the electric accessory 315b is opened because there is a high probability that the result of the lottery per drawing, which is executed when the game ball 99 passes through the through gates 317L and 317R, will be a hit. Because of the high frequency of being played (see FIG. 85 (B)) and the long opening time of the electric accessory 315b (3 seconds), many game balls 99 can be expected to enter the second winning opening 315. It is a long open time short game state (see FIG. 85 (C)).

In this way, when the result of the second special figure big hit lottery executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 314 in the third short game state is a big hit, a predetermined number of round games are executed. The type 1 jackpot game is executed, and the third time-saving game state occurs after the end of the type 1 jackpot game.

As the jackpot type distribution table in the third short game state, a common distribution table is used for the 1st type jackpot and the 2nd type jackpot, but the distribution is different between the 1st type jackpot and the 2nd type jackpot. You may use a table.

[2nd special figure 1 type jackpot type distribution table]
The 2nd special figure 1 type jackpot type distribution table is a 2nd special figure 1 type jackpot when the lottery result in the 2nd special figure jackpot lottery in the 1st short game state and the 2nd short game state is a big hit. Used to sort the types. Here, FIG. 87 (G) is a diagram showing an example of a second special figure type 1 jackpot type distribution table.

As shown in FIG. 87 (G), in the second special figure 1 type jackpot type distribution table, 19 of 0 to 18 out of 20 jackpot type counters C2 values (random values) from 0 to 19. The random number value is a 2R short open time short jackpot, and one random number value of 19 is a 16R short open time short jackpot. That is, in the present embodiment, two types of 2R short-open time-short jackpot and 16R short-open time-short jackpot are set as the second special figure type 1 jackpot, and the distribution rate of the 2R short-open time-short jackpot is set to 95%. , 16R Short opening time Short jackpot distribution rate is set to 5%.

Here, when the lottery result in the second special figure jackpot lottery in the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state is the 2R short-open time-shortened jackpot, the variable winning opening 316 is opened in the jackpot game. When the open / close execution mode in which the round game is repeated twice is executed and the lottery result in the second special figure big hit lottery in the first time short game state and the second time short game state is 16R short open time short big hit, the big hit. In the game, an open / close execution mode in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is repeated 16 times is executed. Then, in both the 2R short-open time-short jackpot and the 16R short-open time-short jackpot, after the jackpot game executed based on these jackpots is completed, the game shifts to the second short-time game state, which is one of the high-frequency support modes. Will be done. In this second short-time game state, the electric accessory 315b is opened because there is a high probability that the result of the lottery per drawing, which is executed when the game ball 99 passes through the through gates 317L and 317R, will be a hit. Although it is frequently played (see FIG. 85 (B)), many game balls 99 enter the second winning opening 315 due to the short opening time of the electric accessory 315b (0.6 seconds). Is a short open time short game state that cannot be expected (see FIG. 85 (C)).

In this way, when the result of the second special figure big hit lottery executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 314 in the first short game state or the second short game state is a big hit, it is a big hit. As a profit state for winning, a type 1 jackpot game in which a predetermined number of round games are executed is executed, and a second time saving game state occurs after the end of the type 1 jackpot game.

[Processing of main control device 4]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 to 103, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the main timer interrupt process is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, but a part of the main process is different from the main process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 21). different. Here, FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the main processing of the main control device 4 of the present embodiment.

[Main processing of main control device 4]
As shown in FIG. 88, the main process of the main control device 4 of the present embodiment is one of a normal figure game control process (step S1404), a special figure game control process (step S1406), and a game state transition process (step S1408). The processing of the unit is different from the first embodiment described above, and is different from the first embodiment in that the small hit game control processing (step S1407-1) is executed. Hereinafter, a procedure (step) different from the above-mentioned first embodiment in the normal figure game control process (step S1404) and the special figure game control process (step S1406) will be described, and the small hit game control process (step S1407-1) will be described. And all the procedures of the game state transition process (step S1408) will be described.

[Public game control process]
In the normal map game control process executed in step S1404 in the main process of FIG. 88 of the present embodiment, the normal map variation start process is different from the first embodiment described above. Hereinafter, the normal map fluctuation start processing of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 89.

[Public map fluctuation start processing]
In the normal symbol variation start processing of the present embodiment, the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 361 is started, and various flags are set based on the lottery result in the common symbol lottery.

<Step S3301>
As shown in FIG. 89, in the normal map variation start processing of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the normal game state flag indicating that the game is in the normal game state is set to ON (step S3301). .. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming state when starting the variable display of the normal symbol (normal drawing game) is the normal gaming state. That is, it is determined whether the normal game state is the low frequency support mode or the time-saving game state is the high frequency support mode at the start of the change of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol is based on the support mode at the start of the change of the normal symbol. Make a hit / fail judgment.

In addition, when the normal game state flag is transferred from another game state to the normal game state in the game state transition process described later, step S3629 in FIG. 98, step S3649 in FIG. 99, step S3667 in FIG. 100 or FIG. While it is set to on in step S3701 of 102, it is set to off in step S3608, S3612 or S3616 of FIG. 97 when shifting from the normal gaming state to another gaming state.

When the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3302. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3305 when the normal gaming state flag is set to off (step S3301: No), that is, when any of the first to third time-saving gaming states.

<Steps S3302 to S3304>
When the normal game state flag is set to on (step S3301: Yes), that is, in the low frequency support mode, the MPU 41 is based on the normal game state normal game hit / miss table (see FIG. 85 (A)). A winning / failing determination is made for the lottery per drawing (step S3302), and it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination is a hitting the normal figure (step S3303).

Whether or not the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit on the normal figure is acquired by entering the game ball 99 into the through gates 317L and 317R, and is stored as a specific value in the normal figure hold storage area 412c (see FIG. 11). It is determined based on the random number counter C4 per normal figure.

When the result of the hit / fail determination based on the normal game state hit / hit table is hit (step S3303: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the short open hit / hit flag to on (step S3304), and steps the process. Move to S3309. The short-opening normal-figure hit flag is a flag indicating that the result of the short-opening normal-figure winning is a short-opening hit. It is referred to when it is determined whether or not to set the value of the opening counter at the time corresponding to the short opening as the opening time of the electric accessory 315b.

On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3309 when the result of the hit / miss determination based on the normal game state hit / miss table is not the hit / miss (step S3303: No), that is, when the result of the hit / miss judgment is wrong. ..

<Steps S3305 and S3306>
When the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3301: No), that is, in any of the first to third time-saving game states, which is the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 hits the time-saving game state. Based on the winning / failing table (see FIG. 85 (B)), a winning / failing determination is made for the lottery per drawing (step S3305), and it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination is a hitting figure (step S3306).

Whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination is a normal figure hit is obtained by entering the game ball 99 into the through gates 317L and 317R as in the above-mentioned step S3302, and the normal figure holding storage area 412c (FIG. 11) is determined based on the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure stored as a specific value.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3307 when the result of the hit / fail determination based on the time-saving gaming state normal figure hit / miss table is the normal figure hit (step S3306: Yes), and when the process is shifted to step S3307 and the result of the hit / miss judgment is not the normal figure hit (step S3306: Yes). Step S3306: No), that is, if the result of the pass / fail determination is wrong, the process shifts to step S3309.

<Steps S3307 and S3308>
When the result of the hit / fail determination based on the time-saving game state hit / miss table is hit (step S3306: Yes), the MPU 41 has the third time-saving game state flag turned on, which indicates that it is in the third time-shortened game state. It is determined whether or not it is set (step S3307). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game state when starting the variable display of the normal symbol (normal figure game) is the third time-shortened game state.

It should be noted that the third time-shortened gaming state flag is set in step S3644 of FIG. 99, step S3694 of FIG. 101, or step 103 of FIG. While set to on in S3723, it is set to off in steps S3657, S3661 or S3668 of FIG. 100 when transitioning from the third time-saving gaming state to another gaming state.

When the third time short game state flag is set to ON (step S3307: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the long open normal map hit flag to ON (step S3308), and shifts the process to step S3309. .. The long-opening normal-figure hit flag is a flag indicating that the result of the long-opening normal-figure lottery is a long-opening hit, and in step S1803 in the game control process per normal-figure in FIG. 25 of the above-mentioned first embodiment. It is referred to when it is determined whether or not to set the value of the opening counter at the time corresponding to the long opening as the opening time of the electric accessory 315b.

On the other hand, when the third time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S3307: No), that is, when the MPU 41 is in the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 shifts to the above-mentioned step S3304. The short open normal map hit flag is set to on, and the process proceeds to step S3309.

<Steps S3309 and S3310>
When the result of the lottery per normal figure is out of order (step S3303 or S3306: No), when the flag for short open normal figure is set to on (step S3304), or when the flag for long open normal figure is set to on. (Step S3308), the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (step S3309). Then, the MPU 41 sets the flag during the normal map fluctuation display indicating that the normal symbol is variablely displayed, that is, the normal map game is being executed, to be turned on (step S3310), and performs the normal map fluctuation start process. finish.

The execution period such as the variation display time and the fixed display time of the ordinary symbol or the opening time of the electric accessory 315b when the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the ordinary symbol display unit 361 will be described in the first embodiment described above. As described above, the random number counter C4 per normal figure and the normal figure as a specific value acquired by the entry of the game ball 99 into each winning opening 314 and 315 and stored in the normal figure reservation storage area 412c (see FIG. 11) and the normal figure It is set based on the variation type counter CS2 and various time-saving game status flags. The variation display time of the normal symbol when the variation display of the normal symbol is started on the normal symbol display unit 361 is determined by referring to the game state when the variation display of the normal symbol is started, that is, various time-saving gaming state flags. Will be done.

[Special figure game control processing]
In the special figure game control process executed in step S1406 in the main process of FIG. 88 of the present embodiment, the special figure variation start process is different from the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start processing. Hereinafter, the special figure change start processing of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 90.

[Special figure change start processing]
In the special symbol variation start processing of the present embodiment, the first special symbol of the first special symbol display unit 362 in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol of the second special symbol display unit 363 in the second special symbol game The variable display and the stop display are controlled.

<Step S3401>
As shown in FIG. 90, in step S3401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special figure game to be started is the first special figure game. Whether or not the special figure game to be started is the first special figure game is set in the RAM 412 in step S2003 or S2006 in the special figure data setting process of FIG. 27 of the above-mentioned first embodiment, for example. The determination is made based on the hit / fail information moved to the special figure execution area AE (see FIG. 8) of the hold storage area 412b.

When the special figure game to be started is the first special figure game (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3402. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3403 when the special figure game to be started is not the first special figure game (step S3401: No), that is, when the special figure game to be started is the second special figure game. ..

<Step S3402>
When the special figure game to be started is the first special figure game (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 41 uses the first special figure jackpot hit / fail table (see FIG. 86 (A)) and the special figure reservation storage area 412b. Figure: A hit / fail determination is made based on the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as the hit / miss information (numerical information) stored in the execution area AE (step S3402), and the process shifts to step 3406. The result of the hit / fail determination in step S3402 is stored in the RAM 413.

<Steps S3403 to S3405>
When the special figure game to be started is not the first special figure game (step S3401: No), that is, when the special figure game to be started is the second special figure game, the MPU 41 is in the third time saving game state. It is determined whether or not the indicated third time saving game state flag is on (step S3403). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming state when starting the second special figure game is the third time-shortening gaming state.

The third time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3644 of FIG. 99 or step S3694 of FIG. 101 when the game state transition process described later shifts from another gaming state to the third time-shortened gaming state. On the other hand, when shifting from the third time-shortened gaming state to another gaming state, it is set to off in steps S3657, S3661 or S3668 of FIG.

The MPU 41 has a long open second special figure when the third time-shortened game state flag is on (step S3403: Yes), that is, when the game state when starting the second special figure game is the third time-shortened game state. The hit / fail judgment is made based on the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as the hit / miss information (numerical information) stored in the jackpot hit / fail table (see FIG. 87 (B)) and the special figure execution area AE of the special figure hold storage area 412b. (Step S3404), and the process proceeds to step 3406. The result of the hit / fail determination in step S3404 is stored in the RAM 413.

On the other hand, in the MPU 41, when the third time-shortened game state flag is off (step S3403: No), that is, the game state when starting the second special figure game is the first time-shortened game state or the second time-shortened game state. In this case, the jackpot random number counter C1 included as the hit / miss information (numerical information) stored in the short-open second special figure jackpot hit / fail table (see FIG. 87 (A)) and the special figure execution area AE of the special figure hold storage area 412b. A hit / fail determination is made based on the counter value (step S3405), and the process proceeds to step 3406. The result of the hit / fail determination in step S3405 is stored in the RAM 413.

<Step S3406>
When the hit / fail determination is made in step S3402, S3404 or S3405, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal gaming state flag indicating the normal gaming state is on (step S3406). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming state when starting the special figure game is the normal gaming state or the first to third time-saving gaming states.

The normal game state flag is set to step S3629 of FIG. 98, step S3650 of FIG. 99, step S3667 of FIG. 100, or FIG. 102 when the normal game state flag is transferred from another game state to the normal game state in the game state transition process described later. While it is set to on in step S3701 of FIG. 97, it is set to off in step S3608, S3612 or S3616 of FIG. 97 when shifting from the normal gaming state to another gaming state.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3413 when the normal game state flag is on (step S3406: Yes), that is, when the game state when starting the special figure game is the normal game state. On the other hand, the MPU 41 performs processing when the normal game state flag is off (step S3406: No), that is, when the game state when starting the special figure game is any of the first to third time-saving game states. The process proceeds to step S3407.

<Step S3407>
When the normal game state flag is off (step S3406: No), that is, when the game state when starting the special figure game is any of the first to third time-saving game states, the MPU 41 is set to the time-saving game state (step S3406: No). The process shifts to step S3408 by subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of remaining time reduction games in the first time reduction game state, the second time reduction game state, or the third time reduction game state (step S3407).

In step S3605 of FIG. 97 and steps S3762, S3679, S3686, S3693 of FIG. , Set in step S3643 of FIG. 101 when shifting from the second time-shortening gaming state to the third time-shortening gaming state, while starting the special figure game in any of the first to third time-shortening gaming states. It is subtracted by 1 in the step S3407 of the special figure change start process.

<Step S3408>
In step S3408, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second time-saving game state flag indicating that the second time-shortened game state is on is on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game state when starting the special figure game is the second time-saving game state.

It should be noted that the second time-saving game state flag is the step S3763, S3680, S3687 of FIG. 101, or the step of FIG. 102 when the game state transition process described later shifts from another gaming state to the second time-shortened gaming state. While set to on in S3711, it is set to off in steps S3636, S3640, S3647 or S3651 of FIG. 99 when transitioning from the second time-saving gaming state to another gaming state.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3409 when the second time-shortened game state flag is on (step S3408: Yes), that is, when the game state when starting the special figure game is the second time-shortened game state. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3413 when the second time-shortened game state flag is off (step S3408: No), that is, when the game state when starting the special figure game is not the second time-shortened game state. ..

<Step S3409>
When the second time-shortened game state flag is on (step S3408: Yes), that is, when the game state when starting the special figure game is the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game is correct in step S3402 or step S3405. Based on the result of (step S3409), it is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game is out of the time saving symbol stop (step S3409).

When the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is out of the time-saving symbol stop (step S3409: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3410, and the result in the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is out of the time-saving symbol stop. If not (step S3409: No), the process proceeds to step S3413.

<Steps S3410 and S3411>
When the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is the time-saving symbol stop loss (step S3409: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the number of time-saving games (FIG. 86 (E) and FIG. (Refer to 87 (E)), the value of the time reduction counter (the number of remaining time reduction games in the second time reduction game state) is subtracted (step S3410), and it is determined whether or not the subtraction value at this time exceeds 0. (Step S3411). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation is larger than the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state. The MPU 41 shifts the process to S3412 when the subtraction value exceeds 0 (S3411: Yes), and shifts the process to S3413 when the subtraction value is 0 or less (S3411: No).

That is, in the present embodiment, the value of the time reduction number counter (in the second time reduction game state) from the time reduction game count (see FIGS. 86 (E) and 87 (E)) set for the time reduction symbol stop deviation. When the subtraction value obtained by subtracting the remaining number of time-saving games) is larger than 0, the game shifts from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, and when the subtraction value is smaller than 0, the game shifts to the third time-saving game state. It is not transferred, and the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is maintained unchanged.

In the present embodiment, when the subtraction value exceeds 0, the gaming state is shifted from the second time-shortening gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state, but not only when the subtraction value exceeds 0, but also the subtraction. Even when the value is 0, the gaming state may be changed from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state. That is, when the subtraction value is 0 or more, the gaming state may be shifted from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the subtraction value is 0 or less, the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is maintained without being changed, but when the subtraction value is 0 or less. The number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state may be changed. For example, the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state may be changed to the sum of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop loss, or for the time-saving symbol stop loss. It may be changed (or replaced) to the number of time-saving games set in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the special figure game started in the second time-saving game state is either the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the result of the jackpot lottery is out of the time-saving symbol stop. In some cases, on condition that the subtraction value exceeds 0, the game is changed from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state after the end of the special figure game, but the special figure game started in the second time-shortened game state. Only when is the second special figure game, it may be possible to shift from the second time reduction game state to the third time reduction game state after the end of the special figure game. That is, even if the result of the big hit lottery is out of the time saving symbol stop, if the big hit lottery is for the first special figure game, the second time saving game state is not changed to the third time saving game state. You may do so. Further, from the type in which the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special figure game is out of order, the time saving symbol stop omission may be omitted. In that case, the special figure game started in the second time saving game state may be omitted. In the case of the first special figure game, after the end of the first special figure game, the state is not changed from the second time reduction game state to the third time reduction game state.

The variable display time, the fixed display time, or the variable winning opening of the first special symbol of the first special symbol display unit 362 in the first special symbol game, or the second special symbol of the second special symbol display unit 363 in the second special symbol game. The execution period such as the opening period (number of rounds) of 316 is acquired by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315, as described in the first embodiment described above. It is set based on the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 as a specific value stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and various time-saving game state flags. The variation display time of each special symbol when the variation display of the first special symbol of the first special symbol display unit 362 and the variation display of the second special symbol of the second special symbol display unit 363 is started is the variation display of each special symbol. It is determined by referring to the game state at the time of starting, that is, various time-saving game state flags. Even if the game state at the time of entering the game ball 99 into each winning opening 314 or 315 is the normal game state (low frequency support mode), the game state when starting the variable display of each special symbol is various time reductions. In the game state, the execution period such as the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the opening period (number of rounds) of the variable winning opening 316 is determined by the condition of the time-saving game state. Further, even if the gaming state at the time of entering the gaming ball 99 into each winning opening 314 or 315 is various time-saving gaming states, the gaming state when starting the variable display of each special symbol is the normal gaming state (low). In the case of the frequency support mode), the execution period such as the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the opening period (number of rounds) of the variable winning opening 316 is determined under the conditions of the normal gaming state.

For example, if the game ball 99 enters each winning opening 314 or 315 and one corresponding hold occurs during the change of the special symbol during the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode), the special symbol that is already changing will be displayed. If the game state when stopped is still in the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode), the change of the special symbol corresponding to the held game ball is the condition in the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode). Various lottery will be held at and the fluctuation will start. However, if the game state is switched to the normal game state (low frequency support mode) before the changing special symbol stops, the change of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved game ball is the normal game. Various lottery is performed under the condition of the state (low frequency support mode) and the fluctuation starts.

In addition, when the game ball 99 enters each winning opening 314 or 315 and one hold occurs during the change of the special symbol in the normal game state (low frequency support mode), the changing special symbol is stopped. If the game state at that time is still in the normal game state (low frequency support mode), the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved game ball will be various lottery under the condition in the normal game state (low frequency support mode). Is performed and the fluctuation is started. However, if the gaming state is switched to the time-saving gaming state (high frequency support mode) before the changing special symbol stops, the high profit condition will be established and the reserved gaming ball will be dealt with. The fluctuation of the special symbol becomes a state where the high profit condition is satisfied, and various lottery is performed under the condition of the short-time game state (high frequency support mode), and the fluctuation is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, each time the result of the big hit lottery in the second time-saving game state is the time-saving symbol stop off, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time-saving game set for the time-saving symbol stop off. The subtraction value is calculated in relation to, but in the second time-saving game state, the jackpot lottery result of the time-saving symbol stop-out is 1 when the subtraction value at that time is 0 or less before the time-saving symbol stop-out. If there are more than one, the upper limit of the number of time-saving games set for the one or more time-saving symbol stop deviation (specified number of times) is set to the upper limit value of the time-saving game number set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation (specified number of times). It may be determined whether or not to shift to the third time saving game state based on whether or not the value obtained by subtracting the value of the time saving number counter from the value obtained by adding the number of times) exceeds 0. That is, when the result of the big hit lottery in the second time-saving game state is the time-saving symbol stop-out, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time-saving game number set for the time-saving symbol stop-out is set in the second time-saving game state. The third time reduction is based on whether or not the value obtained by subtracting the value of the time reduction number counter from the value added to the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time reduction game set for the previous time reduction symbol stop deviation exceeds 0. It may be determined whether or not to shift to the gaming state. That is, the state in which the high profit condition is established may be determined by including not only the result of the time-saving symbol stop failure in the jackpot lottery but also the result of the jackpot lottery before that. In this case, the greater the number of times that the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is out of the time-saving symbol, the higher the possibility that the subtraction value exceeds 0 and the game shifts to the third time-saving game state. It is possible to raise the player's attention to the fact that the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the game state, and the interest of the game is further improved.

<Step S3412>
When the subtraction value exceeds 0 (S3411: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the third time-saving game state transition flag for shifting the gaming state from the second time-shortening gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state on (step). S3412). This third time-saving game state transition flag is referred to in order to determine whether or not to shift the gaming state from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state in step S3641 in the game state transition process of FIG. 99, which will be described later. Will be done.

<Step S3413>
In step S3413, the MPU 41 has the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special of the main display unit 36 corresponding to the special figure variation pattern of the special figure game based on the result of the hit / fail determination in steps S3402, S3404 or S3405. The special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) of the symbol display unit 363 is set in the special symbol variation display time counter. Specifically, when the result of the hit / fail determination in step S3402 is a jackpot, the MPU 41 determines the hit / fail in step S3402 based on the first special figure type 1 jackpot variation table (see FIG. 86 (C)). If the result is out of alignment, the special figure variation pattern (special figure variation display time) of the first special symbol display unit 362 is based on the first special figure deviation variation table (see FIG. 86 (E)) according to the deviation type. ) Is set in the special figure fluctuation display time counter. Further, when the result of the hit / fail determination in step S3404 or step S3405 is a big hit or a small hit, the MPU 41 is based on the second special figure per variation table (see FIG. 87 (C)) according to the hit type. If the result of the hit / fail determination in step S3404 or step S3405 is incorrect, the special symbol variation pattern of the second special symbol display unit 363 (see FIG. 87 (D)) based on the second special figure deviation variation table (see FIG. 87 (D)). Special figure fluctuation display time) is set in the special figure fluctuation display time counter.

<Step S3414>
In step S3414, the MPU 41 includes the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the special figure game in steps S3402, S3404 or S3405, and the special figure variation pattern (special figure variation display time) set in step S3413. Set the variation pattern command in RAM412. As a result, in step S1401 of the external output processing in the next main processing (see FIG. 88) executed by the MPU 41, the special figure fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute the special figure game effect on the symbol display unit 341 or the like based on the special figure fluctuation pattern command.

In the MPU 41, when the lottery result is "2R short opening time short jackpot", "A" indicating that it is a 2R short opening time short jackpot is added to the special figure fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" or "06". Any one of "A01" to "A03" and "A06" is set in RAM412 as a special figure fluctuation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is "16R short opening time short jackpot", the MPU 41 adds "B" indicating that it is a 16R short opening time short jackpot to the special figure fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" or "06". Any one of "B01" to "B03" and "B06" is set in RAM412 as a special figure fluctuation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is "small hit", the MPU 41 sets "C05" with "C" indicating that the special figure fluctuation pattern "05" is a small hit in the RAM 412 as a special figure fluctuation pattern command. do. Further, when the lottery result is "off", the MPU 41 selects one of "D01" to "D07" with "D" indicating that the special figure fluctuation patterns "01" to "07" are out of order. It is set in RAM412 as a special figure fluctuation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is "off", the MPU 41 includes information on whether it is a front-back out-of-reach reach, a reach other than the front-back out-of-order, a complete out-of-order, or a time-saving symbol stop-out, in the special figure variation pattern command.

<Steps S3415 and S3416>
In step S3405, the MPU 41 starts variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 of the main display unit 36 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363, and further, the special symbol ( The special figure change display flag indicating that the first special figure or the second special figure is being displayed (during the execution of the special figure game) is set to on (step S3416), and the change start process is terminated. ..

In addition, in step S1902 in the special figure game control process of FIG. 26 of FIG. It is referred to to determine whether or not (the special figure game is being executed).

[Small hit game control process]
In the small hit game control process executed in step S1407-1 in the main process of FIG. 88 of the present embodiment, a lottery in the big hit lottery executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 is a lottery. In the small hit game executed based on the result being a small hit, a process of controlling the operation of the feather accessory device 83 is executed. The small hit game of the present embodiment is the first small hit game executed when the lottery result in the second special figure big hit lottery in the first time reduction game state and the second time reduction game state is a small hit. , The second small hit game executed when the lottery result in the second special figure big hit lottery in the third short game state is a small hit. Here, FIG. 91 is a time chart showing an example of the progress of the small hit game.

As shown in FIGS. 91 (A) and 91 (B), in the small hit game (first small hit game or second small hit game), the introduction port 831 of the vane accessory device 83 is maintained in a closed state. The opening (first opening or second opening) to be performed, and the movable vane operation game in which the introduction port 831 is opened by operating the movable vane portion 832 of the vane accessory device 83 are included. The time of the first opening of the first small hit game (for example, 3 seconds to 10 seconds) is set longer than the time of the second opening of the second small hit game (for example, 2 seconds to 9 seconds). Further, the difference between the first opening time of the first small hit game and the second opening time of the second small hit game (for example, 1 second to 3 seconds) is the operating time of the V winning opening opening / closing unit 835 described later. It is set to be larger than (for example, 0.1 second to 1 second).

Further, as shown in FIG. 91 (C), in the small hit game, the operation timing and the operation time (opening time) of the V winning opening opening / closing unit 835 are the types of the time-saving game state in which the second special figure big hit lottery is executed. It is set to be the same regardless of. Of course, one or both of the operation timing and the operation time (opening time) of the V winning opening opening / closing part 835 may be set based on the type of the time-saving gaming state in which the second special figure jackpot lottery is executed. Often, it is not always necessary to set the same regardless of the type of time-saving game state. For example, the operation timing and operation time (opening time) of the V winning opening opening / closing unit 835 in the first small hit game executed based on the second special figure big hit lottery in the first time reduction game state and the second time reduction game state. It is conceivable to set one or both of them as different from the second small hit game executed based on the second special figure big hit lottery in the third short game state.

In the small hit game, the execution time of the movable wing portion operation game (operation time of the movable wing portion 832) is set to be the same regardless of the type of the time-saving game state in which the second special figure big hit lottery is executed. .. Of course, the execution time of the movable wing portion operating game (operating time of the movable wing portion 832) can be different depending on the type of the time-saving gaming state in which the second special figure jackpot lottery is executed. For example, the execution time of the movable vane operation game of the first small hit game executed based on the second special figure big hit lottery in the first time reduction game state and the second time reduction game state is set to the execution time in the third time reduction game state. It is conceivable to set the execution time shorter than the execution time of the movable wing operation game of the second small hit game executed based on the second special figure big hit lottery.

Further, in the present embodiment, the movable vane operation game in the small hit game is executed as a fixed time (constant time) regardless of whether or not the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 833, but it is movable. The vane operation game may be terminated before the fixed time elapses when the game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 833.

Further, in the small hit game of the present embodiment, the ending is not set, but the ending may be executed after the end of the movable vane operation game. In this case, at the ending, it is conceivable that the symbol display unit 341 or the like notifies whether or not the game ball 99 has been inserted into the V winning opening 833.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 91 (A) and 91 (C), it is executed when the lottery result in the second special figure big hit lottery in the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state is a small hit. In the first small hit game, the operation timing of the V winning opening opening / closing portion 835 of the feather accessory device 83 is set to the first opening. In the first opening, since the introduction port 831 of the feather accessory device 83 is maintained in the closed state as described above, the game ball 99 is not introduced inside the feather accessory device 83. Therefore, in the first small hit game, the game ball 99 is not inserted into the V winning opening 833, and the type 2 big hit game is not generated. As a result, in the first short-time game state and the second short-time game state, even if the first small hit game is executed because the lottery result in the big hit lottery becomes a small hit, the two kinds of big hit games are executed. Will not be done.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 91 (B) and 91 (C), the second small hit game executed when the lottery result in the second special figure big hit lottery in the third short game state is a small hit. Then, the operation timing of the V winning opening opening / closing portion 835 of the vane accessory device 83 is set to the movable vane operation game. In the movable vane operation game, since the introduction port 631 is opened by operating the movable vane portion 832 as described above, the game ball 99 can be introduced inside the vane accessory device 83. Therefore, in the second small hit game, the game ball 99 can be inserted into the V winning opening 833 to generate a two-kind big hit game. As a result, in the third short-time game state, the two kinds of big hit games can be executed based on the fact that the second small hit game is executed because the lottery result in the big hit lottery becomes a small hit. That is, a small hit is included as a lottery result in the big hit lottery in any of the first to third short-time game states, but it is only in the third short-time game state that the two-kind big hit game can be generated. As a result, although the details will be described later, it is said that the game is shifted to the third time-saving game state in which the type 2 jackpot game can be generated via the second time-saving game state that is shifted after the end of the type 1 jackpot game. Since new playability is given, attention and interest in the game are improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the first small hit game of the present embodiment, the game ball 99 is not inserted into the V winning opening 833 because the operation timing of the V winning opening opening / closing portion 835 of the vane accessory device 83 is set to the first opening. However, a part or all of the operation timing of the V winning opening opening / closing part 835 may be set to the movable vane part operation game. Specifically, in the first small hit game, the operation timing of the V winning opening opening / closing portion 835 of the vane accessory device 83 is set so as to straddle the movable vane operating game from the first opening, so that the V winning opening 833 It may be impossible or difficult to enter the game ball 99 into the ball. Further, in the first small hit game, the entire operation timing of the V winning opening opening / closing part 835 of the feather accessory device 83 is set to the movable vane part operating game, and the operating time of the V winning opening opening / closing part 835 (for example, 0. By setting (02 seconds to 0.1 seconds) short, it may be impossible or difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the V winning opening 833. Here, the effect is as described above when the game ball 99 cannot enter the V winning opening 833 in the first small hit game, but on the other hand, the V winning opening 833 in the first small hit game. If it is impossible to enter the game ball 99 into the game, there is a concern that the player's attention and interest in the small hit game will decrease. On the other hand, if it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the V winning opening 833 in the first small hit game, the game ball 99 can enter the V winning opening 833 in the first small hit game. Because of the nature, the decrease in the player's attention and interest in the small hit game is suppressed.

Next, a specific processing procedure of the small hit game control processing of the present embodiment will be described. Here, FIGS. 92 to 95 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the small hit game control process.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 92, in the small hit game control process of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 is first set to turn on the special figure fluctuation stop flag indicating that the first special figure or the second special figure is stopped and displayed. It is determined whether or not it is present (step S3501). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the timing at which the small hit game can be started is reached by displaying the stop of the first special figure or the second special figure. The special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON when the first special figure or the second special figure is stopped and displayed in step S1908 in the special figure game control process of FIG.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3502 when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S3501: Yes), that is, when the small hit game can be started. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3510 of FIG. 93 when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S3501: No), that is, when it is not the timing at which the small hit game can be started.

<Step S3502>
When the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S3501: Yes), that is, when the small hit game can be started, the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the big hit lottery for the special figure game is a small hit. It is determined whether or not the flag is (step S3502). Whether or not the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a small hit is determined by the lottery in the big hit lottery stored in the RAM 413 when the hit / fail judgment is made in steps S3401, S3404 or S34015 in the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 90. Judgment is based on the result.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3503 when the lottery result in the big hit lottery for the special figure game is a small hit (step S3502: Yes), and when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is not a small hit (step S3502: Yes). No), the small hit game control process is terminated.

<Steps S3503 and S3504>
When the lottery result in the big hit lottery for the special figure game is a small hit (step S3502: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the V winning opening opening / closing part operation standby flag to on (step S3503). The V winning opening opening / closing section operation standby flag is a flag indicating that the V winning opening opening / closing section 835 of the feather accessory device 83 is not operating and the V winning opening opening / closing section 835 is waiting for operation. This V winning opening opening / closing section operation standby flag is referred to in step S3510 of FIG. 93 in the small hit game control process in order to determine whether or not the V winning opening opening / closing section 835 is not operating. Then, the MPU 41 sets a V winning opening opening / closing unit operation standby time counter indicating the remaining time until the operation of the V winning opening opening / closing unit 835 is started (step S3504), and shifts the process to step S3505.

It should be noted that the V winning opening opening / closing unit operation standby time counter is decremented by 1 in step S3511 of FIG. 93 each time the small hit game control process is executed, and is it the timing to start the operation of the V winning opening opening / closing unit 835? It is referred to in step S3512 of FIG. 93 in the small hit game control process to determine whether or not.

<Step S3505>
In step S3505, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third time-saving gaming state flag indicating that the third time-saving gaming state is set is set to ON (step S3505). Here, when the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit, the first small hit game is executed in the first short-time game state and the second short-time game state (see FIG. 93 (A)), and the third short-time game state. Then, the second small hit game is executed (see FIG. 93 (B)). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the small hit game starts the first small hit game or the second small hit game for the small hit.

It should be noted that the third time-shortened game state flag is set to step S3644 in FIG. 99, step S3694 in FIG. 101, and step 103 in FIG. While set to on in S3719 or S3723, it is set to off in steps S3657, S3661 or S3668 of FIG. 100 when transitioning from the third time-shortened gaming state to another gaming state.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3506 when the third time saving game state flag is set to on (step S3505: Yes), that is, when the second small hit game is started because it is in the third time saving game state. do. On the other hand, the MPU 41 starts the first small hit game when the third time saving game state flag is set to off (step S3505: No), that is, because it is in the first time saving game state or the second time saving game state. If so, the process proceeds to step S3508.

<Steps S3506 and S3507>
When the third time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S3505: Yes), that is, when the second small hit game is started because the third time-shortened game state is set, the MPU 41 is set to the second small hit game. The second opening flag indicating that the second opening (see FIG. 93B) is being executed is set to on (step S3506), and the remaining time of the second opening time (movable wings of the second small hit game) is set. The second opening time counter indicating the semi-operated game (time until the start of the semi-operated game (see FIG. 93B)) is set (step S3507), and the small hit game control process is terminated.

The second opening flag is referred to in step S3526 of FIG. 94 in order to determine whether or not the second opening of the second small hit game is being executed. Further, the second opening time counter is subtracted by 1 in step S3527 of FIG. 94 each time the small hit game control process is executed, and the second opening is ended (the movable wing operation game of the second small hit game is started). ) Is referred to in step S3528 of FIG. 94 to determine whether or not it is the timing.

<Steps S3508 and S3509>
When the third time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S3505: No), that is, when the first small hit game is started because it is in the first time-shortened game state or the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 sets. The first opening flag indicating that the first opening of the first small hit game (see FIG. 93 (A)) is being executed is set to on (step S3508), and the remaining time of the first opening time (first). The first opening time counter indicating the movable wing operation game of the small hit game (time until the start of the movable wing operation game (see FIG. 93 (A))) is set (step S3509), and the small hit game control process is terminated.

The first opening flag is referred to in step S3522 of FIG. 94 in order to determine whether or not the first opening of the first small hit game is being executed. Further, the first opening time counter is subtracted by 1 in step S3523 of FIG. 94 every time the small hit game control process is executed, and the first opening is ended (the movable wing operation game of the first small hit game is started). ) Is referred to in step S3524 of FIG. 94 to determine whether or not it is the timing.

<Step S3510>
When the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S3501: No), that is, when it is not the timing at which the small hit game can be started, the MPU 41 receives a V prize in the feather accessory device 83 as shown in FIG. 93. It is determined whether or not the V winning opening opening / closing section operation waiting flag indicating that the opening / closing section 835 is not operating and the V winning opening opening / closing section 835 is waiting for operation is set to ON (step S3510). .. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3511 when the V winning opening opening / closing part operation standby flag is set to on (step S3510: Yes), and when the V winning opening opening / closing part operation waiting flag is set to off. (Step S3510: No), the process proceeds to step S3517.

<Steps S3511 and S3512>
When the V winning opening opening / closing section operation standby flag is set to ON (step S3510: Yes), the MPU 41 indicates the remaining time until the V winning opening opening / closing section 835 of the feather accessory device 83 starts operating. 1 is subtracted from the winning opening opening / closing part operation waiting time counter (step S3511), and it is determined whether or not the value of the V winning opening opening / closing part operating waiting time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3512). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to start the operation of the V winning opening opening / closing unit 835 and open the V winning opening 833.

When the value of the V winning opening opening / closing part operation standby time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3512: Yes), the MPU 41 starts the operation of the V winning opening opening / closing part 835 of the feather accessory device 83 to win a V prize. When it is time to open the mouth 833, the process proceeds to step S3513. On the other hand, the MPU 41 starts the operation of the V winning opening opening / closing section 835 (opens the V winning opening 833) when the value of the V winning opening opening / closing section operation standby time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3512: No). If it is not the timing, the process proceeds to step S3522 of FIG.

<Steps S3513 to S3516>
When the value of the V winning opening opening / closing part operation standby time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3512: Yes), that is, the operation of the V winning opening opening / closing part 835 of the feather accessory device 83 is started to open the V winning opening 833. When it is the timing to open, the MPU 41 operates the V winning opening opening / closing section 835 (step S3513), and sets the V winning opening opening / closing section operation flag indicating that the V winning opening opening / closing section 835 is operated to on. (Step S3514).

The V winning opening opening / closing section operation flag is referred to in order to determine whether or not the V winning opening opening / closing section 835 is operating in step S3517 described later in the small hit game control process.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the V winning opening opening / closing section operating time counter indicating the remaining operating time of the V winning opening opening / closing section 835 (step S3515), and sets the V winning opening opening / closing section operation standby flag to off (step). S3516), the process proceeds to step S3522 of FIG.

The V winning opening opening / closing section operating time counter is decremented by 1 each time the small hit game control process is executed in step S3518 described later in the small hit game control process, and the V winning opening opening / closing section 835 is returned. It is referred to in step S3519 described later in the small hit game control process in order to determine whether or not it is the timing to close (V winning opening 833).

<Step S3517>
When the V winning opening opening / closing section operation standby flag is set to off (step S3510: No), the MPU 41 indicates that the V winning opening opening / closing section 835 of the feather accessory device 83 is activated. It is determined whether or not the part operation flag is set to ON (step S3517). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2018 when the V winning opening opening / closing part operation flag is set to on (step S3517: Yes), and when the V winning opening opening / closing part operation flag is set to off (step S3517: Yes). S3517: No), the process proceeds to step S3522 of FIG.

<Steps S3518 and S3519>
When the V winning opening opening / closing part operation flag is set to ON (step S3517: Yes), the MPU 41 operates the V winning opening opening / closing part indicating the remaining operating time of the V winning opening opening / closing part 835 of the feather accessory device 83. 1 is subtracted from the time counter (step S3518), and it is determined whether or not the value of the V winning opening opening / closing unit operating time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3519). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to return the V winning opening opening / closing portion 835 of the feather accessory device 83 (close the V winning opening 833).

The MPU 41 returns the V winning opening opening / closing section 835 of the feather accessory device 83 (closes the V winning opening 833) when the value of the V winning opening opening / closing section operating time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3519: Yes). ), The process proceeds to step S3520. On the other hand, the MPU 41 returns the V winning opening opening / closing section 835 of the feather accessory device 83 (V winning opening 833) when the value of the V winning opening opening / closing section operating time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3519: No). If it is not the timing to close), the process proceeds to step S3522 of FIG.

<Steps S3520 and S3521>
When the value of the V winning opening opening / closing part operating time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3519: Yes), that is, the timing for returning the V winning opening opening / closing part 835 of the feather accessory device 83 (closing the V winning opening 833). In the case of MPU 41, the V winning opening opening / closing section 835 is restored (step S3520), and the V winning opening opening / closing section operation flag indicating that the V winning opening opening / closing section 835 is operated is set to off (step). S3521), the process proceeds to step S3522 of FIG.

<Step S3522>
As shown in FIG. 94, in step S3522, is the MPU 41 set to the first opening flag indicating that the first opening of the first small hit game (see FIG. 91 (A)) is being executed? Judge whether or not. The first opening flag is set to ON in step S3509 of FIG. 92 in the small hit game control process when the first opening of the first small hit game is started.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3523 when the first opening flag is set to on (step S3522: Yes), that is, when the first opening of the first small hit game is executed. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3526 when the first opening flag is set to off (step S3522: No), that is, when the first opening of the first small hit game is not executed.

<Steps S3523 to S3525>
When the first opening flag is set to on (step S3522: Yes), that is, when the first opening of the first small hit game is executed, the MPU 41 has the remaining time of the first opening time (first small). 1 is subtracted from the value of the first opening time counter indicating the movable wing operation game (time until the start of the movable wing operation game (see FIG. 91 (A)) of the hit game) (step S3523), and the first opening time counter after the subtraction is It is determined whether or not it is 0 (step S3524). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the first opening and start the movable vane operation game (see FIG. 91 (A)) in the first small hit game.

The MPU 41 is when the first opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3525: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the first opening and start the movable vane operation game in the first small hit game. , The first opening flag indicating that the first opening is being executed is set to off (step S3525), and the process proceeds to step S3530. On the other hand, in the MPU 41, when the first opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3524: No), that is, in the first small hit game, both at the timing of ending the first opening and at the timing of starting the movable vane operation game. If not, the small hit game control process is terminated.

<Step S3526>
When the first opening flag of the first small hit game is set to off (step S3522: No), the MPU 41 is executing the second opening of the second small hit game (see FIG. 91 (B)). It is determined whether or not the second opening flag indicating that the flag is set to ON. The second opening flag is set to ON in step S3507 of FIG. 92 in the small hit game control process when the second opening of the second small hit game (see FIG. 91 (B)) is started. The flag.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3527 when the second opening flag is set to on (step S3526: Yes), that is, when the second opening of the second small hit game is executed. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3533 of FIG. 95 when the second opening flag is set to off (step S3526: No), that is, when the second opening of the second small hit game is not executed. do.

<Steps S3527 to S3529>
When the second opening flag is set to on (step S3526: Yes), that is, when the second opening of the second small hit game is being executed, the MPU 41 has the remaining time of the second opening time (second small). 1 is subtracted from the value of the second opening time counter indicating the movable wing operation game (time until the start of the movable wing operation game (see FIG. 91 (B)) of the winning game (step S3527), and the second opening time counter after the subtraction is It is determined whether or not it is 0 (step S3528). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the second opening and start the movable vane operation game (see FIG. 91 (B)) in the second small hit game.

The MPU 41 is when the second opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3528: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the second opening and start the movable vane operation game in the second small hit game. , The second opening flag indicating that the second opening is being executed is set to off (step S3529), and the process proceeds to step S3530. On the other hand, in the MPU 41, when the second opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3529: No), that is, in the second small hit game, both at the timing of ending the second opening and at the timing of starting the movable vane operation game. If not, the small hit game control process is terminated.

<Step S3530>
When the first opening flag of the first small hit game or the second opening flag of the second small hit game is turned off (step S3525 or S3529), that is, the opening is ended in the first small hit game or the second small hit game. When it is time to start the movable wing operation game, the MPU 41 activates the movable wing 832 of the vane accessory device 83 to start the movable wing operation game (step S3530), and the process is performed in step S3531. Transition.

In the movable vane operation game, by operating the movable vane portion 832 of the vane accessory device 83, the introduction port 832 of the vane accessory device 83 is opened, and the game ball 99 inside the feather accessory device 83. It is possible to enter the ball.

<Steps S3531 and S3532>
In step S3531, the MPU 41 sets the movable vane operation flag, which indicates that the movable vane portion 832 is activated (movable vane operation game is being executed), to be turned on (step S3531). Then, the MPU 41 sets a movable wing operation time counter indicating the remaining operation time of the movable wing portion 832 (the remaining time of the movable wing operation game) (step S3532), and ends the small hit game control process.

The movable vane operation flag is referred to in step S3533 of FIG. 95 in the small hit game control process in order to determine whether or not the movable vane portion 832 is activated (movable vane operation game is executed). Will be done. Further, the movable vane operation time counter is subtracted by 1 in step S3534 of FIG. 95 in the small hit game control process each time the small hit game control process is executed, and the movable vane 832 is returned (movable feather). It is referred to in step S3535 of FIG. 95 in the small hit game control process in order to determine whether or not it is the timing to end the unit operation game.

<Step S3533>
When the second opening flag is set to off (step S3522: No), that is, when the second opening is not executed in the first opening as well, as shown in FIG. 95, the movable vane portion 832 of the MPU 41 is activated. It is determined whether or not the movable vane operation flag indicating that (the movable vane operation game is executed) is set to ON (step S3533). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3534 when the movable vane operation flag is set to ON (step S3533: Yes), that is, when the movable vane operation game is executed. On the other hand, when the movable vane operation flag is set to off (step S3533: No), that is, when the movable vane operation game is not executed, the MPU 41 ends the small hit game control process.

<Steps S3534 and S3535>
When the movable vane operation flag is set to ON (step S3533: Yes), that is, when the movable vane operation game is executed, the MPU 41 performs the remaining operation time of the movable vane 832 (movable vane operation). 1 is subtracted from the value of the movable vane operation time counter indicating the remaining time of the game (step S3534). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the movable vane operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3535). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the movable vane operation game (small hit game) by returning the movable vane portion 832 and closing the introduction port 831.

The MPU 41 ends the case where the value of the movable vane operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3533: Yes), that is, the timing for returning the movable vane 832 (movable vane operation game (small hit game)). If it is timing, the process proceeds to step S3536. On the other hand, the MPU 41 ends when the value of the movable vane operation time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3533: No), that is, the timing for returning the movable vane 832 (movable vane operation game (small hit game)). If it is not the timing to cause the game to be performed, the small hit game control process is terminated.

<Steps S3536 and S3537>
When the value of the movable vane operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3533: Yes), that is, the timing for returning the movable vane 832 (movable vane operation game (small hit game)) is terminated. In this case, the MPU 41 ends the movable vane operation game (small hit game) by returning the movable vane portion 832 (step S3536). Then, the MPU 41 sets the movable vane operation flag indicating that the movable vane 832 is operated (the movable vane operation game is executed) to off (step S3536), and controls the small hit game. End the process.

[Game state transition process]
In the game state transition process executed in step S1408 in the main process of FIG. 88 of the present embodiment, various game state transition processes are executed. Here, FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a transition example (game flow) of the gaming state in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 96, in the present embodiment, as the game state, the normal game state, the first time-shortening game state, the second time-shortening game state, the third time-shortening game state, the one-kind jackpot game state, and the two-kind jackpot game state, And the small hit game state is included.

In the normal game state, the electric accessory 315b is operated at a low frequency for a short time (see FIGS. 85 (A) and 85 (C)), and the game ball 99 enters the first winning opening 314 as a trigger. The first special figure jackpot lottery is executed based on the first special figure jackpot winning / failing table (see FIG. 86 (A)), and the second special figure triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315. This is a gaming state in which the jackpot lottery is executed based on the short-open second special figure jackpot winning / failing table (see FIG. 87 (A)).

The normal game state shifts to the case where the lottery result for the specified number of big hit lottery is notified (execution of the specified number of special figure games) without shifting from the first to third short-time game states to the big hit game state. Further, when the normal gaming state is shifted to the small hit gaming state based on the result of the big hit lottery in the normal gaming state being a small hit, the V of the feather accessory device 83 in the small hit gaming state. When the game ball 99 is not entered in the winning opening 833 (V non-winning), the player returns from the small hit game state.

On the other hand, from the normal game state, when the result of the big hit lottery is notified that it is a big hit, the game shifts to the type 1 big hit game state, and when the result of the big hit lottery is notified that it is a small hit, the small hit game state. When it is notified that the result of the big hit lottery is out of the time saving symbol stop (time saving symbol stop), it shifts to the first time saving game state. It should be noted that the normal gaming state does not shift to the second time-shortening gaming state, the third time-saving gaming state, and the type 2 jackpot gaming state.

In the first short game state, the second winning opening 315 is opened frequently by executing the short-time operation of the electric accessory 315b with high frequency (see FIGS. 85B and 85C). The first special figure big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning opening 314 is executed based on the first special figure big hit winning / failing table (see FIG. 86 (A)), and the second winning opening 315. The second special figure jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the game is executed based on the short-open second special figure jackpot winning / failing table (see FIG. 87 (A)).

The first time-saving game state shifts to the case of notifying that the result of the jackpot lottery is out of the time-saving symbol stop (time-saving symbol stop) in the normal game state. In addition, when the result of the big hit lottery in the first time-shortened game state is shifted to the small hit game state based on the fact that the result of the big hit lottery in the first time-shortened game state is changed to the small hit game state, the feather role is set in the small hit game state. When the game ball 99 is not entered in the V winning opening 833 of the object device 83 (V non-winning), the player recovers from the small hit gaming state.

On the other hand, from the first short-time game state, when it is notified that the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, it shifts to the type 1 big hit game state, and when it is notified that the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit, it is a small hit. It shifts to the game state, and shifts to the normal gaming state when the lottery result for the specified number of big hit lottery is notified (execution of the specified number of special figure games) without shifting to the big hit game state. It should be noted that the first time-shortened game state does not shift to the second time-shortened game state, the third time-shortened game state, and the type 2 jackpot game state.

The first time-saving game state may be omitted, and at least two types of time-saving game states, a second time-saving game state and a third time-saving game state, may be set. If the first time-saving game state is omitted, the first special figure out-of-drawing distribution table used for the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning opening 314 (see FIG. 86 (D)). The time-saving symbol stop deviation is omitted from the deviation type in.

In the second short-time gaming state, as in the second short-time gaming state, the second winning opening 315 is opened at high frequency by executing the short-time operation of the electric accessory 315b at high frequency (FIG. 85 (B)). (See FIG. 85 (C)), the first special figure jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning opening 314 is based on the first special figure jackpot winning / failing table (see FIG. 86 (A)). The second special figure big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 is executed based on the short opening second special figure big hit winning / failing table (see FIG. 87 (A)). It is a game state.

To the second short game state, which is a profit state, when the result of the big hit lottery in the normal game state or the first short game state is a big hit, and the game is shifted to the one type big hit game, the one type big hit game After the end, the conditions for the time-saving game are met and the game shifts. In addition, when the second short game state is shifted to the small hit game state based on the result of the big hit lottery in the second short game state being a small hit, the wing role is set in the small hit game state. When the game ball 99 is not entered in the V winning opening 833 of the object device 83 (V non-winning), the player recovers from the small hit gaming state.

On the other hand, from the second time-saving game state, although the details will be described later, when it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery is out of the time-saving symbol stop satisfying a predetermined condition, the state shifts to the third time-saving game state. In addition, from the second short-time game state, when it is notified that the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, it shifts to the type 1 big hit game state, and when it is notified that the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit, it is a small hit. It shifts to the game state. In addition, when the lottery result for the specified number of big hit lottery is notified (execution of the specified number of special figure games) without shifting from the second time-shortened game state to either the big hit game state or the third short-time game state. It shifts to the normal game state. It should be noted that the second short-time game state does not shift to the first short-time game state and the two-kind jackpot game state.

In the third time-shortened game state, unlike the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state, the second winning opening 315 is opened at high frequency by executing the electric accessory 315b for a long time with high frequency. (See FIGS. 85 (B) and 85 (C)), the first special figure jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning opening 314 is the first special figure jackpot winning / failing table (FIG. 86 (FIG. 86). The second special figure jackpot lottery, which is executed based on (see A)) and triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315, is short-opened. ) Is the game state executed based on. In the third time-shortened game state, the game ball 99 is more likely to be inserted into the second winning opening 315 because the electric accessory 315b is operated for a longer time than in the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state. It is a time-saving gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state in which the operation time of the accessory 315b is short.

The third short game state shifts to the case where it is notified that the result of the second special figure jackpot lottery in the second short game state is out of the time saving symbol stop that satisfies a predetermined condition. In addition, when the third short game state is shifted to the small hit game state based on the result of the big hit lottery in the third short game state being a small hit, the feather accessory in the small hit game state. When the game ball 99 is not entered in the V winning opening 833 of the device 83 (V non-winning), the player recovers from the small hit gaming state. Here, the predetermined condition is that the number of time-saving games (see FIG. 87 (E)) set for the time-saving symbol stop loss, which is the result of the second special figure jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state, is the second time-saving. The number of remaining time-saving games in the gaming state is exceeded (see steps S3409 to S3412 in the special figure variation start processing of FIG. 90).

On the other hand, from the third short-time game state, when it is notified that the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, it shifts to the type 1 big hit game state, and when it is notified that the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit, it is a small hit. It shifts to the game state. In addition, the lottery result for the specified number of big hit lottery is notified without shifting to either the 1st kind big hit game state or the 2nd kind big hit game state via the small hit game state from the 3rd time short game state ( When the special figure game is executed a specified number of times), the game shifts to the normal game state. It should be noted that the third time-shortened game state does not shift to the first time-shortened game state, the second time-shortened game state, and the type 2 jackpot game state.

Next, a specific processing procedure of the game state transition processing of the present embodiment will be described. Here, FIGS. 97 to 103 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition process.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 97, in the game state transition process of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the normal game state flag indicating that the game is in the normal game state is set to ON (step S3601). When the normal game state flag is transferred from another game state to the normal game state in the game state transition process, the normal game state flag is set to step S3629 in FIG. 98, step S3650 in FIG. 99, step S3667 in FIG. 100, or step S3701 in FIG. 102. On the other hand, when the normal gaming state is changed to another gaming state, it is set to off in steps S3608, S3612 or S3616 of FIG.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3602 when the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3601: Yes), that is, when the normal game state is in the normal game state. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3617 of FIG. 98 when the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3601: No), that is, when the game state is other than the normal game state.

<Step S3602>
When the normal game state flag is set to on (step S3601: Yes), that is, in the normal game state, the MPU 41 is stopped from the special symbol (first special figure or second special figure) which is displayed in a variable manner. It is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop display flag indicating that the special figure game has ended is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 shifts from the normal game state to another game state (type 1 big hit game state, small hit game state, or first short-time game state) when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the special figure game is completed). Determine if it is possible timing.

In addition, the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is the special figure game control of the above-mentioned first embodiment of FIG. It is set to on in step S1908 in the process.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3603 when the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to ON (step S3602: Yes), that is, when it is possible to shift from the normal gaming state to another gaming state. On the other hand, the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process when the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to off (step S3602: No), that is, when it is not the timing when the normal gaming state can be shifted to another gaming state. do.

<Step S3603>
When the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to on (step S3602: Yes), that is, when it is the timing when the normal gaming state can be changed to another gaming state, the MPU 41 is terminated by the stop display of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game is out of the time saving symbol stop (step S3603).

When the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is out of the time saving symbol stop (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3604, and the result of the jackpot lottery is the time saving symbol. If it is not out of stop (step S3603: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3609.

<Steps S3604 to S3608>
When the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is out of the time saving symbol stop (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the first time saving gaming state (step S3603: Yes). Step S3604). Then, the MPU 41 sets the upper limit value (specified number of times) (see FIG. 86 (E)) of the special figure game executed in the first time-saving game state in the time-saving number counter (step S3605), and in the first time-saving game state. The first time-saving game state flag indicating that the game is present is set to on (step S3606). Further, the MPU 41 sets the first time-saving game state transition command (step S3607), sets the normal game state flag indicating that the game is in the normal game state to off (step S3608), and ends the game state transition process. do.

The first time-shortened gaming state transition command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the first time-shortened gaming state, and is a step in the external output processing of the main processing of FIG. 88. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in S1401. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute the effect corresponding to the first time-saving game state in the special figure game based on the first time-saving game state transition command.

<Step S3609>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is not out of the time-saving symbol stop (step S3603: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a type 1 jackpot. (Step S3609). When the result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is one kind big hit (step S3609: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3610, and the result of the big hit lottery is one kind big hit. If not (step S3609: No), the process proceeds to step S3613.

<Steps S3610 to S3612>
When the result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is one kind big hit (step S3609: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the normal game state to the one kind big hit game state (step). S3610). Then, the MPU 41 is set to turn on the normal type 1 jackpot gaming state flag indicating that it is a type 1 jackpot gaming state shifted from the normal gaming state (step S3611), and is a normal game indicating that it is in the normal gaming state. The state flag is set to off (step S3612), and the game state transition process is terminated.

<Step S3613>
If the result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is not one kind big hit (step S3609: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit (step). S3613). When the result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is a small hit (step S3613: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3614. On the other hand, the MPU 41 is in the gaming state when the result of the big hit lottery is not a small hit (step S3613: No), that is, when the result of the big hit lottery is a deviation other than the time saving symbol stop deviation (reach deviation or complete deviation). End the migration process.

<Steps S3614 to S3616>
When the result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is a small hit (step S3613: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the normal game state to the small hit game state (step S3614). .. Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal small hit game state flag indicating that it is the small hit game state shifted from the normal game state to ON (step S3615), and also sets the normal game state flag indicating that it is in the normal game state. Is set to off (step S3616), and the game state transition process is terminated.

<Step S3617>
When the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3601: No), that is, when the game state is other than the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 98, the MPU 41 is in the first time reduction game state. It is determined whether or not the indicated first time-saving game state flag is set to ON, that is, whether or not it is in the first time-saving game state (step S3617).

The first time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3606 of FIG. 97 when the gaming state is changed from the normal gaming state to the first time-saving gaming state in the game state transition process.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3618 when the first time saving game state flag is set to on (step S3617: Yes), that is, when the first time saving game state is set. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3631 of FIG. 99 when the first time saving game state flag is set to off (step S3617: No), that is, when it is not the first time saving game state.

<Step S3618>
When the first time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S3617: Yes), that is, when the first time-shortened game state is set, the MPU 41 has a variable display special symbol (first special figure or second special figure). ) Has been stopped (the special figure game has ended), and it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 shifts from the first short-time game state to another game state (type 1 big hit game state, small hit game state, or normal game state) when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the special figure game is completed). Determine if it is possible timing.

In addition, the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is the special figure game control of the above-mentioned first embodiment of FIG. It is set to on in step S1908 in the process.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3619 when the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to ON (step step S3618: Yes) and when it is the timing at which the first time-saving gaming state can be shifted to another gaming state. do. On the other hand, the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process when the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to off, that is, when it is not the timing when the first time-shortened game state can be shifted to another game state.

<Step S3619>
When the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to on (step step S3618: Yes), when it is the timing when the first time-shortened gaming state can be shifted to another gaming state, the MPU 41 is displayed by the stop display of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the completed special figure game is a type 1 jackpot (step S3619).

When the result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is one kind big hit (step S3619: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3620, and the result of the big hit lottery is one kind big hit. If not (step S3619: No), the process proceeds to step S3623.

<Steps S3620 to S3622>
When the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is the type 1 jackpot (step S3619: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the first time-saving gaming state to the type 1 jackpot gaming state. (Step S3620). Then, the MPU 41 is set to turn on the first time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag indicating that it is the type 1 jackpot gaming state shifted from the first time-saving gaming state (step S3621), and in the first time-saving gaming state. The first time-saving game state flag indicating that the game is present is set to off (step S3622), and the game state transition process is terminated.

<Step S3623>
When the result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is not one kind big hit (step S3619: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit (step). S3623). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3624 when the result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is a small hit (step S3623: Yes), and when the result of the big hit lottery is not a small hit. (Step S3623: No), the process proceeds to step S3627.

<Steps S3624 to S3626>
When the result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is a small hit (step S3623: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the first short-time game state to the small hit game state (step). S3624). Then, the MPU 41 is set to turn on the first time-saving small-hit gaming state flag indicating that it is the small-hit gaming state shifted from the first time-shortening gaming state (step S3625), and is in the first time-shortening gaming state. The first time-saving game state flag indicating the above is set to off (step S3616), and the game state transition process is terminated.

<Step S3627>
When the result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is not a small hit (step S3623: No), the MPU 41 is a value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of remaining time reduction games in the first time reduction game state. Is 0 or not (step S3627). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift from the first time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the time-saving number counter for the first time-saving gaming state.

The time reduction counter for the first time reduction game state is set in step S3605 of FIG. 97 when the normal game state is transferred to the first time reduction game state in the game state transition process, and the special figure change in FIG. 90. It is subtracted each time the special figure game (first special figure game or second special figure game) is started in step S3407 in the start process.

The MPU 41 executed a special figure game in which the value of the time reduction counter for the first time reduction game state is 0 (step S3627: Yes), that is, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time reduction game number in the first time reduction game state. If so, the process proceeds to step S3628. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 (step S3627: No), that is, when the special figure game of the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time reduction game is not executed in the first time reduction game state, the MPU 41 is used. The game state transition process is terminated.

<Steps S3628 to S3630>
When the value of the time reduction counter for the first time reduction game state is 0 (step S3627: Yes), that is, when the special figure game of the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time reduction game number is executed in the first time reduction game state, MPU41 Shifts the gaming state from the first time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state (step S3628). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state flag indicating that it is in the normal gaming state to on (step S3629), and sets the first time saving gaming state flag indicating that it is in the first time saving gaming state to off (step S3629). Step S3630), the game state transition process is terminated.

<Step S3631>
When the first time-reduced game state flag is set to off (step S3617: No), that is, when it is not the first time-reduced game state, the MPU 41 indicates that it is in the second time-reduced game state, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the second short game state flag is set to ON (step S3631).

The second time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3763 of FIG. 101, which will be described later, when the game state is changed from the type 1 jackpot game state to the second time-saving game state in the game state transition process. The flag.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3632 when the second time saving game state flag is set to on (step S3631: Yes), that is, when the second time saving game state is set. On the other hand, when the second time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S3631: No), that is, when the MPU 41 is not in the second time-saving game state, the process shifts to step S3652 in FIG.

<Step S3632>
When the second time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S3631: Yes), that is, when the second time-shortened game state is set, the MPU 41 has a variable display special symbol (first special figure or second special figure). ) Has been stopped (the special figure game has ended), and it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 is changed from the second short-time game state to another game state (type 1 big hit game state, small hit game state, third time-short game state or It is determined whether or not it is possible to shift to the normal game state).

In addition, the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is the special figure game control of the above-mentioned first embodiment of FIG. It is set to on in step S1908 in the process.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3633 when the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to ON (step S3602: Yes), that is, when it is possible to shift from the second gaming state to another gaming state. .. On the other hand, the MPU 41 performs the game state transition process when the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to off (step S3602: No), that is, when it is not the timing when the second game state can be shifted to another game state. finish.

<Step S3633>
When the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to on (step S3602: Yes), that is, when it is the timing when the transition from the second gaming state to another gaming state is possible, the MPU 41 ends by the stop display of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game is one type jackpot (step S3633).

When the result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is one kind big hit (step S3633: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3634. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a type 1 jackpot (step S3633: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3637.

<Steps S3634 to S3636>
When the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is the type 1 jackpot (step S3633: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the second time-saving gaming state to the type 1 jackpot gaming state. (Step S3634). Then, the MPU 41 is set to turn on the second time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag indicating that it is the type 1 jackpot gaming state shifted from the second time-saving gaming state (step S3635), and in the second time-saving gaming state. The second time-saving game state flag indicating that there is is set to off (step S3636), and the game state transition process is terminated.

<Step S3637>
When the result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is not one kind big hit (step S3633: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit (step). S3637).

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3638 when the result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is a small hit (step S3637: Yes), and when the result of the big hit lottery is not a small hit. (Step S3637: No), the process proceeds to step S3641.

<Steps S3638 to S3640>
When the result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is a small hit (step S3637: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the second short-time game state to the small hit game state (step). S3638). Then, the MPU 41 is set to turn on the second time-saving small-hit gaming state flag indicating that it is the small-hit gaming state shifted from the second time-shortening gaming state (step S3639), and is in the second time-shortening gaming state. The second time-saving game state flag indicating the above is set to off (step S3640), and the game state transition process is terminated.

<Step S3641>
When the result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is not a small hit (step S3637: No), the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state. It is determined whether or not the time saving game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3641). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift the gaming state from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state.

The third time-saving game state transition flag is set for the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop-out when the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is the time-saving symbol stop-out. (See FIG. 87 (E)), when the subtraction value obtained by subtracting the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of remaining time reduction games in the second time reduction game state is larger than 0 (set for the time reduction symbol stop deviation). When the number of time-saving games to be played is larger than the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state), it is set to ON in step S3412 in the variation start process of FIG. 90.

The MPU 41 sets the process to step S3642 when the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3641: Yes), that is, when the game state is changed from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state. Transition. On the other hand, the MPU 41 steps the process when the third time-shortened gaming state transition flag is set to off (step S3641: No), that is, when the gaming state is not shifted from the second time-shortened gaming state to the third time-shortened gaming state. Move to S3648.

<Steps S3642 and S3643>
When the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set to on (step S3641: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the second time-shortened gaming state to the third time-shortened gaming state (step S3642), and the third time is reduced. The upper limit value (specified number of times) of the special figure game executed in the time saving game state is set in the time saving number counter (step S3643), and the process shifts to step S3644.

Here, the value of the time saving number counter is set as a value corresponding to the time saving game number selected when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time saving game state is out of the time saving symbol stop. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 87 (E), in the MPU 41, the value of the time saving number counter is set to "10" when 10 times are selected as the number of time saving games, and the time saving number of games is 30. When the number of times is selected, it is set to "30", when 50 times is selected as the number of time-saving games, it is set to "50", and when 100 times is selected as the number of time-saving games, it is set to "100". Is set to. That is, the number of time-saving games when shifting from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state is the number of time-saving games selected when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is out of the time-saving symbol stop. Will be updated.

Here, in the third time-shortening gaming state, as described above, since the electric accessory 315b is operated for a longer time than in the first time-shortening gaming state and the second time-shortening gaming state, the game ball 99 is placed in the second winning opening 315. Is easy to enter, so that the time-saving gaming state in which the operating time of the electric accessory 315b is short is more advantageous to the player than the first time-shortening gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state. Further, in the small hit game executed when the result of the big hit lottery in the first time short game state and the second time short game state is a small hit, the game ball 99 to the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 is executed. In contrast to the fact that it is impossible to enter the ball, in the third short-time game state, in the small hit game executed when the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit, the game to the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83. It is possible to enter the ball 99. Therefore, the third time-shortening game state is different from the first time-shortening game state and the second time-shortening game, and is a two-kind big hit based on the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 in the small hit game. In that the game can be executed, it is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game.

In this way, the number of time-saving games when shifting from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is out of the time-saving symbol stop. By updating to the number of times, it is possible to effectively utilize the value for the number of time-saving games determined for the time-saving symbol stop.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is the time-saving symbol stop-out, the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop-out is set in the second time-saving game state. When the number of remaining time-saving games is larger than the number of remaining time-saving games, the game is shifted to the third time-saving game state. Granted. As a result, attention and interest in the game can be increased, so that the interest of the game is improved.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is the time-saving symbol stop-out, the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop-out is set in the second time-saving game state. If it is less than or equal to the number of remaining time-saving games, the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is not changed. The number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation may be added to the number of time-saving games of. As a result, the number of jackpot lottery for determining whether or not to shift from the second time-shortening gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state increases, so that there is a possibility of shifting to the third time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Since it is maintained for a longer period of time, attention and interest in the game can be increased, and the interest of the game is improved.

<Steps S3644 and S3645>
In step S3644, the MPU 41 sets the third time-saving game state flag indicating that it is in the third time-saving game state to on, and further controls the voice lamp to shift from the second time-saving game to the third time-saving game state. The third time-saving game state A transition command to be notified to the device 5 is set (step S3645), and the process is shifted to step S3646.

The third time-saving game state A transition command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in step S1401 in the main process of FIG. 88. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute the effect corresponding to the third time-saving gaming state.

<Steps S3646 and S3647>
In step S3646, the MPU 41 sets the third time-shortened game state transition flag to be turned off, and further sets the second time-shortened game state flag indicating that the player is in the second time-shortened game state to off. (Step S3647), the game state transition process is terminated.

<Step S3648>
When the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set to off (step S3641: No), that is, when the game state is not shifted from the second time-shortened gaming state to the third time-shortened gaming state, the MPU 41 is set to the second time-shortened gaming state. It is determined whether or not the value of the time saving number counter indicating the number of remaining time saving games in is 0 (step S3627).

The time reduction counter for the second time reduction game state is set in steps S3762, S3679 or S3686 of FIG. 101 when the game state transition process shifts from the type 1 jackpot game state to the second time reduction game state. It is subtracted each time the special figure game (first special figure game or second special figure game) is started in step S3407 in the special figure variation start process of FIG. 90.

The MPU 41 executed a special figure game in which the value of the time reduction counter for the second time reduction game state is 0 (step S3648: Yes), that is, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time reduction game number in the second time reduction game state. If so, the process proceeds to step S3649. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 (step S3649: No), that is, when the special figure game of the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time reduction game is not executed in the second time reduction game state, the MPU 41 is used. The game state transition process is terminated.

<Steps S3649 to S3651>
When the value of the time reduction counter for the second time reduction game state is 0 (step S3648: Yes), that is, when the special figure game of the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time reduction game number is executed in the second time reduction game state, MPU41 Shifts the gaming state from the second time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state (step S3648). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state flag indicating that it is in the normal gaming state to on (step S3650), and sets the second time saving gaming state flag indicating that it is in the second time saving gaming state to off (step S3650). Step S3651), the game state transition process is terminated.

<Step S3652>
When the second time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S3631: No), that is, when it is not the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 indicates that it is in the third time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 100. It is determined whether or not the third short game state flag is set to ON (step S3652).

It should be noted that the third time-shortened game state flag is set to step S3644 in FIG. 99, step S3694 in FIG. 101, and step S3719 in FIG. 103 when the game state shift process shifts from another gaming state to the third time-shortened game state. Or it is set to on in S3723.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3653 when the third time saving game state flag is set to on (step S3652: Yes), that is, when the third time saving game state is set. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3669 of FIG. 89 when the third time saving game state flag is set to off (step S3652: No), that is, when the third time saving game state is not set.

<Step S3653>
When the third time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S3652: Yes), that is, when the third time-shortened game state is set, the MPU 41 has a variable display special symbol (first special figure or second special figure). ) Has been stopped (the special figure game has ended), and it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 shifts from the third short-time game state to another game state (type 1 big hit game state, small hit game state, normal game state) when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the special figure game is completed). Determine if it is possible timing.

In addition, the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is the special figure game control of the above-mentioned first embodiment of FIG. It is set to on in step S1908 in the process.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3654 when the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to ON (step S3653: Yes), that is, when it is possible to shift from the third gaming state to another gaming state. .. On the other hand, the MPU 41 performs the game state transition process when the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to off (step S3653: No), that is, when it is not the timing when the third game state can be shifted to another game state. finish.

<Step S3654>
When the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to on (step step S3653: Yes), that is, when it is the timing when the third gaming state can be shifted to another gaming state, the MPU 41 is displayed by the stop display of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the completed special figure game is a type 1 jackpot (step S3654).

When the result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is one kind big hit (step S3654: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3655. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a type 1 jackpot (step S3654: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3658.

<Steps S3655-S3657>
When the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is the type 1 jackpot (step S3655: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the third time-saving gaming state to the type 1 jackpot gaming state. (Step S3655). Then, the MPU 41 is set to turn on the third time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag indicating that it is the type 1 jackpot gaming state shifted from the third time-saving gaming state (step S3656), and in the third time-saving gaming state. The third time-saving game state flag indicating that there is is set to off (step S3657), and the game state transition process is terminated.

<Step S3658>
When the result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is not one kind big hit (step S3654: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit (step). S3658). When the result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is a small hit (step S3658: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3569. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit lottery is not a small hit (step S3658: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3662.

<Steps S3659 to S3661>
When the result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is a small hit (step S3658: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the third time saving game state to the small hit game state (step). S3659). Then, the MPU 41 is set to turn on the third time-shortening small hit gaming state flag indicating that it is the small hit gaming state shifted from the third time-shortening gaming state (step S3660), and is in the third time-shortening gaming state. The third time-saving game state flag indicating the above is set to off (step S3661), and the game state transition process is terminated.

<Step S3662>
If the result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is not a small hit (step S3658: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is out of the time saving symbol stop (step S3658: No). Step S3662).

When the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is out of the time saving symbol stop (step S3662: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3663. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot lottery is not out of the time saving symbol stop (step S3662: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3665.

<Step S3663>
When the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is out of the time saving symbol stop (step S3662: Yes), the MPU 41 executes the resetting process of the time saving number counter for the third time saving game state. (Step S3663), the process proceeds to step S3664. In this resetting process, the MPU 41 is selected for the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) selected for the time-saving symbol stop deviation rather than the remaining number of time-saving games in, for example, the third time-saving game state (see FIG. 87 (E)). If there are more cases, the value of the time reduction counter for the third time reduction game state is reset to the time reduction game count (specified number of times).

In this way, when the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) selected for the time-saving symbol stop deviation is larger than the number of remaining time-saving games in the third time-saving game state (see FIG. 87 (E)). By resetting the value of the time reduction counter to the number of time reduction games (specified number of times), the number of big hit lottery executed in the third time reduction game state (number of special figure games) increases, so that the third time reduction game state That is, it becomes possible to further enjoy the profit that the two-kind big hit game based on the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 in the small hit game can be executed.

In addition, the processing for the time saving number counter when the result of the big hit lottery in the third time saving game state is out of the time saving symbol stop is the first when the result of the big hit lottery in the third time saving game state is out of the time saving symbol stop. It may be reset regardless of the number of remaining time-saving games in the three-time-saving game state. For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is the time-saving symbol stop-out, the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) selected for the time-saving symbol stop-out (see FIG. 87 (E)) is the relevant. Regardless of whether it is more or less than the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state, the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) selected for the time-saving symbol stop deviation may be changed. Of course, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is the time-saving symbol stop-out, the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) selected for the time-saving symbol stop-out (see FIG. 87 (E)) is the relevant. Regardless of whether it is more or less than the number of remaining time-saving games in the third time-saving game state, it may be maintained without resetting the number of remaining time-saving games in the third time-saving game state.

<Step S3664>
In step S3664, the MPU 41 sets a time reduction counter reset command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the time reduction counter reset processing has been executed (step S3664), and ends the game state transition process. .. In addition to the fact that the time reduction counter resetting process has been executed, the time reduction counter reset command includes information on the changed time reduction game count when the value of the time reduction counter is changed. .. Then, the time reduction counter reset command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. 76, and the voice lamp control device 5 receives the time reduction counter reset command. To reset the value of the time reduction counter.

<Step S3665>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is not out of the time reduction symbol stop (step S3662: No), the MPU 41 is a time reduction counter indicating the number of remaining time reduction games in the third time reduction game state. Is 0 or not (step S3665).

The time reduction counter for the third time reduction game state is shown in FIG. 99 when the second time reduction game state, the type 1 jackpot game state, or the type 2 jackpot game state is shifted to the third time reduction game state in the game state transition process. The special figure game (first special figure game or second special figure game) is set in step S3643 of FIG. 101, step S3693 of FIG. 101, or step S3724 of FIG. It is subtracted each time it is started.

The MPU 41 executed a special figure game in which the value of the time reduction counter for the third time reduction game state is 0 (step S3665: Yes), that is, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time reduction game number in the third time reduction game state. If so, the process proceeds to step S3666. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 (step S3649: No), that is, when the special figure game of the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time reduction game is not executed in the third time reduction game state, the MPU 41 is used. The game state transition process is terminated.

<Steps S3666 to S3668>
When the value of the time reduction counter for the third time reduction game state is 0 (step S3665: Yes), that is, when the special figure game of the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time reduction game number is executed in the third time reduction game state, MPU41 Shifts the gaming state from the third time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state (step S3666). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state flag indicating that it is in the normal gaming state to on (step S3667), and sets the third time saving gaming state flag indicating that it is in the third time saving gaming state to off (step S3667). Step S3668), the game state transition process is terminated.

<Step S3669>
When the third time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S3652: No), that is, when the third time-shortened game state is not set, the MPU 41 normally turns on the type 1 jackpot game state flag as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is set (step S3669).

The normal type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the normal gaming state is a type 1 jackpot gaming state, and when the gaming state is shifted from the normal gaming state to the type 1 jackpot gaming state. , Is set to ON in step S3611 of FIG. 97 of the game state transition process.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3670 when the type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is normally set to on (step S3669: Yes), that is, when the type 1 jackpot gaming state is shifted from the normal gaming state. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3676 when the type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is normally set to off (step S3669: No), that is, when it is not the type 1 jackpot gaming state shifted from the normal gaming state. ..

<Step S3670>
If the normal type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to on (step S3669: Yes), that is, if the type 1 jackpot game state is shifted from the normal game state, has the MPU 41 completed the type 1 jackpot game? It is determined whether or not (step S3670). Whether or not the type 1 jackpot game is completed is determined based on, for example, the jackpot game end flag set on when the jackpot game is terminated in the jackpot game control process of step S1407 in the main process of FIG. 88. (See step S2251 of the jackpot control process in FIG. 29 of the first embodiment described above).

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3761 when the type 1 jackpot game is completed (step S3670: Yes), and ends the game state transition process when the type 1 jackpot game is not completed (step S3670: No). do.

<Steps S3761 and S3762>
When the type 1 jackpot game is completed (step S3670: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the type 1 jackpot gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state (step S3761), and is executed in the second time-saving gaming state. The upper limit value (specified number of times) of the special figure game is set in the time reduction number counter (step S3762), and the process shifts to step S3763.

Here, the value of the time saving number counter is set as a value corresponding to the time saving game number selected when the result of the big hit lottery in the normal game state is a big hit. Specifically, the MPU 41 is set to "100" as the value of the time reduction counter when the MPU 41 is transferred from the type 1 jackpot gaming state to the second time reduction gaming state, which is transferred based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal gaming state. (See FIGS. 86 (B) and 87 (G)).

<Steps S3763 to S3675>
In step S3763, the MPU 41 sets the second time-saving game state flag indicating that it is in the second time-saving game state to on, and further, the voice lamp control device 5 indicates that the game state is shifted to the second time-saving game state. The second time-saving game state transition command to be notified to is set (step S3674). This second time-saving game state transition command includes information indicating that the gaming state is transferred to the second time-shortening gaming state, as well as information regarding the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) in the second time-saving gaming state. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of 88. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the number of time-saving games (prescribed number of times) based on the second time-saving game state transition command, and can execute the effect corresponding to the second time-saving game state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal type 1 big hit game state flag indicating that the normal game state has been shifted to the type 1 big hit game state to off (step S3675), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3676>
When the normal type 1 big hit game state flag is set to off (step S3669: No), that is, when the type 1 big hit game state is not shifted from the normal game state, the MPU 41 sets the 1st time saving type 1 big hit game state flag. Determines whether or not is set to on (step S3676).

The 1st time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the 1st time-saving gaming state is a 1st type jackpot gaming state, and the gaming state is from the 1st time-saving gaming state to the 1st type jackpot gaming state. When shifting to, it is set to ON in step S3621 of FIG. 98 of the game state transition process.

The MPU 41 processes when the first type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is set to on (step S3676: Yes), that is, when the gaming state is the type 1 jackpot gaming state shifted from the first time saving gaming state. To step S3677. On the other hand, the MPU 41 steps the process when the first type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is set to off (step S3676: No), that is, when it is not the type 1 jackpot gaming state shifted from the first time saving gaming state. Move to S3683.

<Step S3677>
When the 1st time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S3676: Yes), that is, when the gaming state is the 1st type jackpot gaming state shifted from the 1st time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 is 1. It is determined whether or not the seed jackpot game is completed (step S3677). Whether or not the type 1 jackpot game is completed is determined based on, for example, the jackpot game end flag set on when the process of ending the jackpot game is executed in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 88. (See step S2251 of the jackpot control process in FIG. 29 of the first embodiment described above).

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3678 when the type 1 jackpot game is completed (step S3677: Yes), and ends the game state transition process when the type 1 jackpot game is not completed (step S3677: No). do.

<Steps S3678 and S3679>
When the type 1 jackpot game is completed (step S3677: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the type 1 jackpot gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state (step S3678), and is executed in the second time-saving gaming state. The upper limit value (specified number of times) of the special figure game is set in the time reduction number counter (step S3679), and the process shifts to step S3680.

Here, the value of the time saving number counter is set as a value corresponding to the time saving game number selected when the result of the big hit lottery in the first time saving game state is a big hit. Specifically, when the MPU 41 is transferred from the type 1 jackpot gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state, which is transferred based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the first time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 is set as the value of the time-saving number counter. 100 ”is set (see FIGS. 86 (B) and 87 (G)).

<Steps S3680 to S3682>
In step S3680, the MPU 41 sets the second time-saving game state flag indicating that it is in the second time-saving game state to on, and further, the voice lamp control device 5 indicates that the game state is shifted to the second time-saving game state. The second time-saving game state transition command to be notified to is set (step S3681). This second time-saving game state transition command includes information indicating that the gaming state is transferred to the second time-shortening gaming state, as well as information regarding the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) in the second time-saving gaming state. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of 88. As a result, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives the second time-saving game state transition command, the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the number of time-saving games (prescribed number of times) and can execute the effect corresponding to the second time-saving game state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the first time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag, which indicates that it is the type 1 jackpot gaming state shifted from the first time-saving gaming state, to off (step S3682), and ends the game state transition process. do.

<Step S3683>
When the first time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to off (step S3676: No), that is, when it is not the type 1 jackpot gaming state shifted from the first time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 is the second time-saving type 1. It is determined whether or not the jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S3683).

The second time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the game state is a type 1 jackpot gaming state shifted from the second time-saving gaming state, and the gaming state is from the second time-saving gaming state to the type 1 jackpot gaming state. When transitioning to, it is set to on in step S3636 of FIG.

The MPU 41 performs processing in step S3684 when the second time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is set to on (step S3683: Yes), that is, when it is the type 1 jackpot gaming state shifted from the second time-saving gaming state. Move to. On the other hand, the MPU 41 steps the process when the second time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is set to off (step S3683: No), that is, when it is not the type 1 jackpot gaming state shifted from the second time-saving gaming state. Move to S3690.

<Step S3684>
When the second type 1 big hit game status flag is set to on (step S3684: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the type 1 big hit game is completed (step S3684). Whether or not the type 1 jackpot game is completed is determined based on, for example, the jackpot game end flag set on when the process of ending the jackpot game is executed in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 88. (See step S2251 of the jackpot control process in FIG. 29 of the first embodiment described above).

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3685 when the type 1 jackpot game is completed (step S3684: Yes), and ends the game state transition process when the type 1 jackpot game is not completed (step S3684: No). do.

<Steps S3685 and S3686>
When the type 1 jackpot game is completed (step S3684: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the type 1 jackpot gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state (step S3685), and is executed in the second time-saving gaming state. The upper limit value (specified number of times) of the special figure game is set in the time reduction number counter (step S3686), and the process shifts to step S3387.

Here, the value of the time saving number counter is set as a value corresponding to the time saving game number selected when the result of the big hit lottery in the second time saving game state is a big hit. Specifically, when the MPU 41 is transferred from the type 1 jackpot gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state, which is transferred based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 is set as the value of the time-saving number counter. 100 ”is set (see FIGS. 86 (B) and 87 (G)).

<Steps S3687 to S3689>
In step S3687, the MPU 41 sets the second time-saving game state flag indicating that it is in the second time-saving game state to on, and further, the voice lamp control device 5 indicates that the game state is shifted to the second time-saving game state. The second time-saving game state transition command to be notified to is set (step S3688). This second time-saving game state transition command includes information indicating that the gaming state is transferred to the second time-shortening gaming state, as well as information regarding the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) in the second time-saving gaming state. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of 88. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the number of time-saving games (prescribed number of times) based on the second time-saving game state transition command, and can execute the effect corresponding to the second time-saving game state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the second time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the type 1 jackpot game state shifted from the second time-shortening gaming state, to off (step S3689), and ends the game state transition process. do.

<Step S3690>
When the second time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to off (step S3683: No), that is, when the type 1 jackpot game state shifted from the second time-saving gaming state is not set, the MPU 41 is the third time-saving type 1. It is determined whether or not the jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S3690).

The third time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the game state is a type 1 jackpot gaming state shifted from the third time-saving gaming state, and the gaming state is a type 1 jackpot gaming state from the third time-saving gaming state. When transitioning to, it is set to on in step S3656 of FIG.

The MPU 41 performs processing in step S3691 when the third time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is set to on (step S3690: Yes), that is, when it is the type 1 jackpot gaming state shifted from the third time-saving gaming state. Move to. On the other hand, the MPU 41 processes the process when the second time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is set to off (step S3690: No) and when it is not the type 1 jackpot gaming state shifted from the third time-saving gaming state. Step S3697.

<Step S3691>
When the third time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to on (step S36901: Yes), that is, when the type 1 jackpot gaming state is shifted from the third time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 is a type 1 jackpot game. Is determined (step S3691). Whether or not the type 1 jackpot game is completed is determined based on, for example, the jackpot game end flag set on when the process of ending the jackpot game is executed in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 88. (See step S2251 of the jackpot control process in FIG. 29 of the first embodiment described above).

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3692 when the type 1 jackpot game is completed (step S3691: Yes), and when the type 1 jackpot game is not completed (step S3691: No), that is, from the third time saving game state. If it is not the transferred type 1 jackpot game state, the game state transition process is terminated.

<Steps S3692 and S3693>
When the type 1 jackpot game is completed (step S3691: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the type 1 jackpot gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state (step S3692), and is executed in the third time-saving gaming state. The upper limit value (specified number of times) of the special figure game is set in the time reduction number counter (step S3693), and the process shifts to step S3694.

Here, the value of the time saving number counter is set as a value corresponding to the time saving game number selected when the result of the big hit lottery in the third time saving game state is a big hit. Specifically, when the MPU 41 is transferred from the type 1 jackpot gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state, which is transferred based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 is set as the value of the time-saving number counter. 50 ”is set (see FIG. 87 (F)).

<Steps S3694 to S3696>
In step S3694, the MPU 41 sets the third time-saving game state flag indicating that it is in the third time-saving game state to on, and further, voices that the game state is changed from the jackpot game state to the third time-saving game state. The third time-saving game state B transition command to be notified to the lamp control device 5 is set (step S3695). This third time-saving game state B transition command is related to the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) in the third time-saving game state, in addition to the information indicating that the gaming state is changed from the jackpot gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state. The information is included and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. 88. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the number of time-saving games (prescribed number of times) based on the third time-saving game state B transition command, and can execute the effect corresponding to the third time-saving game state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the third time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag, which indicates that it is the type 1 jackpot gaming state shifted from the third time-saving gaming state, to off (step S3696), and ends the game state transition process. do.

<Step S3697>
When the second type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is set to off (step S3690: No), and when it is not the type 1 jackpot gaming state shifted from the third time saving gaming state, the MPU 41 is as shown in FIG. 102. , It is determined whether or not the normal small hit game state flag is set to ON (step S3697).

The normal small hit gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the gaming state is the small hit gaming state shifted from the normal gaming state, and when the gaming state is shifted from the normal gaming state to the small hit gaming state. , It is set to ON in step S3615 of FIG. 97 in the game state transition process.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3698 when the normal small hit game state flag is set to on (step S3679: Yes), that is, when the game state is the small hit game state shifted from the normal game state. .. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3702 when the normal small hit gaming state flag is set to off (step S3697: No), that is, when the gaming state is not the small hit gaming state shifted from the normal gaming state. do.

<Step S3698>
When the normal small hit game state flag is set to on (step S3679: Yes), that is, when the game state is the small hit game state shifted from the normal game state, has the MPU 41 finished the small hit game? It is determined whether or not (step S3698). Whether or not the small hit game is completed is determined by, for example, the small hit game end flag set to ON when the movable vane portion 832 of the vane accessory device 83 is returned in step S3536 in the small hit game control process of FIG. Judgment is based on.

When the small hit game is completed (step S3698: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3699, and when the small hit game is not finished (step S3698: No), the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S3699 to S3701>
When the small hit game is completed (step S3698: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal small hit game state flag to off (step S3699) and shifts the game state from the small hit game state to the normal game state (step). S3700). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag indicating that it is in the normal game state to ON (step S3701), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3702>
When the normal small hit game state flag is set to off (step S3697: No), that is, when the game state is not the small hit game state shifted from the normal game state, the MPU 41 sets the first time reduction small hit game state flag. Determines whether or not is set to on (step S3702).

The first time-saving small hit gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the gaming state is the small hit gaming state shifted from the first time-shortening gaming state, and the gaming state is from the first time-shortening gaming state to the small hit gaming state. When shifting to, it is set to ON in step S3625 of FIG. 98 in the game state transition process.

The MPU 41 steps the process when the first time reduction small hit game state flag is set to on (step S3702: Yes), that is, when the game state is the small hit game state shifted from the first time reduction game state. Move to S3703. on the other hand. The MPU 41 performs processing in step S3707 when the first time-saving small hit gaming state flag is set to off (step S3702: No), that is, when the gaming state is not the small hit gaming state shifted from the first time-shortening gaming state. Move to.

<Step S3703>
When the first time-saving small hit game status flag is set to on (step S3702: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the small hit game is completed (step S3703). Whether or not the small hit game is completed is determined by, for example, the small hit game end flag set to ON when the movable vane portion 832 of the vane accessory device 83 is returned in step S3036 in the small hit game control process of FIG. Judgment is based on.

When the small hit game is completed (step S3703: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3704, and when the small hit game is not finished (step S3703: No), the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S3704 to S3706>
When the small hit game is completed (step S3703: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first time reduction small hit game state flag to off (step S3704) and changes the game state from the small hit game state to the first time reduction game state. Transition (step S3705). Then, the MPU 41 sets the first time-reduced game state flag indicating that it is in the first time-reduced game state to ON (step S3706), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3707>
When the first time reduction small hit game state flag is set to off (step S3702: No), that is, when the game state is not the small hit game state shifted from the first time reduction game state, the MPU 41 has the second time reduction small. It is determined whether or not the winning game status flag is set to ON (step S3707).

The second time-saving small hit gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the gaming state is the small hit gaming state shifted from the second time-shortening gaming state, and the gaming state is from the second time-shortening gaming state to the small hit gaming state. When shifting to, it is set to ON in step S3639 of FIG. 99 in the game state transition process.

The MPU 41 steps the process when the second time reduction small hit game state flag is set to on (step S3707: Yes), that is, when the game state is the small hit game state shifted from the second time reduction game state. Move to S3708. On the other hand, the MPU 41 performs processing when the second time reduction small hit game state flag is set to off (step S3707: No), that is, when the game state is not the small hit game state shifted from the second time reduction game state. The process proceeds to step S3712 of FIG. 103.

<Step S3708>
When the second time-saving small hit game state flag is set to on (step S3707: Yes), that is, when the game state is the small hit game state shifted from the second time short game state, the MPU 41 performs the small hit game. It is determined whether or not is completed (step S3708). Whether or not the small hit game is completed is determined by, for example, the small hit game end flag set to ON when the movable vane portion 832 of the vane accessory device 83 is returned in step S3036 in the small hit game control process of FIG. Judgment is based on.

When the small hit game is completed (step S3708: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3709, and when the small hit game is not finished (step S3708: No), the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S3709 to S3711>
When the small hit game is completed (step S3708: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second time reduction small hit game state flag to off (step S3709), and changes the game state from the small hit game state to the second time reduction game state. Transition (step S3710). Then, the MPU 41 sets the second time-saving game state flag indicating that it is in the second time-saving game state to ON (step S3711), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3712>
When the second time reduction small hit game state flag is set to off (step S3707: No), that is, when the game state is not the small hit game state shifted from the second time reduction game state, as shown in FIG. 103. The MPU 41 determines whether or not the third time reduction small hit game state flag is set to ON (step S3712).

The third time-saving small hit gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the gaming state is the small hit gaming state shifted from the third time-shortening gaming state, and the gaming state is from the third time-shortening gaming state to the small hit gaming state. When shifting to, it is set to ON in step S3660 of FIG. 100 in the game state transition process.

The MPU 41 steps the process when the third time reduction small hit game state flag is set to on (step S3712: Yes), that is, when the game state is the small hit game state shifted from the third time reduction game state. Move to S3713. On the other hand, the MPU 41 performs processing when the third time reduction small hit game state flag is set to off (step S3712: No), that is, when the game state is not the small hit game state shifted from the third time reduction game state. The process proceeds to step S3720.

<Step S3713>
When the third time-saving small hit game state flag is set to on (step S3712: Yes), that is, when the game state is the small hit game state shifted from the third time short game state, the MPU 41 performs the small hit game. It is determined whether or not is completed (step S3713). Whether or not the small hit game is completed is determined by, for example, the small hit game end flag set to ON when the movable vane portion 832 of the vane accessory device 83 is returned in step S3036 in the small hit game control process of FIG. Judgment is based on.

When the small hit game is completed (step S3713: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3714, and when the small hit game is not finished (step S3713: No), the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S3714 and S3715>
When the small hit game is completed (step S3713: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the third time-saving small hit game status flag to off (step S3714). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball 99 has been inserted into the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 (step S3715). Whether or not the game ball 99 has been inserted into the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 is determined by, for example, whether or not the game ball 99 has been inserted into the V winning opening 833 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 in the main process of FIG. It is determined based on the V winning flag set to be on when it is detected by the ball entry sensor (not shown) that the ball has been entered.

When the game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 (step S3715: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3716 and plays a game in the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83. If the ball 99 is not inserted (step S3715: No), the process proceeds to step S3718.

<Steps S3716 and S3717>
When the game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 (step S3715: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the small hit game state to the two-kind big hit game state (step S3716). ), Set the two-kind jackpot game state flag indicating that the two-kind jackpot game state is on (step S3717), and end the game state transition process.

<Steps S3718 and S3719>
When the game ball 99 is not inserted into the V winning opening 833 of the wing accessory device 83 (step S3715: No), the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the small hit game state to the third time reduction game state (step S3718). , The third time-saving game state flag indicating that the game state is in the third time-saving game state is set to on (step S3719), and the game state transition process is terminated.

<Step S3720>
When the third time-saving small hit game state flag is set to off (step S3712: No), that is, when the game state is not the small hit game state shifted from the third time short game state, the MPU 41 is a type 2 big hit game. It is determined whether or not the two-kind jackpot game state flag indicating that the state is set is set to ON (step S3720). The type 2 jackpot gaming state flag is set to on in step S3717 when the gaming state shifts from the third time-shortened gaming state to the type 2 jackpot gaming state.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3721 when the type 2 jackpot gaming state flag is set to on (step S3720: Yes), that is, when the type 2 jackpot gaming state is set. On the other hand, the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process when the type 2 jackpot gaming state flag is set to off (step S3720: No), that is, when the type 2 jackpot gaming state is not set.

<Step S3721>
When the two-kind jackpot game state flag is set to on (step S3720: Yes), that is, when the two-kind jackpot game state is set, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the two-kind jackpot game has ended (step S3721). ). Whether or not the type 2 jackpot game is completed is determined based on, for example, the jackpot game end flag set on when the process of ending the jackpot game is executed in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 88. (See step S2251 of the jackpot control process in FIG. 29 of the first embodiment described above).

When the type 2 jackpot game is completed (step S3721: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3722, and when the type 2 jackpot game is not completed (step S3721: No), the game state transition process is performed. finish.

<Steps S3722 to S3724>
When the type 2 jackpot game is completed (step S3721: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the type 2 jackpot gaming state to the third time-shortening gaming state (step S3722), and indicates that the gaming state is the third time-saving gaming state. The third time-saving game status flag shown is set to on (step S3723). Then, the MPU 41 sets the time reduction counter (step S3724), and shifts the process to step S3725.

Here, the value of the time saving number counter is set as a value corresponding to the time saving game number selected when the jackpot game in the third time saving game state is executed. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets "50" as the value of the time reduction number counter when shifting from the type 2 jackpot gaming state to the third time reduction gaming state (see FIG. 87 (F)).

<Steps S3725 and S3726>
In step S3725, the MPU 41 sets a third time-saving game state B transition command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the gaming state is shifted from the jackpot gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state, and further, two types of jackpot games. The two-kind jackpot game state flag indicating that the state is set is set to off (step S3726), and the game state transition process is terminated.

Here, the third time-saving game state B transition command includes information indicating that the gaming state is shifted from the jackpot gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state, and the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) in the third time-saving gaming state. ), And is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. 88. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the number of time-saving games (prescribed number of times) based on the third time-saving game state B transition command, and can execute the effect corresponding to the third time-saving game state.

[Processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 104 to 113, the process executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, a part of the command determination process among the processes of the voice lamp control device 5 is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process of the present embodiment, a command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. However, a process of setting and managing the number of time-saving games in various time-saving game states, etc. Is executed, which is different from the command determination process of the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2703 of the sub-timer interrupt process in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 42.

<Step S3801>
As shown in FIG. 104, in the command determination process of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a command has been received (step S3801). When the MPU 51 receives a command (step S3801: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3802, and when the command is not received (step S3801: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process.

<Step S3802>
When the command is received (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is the first time-saving game state transition command (step S3802). The first time-saving game state transition command is a command indicating that the game state shifts from the normal gaming state to the first time-saving gaming state based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal gaming state being out of the time-saving symbol stop. be. This first time-saving game state transition command is set when the game state is changed from the normal gaming state to the first time-saving gaming state in step S3607 of FIG. 97 in the game state transition process.

When the received command is the first time-saving game state transition command (step S3802: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3803, and when the received command is not the first time-saving game state transition command (step S3802: No). ), The process proceeds to step S3805.

<Steps S3803 and S3804>
When the received command is the first time-saving game state transition command (step S3802: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the first time-saving game state flag indicating that it is in the first time-saving game state to on (step S3803). Then, the MPU 51 sets the time-saving game number counter based on the information regarding the time-saving game number included in the first time-saving game state transition command (step S3804), and ends the command determination process.

<Step S3805>
If the received command is not the first time-saving game state transition command (step S3802: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is the second time-saving game state transition command (step S3805). The second time-shortened gaming state transition command is a command indicating that the gaming state shifts from the type 1 jackpot gaming state to the second time-shortened gaming state. This second time-saving game state transition command is set in step S3674, S3681 or S3688 of FIG. 101 in the game state transition process when the game state is changed from the type 1 jackpot gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state.

When the received command is the second time-saving game state transition command (step S3805: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3806, and when the received command is not the second time-saving game state transition command (step S3805: No). ), The process proceeds to step S3808.

<Steps S3806 and S3807>
When the received command is the second time-saving game state transition command (step S3805: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the second time-saving game state flag indicating that it is in the second time-saving game state to on (step S3806). Then, the MPU 51 sets the time-saving game number counter based on the information regarding the time-saving game number included in the second time-saving game state transition command (step S3807), and ends the command determination process.

<Step S3808>
When the received command is not the second time-saving game state transition command (step S3805: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is the third time-shortening game state A transition command (step S3808). The third time-shortened gaming state A transition command is a command indicating that the gaming state shifts from the second time-shortened gaming state to the third time-shortened gaming state. This third time-reduced game state A transition command is set when the game state is changed from the second time-reduced gaming state to the third time-reduced gaming state in step S3645 of FIG. 99 in the game state transition process.

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3809 when the received command is the third time-saving game state A transition command (step S3808: Yes), and when the received command is not the third time-shortening game state A transition command (step S3808). : No), the process proceeds to step S3812.

<Steps S3809-S3811>
When the received command is the third time-shortened game state A transition command (step S3808: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the third time-shortened game state flag indicating that the third time-shortened game state is on (step S3809). .. Then, the MPU 51 sets the time-saving game number counter based on the information regarding the time-saving game number included in the third time-saving game state A transition command (step S3810).

Further, the MPU 51 sets the third time-shortened gaming state transition flag, which indicates that the gaming state is shifted from the second time-shortened gaming state to the third time-shortened gaming state, to ON (step S3811), and ends the command determination process. .. In step S3904 in the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of FIG. 105, which will be described later, the third time-shortening game state transition flag clearly indicates that the third time-shortening game state transition is to be performed. (See FIGS. 106 (B) and 110 (D)) is referred to for determining whether or not to set.

<Step S3812>
When the received command is not the third time-saving game state A transition command (step S3808: No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the third time-shortening game state B transition command (step S3812). The third time-shortened game state B transition command is a command indicating that the game state shifts from the jackpot game state to the third time-shortened game state. This third time-shortened game state B transition command is set when the game state is changed from the jackpot game state to the third time-shortened gaming state in step S3695 of FIG. 101 in the game state transition process.

When the received command is the third time-saving game state B transition command (step S3812: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3813, and when the received command is not the third time-saving game state B transition command (step S3812). : No), the process proceeds to step S3815.

<Steps S3813 and S3814>
When the received command is the third time-shortened game state B transition command (step S3812: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the third time-shortened game state flag indicating that the third time-shortened game state is on (step S3813). .. Then, the MPU 51 sets the time-saving game number counter based on the information regarding the time-saving game number included in the third time-saving game state B transition command (step S3814), and ends the command determination process.

<Step S3815>
When the received command is not the third time saving game state B transition command (step S3812: No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the time saving number counter reset command (step S3815). The time reduction counter reset command is a command for notifying that a determination has been made as to whether or not to reset the time reduction game count in the third time reduction game state, and the time reduction game count in the third time reduction game state is set. When resetting, information on the number of time-saving games after the change is included. This time reduction counter reset command is set when resetting the time reduction game count in the third time reduction game state in step S3664 of FIG. 100 in the game state transition process.

When the received command is the time reduction counter reset command (step S3815: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3816, and when the received command is not the time reduction counter reset command (step S3815: No). The process proceeds to step S3817.

<Step S3816>
When the received command is the time reduction counter reset command (step S3815: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the time reduction counter reset processing (step S3816). In this time reduction counter resetting process, if information about the time reduction game count after the time reduction counter reset command is changed is included, the value of the time reduction game counter is changed and the time reduction counter reset command is changed. If the information regarding the number of later time-saving games is not included, the value of the time-saving game number counter is not changed.

<Step S3817>
If the received command is not a time reduction counter reset command (step S3815: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S3817). The special figure fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the special figure game and the special figure fluctuation pattern (variation display time). This special figure variation pattern command is set when the variation display time (special figure variation pattern) of the special symbol is set in step S3414 of FIG. 90 in the special figure variation start processing.

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3818 when the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S3817: Yes), and performs the process when the received command is not a special figure variation pattern command (step S3817: No). The process proceeds to step S3823.

<Steps S3818 to S3820>
When the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S3817: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the effect type setting process (step S3818) and the stop symbol combination setting process (step S3819), and processes the process in step S3820. Transition.

The details of the procedure of the effect type setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 105 to 110. In this effect type setting process, the effect to be executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, etc. is a gaming state. It is set according to such. The details of the procedure for the stop symbol combination setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 111 and 112. In this stop symbol combination setting process, the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is a big hit lottery. It is set based on the result.

<Steps S3820 and S3821>
In step S3820, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time of the decorative symbol based on the special map variation pattern (variation display time) included in the special map variation pattern command (step S3820). Then, the MPU 51 displays and controls a variation type (effect pattern) set in step S3818 and a display variation pattern command for specifying the content of the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol in the symbol display unit 341 set in step S3819. It is transmitted to the device 6 (step S3821), and the process proceeds to step S3822.

The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the variation type (effect pattern) set in step S3818 and the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol in the symbol display unit 341 set in step S3819. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores an effect image corresponding to each display variation pattern command, a variation image of a decorative pattern, and the like. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the effect display on the symbol display unit 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command and the variation type (effect pattern).

<Step S3822>
In step S3822, the MPU 51 executes the time reduction counter processing and ends the command determination processing. The details of the procedure for the time reduction counter processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 113, but in this time reduction counter processing, a time reduction counter indicating the remaining time reduction game counts in the time reduction game state is managed.

<Step S3823>
When the received command is not a special figure variation pattern command (step S3817: No), the MPU 51 includes the processing of steps S3107 to S3134 in the command determination processing shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 in the first embodiment described above. , A process based on another command is executed (step S3823), and the command determination process is terminated.

[Variation type (effect pattern) setting process]
In the variation type (effect pattern) setting process executed in step S3818 when the special figure variation pattern is received in the command determination process of FIG. 104, the effect to be executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, or the like is performed. It is set according to the game state and the like. Here, FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for setting a variation type (effect pattern).

<Steps S3901 and S3902>
In the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 105, whether or not the MPU 51 is set to turn on the first time-saving game state flag indicating that it is in the first time-saving game state. Is determined (step S3901). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is in the first time-shortening gaming state. The first time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3803 when the first time-saving game state transition command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 104.

The MPU 51 has information (variation display time, jackpot lottery) included in the special figure variation pattern command when the first time reduction game state flag is set to on (step S3901: Yes), that is, when the first time reduction game state is set. (Result), the first time-saving game state effect preset for the first time-shortened game state is set (step S3902), and the variation type (effect pattern) setting process is terminated. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3903 when the first time saving game state flag is set to off (step S3901: No), that is, when it is not in the first time saving game state.

<Step S3903>
When the first time saving game state flag is set to off (step S3901: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second time saving game state flag indicating that the second time saving game state is set is set to on. Determine (step S3903). The second time-shortened game state flag, that is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second time-shortened game state is in effect. The second time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3806 when the second time-saving game state transition command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 104.

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3904 when the second time saving game state flag is set to on (step S3903: Yes), that is, when the second time saving game state is set. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3907 when the second time saving game state flag is set to off (step S3903: No), that is, when the second time saving game state is not set.

<Step S3904>
When the second time-saving game state flag is set to on (step S3903: Yes), that is, when the second time-saving game state is set, the MPU 51 is out of the time-saving symbol stop where the result of the jackpot lottery satisfies a predetermined condition. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the third time-saving gaming state transition flag indicating that the gaming state is shifted from the second time-shortening gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state is set to ON (step S3904). The third time-shortened game state transition flag receives the third time-shortened game state A transition command indicating that the game state is changed from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state in the command determination process of FIG. 104. If so, it is set to ON in step S3811.

When the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set to on (step S3904: Yes), that is, when the game state is shifted from the second time-shortened gaming state to the third time-shortened gaming state, the process shifts to step S3906. .. On the other hand, when the third time-shortened gaming state transition flag is set to off (step S3904: No), that is, when the gaming state is not shifted from the second time-shortened gaming state to the third time-shortened gaming state (second time-shortened gaming state is (If continued), the process proceeds to step S3905.

<Steps S3905 and S3906>
When the third time-shortened gaming state transition flag is set to off (step S3904: No), that is, when the gaming state is not shifted from the second time-shortened gaming state to the third time-shortened gaming state (second time-shortened gaming state is continued). ), The MPU 51 sets the second time-saving game state continuation effect as the second time-saving game state effect, which clearly indicates that the second time-saving game state continues (step S3905), and ends the effect type setting process. ..

On the other hand, when the third time-shortened gaming state transition flag is set to ON (step S3904: Yes), that is, when the gaming state is shifted from the second time-shortened gaming state to the third time-shortened gaming state, the MPU 51 is set to the second. As the time-saving game state effect, a third time-saving game state transition effect that clearly indicates that the game state is transferred from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state is set (step S3906), and the effect type setting process is completed. do.

Here, FIG. 106 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a second time-saving game state continuation effect pattern, which is a second time-saving game state effect, and FIG. 106 (B) is a diagram showing a third time-saving game state effect, which is a second time-saving game state effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state transition effect pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 106 (A) and 106 (B), the second time-saving game state effect (the second time-saving game state continuation effect and the third time-saving game state transition effect) is a battle effect between the main character and the enemy character. Will be executed. Of course, the second time-shortening game state production (second time-shortening game state continuation production and third time-shortening game state transition production) does not have to be a battle production, for example, a mission production (for example, a big hit lottery depending on the success or failure of the mission given to the character). It may be an effect that clearly or suggests the result of.

Further, FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a screen example of the symbol display unit 341 for explaining the second time-saving gaming state effect. Specifically, FIG. 107 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a screen at the start of a battle, and FIG. 107 (B) is an enlarged view of the HP display unit 75 on the screen at the start of a battle, FIG. 107 (C). FIG. 107 (E) is a diagram showing an example of a gauge display unit 75 image.

As shown in FIG. 107 (A), the screen of the symbol display unit 341 at the start of the battle is a character image of "battle start" indicating that the battle is started, and a hit point indicating the damage that the enemy character can withstand. (HP) Includes the HP image shown. The HP of the enemy character is in the range of 0 to 100, and 0 of the HP of the enemy character means that the enemy character collapses, that is, the ally character wins. In addition, the screen of the symbol display unit 341 at the start of the battle is in the third short-time game state (RUSH), which can shift to the two-type big hit game state via the small hit game when the HP of the enemy character becomes 0. Includes a text image of "RUSH rush when enemy HP becomes 0" indicating rush.

Then, the HP image is displayed on the HP display unit 75 set in the upper right of the symbol display unit 341. The HP display unit 75 displays an HP gauge 76 and an HP counter 77 indicating the HP of the enemy character.

As shown in FIG. 107 (B), the HP gauge 76 shows the HP of the enemy character as a gauge, and includes a large gauge 761 and a small gauge 762. The large gauge 761 is 10 HP per gauge. The small gauge 762 is 1 HP per gauge. In the example shown in FIG. 107 (B), the large gauge 761 is 9 gauge and the small gauge 762 is 9 gauge, which means that the HP of the enemy character is 99. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 107 (C), the HP of the enemy character is 31 because the large gauge 761 is 3 gauge and the small gauge 762 is 1 gauge, and in the example shown in FIG. 107 (D), the large gauge is used. Since 761 is 1 gauge and small gauge 762 is 0 gauge, the HP of the enemy character is 1. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 107 (E), since both the large gauge 761 and the small gauge 762 are 0 gauge, the HP of the enemy character is 0, and the ally character has won the enemy character, that is, the game state is It is shown that the transition from the second short-time gaming state to the third short-time gaming state is performed.

On the other hand, the HP counter 77 numerically indicates the HP of the enemy character. In the example shown in FIG. 107 (B), the number "99" is shown on the HP counter 77, which means that the HP of the enemy character is 99. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 107 (C), the number "31" is shown in the HP counter 77, the HP of the enemy character is 31, and in the example shown in FIG. 107 (D), the HP counter 77 is used. The number "1" is shown, and the HP of the enemy character is 1. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 107 (E), the number "0" is shown in the HP counter 77, the HP of the enemy character is 0, and the ally character has won the enemy character, that is, the game state. It is shown that the transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state is performed.

Then, in the present embodiment, the HP of the enemy character has a value displayed at the start of the battle corresponding to the maximum value of the remaining number of time-saving games including the fluctuation in the second time-saving game state. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 107 (A), it means that the maximum value of the remaining number of time-saving games including the special figure game in the second time-saving game state is 99. In this way, the HP value of the enemy character displayed at the start of the battle corresponds to the maximum value of the remaining number of time-saving games including the fluctuation in the second time-saving game state. From the HP of the enemy character displayed at the start, the maximum value of the remaining number of time-saving games including the fluctuation in the second time-saving game state can be grasped.

Returning to the description with reference to FIG. 106 (A), the second time-saving gaming state continuation effect is an effect indicating that the second time-saving game state continues. In the example shown in FIG. 106 (A), eight effect patterns A1 to A8 are set as the second time-saving gaming state continuation effect pattern. In each pattern A1 to A8, since the second time-saving game state continuation effect is an effect indicating the continuation of the second time-saving game state, the final result of the battle between the ally character and the enemy character is the victory of the ally character. It is a draw (draw) instead of. Then, the HP of the enemy character after the end of the battle does not become 0, and the value at the start of the battle is finally maintained.

Further, in the patterns A1 to A4, the ally character makes a first strike in the battle (see FIG. 96 (A)). Then, in the patterns A1 and A2, the enemy character defends against the attack of the ally character (see FIG. 108 (A)). At this time, the HP of the enemy character does not change. On the other hand, in the patterns A3 and A4, the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character (see FIG. 108 (C)). At this time, the HP of the enemy character is halved (pattern A3) or the remaining 1 (pattern A4).

Further, in the patterns A5 to A8, the enemy character makes a first strike in the battle (see FIG. 109 (A)). Then, in the patterns A5 and A6, the ally character defends against the attack of the enemy character (see FIG. 109 (B)). On the other hand, in the patterns A7 and A9, the attack of the enemy character hits the ally character (see FIG. 109 (C)). Then, in the patterns A5 to A8, the HP of the enemy character does not change because it is the first strike of the enemy character.

Then, in the patterns A2 to A8 excluding the pattern A1, the button effect is executed. As this button effect, for example, a long press effect that urges the player to perform a long press operation on the operation button 20 and reduces the HP of the enemy character based on the long press operation on the player's operation button 20 (see FIG. 110 (A)). , The player is urged to continuously press the operation button 20, and the HP of the enemy character is reduced based on the continuous pressing operation of the player's operation button 20 (see FIG. 110 (B)). Of course, the button effect urges the player to perform a single-stroke operation (one-shot operation) on the operation button 20, and draws as a result of a battle with the enemy character based on the single-stroke operation (one-shot operation) on the player's operation button 20. It may be a single-stroke effect (one-shot effect) that indicates that it is a draw).

In pattern A1, the HP of the enemy character is displayed as it was at the start of the battle with an image showing that the final result of the battle is a draw without executing the button effect (FIG. 110 (C)). reference).

On the other hand, the third time-saving gaming state transition effect shown in FIG. 106 (B) is an effect indicating that the gaming state shifts from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state. In the example shown in FIG. 106 (B), eight effect patterns B1 to B8 are set as the third time-saving game state transition effect pattern. Since each of the patterns B1 to B8 is an effect indicating that the game state can be changed from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state, the third time-shortened game state transition effect is an effect of the ally character and the enemy character. The final result of the battle is the victory of the ally character, and the HP of the enemy character after the battle is finally 0 (see FIG. 110 (D)).

Further, the patterns B1 to B8 correspond to the patterns A1 to A8, but the final result of the battle between the ally character and the enemy character is the victory of the ally character and the HP of the enemy character after the battle is finally completed. It differs from the patterns A1 to A8 in that it becomes 0.

In addition, as an effect when the special figure game is the last special figure game in the second time saving game state, the ally character is defeated by the enemy character as the final screen in the patterns A1 to A8 (or the patterns B1 to B8). An image indicating that the second short game state ends is displayed together with the image (see FIG. 110 (E)).

<Step S3907>
Returning to the description of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of FIG. 105, when the second time saving game state flag is set to off (step S3903: No), that is, when it is not the second time saving game state, the third time saving game It is determined whether or not the third time-saving game state flag indicating that the state is set is set to ON (step S3907). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is in the third time-shortening gaming state. The third time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3809 when the third time-saving game state A transition command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 104.

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3908 when the third time saving game state flag is set to on (step S3907: Yes), that is, when the third time saving game state is set. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3909 when the third time saving game state flag is set to off (step S3907: No), that is, when it is not the third time saving gaming state but the normal gaming state.

<Step S3908>
When the third time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S3907: Yes), that is, when the third time-shortened game state is set, the MPU 51 uses the information included in the special figure variation pattern command (special figure variation pattern (special). Based on the figure variation display time) and the result of the jackpot lottery), the third time-saving game state effect preset for the third time-saving game state is set (step S3908), and the effect type setting process is terminated. ..

<Step S3909>
When the third time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S3907: No), that is, when the game is in the normal game state instead of the third time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 has information (special) included in the special figure variation pattern command. Based on the figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time), the result of the jackpot lottery), the normal game state effect (see FIG. 50) preset for the normal game state is set (step S3909), and the effect is set. End the type setting process.

[Stop symbol combination setting process]
In the stop symbol combination setting process executed in step S3819 when the special symbol variation pattern is received in the command determination process of FIG. 104, the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is based on the result of the jackpot lottery or the like. Set. Here, FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process.

<Steps S4001 and S4002>
In the stop symbol combination setting process of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is out of the time saving symbol stop (step S4001). .. Whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the special figure game is out of the time-saving symbol stop is determined based on, for example, the result of the hit / fail determination included in the special figure variation pattern command.

When the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is out of the time saving symbol stop (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4003 and sets the time saving symbol to be set for the time saving symbol stop out. It is set as a stop symbol combination (see FIG. 112). On the other hand, when the lottery result in the big hit lottery for the special figure game is not out of the time saving symbol stop (step S4001: No), the MPU 51 is based on the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time) and the result of the big hit lottery. A stop symbol combination other than the time-saving symbol is set (step S4002), and the stop symbol combination setting process is terminated.

Here, FIG. 112 is a diagram showing the relationship between the upper limit value (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop-off and the stop symbol combination (time-saving symbol) for the time-saving symbol stop-off. As shown in FIG. 112, in the present embodiment, 5 times, 10 times, 20 times, 30 times, 50 times and 100 times are set as the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games (FIG. 86 (FIG. 86). E) and FIG. 87 (E)). Then, as a stop symbol combination (time saving symbol) for the time saving symbol stop deviation, 5 times of the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time saving game is set to "443" and "445", and 10 times is set to "665" and "667". , 20 times to "998" and "991", 30 times to "554" and "556", 50 times to "332" and "334", 100 times to "775" and "778", respectively. It corresponds.

As for the stop symbol combination (time reduction symbol) for the time-saving symbol stop, the left symbol and the middle symbol have the same number, and the right symbol is a symbol combination that is one front and rear deviation from the left symbol and the middle symbol. , It is a characteristic combination with a certain regularity. In this way, since the time-saving symbols are a characteristic combination, the player can easily grasp that the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, when the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, the time saving symbol may output a specific special sound peculiar to the stop display. Also with this, the player can easily grasp that the time saving symbol has been stopped and displayed.

Of course, the time-saving symbol is not limited to the example in FIG. 112, and may be another characteristic combination, and does not necessarily have to be a characteristic combination. Further, the time saving symbol does not need to correspond to the upper limit value (specified number of times) of one time saving game, and may be one, three or more, and all the time saving games. It is not necessary to make the same number of time-saving symbols correspond to the upper limit value (specified number of times) of.

<Steps S4003 and S4004>
Returning to the description of the stop symbol combination setting process of FIG. 111, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is out of the time-saving symbol stop (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 responds to the time-saving symbol stop out of. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the set number of time-saving games is 5 (step S4003). Whether or not the upper limit of the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) set for the time-saving symbol stop is 5 is determined, for example, by the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time) included in the special figure fluctuation pattern command. ) And the result of the jackpot lottery.

In the MPU 51, when the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation is 5 times (step S4003: Yes), the time-saving game number of times corresponds to "443" or 5 times. “445” (see FIG. 112) is set as a stop symbol combination (step S4004), and the stop symbol combination setting process is terminated. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4005 when the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time-saving game number set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation is not 5 times (step S4003: No).

<Steps S4005 and S4006>
If the upper limit (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop is not 5 (step S4003: No), the MPU 51 is set for the time-saving game number of times for the time-saving symbol stop. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value (specified number of times) of is 10 times (step S4005).

In the MPU 51, when the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation is 10 times (step S4005: Yes), the number of time-saving games corresponds to "665" or 10 times. “667” (see FIG. 112) is set as a stop symbol combination (step S4006), and the stop symbol combination setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time saving game number set for the time saving symbol stop deviation is not 10 times (step S4005: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4007.

<Steps S4007 and 3508>
If the upper limit (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop is not 10 (step S4005: No), the MPU 51 is set for the time-saving game number of times for the time-saving symbol stop. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value (specified number of times) of is 20 times (step S4007).

When the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation is 20 times (step S4007: Yes), the MPU 51 is "998" corresponding to the number of times of time-saving games 20 times. “991” (see FIG. 112) is set as a stop symbol combination (step S4008), and the stop symbol combination setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time saving game number set for the time saving symbol stop deviation is not 20 times (step S4007: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4009.

<Steps S4009 and S4010>
If the upper limit (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop is not 20 (step S4007: No), the MPU 51 is set for the time-saving game number of times for the time-saving symbol stop. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value (specified number of times) of is 30 times (step S4009).

In the MPU 51, when the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation is 30 times (step S4009: Yes), the number of time-saving games corresponds to "554" or 30 times. “556” (see FIG. 112) is set as a stop symbol combination (step S4010), and the stop symbol combination setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time saving game number set for the time saving symbol stop deviation is not 30 times (step S4009: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4011.

<Steps S4011 and S4012>
If the upper limit (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop is not 30 (step S4009: No), the MPU 51 is set for the time-saving game number of times for the time-saving symbol stop. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value (specified number of times) of is 50 times (step S4011).

When the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation is 50 times (step S4011: Yes), the MPU 51 is "332" or "332" corresponding to the number of times of time-saving games 50 times. “334” (see FIG. 112) is set as a stop symbol combination (step S4012), and the stop symbol combination setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time saving game number set for the time saving symbol stop deviation is not 50 times (step S4011: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4013.

<Step S4013>
When the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation is not 50 times (step S4011: No), the MPU 51 has an upper limit value (specified number of times) of 100 times of time-saving games. Since it can be determined, "775" or "778" (see FIG. 112) corresponding to 100 times of time-saving games is set as a stop symbol combination (step S4013), and the stop symbol combination setting process is terminated.

[Time reduction counter processing]
In the time reduction counter processing executed in step S3822 when the special figure fluctuation pattern is received in the command determination processing of FIG. 104, the processing for managing the time reduction counter is executed. Here, FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the time reduction counter processing.

<Step S4101>
In the time reduction counter processing of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the first time reduction game state flag indicating that the first time reduction game state is set is set to ON (. Step S4101). The first time-shortened game state flag, that is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is in the first time-shortened game state. The first time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3803 when the first time-saving game state transition command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 104.

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4102 when the first time saving game state flag is set to on (step S4101: Yes), that is, when it is in the first time saving game state. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4105 when the first time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S4101: No), that is, when it is not in the first time-saving game state.

<Steps S4102 to S4104>
When the first time-reduced game state flag is set to on (step S4101: Yes), that is, in the first time-reduced game state, the MPU 51 is a time-reduced number counter indicating the remaining number of special figure games in the time-reduced game state. The value of is subtracted by 1 (step S4102), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4103). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the last special figure game in the first time-saving game state.

The MPU 51 sets the first time reduction game state flag to off when the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4103: Yes), that is, when it is the last special figure game in the first time reduction game state. (Step S4104), and the time reduction counter processing is terminated. On the other hand, the MPU 51 ends the time reduction counter processing when the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4103: No), that is, when it is not the last special figure game in the first time reduction game state.

<Step S4105>
When the first time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S4101: No), that is, when the first time-shortened game state is not set, the second time-shortened game state flag indicating that the second time-shortened game state is set is set to on. It is determined whether or not the flag has been set (step S4105). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is in the second time-shortening gaming state. The second time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3806 when the second time-saving game state transition command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 104.

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4106 when the second time saving game state flag is set to on (step S4105: Yes), that is, when the second time saving game state is set. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4109 when the second time saving game state flag is set to off (step S4105: No), that is, when it is not in the second time saving game state.

<Steps S4106 to S4108>
When the second time-reduced game state flag is set to on (step S4105: Yes), that is, in the second time-reduced game state, the MPU 51 is a time-reduced number counter indicating the remaining number of special figure games in the time-reduced game state. The value of is subtracted by 1 (step S4106), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4107). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the last special figure game in the second time-saving game state.

The MPU 51 sets the second time reduction game state flag to off when the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4107: Yes), that is, when it is the last special figure game in the second time reduction game state. (Step S4108), and the time reduction counter processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4107: No), that is, if it is not the last special figure game in the second time reduction game state, the MPU 51 ends the time reduction counter processing.

<Step S4109>
When the second time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S4105: No), that is, when the second time-shortened game state is not set, the third time-shortened game state flag indicating that the third time-shortened game state is set is set to on. It is determined whether or not the flag has been set (step S4109). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is in the third time-shortening gaming state. The third time-shortened game state transition flag receives the third time-shortened game state A transition command indicating that the game state is changed from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state in the command determination process of FIG. 104. If so, it is set to ON in step S3811.

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4110 when the third time saving game state flag is set to on (step S4109: Yes), that is, when the third time saving game state is set. On the other hand, when the third time saving game state flag is set to off (step S4109: No), that is, when the third time saving game state is not set, the MPU 51 ends the time saving number counter processing.

<Steps S4110 to S4112>
When the third time-saving game state flag is set to on (step S4109: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving number counter indicating the remaining number of special figure games in the time-saving game state (step S4110). , It is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4111). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the last special figure game in the third time-shortened game state.

The MPU 51 sets the third time reduction game state flag to off when the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4111: Yes), that is, when it is the last special figure game in the third time reduction game state. (Step S4112), and the time reduction counter processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4111: No), that is, if it is not the last special figure game in the third time reduction game state, the MPU 51 ends the time reduction counter processing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to shift to the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state in which the two-type big-hit game via the small-hit game can be executed, the time-saving game is performed after the end of the one-type big hit game. The condition is to shift to the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state, and the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state is the upper limit of the number of time-saving games. As (prescribed number of times), it is considered that the high profit condition is established when the time saving symbol is out of stop more than the number of remaining time saving games in the second time saving game state. That is, in the present embodiment, the conditions are stricter than those of the conventional type 1 and type 2 mixer in order to shift to the third time-saving game state, which is a high profit state in which the type 2 jackpot game can be executed. As a condition for shifting to the third open time-saving game state, which is a high profit state, a new game property using the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time-saving game set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation is given. As a result, in the present embodiment, the game is expected to be stopped and displayed in the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state in which the conditions for the time-saving game are satisfied after the end of the type 1 jackpot game. You can enjoy the progress of the game, and if the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, pay attention to whether or not the game shifts to the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state in which the type 2 jackpot game can be executed. You can enjoy the progress. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention and interest in the game and improve the player's willingness to play.

Further, in the present embodiment, the high profit condition for shifting from the second short game state (short open time short game state) as the low profit state to the third short game state (long open time short game state) which is the high profit state is , The result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state as a low profit state is larger than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state as the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time-saving game. It is in a state of becoming. In this way, the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state as a low profit state is a time-saving symbol that is larger than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state as the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time-saving game. In the case of going out of stop, when shifting from the second time-saving game state as a low profit state to the third time-saving game state which is a high profit state, the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state as a low profit state. As the number of games decreases (the number of times the special figure game is executed in the second time-saving game state increases), the game property that it is easy to shift to the third time-saving game state, which is a high profit state, is given. As a result, as the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state as a low profit state decreases (as the number of executions of the special figure game in the second time-saving game increases), the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed. Since attention will be further raised to expectations for and whether or not to shift to the third short-time game state, which is a high profit state, the degree of attention and interest in the game will be further increased, and the player's willingness to play will be further improved. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state in which the conditions for the time-saving game are satisfied after the end of the jackpot game based on the first special figure type 1 jackpot is satisfied. The (prescribed number of times) is set to the number of times (the number of times the player's ball does not decrease) that can be executed by the game ball (expected value of the ball output) that can be acquired by the player by, for example, the 2R short opening time short jackpot game. As a result, the player can execute the specified number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state without significantly reducing the number of balls held, which is a great disadvantage to the second time-saving game state as a low profit state. It is possible to give a chance to shift to the third short-time gaming state, which is a high-profit state that can shift to the two-kind big hit gaming state via the small hit gaming state, while preventing the giving.

In this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the above-mentioned first to third embodiments can be made to the extent applicable.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment described above, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state, which is transferred after the condition of the time-saving game is satisfied after the end of the type 1 jackpot game, is out of the time-saving symbol stop, the time-saving When the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the symbol stop loss is larger than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, the type 2 big hit game state is passed through the small hit game state. The case where the game is transferred to the third time-saving game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state, has been described.

Further, in the above-mentioned fourth embodiment, when the result of the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning opening 314 is out of the time saving symbol stop, and the second to third time saving gaming states. In, there are multiple types (4 types) as the upper limit of the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 is out of the time-saving symbol stop. ) Explained the case of setting.

Further, in the fourth embodiment described above, as the second time-saving gaming state effect executed in the second time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state continuation effect or the game that clearly indicates that the second time-saving gaming state continues. The case where the third time-saving game state transition effect is executed, which clearly indicates that the state is changed from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state, has been described.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is the time-saving symbol stop-out, the upper limit of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop-out (specified number of times). ) Is greater than the number of remaining time reductions in the second time reduction gaming state, the mode is shifted to the third time reduction gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the second time reduction gaming state. In common with.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of time-saving games set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 in the second time-saving game state is out of the time-saving symbol stop. It differs from the above-mentioned fourth embodiment in that the upper limit value (specified number of times) is one type of N times (50 times in this embodiment).

Further, in the present embodiment, as the second time-saving game state effect, the first effect is executed from the transition to the second time-shortened game state to the predetermined number of special figure games, and after the transition to the second time-shortened game state. It is different from the above-mentioned fourth embodiment in that the second effect different from the first effect is executed from the special figure game exceeding a predetermined number of times.

By the way, as described above, in the second time-saving game state, the time-saving game is executed after the end of the type 1 jackpot game executed when the result of the big hit lottery in the normal game state (or the first time-saving game state) is a big hit. (See FIG. 96), the upper limit of the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) in the second time-saving game state is set to M times (100 times in this embodiment), which is a fixed number. (See FIG. 86 (B)). Therefore, the upper limit of the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 in the second time-saving game state is out of the time-saving symbol stop. ) Is one type (N times), the time saving symbol stop is off in the second time saving game state from the transition to the second time saving game state until the special figure game of "MN" times is executed. The upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the above is not larger than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, and the game does not shift to the third time-saving game state. On the other hand, when the special figure game exceeding "MN" times is executed after shifting to the second time-saving game state, the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation in the second time-saving game state is set. Since the upper limit value (specified number of times) can be larger than the remaining number of time reductions in the second time reduction game state, the game can be shifted to the third time reduction game state.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the time-saving game state, is the result of the jackpot lottery out of the time-saving symbol stop from the transition to the second time-saving game state to the execution of the "MN" special figure game? It is more important whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is out of the time-saving symbol stop after the special figure game exceeding "MN" times is executed after the transition to the second time-saving game state. Since the new playability is given, the player's attention and interest in the special figure game in the second short-time game state is improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the second time-saving game state, even in the second time-saving game effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 or the like, the special figure game exceeding "MN" times is executed after the transition to the second time-saving game state. It is more important to wait. That is, different effects are performed between the transition to the second time-saving game state and the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times (for example, "MN" times) and the execution of the special figure game exceeding the predetermined number of times. Is executed, it is possible to clearly or suggest to the player an insignificant period and an important period in the second short-time gaming state. For example, while performing a pinch effect as the first effect to determine whether the second time-reduced gaming state is maintained during all or part of the non-important period in the second time-reduced gaming state, it is important in the second time-saving gaming state. It is also possible to execute a chance effect as to whether or not to shift to the third time-saving gaming state as the second effect in all or part of the period. As a result, the player's attention and interest in the special figure game in the second short-time game state is improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

Here, in the present embodiment, the number of executions of the special figure game after shifting to the second time-saving game state in which the first effect and the second effect are switched as the second time-saving game state effect is "predetermined number of times". "" Corresponds to the "MN" times in which it is possible to shift to the third time-saving game state by the time-saving symbol stopping. In this way, when the "predetermined number of times" and the "MN" times match, the player can shift to the third time-saving game state in the second time-saving game state. It becomes possible to grasp the second time-saving gaming state effect based on the change from the first effect to the second effect. As a result, the progress of the game can be enjoyed while paying attention to the fact that the second time-saving game state effect is changed from the first effect to the second effect, and when the second effect is changed, the game can be enjoyed. Since the progress of the game can be enjoyed by paying attention to the second production, the interest of the game is improved.

The "predetermined number of times" and the "MN" times do not have to match, but it is preferable that the difference between the "predetermined number of times" and the "MN" times is small, and the difference is The absolute value is set to, for example, 20% or less of the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, preferably 10% or less, and more preferably 5% or less. In this way, if the "predetermined number of times" and the "MN" times do not match, the player can shift to the third time-saving game state in the second time-saving game state. I can't figure it out exactly. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the stage at which the special figure game that enables the transition to the third time-saving game state in the second time-saving game state is executed. The interest is improved.

Of course, the feature of this embodiment is the time-saving game set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 in the second time-saving game state is out of the time-saving symbol stop. This embodiment can also be applied to the above-mentioned fourth embodiment in which the upper limit of the number of times (specified number of times) is a plurality of types. In this way, the upper limit of the number of time-saving games set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 in the second time-saving game state is out of the time-saving symbol stop ( By applying the features of this embodiment when a plurality of types (prescribed number of times) are set, it is not possible to accurately grasp the special figure game that can shift to the third time-saving game state in the second time-saving game state. Therefore, as in the case where the "predetermined number of times" and the "MN" times do not match, the player can shift to the third time-saving gaming state in the second time-saving gaming state at what stage. Since it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the special figure game is executed, the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second time-saving game state is entered into the time-saving game after the end of the type 1 jackpot game executed when the result of the big hit lottery in the normal game state (or the first time-saving game state) is a big hit. The upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state to be transferred when the condition of is satisfied is set to M times (100 times in this embodiment), which is a fixed number (FIG. 86 (FIG. 86). B)), a plurality of upper limit values (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state may be set. In this way, by setting a plurality of upper limit values (specified number of times) for the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, from the transition to the second time-saving game state until the result of the jackpot lottery is out of the time-saving symbol stop. Not only the number of special figure games executed in the above, but also the playability in which the size of the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is important is given.

Further, when a plurality of upper limit values (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state are set, all of the plurality of set upper limit values (specified number of times) M are set to the second in the second time-saving game state. The number of times is larger than the upper limit (specified number of times) N of one type of time-saving game set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the winning opening 315 is out of the time-saving symbol stop. It is also possible to set it. As a result, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is large or small without impairing the important game performance at the timing when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is out of the time-saving symbol stop. Is given playability, which is important.

Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 117, focusing on the differences from the fourth embodiment described above.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
As described above, this embodiment is set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 in the second time saving game state is out of the time saving symbol stop. It differs from the above-mentioned fourth embodiment in that the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of games is one type (50 times in this embodiment). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the second special figure out-of-figure fluctuation table in the case where the result of the jackpot lottery in the second short-time game state is out of order is different from the above-mentioned fourth embodiment. Here, FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example of a second special figure out-of-figure fluctuation table in the case where the result of the big hit lottery in the second short-time game state is out of order.

[2nd special figure out-of-bounds fluctuation table]
As shown in FIG. 114, in the present embodiment, when the result of the big hit lottery in the second time-saving game state is out of order, all of them are out of time-saving symbols stop. Then, when the time saving symbol is out of stop, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time saving game number is set to 50 times.

[Processing of audio lamp control device 5]
In this embodiment, as described above, as the second time-saving game state effect, the first effect is executed from the transition to the second time-shortened game state to the predetermined number of special figure games, and the second time-shortened game state is entered. After that, the special figure game that exceeds a predetermined number of times is different from the above-mentioned fourth embodiment in that the second effect different from the first effect is executed. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of step S3318 and the stop symbol combination setting of step S3319, which are executed when the special figure variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 104, are executed. The treatment is different from the fourth embodiment described above.

[Variation type (effect pattern) setting process]
In the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of the present embodiment, as the second time-saving game state effect, the first effect is set when the number of unexecuted time-saving games is 50 or more, and the number of unexecuted time-saving games is set. If it is less than 50 times, a second effect different from the first effect is set. Here, FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process executed in step S3318 of the command determination process of FIG. 104.

<Steps S4201 and S4202>
In the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 115, whether or not the MPU 51 is set to turn on the second time-saving game state flag indicating that it is in the second time-saving game state. Is determined (step S4201). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is in the second time-shortening gaming state.

When the second time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4201: Yes), that is, when the MPU 51 is in the second time-saving game state, the process shifts to step S4202, and the process shifts to step S4202 in the second time-saving game state. Based on the number of remaining time-saving games, either the first effect or the second effect is set as the second time-saving game state effect.

On the other hand, in the MPU 51, when the second time saving game state flag is set to off (step S4201: No), that is, when it is not the second time saving game state, the game state, the jackpot lottery result, and the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure). Based on the variation display time) and the like, other effects other than the second time-saving game state effect are set (step S4202), and the variation type (effect pattern) setting process is terminated.

Here, FIG. 116 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a pattern of the first effect as the second time-saving game state effect, and FIG. 116 (B) is a diagram of the pattern of the second effect as the second time-saving game state effect. It is a figure which shows an example.

As shown in FIGS. 116 (A) and 116 (B), the second short game state effect (first effect and second effect) is executed as a battle effect between the main character and the enemy character. In the second short game state effect (first effect and second effect), one of the ally character and the enemy character attacks, and the other character defends against the attack of one character, or one character. The attack hits the other character, and finally the result of the battle is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 116 (A), the first effect as the second time-saving game state effect is executed when the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is 50 or more as described later. It is a production. In this first effect, even if the result of the jackpot lottery is out of the time saving symbol stop (when the symbol combination corresponding to the time saving symbol stop out is displayed as a stop), the second time saving after the end of the special symbol game is completed. It is clearly or suggested that the game state does not shift to the third time-saving game state. In the example shown in FIG. 116 (A), the first effect includes eight effect patterns of patterns C1 to C8, and in each pattern C1 to C8, if the result of the jackpot lottery is out of the time saving symbol stop, the battle By drawing (drawing) the result of, it is clearly or suggested that the gaming state does not shift from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state even if the symbol combination corresponds to the time-saving symbol stop loss. .. In addition, when the result of the big hit lottery is a win (big hit or small hit), the result of the battle is the victory of the ally character, which clearly or suggests that it is a win. Of course, if the result of the big hit lottery is a win (big hit or small hit), the result of the battle may be a draw. In this case, the result of the jackpot lottery is clearly or suggested by the combination of the stop symbols, not the result of the battle.

Further, in the patterns C2, C4, C6 to C8, after the offense and defense between the ally character and the enemy character, button effects such as a long press effect and a continuous hit effect (see FIGS. 110 (A) and 110 (B)) are executed. After that, the result of the battle is displayed.

Further, in the patterns C7 and C8, after the first strike of the enemy character hits the ally character, the display indicating that the ally character is in a pinch is made (see FIG. 116 (C)). This pinch display is a display peculiar to the first effect executed when the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is 50 or more, which is a predetermined number of times, and is not displayed in the second effect. Of course, the pinch display may be made in the second production.

The patterns C1 to C8 of the first effect are set, for example, based on the result of the big hit lottery. Further, the patterns C7 and C8 in which the pinch display is made are likely to be set when, for example, the result of the big hit lottery is not out of the time saving symbol stop (when it is a big hit or a small hit), and the result of the big hit lottery is out of the time saving symbol stop. It may be difficult to be selected in some cases. As a result, the player can grasp that when the pinch display is made, the degree of expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery is out of the time-saving symbol stop is low.

Further, when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit or small hit) that does not deviate from the time saving symbol stop, the effect other than the patterns C1 to C8 may be executed. That is, the patterns C1 to C8 may be set as a dedicated effect when the result of the big hit lottery is out of the time saving symbol stop.

As shown in FIG. 116 (B), the second effect as the second time-saving game state effect is executed when the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is less than 50 as described later. It is a production. In this second effect, if the result of the jackpot lottery is out of the time-saving symbol stop (when the symbol combination corresponding to the time-saving symbol stop out is stopped and displayed), after the end of the special symbol game, the second time-saving game state is started. It is explicitly or suggested that the game will shift to the 3 o'clock short game state. In the example shown in FIG. 116 (B), the second effect includes eight effect patterns of patterns D1 to D8, and in each of the patterns D1 to D8, if the result of the jackpot lottery is out of the time saving symbol stop, the battle When the result of the above is the victory of the ally character, it is clearly or suggested that the gaming state shifts from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state. In addition, when the result of the big hit lottery is a win (big hit or small hit), the result of the battle is a draw (draw), which clearly or suggests that it is a win. Of course, if the result of the big hit lottery is a win (big hit or small hit), the result of the battle may be the victory of the ally character. In this case, the result of the jackpot lottery is clearly or suggested by the combination of the stop symbols, not the result of the battle.

Further, in the patterns D2, D4, D6 to D8, after the offense and defense between the ally character and the enemy character, button effects such as a long press effect and a continuous hit effect (see FIGS. 110 (A) and 110 (B)) are executed. After that, the result of the battle is displayed.

Further, in the patterns D7 and D8, after the first strike of the ally character hits the enemy character, the display indicating that the ally character is a chance is made (see FIG. 116 (D)). This chance display is a display peculiar to the second effect executed when the number of remaining time-reduced games in the second time-reduced game state is less than 50 times, which is a predetermined number, and is not displayed in the first effect. Of course, the chance may be displayed in the first production.

The patterns D1 to D8 of the second effect are set, for example, based on the result of the big hit lottery. Further, the patterns D7 and D8 in which the chancech display is made are likely to be set when, for example, the result of the big hit lottery is out of the time saving symbol stop, and when the result of the big hit lottery is not out of the time saving symbol stop (big hit or small hit). ) May be difficult to select. As a result, the player can grasp that when the chance display is made, the expectation that the result of the big hit lottery is out of the time-saving symbol stop is high.

Further, when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit or small hit) that does not deviate from the time saving symbol stop, the effect other than the patterns D1 to D8 may be executed. That is, the patterns D1 to D8 may be set as a dedicated effect when the result of the big hit lottery is out of the time saving symbol stop.

<Steps S4203-S4205>
Returning to the description of the procedure for setting the variation type (effect pattern) in FIG. 115, when the second time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4201: Yes), that is, when the second time-saving game state is set, the MPU 51 Specifies the number of unexecuted time-saving games excluding the special figure game in the second time-saving game state based on the value of the time-saving number counter (step S4203), and the remaining time-saving in the second time-saving game state. It is determined whether or not the number of games is 50 or more (step S4204).

When the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is 50 or more (step S4204: Yes), the MPU 51 is the first effect from patterns C1 to C8 based on the result of the jackpot lottery (FIG. 116 (FIG. 116). A)) is set (step S4205), and the variation type (effect pattern) setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is not 50 or more (step S4204: No), that is, when the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is less than 50 times. Based on the result of the jackpot lottery, the MPU 51 sets the second effect (see FIG. 116 (B)) from the patterns D1 to D8 (step S4206), and ends the variation type (effect pattern) setting process.

[Stop symbol combination setting process]
In the stop symbol combination setting process of the present embodiment, as a stop symbol combination, a time-saving symbol is set when the result of the jackpot lottery is out of the time-saving symbol stop, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is not out of the time-saving symbol stop (big hit or small). If it is a hit), a symbol other than the time saving symbol is set. Here, FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process executed in step S3819 of the command determination process of FIG. 104.

<Step S4301>
In the stop symbol combination setting process of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is out of the time saving symbol stop (step S4301). When the result of the jackpot lottery is out of the time saving symbol stop (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4302. On the other hand, the MPU 51 sets the process to step S4303 when the result of the big hit lottery is not out of the time-saving symbol stop (step S4301: No), that is, when the result of the big hit lottery is out of the time-saving symbol stop, big hit or small hit. Transition.

<Step S4302>
When the result of the jackpot lottery is out of the time saving symbol stop (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the time saving symbol as the stop symbol combination. Here, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is out of the time-saving symbol stop is one type of 50 times. .. Therefore, at least one type of time-saving symbol that is stopped and displayed in the second time-saving gaming state may be used, and may be one type or a plurality of types.

<Step S4303>
If the result of the big hit lottery is not out of the time-saving symbol stop (step S4301: No), if the result of the big hit lottery is out of the time-saving symbol stop off, big hit or small hit, the symbol combination other than the time-saving symbol is used as the stop symbol combination. Set according to the result of the jackpot lottery. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss other than the time-saving symbol stop miss, set the stop symbol combination according to the miss type, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, set doublet as the stop symbol combination. If the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit, a combination of stop symbols other than the out-of-bounds symbols and doublets is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the time-saving game state, the result of the big hit lottery is performed from the transition to the second time-saving game state, which is a low profit state, to the execution of the special figure game a specific number of times (50 times). The result of the big hit lottery is shortened after the special figure game is executed more than a specific number of times (50 times) after shifting to the second time-saving game state, which is a low profit state, rather than whether or not the time-saving symbol is out of stop. Since a new game property is given that it is more important whether or not the symbol is out of stop, the player's attention and interest in the special figure game in the second short-time game state is improved, and the interest of the game is improved. Will be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state, shifts to the second time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state, even in the second time-saving game effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 or the like. It is more important after the special figure game is executed more than a specific number of times (50 times). That is, different effects are produced from the transition to the second short-time game state, which is a low profit state, to the execution of the special figure game a specific number of times (50 times), and after the special figure game exceeding the specific number of times is executed. By executing the above, it is possible to clearly or suggest to the player an insignificant period and an important period in the second short-time gaming state, which is a low profit state. The second effect, which is a low profit state, is performed while performing a pinch effect as to whether the second time short game state, which is a low profit state, is maintained as the first effect during an unimportant period in the second time short game state, which is a low profit state. It is also possible to execute a chance effect as to whether or not to shift to the third time-saving game state, which is a high profit state, as the second effect during the important period in the time-saving game state. As a result, the player's attention and interest in the special figure game in the second short-time game state is improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of executions of the special figure game after shifting to the second time-saving game state in which the first effect and the second effect are switched as the second time-saving game state effect is out of the time-saving symbol stop. This is the same as the number of times it is possible to shift to the third time-saving game state. In this way, by matching the switching timing of the second time-saving game state effect with the timing at which the transition to the third time-saving game state, which is a high profit state, is possible, the first effect in the second time-saving game state effect can be achieved. Based on the change to the second effect, it becomes possible to grasp that it is in a state where it is possible to shift to the third time-saving game state, which is a high profit state. As a result, the progress of the game can be enjoyed while paying attention to the fact that the second time-saving game state effect is changed from the first effect to the second effect, and when the second effect is changed, the second effect is concerned. Since you can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the production, the interest of the game is improved.

In this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the above-mentioned first to fourth embodiments can be made to the extent applicable.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment described above, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state, which is transferred after the condition of the time-saving game is satisfied after the end of the type 1 jackpot game, is out of the time-saving symbol stop, the time-saving When the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the symbol stop loss is larger than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), the small hit game state. The case where the game is transferred to the third time-saving game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state, is described in that the game state can be changed to the two-kind jackpot gaming state.

Further, in the above-mentioned fourth embodiment, the transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state is executed after the predetermined condition is completed in the special figure game.

Further, a case where the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state is set to the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation has been described. ..

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is the time-saving symbol stop-out, the upper limit of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop-out (specified number of times). ) Is greater than the number of remaining time reductions in the second time reduction gaming state, the mode is shifted to the third time reduction gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the second time reduction gaming state. In common with.

Here, FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a setting example of the third time-saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 118 (A), in the present embodiment, the transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state has reached the specified number of executions of the special figure game in the second time-saving game state. Will be executed later. Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value K (specified number of times K) of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state is set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the upper limit of the number of time-saving games is set. It is set to a value (JL) obtained by subtracting the remaining time reduction number L in the second time reduction game state from the value J (specified number of times J). For example, as shown in FIG. 118 (B), the upper limit value K (specified number of times K) of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state is set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation when the predetermined condition is satisfied. When the upper limit value J (specified number of times J) of the number of time saving games is 50 times and the remaining number of times of time saving L in the second time saving game state is 20 times, K = JL = 50-20 = 30. Therefore, it is set to 30 times.

In the present embodiment, the transition from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state is executed after the number of executions of the special figure game in the second time-shortened game state reaches a predetermined number of times. Here, as described above, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is determined by, for example, the game ball (expected value of ball output) that the player can acquire by the 2R short-open time-saving jackpot game. It is set to the number of times that can be executed (the number of times that the player's ball does not decrease). Therefore, the transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state is executed after the number of executions of the special figure game in the second time-saving game state reaches the specified number of times, so that the second time-saving game state is entered. Since it is possible to secure a large number of games from the transition to the first two-kind jackpot game that is executed based on the small hit in the third short game state, after the transition to the second short game state. It is possible to suppress a rapid increase in the number of balls that are thrown out or held. This makes it possible to suppress the gambling property of the gaming machine 10.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state is the upper limit value of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation when the predetermined condition is satisfied (the upper limit value of the number of time-saving games). The specified number of times) is set to a value obtained by subtracting the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state. Therefore, as for the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of times of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of times of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation when the predetermined condition is satisfied is large. The smaller the number of remaining time-saving games at the time of execution of the special figure game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied, the greater the number, and the situation in the third time-saving game state becomes advantageous to the player. That is, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time-saving game set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the timing when the predetermined condition is satisfied are important. Gender is given, and as a result, attention and interest in the game can be increased, so that the interest of the game is improved.

In the present embodiment, the initial setting value of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state when shifting from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state is the time-saving symbol stop in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. The initial setting value is set to a value obtained by subtracting the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state from the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the deviation. It may be set to the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time-saving game number set for the time-saving symbol stop off when the condition of is satisfied, or it may be set to the remaining time-saving game number of times in the second time-saving game state. May be good.

Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 119, focusing on the differences from the fourth embodiment described above.

[Processing of main control device 4]
In the present embodiment, the procedure for shifting to the third time-saving game state in the game state transition process and the procedure for setting the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state are different from the above-mentioned fourth embodiment. Here, FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a part of the game state transition process of the present embodiment.

[Game state transition process]
In the game state transition process of the present embodiment, when the number of executions of the special figure game in the second time-saving game state reaches a predetermined number of times, the game state shifts to the third time-saving game state, and the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state is reached. The upper limit value of is set to a value obtained by subtracting the remaining time reduction number L in the second time reduction game state from the upper limit value of the time reduction game number set for the time reduction symbol stop deviation when the predetermined condition is satisfied. The process is executed.

<Step S4401>
In the game state transition process of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, when the game state is the second short-time game state, the result of the big hit lottery for the special figure game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is one kind of big hit. However, if it is not a small hit (step S3637: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4401). The third time-shortened game state transition flag is a flag indicating that a predetermined condition for shifting from the second time-shortened gaming state to the third time-shortened gaming state is satisfied, and is turned on in step S3412 in the special figure change start process of FIG. 90. Is set to.

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4402 when the third time-saving game state transition flag is set to on (step S4401: Yes), and when the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set to off (step S4401: Yes). S4401: No), the game state transition process is terminated.

<Steps S4402 and S4403>
When the third time-reduced game state transition flag is set to on (step S4401: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the third time-reduced game state transition flag to off (step S4402), and in the second time-reduced game state. It is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of remaining time reduction games is 0 (step S4403).

When the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S4403: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4404, and when the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 (step S4403: No), the game state shift process is performed. finish.

<Step S4404 to Step S4406>
When the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S4403: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the gaming state from the second time reduction gaming state to the third time reduction gaming state (step S4404). Then, the MPU 51 sets the third time-saving game state flag indicating that it is in the third time-saving game state to on (step S4405), and turns off the second time-saving game state flag indicating that it is in the second time-saving game state. (Step S4406), and the process proceeds to step S4407.

<Step S4407>
In step S4407, the MPU 51 sets an upper limit value (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state, and stops the time-saving symbol that triggered the transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state. It is set to a value obtained by subtracting the remaining number of time-saving games (value of the time-saving number counter) in the second time-saving game state from the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the deviation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the case of shifting to the third time-saving game state after the end of the type 2 jackpot is fixed at 50 times as in the above-mentioned fourth embodiment. It is set to a number (see FIG. 87 (F)). However, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games when shifting to the third time-saving game state after the end of the type 2 jackpot is set when shifting from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state. The initial setting value may be the same, or may be set from the number of time-saving games set for a plurality of types.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the transition from the second short-time gaming state as a low-profit state to the third short-time gaming state as a high-profit state is a special figure in the second short-time gaming state as a low-profit state. It is executed after the number of times the game is executed reaches the specified number of times. Here, as described above, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state as a low profit state is, for example, a game ball that can be acquired by the player by a 2R short-open time-saving jackpot game. It is set to the number of times that can be executed (the number of times that the player's ball does not decrease) according to the expected value of the ball). Therefore, the transition from the second short-time gaming state as a low-profit state to the third short-time game state, which is a high-profit state, reduces the number of executions of the special figure game in the second short-time game state as a low-profit state to the specified number of times. By being executed after reaching, it is shifted to the second time-saving game state as a low profit state, and then the first two kinds of big hits are executed based on the small hit in the third time-saving game state which is a high profit state. Since it is possible to secure a large number of games until the game, it is possible to suppress a sudden increase in the number of balls to be played or the number of balls to be held after the transition to the second short-time game state. This makes it possible to suppress the gambling property of the gaming machine 10.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the condition for shifting to the third time-saving game state, which is a high profit state, is satisfied, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state is out of the time-saving symbol stop. It is set to a value obtained by subtracting the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state from the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set. Therefore, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state, which is a high profit state, is the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation when the transition condition is satisfied. The greater the number of times), the greater the number of remaining time-saving games at the time of execution of the special figure game in which the transition condition is satisfied, and the situation in the third time-saving game state, which is a high profit state, is advantageous to the player. Become. That is, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time-saving game set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation when the transition condition is satisfied and the timing at which the predetermined condition is satisfied are important. Is given, and as a result, attention and interest in the game can be increased, so that the interest of the game is improved.

In this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the above-mentioned first to fifth embodiments can be made to the extent applicable.

[7th Embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment described above, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state, which is transferred after the condition of the time-saving game is satisfied after the end of the type 1 jackpot game, is out of the time-saving symbol stop, the time-saving When the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the symbol stop loss is larger than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), the small hit game state. The case where the game is transferred to the third time-saving game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state, is described in that the game state can be changed to the two-kind jackpot gaming state.

Further, in the above-mentioned fourth embodiment, the small hit probability (about 1/1) in the big hit lottery executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 is set higher than the loss probability. The case has been described (see FIGS. 87 (A) and 87 (B)).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is the time-saving symbol stop-out, the upper limit of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop-out (specified number of times). ) Is greater than the number of remaining time reductions in the second time reduction gaming state, the mode is shifted to the third time reduction gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the second time reduction gaming state. In common with.

Further, in the present embodiment, contrary to the above-mentioned fourth embodiment, the jackpot is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 in the second time-shortened game state and the third time-shortened game state. The probability of losing in the lottery is set higher than the probability of small hits, for example, the probability of losing is set to about 1/1.

In the present embodiment, the probability of losing in the big hit lottery executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 in the second short-time gaming state is set higher than the small hit probability. It is easier to shift to the third time-saving gaming state than the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment of the above. On the other hand, the probability of losing in the big hit lottery executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 in the third short game state is set higher than the small hit probability. It is more difficult to execute the two-kind jackpot game than the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the game is shifted to the third time-saving game state, the game property of winning a small hit in the big hit lottery is given. As a result, attention and interest in the game can be increased, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 123, focusing on the differences from the fourth embodiment described above.

[Processing of main control device 4]
In this embodiment, the distribution of the jackpot lottery executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 is different from the above-mentioned fourth embodiment. Here, FIG. 120 is a diagram showing an example of the second special figure jackpot winning / failing table of the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 120 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a short-open second special figure jackpot winning / failing table in a state other than the third time-shortening gaming state (normal gaming state, first time-shortening gaming state, and second time-shortening gaming state). FIG. 120 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second special figure jackpot winning / failing table in a long-open third time-shortening game state.

As shown in FIG. 120 (A), the short-open second special figure jackpot winning / failing table of the present embodiment is set in common for the game setting values 1 to 6 in 6 stages. In the short-open second special figure jackpot winning / failing table, one of jackpot, small hit, and miss is selected according to the value (random number value) of the jackpot random number counter C1 as the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. That is, in the second special figure big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 in the short opening, the first one triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning opening 314. Unlike the special figure big hit lottery, the lottery result includes a small hit in which the feather accessory device 83 (see FIGS. 82 to 84) is activated. Specifically, in the short-open second special figure jackpot hit / fail table, 0 to 205 correspond to jackpots and 206 to 207 are small among the values (random number values) of 65536 jackpot random number counters C1 from 0 to 65535. Corresponds to hits, and other random numbers correspond to misses. That is, in the jackpot lottery executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 314 due to the short opening of the electric accessory 315b, the jackpot probability is set to about 1 / 318.1. The small hit probability is set to about 1/32768 and the miss probability is set to about 1 / 1.003, and most of the results of the big hit lottery are missed.

As shown in FIG. 120 (B), the long-open second special figure jackpot winning / failing table is set in common for the game setting values 1 to 6 in 6 stages. In the long-open second special figure jackpot winning / failing table, one of jackpot, small hit, and miss is selected according to the value (random number value) of the jackpot random number counter C1 as the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. That is, in the second special figure jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 at the long opening, the first one triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning opening 314. Unlike the special figure big hit lottery, the lottery result includes a small hit in which the feather accessory device 83 (see FIGS. 82 to 84) is activated. Specifically, in the long-open second special figure jackpot hit / fail table, among the values (random number values) of 65536 jackpot random number counters C1 from 0 to 65535, 0 to 205 correspond to jackpots and 206 to 65559 are small. Corresponds to hits, and other random numbers correspond to misses. That is, in the second special figure jackpot lottery executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 314 due to the long opening of the electric accessory 315b, the jackpot probability is about 1 / 318.1. The small hit probability is set to about 1/30, the miss probability is set to about 1 / 1.038, and most of the results of the big hit lottery are missed.

In this embodiment, the short opening 2nd special figure big hit winning / failing table and the long opening 2nd special drawing big hit winning / failing table are provided in common for the 6 game setting values, but the short opening second One or both of the special figure jackpot winning / failing table and the long open second special figure jackpot winning / failing table may be set for each game setting value. It is also conceivable to set one second special figure big hit hit / miss table by sharing the short open second special figure big hit hit / miss table and the long open second special figure big hit hit / miss table.

[Processing of audio lamp control device 5]
The processing of the voice lamp control device 5 in the present embodiment is the same as that of the above-mentioned fourth embodiment, but the second time-saving gaming state effect and the third time-saving gaming state effect are different from the above-mentioned fourth embodiment. different.

<2nd time-saving game state production>
The second time-saving game state effect is executed as a mission effect in which the ally character acquires the special move, and it is clearly shown that the ally character shifts to the third time-saving game state by acquiring the special move. Here, FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an example of a screen in the symbol display unit 341 in the second time-saving gaming state effect. Specifically, FIG. 121 (A) is an example of a start screen of a special move acquisition mission, FIG. 121 (B) is an example of a screen during a mission challenge, and FIG. 121 (C) is a successful special move acquisition (mission success). ), And FIG. 121 (D) is a screen example of a special move acquisition failure (mission failure).

As shown in FIG. 121 (A), at the start of the special move acquisition mission, the text image of the mission content "Destroy Oiwa and acquire the special move" and the content of the mission success "Special move". The character image of "rushing into RUSH by acquiring the technique" is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 121 (B), during the mission challenge, an image of an ally character punching Oiwa and the characters "Special Punch!" Are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 121 (C), successful acquisition of a special move (successful mission) includes a character image of "acquisition of a special move" indicating that the special move has been acquired and "rushing into RUSH" indicating that the player has entered RUSH. A character image and an image in which an ally character smiles due to the acquisition of a special move are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 121 (D), the failure to acquire the special move (mission failure) includes the character images of "failure" and "not to acquire the special move" indicating that the acquisition of the special move has failed, and the failure to acquire the special move. Therefore, an image in which the ally character is sad is displayed.

<3rd time saving game state production>
The third short game state effect is executed as a battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character, and when the ally character wins the enemy character, it is clearly shown that the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit. Further, in the third short game state production, it is determined that the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit when the ally character attacks by the special move.

Here, FIG. 122 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a pattern of the third time-saving game state effect when the result of the jackpot lottery is missed, and FIG. 122 (B) is a diagram showing the result of the jackpot lottery is a hit (big hit). It is a figure which shows an example of the pattern of the 3rd time shortening game state effect in the case of a small hit).

As shown in FIGS. 122 (A) and 122 (B), the third time-shortening game state effect (the third time-shortening game state effect and the hit third time-saving game state effect) is a battle effect between the main character and the enemy character. Will be executed. 3rd time-shortening game state production (off 3rd time-shortening game state production and small hit 3rd time-shortening game state production) One of the ally character and the enemy character attacks, while the other character attacks one character. The result of the battle is displayed as to whether or not the attack of one character hits the other character and finally the third short game state continues.

As shown in FIG. 122 (A), the missed third time-saving game state effect is an effect executed when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-shortened game state effect is out of order, and the end of the special figure game. It is explicitly or suggested that the small hit game is not executed later and the third time-saving game state is maintained. Here, in the third short-time game state, most of the results of the jackpot lottery are off (1 / 1.038) (see FIG. 120 (B)). Therefore, in most of the third time-saving game states, the off-third time-saving game state effect is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 122 (A), the off-third time-saving gaming state effect includes eight effect patterns of patterns E1 to E8, and in each pattern E1 to E8, the third time-saving gaming state is finally continued. By displaying the result of the battle as "continuation" whether or not to do so, it is clearly or suggested that the third short-time gaming state is maintained without shifting to the small hit gaming state (FIG. 123 (B)). reference).

Further, in the patterns E2, E4, E6 to E8, after the offense and defense between the ally character and the enemy character, button effects such as a long press effect and a continuous hit effect (see FIG. 123 (A)) are executed, and then the result of the battle. Is displayed as "continue".

As shown in FIG. 122 (B), the winning third time-saving game state effect is an effect executed when the result of the big hit lottery in the third time-saving game state effect is a hit (big hit or small hit). It is clearly or suggested that the big hit game or the small hit game is executed after the end of the special figure game. In the example shown in FIG. 122 (B), the winning third time-saving game state effect includes eight effect patterns of patterns F1 to F8, and in each pattern F1 to F8, the third time-saving game state is finally continued. When the result of the battle is displayed as "win", it is clearly or suggested that the player shifts to the big hit game state or the small hit game state (see FIG. 123 (C)).

Further, in the patterns F2, F4, F6 to F8, after the offense and defense between the ally character and the enemy character, button effects such as a long press effect and a continuous hit effect (see FIG. 123 (A)) are executed, and then the result of the battle. Is displayed as "victory".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of losing in the big hit lottery executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 in the second short-time gaming state as a low profit state is higher than the small hit probability. By setting the value higher than that of the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above, it is easier to shift to the third time-saving gaming state, which is a high profit state. On the other hand, the probability of losing in the big hit lottery executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 in the third short game state, which is a high profit state, is set higher than the small hit probability. Therefore, it is more difficult to execute the two-kind jackpot game than the game machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the game is shifted to the third time-saving game state, the game property of winning a small hit in the big hit lottery is given. As a result, attention and interest in the game can be increased, so that the interest of the game is improved.

In this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the above-mentioned first to sixth embodiments can be made to the extent applicable.

Further, in the above-mentioned fourth to seventh embodiments, the probability of hitting a normal figure is set to be the same in all of the first to third time-saving gaming states, but the probability of hitting a normal figure is the type of the time-saving gaming state. It may be set differently depending on.

Further, in the above-mentioned 4th to 7th embodiments, the time saving symbol stop loss is included as the type of deviation of the jackpot lottery result in the normal gaming state, but the time saving as the type of deviation of the jackpot lottery result in the normal gaming state. The symbol stop disconnection may be omitted. In this case, the first time-saving game state is omitted as the time-saving game state.

Further, in the above-mentioned fourth to seventh embodiments, one short-open second special figure jackpot hit / fail table and one long-open second special figure jackpot hit / fail table are provided in common for the six game setting values. However, one or both of the short-open second special figure jackpot winning / failing table and the long-opening second special figure jackpot winning / failing table may be set for each game setting value. It is also conceivable to set one second special figure big hit hit / miss table by sharing the short open second special figure big hit hit / miss table and the long open second special figure big hit hit / miss table.

Further, in the above-mentioned fourth to seventh embodiments, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games is set according to the type of the special figure fluctuation pattern (variation display time). The upper limit value (specified number of times) does not have to correspond to the type of special figure fluctuation pattern (variation display time). Further, in the time-saving symbol stop-off type distribution table of the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, the time-saving symbol is always out of stop. It may be out of stop.

Further, in the above-mentioned fourth to seventh embodiments, from the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the time-saving game number set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation in the second time-saving game state, in the second time-saving game state. When the subtraction value of the number of remaining time-saving games is smaller than 0, the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is maintained unchanged, but when the subtraction value is smaller than 0, the said value is met. The number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state may be changed. For example, the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state may be changed to the sum of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop loss, or for the time-saving symbol stop loss. It may be changed (or replaced) to the number of time-saving games set in the game.

Further, in the small hit game of the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, the execution time of the movable wing portion operating game (operating time of the movable wing portion 832) is the time-saving game state in which the second special figure big hit lottery is executed. It is set to be the same regardless of the type of. Of course, the execution time of the movable wing portion operating game (operating time of the movable wing portion 832) can be different depending on the type of the time-saving gaming state in which the second special figure jackpot lottery is executed. For example, the execution time of the movable vane operation game of the small hit game executed based on the second special figure big hit lottery in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state is set to the second time in the third time-saving game state. It is conceivable to set the execution time shorter than the execution time of the movable wing operation game of the small hit game executed based on the special figure big hit lottery.

Further, in the first small hit game of the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, the operation timing of the V winning opening opening / closing portion 835 of the vane accessory device 83 is set to the first opening, so that the V winning opening 833 is used. Although the game ball 99 is not inserted, a part or all of the operation timing of the V winning opening opening / closing part 835 may be set to the movable vane operation game. Specifically, in the first small hit game, the operation timing of the V winning opening opening / closing portion 835 of the vane accessory device 83 is set so as to straddle the movable vane operating game from the first opening, so that the V winning opening 833 It may be impossible or difficult to enter the game ball 99 into the ball. Further, in the first small hit game, the entire operation timing of the V winning opening opening / closing part 835 of the feather accessory device 83 is set to the movable vane part operating game, and the operating time of the V winning opening opening / closing part 835 (for example, 0. By setting (02 seconds to 0.1 seconds) short, it may be impossible or difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the V winning opening 833. Here, the effect is as described above when the game ball 99 cannot enter the V winning opening 833 in the first small hit game, but on the other hand, the V winning opening 833 in the first small hit game. If it is impossible to enter the game ball 99 into the game, there is a concern that the player's attention and interest in the small hit game will decrease. On the other hand, if it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the V winning opening 833 in the first small hit game, the game ball 99 can enter the V winning opening 833 in the first small hit game. Because of the nature, the decrease in the player's attention and interest in the small hit game is suppressed.

Further, in the above-mentioned fourth to seventh embodiments, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is the time-saving symbol stop-out, the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop-out is the said. If it is less than or equal to the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is not changed. 2 The number of time-saving games set for the time-saving deviation may be added to the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state. As a result, the number of jackpot lottery for determining whether or not to shift from the second time-shortening gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state increases, so that there is a possibility of shifting to the third time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Since it is maintained for a longer period of time, attention and interest in the game can be increased, and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the above-mentioned fourth to seventh embodiments, the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) selected for the time-saving symbol stop deviation is larger than the number of remaining time-saving games in the third time-saving game state. In addition, the number of time reductions is reset to the number of time reduction games (specified number of times), but the number of time reductions when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time reduction game state is out of the time reduction symbol stop is in the third time reduction game state. The result of the jackpot lottery may be reset regardless of the number of remaining time-saving games in the third time-saving game state when the time-saving symbol is out of stop. For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is the time-saving symbol stop-out, the number of time-saving games selected for the time-saving symbol stop-out is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state. Regardless of whether there are many or few, you may change to the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) selected for the time-saving symbol stop off. Of course, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is the time-saving symbol stop-out, the number of time-saving games selected for the time-saving symbol stop-out (the specified number of times is the remaining time-saving in the third time-saving game state). Regardless of whether it is more or less than the number of games, it may be maintained without resetting the number of remaining time-saving games in the third time-saving game state.

Further, in each embodiment, the matters described in other embodiments can be applied to the extent applicable.

[Outline of the invention]
Hereinafter, the outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described. In addition, for the sake of understanding the correspondence between each appendix and each embodiment, the description may be given with reference numerals, etc., but the invention according to the appendix is limited to the specific configuration with the reference numerals. It's not a thing. Further, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A predetermined winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the above-mentioned determination condition when the game ball enters the ball, and
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41).
A holding means (holding means) capable of withholding the right to execute the notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the predetermined winning opening (314, 315). 41) and
The transition determination means (41) has a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of transition to the special gaming state is the first probability, or a probability of determination to transition to the special gaming state. Is the second probability higher than the first probability, and the transition determination is made in the second determination state (probability variation game state).
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between a first winning opening (314) and an allowable state in which entry of a game ball is permitted and a restricted state in which entry of a game ball is restricted. Including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314).
The gaming machine is
As the notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game), the first notification game (first special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the first winning opening (314). A second notification game (second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315), and a notification game execution means for executing the second notification game (second special figure game) are provided.
The notification game execution means is
A specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) is displayed on the display means (341) in succession to the first notification game (first special figure game) a predetermined number of times in the first determination state (normal game state). And the means to do
The predetermined number of times of the second notification game in the first determination state (normal game state) (the second special figure game executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening 315 at the time of short opening). The display means (341) is provided with a means (51) for displaying the specific effect image.
The specific first notified game (executed for the hold of the first special figure game after the end of the second special figure game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notified game (second special figure game). In 1 special figure game), the specific effect image is continuously displayed on the display means (341).
When a specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game (first special figure game), the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) is displayed as the specific effect. A gaming machine characterized in that it can be switched to a predetermined effect image (for example, an image of the same color pattern effect) different from the image.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A1, the game to the second winning opening, which is executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game executed when the gaming ball enters the second winning opening in the first determination state. The specific effect image is continuously displayed in the specific first notification game executed when the ball enters the ball, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game, the specific effect image is changed to the predetermined effect image. Can be switched. In this way, the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening, which is executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening in the first determination state. By continuously displaying the specific effect image in the specific first notification game executed with the above as an opportunity, and switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game. Based on whether or not the specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to select whether to continuously display the specific effect image or switch to the predetermined effect image for display. For example, if there is no inconvenience caused by continuously executing the specific effect image, the specific effect image is continuously executed, and if there is an inconvenience caused by continuously executing the specific effect image, the predetermined effect image is executed. Can be switched and executed. As a result, the occurrence of inconvenience due to the continuous execution of the specific effect image is prevented.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the appendix A1, the specific effect image is continuously displayed or switched to the predetermined effect image and displayed based on whether or not the specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game in the first determination state. By making it possible to select whether to do so, when the predetermined effect image is displayed after the end of the specific effect image, the player feels a sense of discomfort due to the restart of the specific effect image, which is the opposite. In addition, since the possibility that the specific production image is not restarted and the player feels uncomfortable with the production in the progress of the game can be reduced, the interest of the game caused by the player feeling uncomfortable with the production in the progress of the game. The drop is prevented.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the appendix A1, when the specific condition is not satisfied in the specific first notification game in the first determination state, the specific effect image is continuously displayed, so that it is displayed in the first notification game. The specific effect image that has been used can be usefully used in the second notification game.

[Appendix A2]
A privilege granting means (41) for granting a privilege to a player when the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times is provided.
The specific condition is characterized in that, when the specific effect image is scheduled to be continuously displayed in the notification game more than the specific number of times, the privilege to be given to the player is not provided. The gaming machine according to the appendix A1.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A2, the specific condition includes that there is no privilege to be given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times. In this way, the specific condition includes that there is no privilege to be given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times. If is not satisfied, when the specific effect image is continuously displayed, the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times even though there is no privilege given to the player. Is avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the privilege is not granted to the player even though the display in the notification game clearly indicates that the privilege is granted.

[Appendix A3]
The permissible state of the second winning opening (315) is the first permissible state (short opening) in which the permissible state is the first hour, and the permissible state is the first hour. Including a long second permissible state (long open),
The specific condition is a game ball to the second winning opening (315) which is set to the first allowable state (short opening) in the first notification game (first special figure game) in which the specific effect image is displayed. The gaming machine according to the appendix A2, which comprises the entry of a ball.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A3, the gaming ball is entered into the second winning opening, which is in the first allowable state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed. In this way, by entering the game ball into the second winning opening, which is the first allowable state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed, the second winning opening is made in the first allowable state. When the specific effect image is continuously displayed, it is avoided that the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the notification game more than a predetermined number of times even though there is no privilege given to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the privilege is not granted to the player even though the display in the notification game clearly indicates that the privilege is granted.

[Appendix A4]
In the specific condition, 0 is set in the second winning opening (315) which is in the allowable state in the first notification game (first special figure game) in which the specific effect image is displayed on the display means (341). The gaming machine according to Appendix A2, which includes the inclusion of a specific number or less of gaming balls exceeding the number of balls.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A4, a game ball having a specific number or less exceeding 0 is inserted into the second winning opening, which is allowed in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed on the display means. .. In this way, it is permissible to include that a specific number or less of game balls exceeding 0 are inserted into the second winning opening, which is in the permissible state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed on the display means. When the number of times of the second notification game executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening in the state is less than or equal to a specific number exceeding 0, the specific effect image is continuously displayed. Even though there is no privilege given to the player, it is avoided that the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the notification game more than a predetermined number of times. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the privilege is not granted to the player even though the display in the notification game clearly indicates that the privilege is granted.

[Appendix A5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A2 to Supplementary A4, wherein the privilege is the execution of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A5, the privilege is the execution of a special game. In this way, since the privilege is the execution of the special game, a situation may occur in which the special game is not executed even though the display in the notification game clearly indicates that the special game is executed. Be prevented.

[Appendix A6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol that is variablely displayed by the display means (341).
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A5, wherein the specific effect image is an image of a combination of the symbols that is stopped and displayed by the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A6, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means in the notification game. As described above, since the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means in the notification game, the player can easily grasp that the specific effect image is displayed. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the specific effect images are continuously displayed, so it is expected that the specific effect images will be continuously displayed when the specific effect images are displayed. Since you can enjoy the progress of the game while doing so, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A7]
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are characterized in that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A6.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A7, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transfer determination by the transfer determination means is to shift to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state, so that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image can be obtained. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting it to be displayed, and if a specific effect image and a predetermined effect image are displayed, pay attention to whether the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state. Because you can enjoy the progress of the game, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix A8]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A7, characterized in that the specific effect image can be switched to the predetermined effect image in the predetermined second notification game (second special figure game).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A8, when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game in the first determination state, the specific production image can be switched to the predetermined production image in the predetermined second notification game. In this way, when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game, the specific effect image can be switched to the predetermined effect image in the predetermined second notification game, so that the specific condition in the specific first notification game can be switched. When the establishment prevents inconvenience in the predetermined second notification game by continuously executing the specific effect image, and inconvenience occurs in the first notification game restarted after the end of the predetermined second notification game. Even so, the occurrence of inconvenience is avoided in advance before the first notification game is executed.

[Appendix A9]
The predetermined second notification game (second special figure game) is the second notification game (second) executed after the specific first notification game (first special figure game) in which the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to Appendix A8, which is characterized by being a special figure gaming).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A9, the predetermined second notification game is the second notification game executed after the specific first notification game for which the specific condition is satisfied. As described above, since the predetermined second notification game is the second notification game executed after the specific first notification game in which the specific condition is satisfied, it is inconvenient to continuously execute the specific effect image. The occurrence of inconvenience is avoided immediately after it is understood that

[Appendix A10]
A privilege granting means (41) for granting a privilege to a player when the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times is provided.
The specific condition includes the absence of the privilege given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be continuously displayed in the notified game more than the specified number of times.
The predetermined second notification game (second special figure game) is characterized in that it is the second notification game (second special figure game) of the specific number of times in which the specific effect image is continuously executed. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A9.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A10, when the specific effect image is scheduled to be continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times and there is no privilege given to the player, the execution is performed at the specific number of times. When the notification game to be performed is the second notification game, the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image in the second notification game. In this way, when the specific effect image is scheduled to be continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times and there is no privilege given to the player, the notification game executed at the specific number of times is executed. Is the second notification game, the specific production image can be displayed continuously as much as possible by switching from the specific production image to the predetermined production image in the second notification game. As a result, the player's expectation due to the continuous display of the specific effect image can be maintained to the maximum, and the player's interest in the game is reduced by switching the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image. Is reduced, so that the interest in the game is prevented from being lowered.

[Appendix A11]
Addendum A1 to A7, characterized in that the specific effect image can be switched to the predetermined effect image in the predetermined first notification game (first special figure game) executed in the specific first notification game. The gaming machine described in any of.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A11, when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game in the first determination state, the specific production image can be switched to the predetermined production image in the predetermined first notification game. In this way, when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game in the first determination state, the specific effect image can be switched to the predetermined effect image in the predetermined first notification game, so that the specific effect image can be specified by the establishment of the specific condition. By continuously executing the effect image, it is possible to avoid inconvenience in the first notification game.

Further, when the specific effect image is switched from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image in the first notification game restarted after the end of the predetermined second notification game, which causes inconvenience due to continuous execution of the specific effect image, the specific effect is specified. A large number of notification games in which the production image is continuously displayed are secured. In this way, by ensuring the maximum number of notification games in which the specific effect image is continuously displayed, there is a case where inconvenience occurs by continuously executing the specific effect image when the specific condition is satisfied. However, the player can enjoy the specific production image to the maximum.

[Appendix A12]
A privilege granting means (41) for granting a privilege to a player when the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times is provided.
The specific condition includes the absence of the privilege given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be continuously displayed in the notified game more than the specified number of times.
The specific first notification game (first special figure game) is characterized in that it is the first notification game (first special figure game) of the specific number of times in which the specific effect image is continuously executed. The gaming machine according to the appendix A11.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A12, when the specific effect image is scheduled to be continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times and there is no privilege given to the player, the execution is performed at the specific number of times. When the notification game to be performed is the first notification game, the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image in the first notification game. In this way, when the specific effect image is scheduled to be continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times and there is no privilege given to the player, the notification game executed at the specific number of times is executed. Is the first notification game, the specific production image can be displayed continuously as much as possible by switching from the specific production image to the predetermined production image in the first notification game. As a result, the player's expectation due to the continuous display of the specific effect image can be maintained to the maximum, and the player's interest in the game is reduced by switching the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image. Is reduced, so that the interest in the game is prevented from being lowered.

[Appendix A13]
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is to shift to the special gaming state.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A12, wherein the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are set to have the same or substantially the same expectation.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A13, the degree of expectation that the special gaming state is to be shifted is set to be the same or substantially the same for the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image. In this way, the degree of expectation of shifting to the special gaming state is set to be the same or substantially the same for the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image, so that the predetermined image displayed on the display means can be specified. Even when the effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, the predetermined image can be maintained without lowering the player's expectation for the display of the predetermined image by switching the predetermined image, so that the predetermined image is caused by the switching. The decrease in the interest of the player who plays the game is prevented, and the decrease in the interest in the game is prevented.

[Appendix A14]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A13, wherein the difference in the degree of expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to −5% to + 5%.

[Appendix A15]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A14, wherein the difference in the degree of expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to −2.5% to + 2.5%.

In the gaming machines according to the appendix A14 and the appendix A15, the difference in the degree of expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to −5% to + 5%, preferably −2.5% to + 2.5%. In this way, the difference in the degree of expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to -5% to + 5%, preferably −2.5% to + 2.5%, so that the predetermined image is displayed. Since the player's expectation for the game can be more appropriately maintained, the decrease in the player's interest due to the switching of the predetermined image is more appropriately prevented, and the decrease in the interest in the game is more appropriately prevented.

[Appendix A16]
The probability that the specific effect image is displayed on the display means (341) in the first notification game (first special figure game) in the first determination state (normal game state) is that the predetermined effect image is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A13 to Supplementary A15, which is characterized in that it is set higher than the probability.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A16, the probability that the specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first notification game in the first determination state is set higher than the probability that the predetermined effect image is displayed. As described above, the probability that the specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first notification game in the first determination state is set higher than the probability that the predetermined effect image is displayed, so that the operation is continuously executed. As a result, the occurrence of inconvenience is appropriately avoided for the continuous display of specific effect images having a high probability of occurrence of inconvenience.

[Appendix A17]
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is to shift to the special gaming state.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A12, wherein the predetermined effect image is set to have a higher degree of expectation than the specific effect image.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A17, the degree of expectation that the gaming machine is to be shifted to the special gaming state is set higher in the predetermined effect image after the switch than in the specific effect image before the switch. In this way, the degree of expectation that the image is to be shifted to the special gaming state is set higher in the predetermined effect image after switching than in the specific effect image before switching, so that the predetermined image is the specific effect image. When switching from to to a predetermined effect image, the degree of expectation suggested to the player is improved by switching to the predetermined effect image. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting to switch from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image when the specific effect image is displayed, and when the specific effect image is switched to. Since the progress of the notification game can be enjoyed with great expectation that the result of the transition determination for the notification game on which the predetermined production image is displayed is to shift to the special game state, the specific production image can be used. The fun of the game is improved by switching the predetermined image to the predetermined production image.

[Appendix A18]
The expectation degree when the predetermined effect image is displayed on the display means (341) in the notification game, and the expectation degree when the specific effect image is displayed on the display means (341) in the notification game. The gaming machine according to Appendix A17, wherein the difference from the above is set to 10% or more.

[Appendix A19]
The expectation degree when the predetermined effect image is displayed on the display means (341) in the notification game, and the expectation degree when the specific effect image is displayed on the display means (341) in the notification game. The gaming machine according to Appendix A18, wherein the difference from the above is set to 25% or more.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices A18 and A19, the difference in the degree of expectation between the predetermined effect image and the specific effect image is set to 10% or more, preferably 25% or more. In this way, the difference in the degree of expectation between the predetermined effect image and the specific effect image is set to 10% or more, preferably 25% or more, so that when the specific effect image is displayed, it is predetermined from the specific effect image. You can enjoy the progress of the game with the expectation that it will be switched to the production image, and when the screen is switched to the predetermined production image, the result of the transition determination for the notification game in which the predetermined production image is displayed is the special game state. Since it is possible to enjoy the progress of the notification game with great expectations by shifting to, the interest of the game is further improved by switching the predetermined image from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image.

[Appendix A20]
The probability that the specific effect image is displayed on the display means (341) in the first notification game (first special figure game) in the first determination state (normal game state) is that the predetermined effect image is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A17 to Supplementary A19, which is characterized in that it is set higher than the probability.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A20, the probability that the specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first notification game in the first determination state is set higher than the probability that the predetermined effect image is displayed. As described above, the probability that the specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first notification game in the first determination state is set higher than the probability that the predetermined effect image is displayed, so that the specific effect image is displayed. Since the frequency of the game is increased, the player has more chances to expect that the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, so that the interest of the game is further improved and the predetermined effect image after the switching is selected. By setting a low probability, the frequency with which the predetermined effect image is displayed is reduced, so that the player's joy when the predetermined effect image is displayed is further enhanced, and the interest of the game is further improved. ..

[Appendix A21]
When the specific effect image (for example, the image of the chance eye effect) is switched to the predetermined effect image (for example, the image of the same color symbol effect), it is executed between the notification game before the switching and the notification game after the switching. A1 to A20, wherein the display means (341) displays a specific effect image different from the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image that clearly or suggests the specific information in the notification game. The game machine described in Crab.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A21, a specific information image that clearly indicates or suggests specific information is displayed in the notification game executed between the notification game before the switching of the predetermined image and the notification game after the switching of the predetermined image. Will be done. In this way, in the notification game executed between the notification game before switching the predetermined image and the notification game after switching the predetermined image, the specific information image that clearly or suggests the specific information is displayed. In a plurality of notification games, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are not continuously displayed, but the continuity between the display of the specific effect image and the display of the predetermined effect image is interrupted. As a result, instead of switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image, the illusion that the display of the predetermined effect image is executed independently of the display of the specific effect image after the display of the specific effect image is completed is played. Since it can be given to a person, it can be disguised as if the specific effect image was not switched to the predetermined effect image. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenience caused by the continuous execution of the specific effect image without the player being aware of it.

By the way, when the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image in order to avoid the inconvenience caused by continuously executing the specific effect image, the notification game in which the predetermined effect image after the switching is executed is executed. The result of the transition determination for the above does not mean that the transition to the special gaming state is made. Therefore, when the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, the player realizes that the result of the transition determination for the notification game in which the predetermined effect image after switching is displayed does not shift to the special game state. There is concern that it will be done. Therefore, by disguising that the switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image has not been performed, the result of the transition determination for the notification game in which the predetermined effect image after the switching is displayed is not transferred to the special game state. It is prevented that the player realizes that there is no such thing.

[Appendix B1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A predetermined winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the above-mentioned determination condition when the game ball enters the ball, and
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41).
A holding means (holding means) capable of withholding the right to execute the notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the predetermined winning opening (314, 315). 41) and
The transition determination means (41) has a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of transition to the special gaming state is the first probability, or a probability of determination to transition to the special gaming state. Is the second probability higher than the first probability, and the transition determination is made in the second determination state (probability variation game state).
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between a first winning opening (314) and an allowable state in which entry of a game ball is permitted and a restricted state in which entry of a game ball is restricted. Including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314).
The gaming machine is
As the notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game), the first notification game (first special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the first winning opening (314). A second notification game (second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315), and a notification game execution means for executing the second notification game (second special figure game) are provided.
The notification game execution means is
A specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) is displayed on the display means (341) in succession to the first notification game (first special figure game) a predetermined number of times in the first determination state (normal game state). And the means to do
The predetermined number of times of the second notification game in the first determination state (normal game state) (the second special figure game executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening 315 at the time of short opening). The display means (341) is provided with a means (51) for displaying the specific effect image.
The specific first notified game (executed for the hold of the first special figure game after the end of the second special figure game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notified game (second special figure game). In 1 special figure game), the specific effect image is continuously displayed on the display means (341).
When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game (first special figure game), the specific effect image (for example, the image of the chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) is the specific effect. It is possible to switch to a predetermined production image (for example, an image with the same color pattern production) that is different from the image.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect image can be switched to the predetermined effect image in the predetermined second notification game (second special figure game).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix B1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game in the first determination state, the specific production image can be switched to the predetermined production image in the predetermined second notification game. In this way, when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game, the specific effect image can be switched to the predetermined effect image in the predetermined second notification game, so that the specific condition in the specific first notification game can be switched. When the establishment prevents inconvenience in the predetermined second notification game by continuously executing the specific effect image, and inconvenience occurs in the first notification game restarted after the end of the predetermined second notification game. Even so, the occurrence of inconvenience is avoided in advance before the first notification game is executed.

[Appendix B2]
The predetermined second notification game (second special figure game) is the second notification game (second) executed after the specific first notification game (first special figure game) in which the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to Appendix B1, which is characterized by being a special figure gaming).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix B2, the predetermined second notification game is the second notification game executed after the specific first notification game for which the specific condition is satisfied. As described above, since the predetermined second notification game is the second notification game executed after the specific first notification game in which the specific condition is satisfied, it is inconvenient to continuously execute the specific effect image. The occurrence of inconvenience is avoided immediately after it is understood that

[Appendix B3]
A privilege granting means (41) for granting a privilege to a player when the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times is provided.
The specific condition includes the absence of the privilege given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be continuously displayed in the notified game more than the specified number of times.
The predetermined second notification game (second special figure game) is characterized in that it is the second notification game (second special figure game) of the specific number of times in which the specific effect image is continuously executed. The gaming machine described in Appendix B1.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B3, when the specific effect image is scheduled to be continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times and there is no privilege given to the player, the execution is performed at the specific number of times. When the notification game to be performed is the second notification game, the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image in the second notification game. In this way, when the specific effect image is scheduled to be continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times and there is no privilege given to the player, the notification game executed at the specific number of times is executed. Is the second notification game, the specific production image can be displayed continuously as much as possible by switching from the specific production image to the predetermined production image in the second notification game. As a result, the player's expectation due to the continuous display of the specific effect image can be maintained to the maximum, and the player's interest in the game is reduced by switching the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image. Is reduced, so that the interest in the game is prevented from being lowered.

[Appendix B4]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol that is variablely displayed by the display means (341).
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B3, wherein the specific effect image is an image of a combination of the symbols that is stopped and displayed by the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix B4, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means in the notification game. As described above, since the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means in the notification game, the player can easily grasp that the specific effect image is displayed. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the specific effect images are continuously displayed, so it is expected that the specific effect images will be continuously displayed when the specific effect images are displayed. Since you can enjoy the progress of the game while doing so, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix B5]
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are characterized in that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B4.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix B5, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transfer determination by the transfer determination means is to shift to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state, so that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image can be obtained. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting it to be displayed, and if a specific effect image and a predetermined effect image are displayed, pay attention to whether the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state. Because you can enjoy the progress of the game, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix C1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A predetermined winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the above-mentioned determination condition when the game ball enters the ball, and
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41).
A holding means (holding means) capable of withholding the right to execute the notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the predetermined winning opening (314, 315). 41) and
The transition determination means (41) has a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of transition to the special gaming state is the first probability, or a probability of determination to transition to the special gaming state. Is the second probability higher than the first probability, and the transition determination is made in the second determination state (probability variation game state).
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between a first winning opening (314) and an allowable state in which entry of a game ball is permitted and a restricted state in which entry of a game ball is restricted. Including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314).
The gaming machine is
As the notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game), the first notification game (first special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the first winning opening (314). A second notification game (second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315), and a notification game execution means for executing the second notification game (second special figure game) are provided.
The notification game execution means is
A specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) is displayed on the display means (341) in succession to the first notification game (first special figure game) a predetermined number of times in the first determination state (normal game state). And the means to do
The predetermined number of times of the second notification game in the first determination state (normal game state) (the second special figure game executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening 315 at the time of short opening). The display means (341) is provided with a means (51) for displaying the specific effect image.
The specific first notified game (executed for the hold of the first special figure game after the end of the second special figure game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notified game (second special figure game). In 1 special figure game), the specific effect image is continuously displayed on the display means (341).
When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game (first special figure game), the specific effect image (for example, the image of the chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) is the specific effect. It is possible to switch to a predetermined production image (for example, an image with the same color pattern production) that is different from the image.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect image can be switched to the predetermined effect image in the predetermined first notification game (first special figure game) executed in the specific first notification game.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix C1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game in the first determination state, the specific production image can be switched to the predetermined production image in the predetermined first notification game. In this way, when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game in the first determination state, the specific effect image can be switched to the predetermined effect image in the predetermined first notification game, so that the specific effect image can be specified by the establishment of the specific condition. By continuously executing the effect image, it is possible to avoid inconvenience in the first notification game.

Further, when the specific effect image is switched from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image in the first notification game restarted after the end of the predetermined second notification game, which causes inconvenience due to continuous execution of the specific effect image, the specific effect is specified. A large number of notification games in which the production image is continuously displayed are secured. In this way, by ensuring the maximum number of notification games in which the specific effect image is continuously displayed, there is a case where inconvenience occurs by continuously executing the specific effect image when the specific condition is satisfied. However, the player can enjoy the specific production image to the maximum.

[Appendix C2]
A privilege granting means (41) for granting a privilege to a player when the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times is provided.
The specific condition includes the absence of the privilege given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be continuously displayed in the notified game more than the specified number of times.
The specific first notification game (first special figure game) is characterized in that it is the first notification game (first special figure game) of the specific number of times in which the specific effect image is continuously executed. The gaming machine according to the appendix C1.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix C2, when the specific effect image is scheduled to be continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times and there is no privilege given to the player, the execution is performed at the specific number of times. When the notification game to be performed is the first notification game, the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image in the first notification game. In this way, when the specific effect image is scheduled to be continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times and there is no privilege given to the player, the notification game executed at the specific number of times is executed. Is the first notification game, the specific production image can be displayed continuously as much as possible by switching from the specific production image to the predetermined production image in the first notification game. As a result, the player's expectation due to the continuous display of the specific effect image can be maintained to the maximum, and the player's interest in the game is reduced by switching the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image. Is reduced, so that the interest in the game is prevented from being lowered.

[Appendix C3]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol that is variablely displayed by the display means (341).
The gaming machine according to Appendix C1 or Appendix C2, wherein the specific effect image is an image of a combination of the symbols that is stopped and displayed by the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix C3, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means in the notification game. As described above, since the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means in the notification game, the player can easily grasp that the specific effect image is displayed. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the specific effect images are continuously displayed, so it is expected that the specific effect images will be continuously displayed when the specific effect images are displayed. Since you can enjoy the progress of the game while doing so, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C4]
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are characterized in that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C1 to C3.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix C4, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transfer determination by the transfer determination means is to shift to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state, so that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image can be obtained. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting it to be displayed, and if a specific effect image and a predetermined effect image are displayed, pay attention to whether the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state. Because you can enjoy the progress of the game, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix D1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A predetermined winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the above-mentioned determination condition when the game ball enters the ball, and
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41).
A holding means (holding means) capable of withholding the right to execute the notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the predetermined winning opening (314, 315). 41) and
The transition determination means (41) has a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of transition to the special gaming state is the first probability, or a probability of determination to transition to the special gaming state. Is the second probability higher than the first probability, and the transition determination is made in the second determination state (probability variation game state).
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between a first winning opening (314) and an allowable state in which entry of a game ball is permitted and a restricted state in which entry of a game ball is restricted. Including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314).
The gaming machine is
As the notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game), the first notification game (first special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the first winning opening (314). A second notification game (second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315), and a notification game execution means for executing the second notification game (second special figure game) are provided.
The notification game execution means is
A specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) is displayed on the display means (341) in succession to the first notification game (first special figure game) a predetermined number of times in the first determination state (normal game state). And the means to do
The predetermined number of times of the second notification game in the first determination state (normal game state) (the second special figure game executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening 315 at the time of short opening). The display means (341) is provided with a means (51) for displaying the specific effect image.
The specific first notified game (executed for the hold of the first special figure game after the end of the second special figure game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notified game (second special figure game). In 1 special figure game), the specific effect image is continuously displayed on the display means (341).
When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game (first special figure game), the specific effect image (for example, the image of the chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) is the specific effect. It is possible to switch to a predetermined production image (for example, an image with the same color pattern production) that is different from the image.
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is to shift to the special gaming state.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are set to have the same or substantially the same degree of expectation.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix D1, the degree of expectation that the special gaming state is to be shifted is set to be the same or substantially the same for the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image. In this way, the degree of expectation of shifting to the special gaming state is set to be the same or substantially the same for the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image, so that the predetermined image displayed on the display means can be specified. Even when the effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, the predetermined image can be maintained without lowering the player's expectation for the display of the predetermined image by switching the predetermined image, so that the predetermined image is caused by the switching. The decrease in the interest of the player who plays the game is prevented, and the decrease in the interest in the game is prevented.

[Appendix D2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D 1, wherein the difference in the degree of expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to −5% to + 5%.

[Appendix D3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D2, wherein the difference in the degree of expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to −2.5% to + 2.5%.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices D2 and D3, the difference in the degree of expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to −5% to + 5%, preferably −2.5% to + 2.5%. In this way, the difference in the degree of expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to −5% to + 5%, preferably −2.5% to + 2.5%, so that the predetermined image is displayed. Since the player's expectation for the game can be more appropriately maintained, the decrease in the player's interest due to the switching of the predetermined image is more appropriately prevented, and the decrease in the interest in the game is more appropriately prevented.

[Appendix D4]
The probability that the specific effect image is displayed on the display means (341) in the first notification game (first special figure game) in the first determination state (normal game state) is that the predetermined effect image is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D1 to D3, which is characterized in that it is set higher than the probability.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix D4, the probability that the specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first notification game in the first determination state is set higher than the probability that the predetermined effect image is displayed. As described above, the probability that the specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first notification game in the first determination state is set higher than the probability that the predetermined effect image is displayed, so that the operation is continuously executed. As a result, the occurrence of inconvenience is appropriately avoided for the continuous display of specific effect images having a high probability of occurrence of inconvenience.

[Appendix D5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol that is variablely displayed by the display means (341).
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D1 to D4, wherein the specific effect image is an image of a combination of the symbols that is stopped and displayed by the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix D5, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means in the notification game. As described above, since the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means in the notification game, the player can easily grasp that the specific effect image is displayed. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the specific effect images are continuously displayed, so it is expected that the specific effect images will be continuously displayed when the specific effect images are displayed. Since you can enjoy the progress of the game while doing so, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix E1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A predetermined winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the above-mentioned determination condition when the game ball enters the ball, and
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41).
A holding means (holding means) capable of withholding the right to execute the notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the predetermined winning opening (314, 315). 41) and
The transition determination means (41) has a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of transition to the special gaming state is the first probability, or a probability of determination to transition to the special gaming state. Is the second probability higher than the first probability, and the transition determination is made in the second determination state (probability variation game state).
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between a first winning opening (314) and an allowable state in which entry of a game ball is permitted and a restricted state in which entry of a game ball is restricted. Including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314).
The gaming machine is
As the notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game), the first notification game (first special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the first winning opening (314). A second notification game (second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315), and a notification game execution means for executing the second notification game (second special figure game) are provided.
The notification game execution means is
A specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) is displayed on the display means (341) in succession to the first notification game (first special figure game) a predetermined number of times in the first determination state (normal game state). And the means to do
The predetermined number of times of the second notification game in the first determination state (normal game state) (the second special figure game executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening 315 at the time of short opening). The display means (341) is provided with a means (51) for displaying the specific effect image.
The specific first notified game (executed for the hold of the first special figure game after the end of the second special figure game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notified game (second special figure game). In 1 special figure game), the specific effect image is continuously displayed on the display means (341).
When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game (first special figure game), the specific effect image (for example, the image of the chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) is the specific effect. It is possible to switch to a predetermined production image (for example, an image with the same color pattern production) that is different from the image.
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is to shift to the special gaming state.
The predetermined effect image is a gaming machine characterized in that the expected degree is set higher than that of the specific effect image.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix E1, the degree of expectation that the gaming machine is to be shifted to the special gaming state is set higher in the predetermined effect image after the switch than in the specific effect image before the switch. In this way, the degree of expectation that the image is to be shifted to the special gaming state is set higher in the predetermined effect image after switching than in the specific effect image before switching, so that the predetermined image is the specific effect image. When switching from to to a predetermined effect image, the degree of expectation suggested to the player is improved by switching to the predetermined effect image. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting to switch from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image when the specific effect image is displayed, and when the specific effect image is switched to. Since the progress of the notification game can be enjoyed with great expectation that the result of the transition determination for the notification game on which the predetermined production image is displayed is to shift to the special game state, the specific production image can be used. The fun of the game is improved by switching the predetermined image to the predetermined production image.

[Appendix E2]
The expectation degree when the predetermined effect image is displayed on the display means (341) in the notification game, and the expectation degree when the specific effect image is displayed on the display means (341) in the notification game. The gaming machine according to Appendix E1, characterized in that the difference from the above is set to 10% or more.

[Appendix E3]
The expectation degree when the predetermined effect image is displayed on the display means (341) in the notification game, and the expectation degree when the specific effect image is displayed on the display means (341) in the notification game. The gaming machine according to Appendix E2, wherein the difference from the above is set to 25% or more.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices E2 and E3, the difference in the degree of expectation between the predetermined effect image and the specific effect image is set to 10% or more, preferably 25% or more. In this way, the difference in the degree of expectation between the predetermined effect image and the specific effect image is set to 10% or more, preferably 25% or more, so that when the specific effect image is displayed, it is predetermined from the specific effect image. You can enjoy the progress of the game with the expectation that it will be switched to the production image, and when the screen is switched to the predetermined production image, the result of the transition determination for the notification game in which the predetermined production image is displayed is the special game state. Since it is possible to enjoy the progress of the notification game with great expectations by shifting to, the interest of the game is further improved by switching the predetermined image from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image.

[Appendix E4]
The probability that the specific effect image is displayed on the display means (341) in the first notification game (first special figure game) in the first determination state (normal game state) is that the predetermined effect image is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E1 to E3, which is characterized in that it is set higher than the probability.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix E4, the probability that the specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first notification game in the first determination state is set higher than the probability that the predetermined effect image is displayed. As described above, the probability that the specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first notification game in the first determination state is set higher than the probability that the predetermined effect image is displayed, so that the specific effect image is displayed. Since the frequency of the game is increased, the player has more chances to expect that the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, so that the interest of the game is further improved and the predetermined effect image after the switching is selected. By setting a low probability, the frequency with which the predetermined effect image is displayed is reduced, so that the player's joy when the predetermined effect image is displayed is further enhanced, and the interest of the game is further improved. ..

[Appendix E5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol that is variablely displayed by the display means (341).
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E1 to E4, wherein the specific effect image is an image of a combination of the symbols that is stopped and displayed by the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix E5, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means in the notification game. As described above, since the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means in the notification game, the player can easily grasp that the specific effect image is displayed. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the specific effect images are continuously displayed, so it is expected that the specific effect images will be continuously displayed when the specific effect images are displayed. Since you can enjoy the progress of the game while doing so, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix F1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A predetermined winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the above-mentioned determination condition when the game ball enters the ball, and
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41).
A holding means (holding means) capable of withholding the right to execute the notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the predetermined winning opening (314, 315). 41) and
The transition determination means (41) has a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of transition to the special gaming state is the first probability, or a probability of determination to transition to the special gaming state. Is the second probability higher than the first probability, and the transition determination is made in the second determination state (probability variation game state).
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between a first winning opening (314) and an allowable state in which entry of a game ball is permitted and a restricted state in which entry of a game ball is restricted. Including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314).
The gaming machine is
As the notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game), the first notification game (first special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the first winning opening (314). A second notification game (second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315), and a notification game execution means for executing the second notification game (second special figure game) are provided.
The notification game execution means is
A specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) is displayed on the display means (341) in succession to the first notification game (first special figure game) a predetermined number of times in the first determination state (normal game state). And the means to do
The predetermined number of times of the second notification game in the first determination state (normal game state) (the second special figure game executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening 315 at the time of short opening). The display means (341) is provided with a means (51) for displaying the specific effect image.
The specific first notified game (executed for the hold of the first special figure game after the end of the second special figure game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notified game (second special figure game). In 1 special figure game), the specific effect image is continuously displayed on the display means (341).
When a specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game (first special figure game), the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) is displayed as the specific effect. It is possible to switch to a predetermined production image (for example, an image with the same color pattern production) that is different from the image.
When the specific effect image (for example, the image of the chance eye effect) is switched to the predetermined effect image (for example, the image of the same color symbol effect), it is executed between the notification game before the switching and the notification game after the switching. A gaming machine characterized in that a display means (341) displays a specific information image different from the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image that clearly or suggests specific information in the notification game.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix F1, a specific information image that clearly indicates or suggests specific information is displayed in the notification game executed between the notification game before the switching of the predetermined image and the notification game after the switching of the predetermined image. Will be done. In this way, in the notification game executed between the notification game before switching the predetermined image and the notification game after switching the predetermined image, the specific information image that clearly or suggests the specific information is displayed. In a plurality of notification games, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are not continuously displayed, but the continuity between the display of the specific effect image and the display of the predetermined effect image is interrupted. As a result, instead of switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image, the illusion that the display of the predetermined effect image is executed independently of the display of the specific effect image after the display of the specific effect image is completed is played. Since it can be given to a person, it can be disguised as if the specific effect image was not switched to the predetermined effect image. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenience caused by the continuous execution of the specific effect image without the player being aware of it.

By the way, when the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image in order to avoid the inconvenience caused by continuously executing the specific effect image, the notification game in which the predetermined effect image after the switching is executed is executed. The result of the transition determination for the above does not mean that the transition to the special gaming state is made. Therefore, when the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, the player realizes that the result of the transition determination for the notification game in which the predetermined effect image after switching is displayed does not shift to the special game state. There is concern that it will be done. Therefore, by disguising that the switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image has not been performed, the result of the transition determination for the notification game in which the predetermined effect image after the switching is displayed is not transferred to the special game state. It is prevented that the player realizes that there is no such thing.

[Appendix F2]
A privilege granting means (41) for granting a privilege to a player when the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times is provided.
The specific condition is characterized in that, when the specific effect image is scheduled to be continuously displayed in the notified game more than the specified number of times, the privilege to be given to the player is not provided. The gaming machine described in Appendix F1.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix F2, the specific condition includes that there is no privilege to be given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times. In this way, the specific condition includes that there is no privilege to be given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times. If is not satisfied, when the specific effect image is continuously displayed, the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times even though there is no privilege given to the player. Is avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the privilege is not granted to the player even though the display in the notification game clearly indicates that the privilege is granted.

[Appendix F3]
The permissible state of the second winning opening (315) is the first permissible state (short opening) in which the permissible state is the first hour, and the permissible state is the first hour. Including a long second permissible state (long open),
The specific condition is a game ball to the second winning opening (315) which is set to the first allowable state (short opening) in the first notification game (first special figure game) in which the specific effect image is displayed. The gaming machine according to the appendix F2, which comprises the entry of a ball.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix F3, the gaming ball is entered into the second winning opening, which is set as the first allowable state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed. In this way, by entering the game ball into the second winning opening, which is the first allowable state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed, the second winning opening is made in the first allowable state. When the specific effect image is continuously displayed, it is avoided that the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the notification game more than a predetermined number of times even though there is no privilege given to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the privilege is not granted to the player even though the display in the notification game clearly indicates that the privilege is granted.

[Appendix F4]
In the specific condition, 0 is set in the second winning opening (315) which is in the allowable state in the first notification game (first special figure game) in which the specific effect image is displayed on the display means (341). The gaming machine according to the appendix F2, which includes the inclusion of a specific number or less of gaming balls exceeding the number of balls.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix F4, a game ball having a specific number or less exceeding 0 is inserted into the second winning opening, which is allowed in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed on the display means. .. In this way, it is permissible to include that a specific number or less of game balls exceeding 0 are inserted into the second winning opening, which is in the permissible state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed on the display means. When the number of times of the second notification game executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening in the state is less than or equal to a specific number exceeding 0, the specific effect image is continuously displayed. Even though there is no privilege given to the player, it is avoided that the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the notification game more than a predetermined number of times. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the privilege is not granted to the player even though the display in the notification game clearly indicates that the privilege is granted.

[Appendix F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions F2 to F4, wherein the privilege is the execution of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix F5, the privilege is the execution of a special game. In this way, since the privilege is the execution of the special game, a situation may occur in which the special game is not executed even though the display in the notification game clearly indicates that the special game is executed. Be prevented.

[Appendix F6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol that is variablely displayed by the display means (341).
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions F1 to F5, wherein the specific effect image is an image of a combination of the symbols that is stopped and displayed by the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix F6, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means in the notification game. As described above, since the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means in the notification game, the player can easily grasp that the specific effect image is displayed. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the specific effect images are continuously displayed, so it is expected that the specific effect images will be continuously displayed when the specific effect images are displayed. Since you can enjoy the progress of the game while doing so, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix F7]
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are characterized in that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary F6.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix F7, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transfer determination by the transfer determination means is to shift to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state, so that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image can be obtained. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting it to be displayed, and if a specific effect image and a predetermined effect image are displayed, pay attention to whether the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state. Because you can enjoy the progress of the game, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix G1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A predetermined winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the above-mentioned determination condition when the game ball enters the ball, and
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41).
A holding means (holding means) capable of withholding the right to execute the notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the predetermined winning opening (314, 315). 41) and
The transition determination means (41) has a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of transition to the special gaming state is the first probability, or a probability of determination to transition to the special gaming state. Is the second probability higher than the first probability, and the transition determination is made in the second determination state (probability variation game state).
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between a first winning opening (314) and an allowable state in which entry of a game ball is permitted and a restricted state in which entry of a game ball is restricted. Including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314).
The gaming machine is
As the notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game), the first notification game (first special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the first winning opening (314). A second notification game (second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315), and a notification game execution means for executing the second notification game (second special figure game) are provided.
The notification game execution means is
A specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) is displayed on the display means (341) in succession to the first notification game (first special figure game) a predetermined number of times in the first determination state (normal game state). And the means to do
The predetermined number of times of the second notification game in the first determination state (normal game state) (the second special figure game executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening 315 at the time of short opening). The display means (341) is provided with a means (51) for displaying the specific effect image.
The specific first notified game (executed for the hold of the first special figure game after the end of the second special figure game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notified game (second special figure game). In 1 special figure game), the specific effect image is continuously displayed on the display means (341).
When a specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game (first special figure game), the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) is displayed as the specific effect. It is possible to switch to a predetermined production image (for example, an image with the same color pattern production) that is different from the image.
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol that is variablely displayed by the display means (341).
The specific effect image is a gaming machine characterized in that it is an image of a combination of the symbols that is stopped and displayed by the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note G1, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means in the notification game. As described above, since the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means in the notification game, the player can easily grasp that the specific effect image is displayed. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the specific effect images are continuously displayed, so it is expected that the specific effect images will be continuously displayed when the specific effect images are displayed. Since you can enjoy the progress of the game while doing so, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix G2]
A privilege granting means (41) for granting a privilege to a player when the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times is provided.
The specific condition is characterized in that, when the specific effect image is scheduled to be continuously displayed in the notified game more than the specified number of times, the privilege to be given to the player is not provided. The gaming machine described in Appendix G1.

In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note G2, the specific condition includes that there is no privilege to be given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times. In this way, the specific condition includes that there is no privilege to be given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times. If is not satisfied, when the specific effect image is continuously displayed, the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times even though there is no privilege given to the player. Is avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the privilege is not granted to the player even though the display in the notification game clearly indicates that the privilege is granted.

[Appendix G3]
The permissible state of the second winning opening (315) is the first permissible state (short opening) in which the permissible state is the first hour, and the permissible state is the first hour. Including a long second permissible state (long open),
The specific condition is a game ball to the second winning opening (315) which is set to the first allowable state (short opening) in the first notification game (first special figure game) in which the specific effect image is displayed. The gaming machine according to the appendix G2, which comprises the entry of a ball.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix G3, the gaming ball is entered into the second winning opening, which is in the first allowable state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed. In this way, by entering the game ball into the second winning opening, which is the first allowable state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed, the second winning opening is made in the first allowable state. When the specific effect image is continuously displayed, it is avoided that the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the notification game more than a predetermined number of times even though there is no privilege given to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the privilege is not granted to the player even though the display in the notification game clearly indicates that the privilege is granted.

[Appendix G4]
In the specific condition, 0 is set in the second winning opening (315) which is in the allowable state in the first notification game (first special figure game) in which the specific effect image is displayed on the display means (341). The gaming machine according to the appendix G2, which includes the inclusion of a specific number or less of gaming balls exceeding the number of balls.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix G4, a game ball having a specific number or less exceeding 0 is inserted into the second winning opening, which is allowed in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed on the display means. .. In this way, it is permissible to include that a specific number or less of game balls exceeding 0 are inserted into the second winning opening, which is in the permissible state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed on the display means. When the number of times of the second notification game executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening in the state is less than or equal to a specific number exceeding 0, the specific effect image is continuously displayed. Even though there is no privilege given to the player, it is avoided that the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the notification game more than a predetermined number of times. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the privilege is not granted to the player even though the display in the notification game clearly indicates that the privilege is granted.

[Appendix G5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions G2 to G4, wherein the privilege is the execution of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix G5, the privilege is the execution of a special game. In this way, since the privilege is the execution of the special game, a situation may occur in which the special game is not executed even though the display in the notification game clearly indicates that the special game is executed. Be prevented.

[Appendix G6]
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are characterized in that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note G1 to Supplementary Note G5.

In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note G6, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transfer determination by the transfer determination means is to shift to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state, so that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image can be obtained. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting it to be displayed, and if a specific effect image and a predetermined effect image are displayed, pay attention to whether the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state. Because you can enjoy the progress of the game, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix H1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A predetermined winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the above-mentioned determination condition when the game ball enters the ball, and
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41).
A holding means (holding means) capable of withholding the right to execute the notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the predetermined winning opening (314, 315). 41) and
The transition determination means (41) has a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of transition to the special gaming state is the first probability, or a probability of determination to transition to the special gaming state. Is the second probability higher than the first probability, and the transition determination is made in the second determination state (probability variation game state).
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between a first winning opening (314) and an allowable state in which entry of a game ball is permitted and a restricted state in which entry of a game ball is restricted. Including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314).
The gaming machine is
As the notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game), the first notification game (first special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the first winning opening (314). A second notification game (second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315), and a notification game execution means for executing the second notification game (second special figure game) are provided.
The notification game execution means is
A specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) is displayed on the display means (341) in succession to the first notification game (first special figure game) a predetermined number of times in the first determination state (normal game state). And the means to do
The predetermined number of times of the second notification game in the first determination state (normal game state) (the second special figure game executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening 315 at the time of short opening). The display means (341) is provided with a means (51) for displaying the specific effect image.
The specific first notified game (executed for the hold of the first special figure game after the end of the second special figure game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notified game (second special figure game). In 1 special figure game), the specific effect image is continuously displayed on the display means (341).
When a specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game (first special figure game), the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) is displayed as the specific effect. It is possible to switch to a predetermined production image (for example, an image with the same color pattern production) that is different from the image.
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are characterized in that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state. Gaming machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H1, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transfer determination by the transfer determination means is to shift to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state, so that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image can be obtained. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting it to be displayed, and if a specific effect image and a predetermined effect image are displayed, pay attention to whether the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state. Because you can enjoy the progress of the game, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix H2]
A privilege granting means (41) for granting a privilege to a player when the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times is provided.
The specific condition is characterized in that, when the specific effect image is scheduled to be continuously displayed in the notification game more than the specific number of times, the privilege to be given to the player is not provided. The gaming machine described in Appendix H1.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H2, the specific condition includes that there is no privilege to be given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be continuously displayed in the notification game of a specific number of times or more. In this way, the specific condition includes that there is no privilege to be given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times. If is not satisfied, when the specific effect image is continuously displayed, the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the notification game more than a specific number of times even though there is no privilege given to the player. Is avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the privilege is not granted to the player even though the display in the notification game clearly indicates that the privilege is granted.

[Appendix H3]
The permissible state of the second winning opening (315) is the first permissible state (short opening) in which the permissible state is the first hour, and the permissible state is the first hour. Including a long second permissible state (long open),
The specific condition is a game ball to the second winning opening (315) which is set to the first allowable state (short opening) in the first notification game (first special figure game) in which the specific effect image is displayed. The gaming machine according to the appendix H2, which comprises the entry of a ball.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H3, the gaming ball is entered into the second winning opening, which is in the first allowable state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed. In this way, by entering the game ball into the second winning opening, which is the first allowable state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed, the second winning opening is made in the first allowable state. When the specific effect image is continuously displayed, it is avoided that the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the notification game more than a predetermined number of times even though there is no privilege given to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the privilege is not granted to the player even though the display in the notification game clearly indicates that the privilege is granted.

[Appendix H4]
In the specific condition, 0 is set in the second winning opening (315) which is in the allowable state in the first notification game (first special figure game) in which the specific effect image is displayed on the display means (341). The gaming machine according to the appendix H2, which includes the inclusion of a specific number or less of gaming balls exceeding the number of balls.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H4, a game ball having a specific number or less exceeding 0 is inserted into the second winning opening, which is allowed in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed on the display means. .. In this way, it is permissible to include that a specific number or less of game balls exceeding 0 are inserted into the second winning opening, which is in the permissible state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed on the display means. When the number of times of the second notification game executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening in the state is less than or equal to a specific number exceeding 0, the specific effect image is continuously displayed. Even though there is no privilege given to the player, it is avoided that the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the notification game more than a predetermined number of times. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the privilege is not granted to the player even though the display in the notification game clearly indicates that the privilege is granted.

[Appendix H5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H2 to H4, wherein the privilege is the execution of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H5, the privilege is the execution of a special game. In this way, since the privilege is the execution of the special game, a situation may occur in which the special game is not executed even though the display in the notification game clearly indicates that the special game is executed. Be prevented.

[Appendix H6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol that is variablely displayed by the display means (341).
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H1 to H5, wherein the specific effect image is an image of a combination of the symbols that is stopped and displayed by the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H6, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means in the notification game. As described above, since the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means in the notification game, the player can easily grasp that the specific effect image is displayed. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the specific effect images are continuously displayed, so it is expected that the specific effect images will be continuously displayed when the specific effect images are displayed. Since you can enjoy the progress of the game while doing so, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix I1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A predetermined winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the above-mentioned determination condition when the game ball enters the ball, and
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41), and
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) has a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of transition to the special gaming state is the first probability, or a probability of determination to transition to the special gaming state. Is the second probability higher than the first probability, and the transition determination is made in the second determination state (probability variation game state).
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between a first winning opening (314) and an allowable state in which entry of a game ball is permitted and a restricted state in which entry of a game ball is restricted. Including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314).
The notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) is a first notification game (first special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the first winning opening (314). And the second notification game (second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315).
Suggestion information display means (341) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (information on jackpot expectation by hold continuous effect on jackpot expectation) in the predetermined first notification game (first special figure game in which hold continuous effect is executed). )When,
The right to execute the second notification game (second special figure game), which is executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315), can be reserved up to the maximum number (for example, four). Means (41) and
A specific gaming state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific gaming state in which the second winning opening (315) is set to the predetermined allowable state (long open), and
Equipped with
In the specific game state, the second notification game is continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number, based on the fact that the second winning opening (315) is set to the predetermined allowable state (long open). It is in a state where it can be made to
Specific effect image (image displayed by the second special figure special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41) is displayed. Directed image display means (51) and
When the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special figure game), the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed (for example, as a captured image 78). Suggestion information continuous display means (51) to be displayed) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix I1, when the specific effect image is displayed in the second notification game, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed. In this way, when the specific effect image is displayed in the second notification game, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, so that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed before the start of the second notification game. , And the player can grasp that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game. This prevents forgetting that the predetermined suggestion information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and restarts the display of the predetermined suggestion information after the end of the second notification game. It can be grasped in advance. As a result, due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestion information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game. Since it is prevented that the person feels uncomfortable, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.
[Appendix I2]
The game according to Appendix I1, wherein the suggestion information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggestive information without changing the predetermined suggestive information when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I2, when the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed without being changed. In this way, when the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed without being changed, so that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed before the start of the second notification game. It can be easily grasped by the player that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game. As a result, it is further prevented from forgetting that the predetermined suggestion information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game. Can be grasped in advance. As a result, due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestion information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game. Since it is more prevented that the person feels uncomfortable, the decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is further prevented.

[Appendix I3]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is executed after the first notification game (first special figure game) in which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, the second notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to Appendix I2, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed while maintaining the mode displayed in the first notification game (first special figure game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I3, in the second notification game executed after the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, the mode displayed in the first notification game is maintained and the predetermined suggestion is made. By displaying the information, the player can more easily and surely grasp that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed in the first notification game before the execution of the second notification game. As a result, since it is more appropriately prevented that the player feels uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is restarted after the end of the second notification game, the display of the predetermined suggestion information is restarted. The resulting decline in the enjoyment of the game is prevented.

[Appendix I4]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is executed after the first notification game (first special figure game) in which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, the second notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to Supplementary note I1, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a mode different from that of the first notification game (first special figure game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I4, in the second notified game executed after the first notified game in which the predetermined suggested information is displayed, the predetermined suggested information is displayed in a mode different from that of the first notified game. In this way, in the second notification game executed after the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed in a mode different from that of the first notification game, so that the second notification game is displayed. It is possible to make the player understand in various ways that the predetermined suggestion information was displayed before the start of the notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game. At the same time, it is possible to make the player grasp the effect performed in the second notification game and the visual recognition of the variation display of the symbol.

[Appendix I5]
The appendix I1 is characterized in that, when the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, the suggestion information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggestive information without changing the display position of the predetermined suggestive information. The gaming machine described in Appendix I4.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I5, when the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, the display position of the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed without being changed. In this way, when the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed without changing the display position of the predetermined suggestive information, so that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed before the start of the 2 notification game. Can be easily grasped by the player that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the end of the second notification game. As a result, it is further prevented from forgetting that the predetermined suggestion information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game. Can be grasped in advance. As a result, due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestion information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game. Since it is more prevented that the person feels uncomfortable, the decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is further prevented.

[Appendix I6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner.
The additional note that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) continuously displays (displays as a captured image 78) the predetermined suggestion information at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the symbol in the second notification game. The gaming machine according to any one of I1 to I5.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I6, predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the symbol in the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the symbol in the second notification game, the predetermined suggestion information was displayed before the start of the second notification game. And, it is possible to make the player understand that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game without obstructing the visual recognition of the variation display of the symbol executed in the second notification game.

[Appendix I7]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed (displayed as a captured image 78) at a position adjacent to the variable display area of the symbol in the second notification game. The gaming machine described in Appendix I6.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I7, predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed at a position adjacent to the variable display area of the symbol in the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying predetermined suggestion information at a position adjacent to the symbol variation display area in the second notification game, the player who pays attention to the symbol variation in the second notification game is predetermined. It becomes possible to more easily notice that the suggestion information of is continuously displayed. As a result, the player can easily and surely grasp that the predetermined suggestion information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game. Can be made to.

[Appendix I8]
The right to execute the first notification game (first special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the first winning opening (314) can be reserved up to the first upper limit number (for example, four). First holding means (41)
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays the predetermined suggestion information when the right to execute the first notification game (first special figure game) is reserved by the first holding means (41). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions I1 to I7, characterized in that it is continuously displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I8, when the right to execute the first notification game executed when the gaming ball enters the first winning opening is reserved, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed. Will be done. In this way, when the right to execute the first notification game executed when the game ball enters the first winning opening is reserved, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed. , When the right to execute the first notification game is reserved while the second notification game is being executed in the specific game state, it is prevented that predetermined suggestion information is displayed for this first notification game. Will be done. As a result, after the end of the specific gaming state, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed for the first notification game in which the number of consecutive times of the predetermined suggestion information set before the transition to the specific gaming state is exceeded. Is prevented. As a result, when a predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed in a specific number of times or more in the first notification game and a privilege is given to the player, the predetermined suggestion information is given to the player even though there is no privilege to be given to the player. Since it is avoided that the suggestion information of is continuously displayed in the first notification game more than a specific number of times, the player is clearly shown that the privilege is given by the display in the notification game. It is prevented that the situation that the privilege is not given to the person occurs.

[Appendix I9]
The frequency in which the second winning opening (315) is in the permissible state is the first frequency, and the frequency in which the second winning opening (315) is in the permissible state is higher than the first frequency. Allowable frequency control means for switching between the second frequency state, which is also a high second frequency, and
Equipped with
The specific gaming state generating means (41) is described in any one of Supplementary Provisions I1 to I8, characterized in that the specific gaming state is generated in at least one of the first frequency state and the second frequency state. Gaming machine.

[Appendix I10]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I9, wherein the specific gaming state generating means (41) generates the specific gaming state in the first frequency state.

[Appendix I11]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I9 or Appendix I10, wherein the specific gaming state generating means (41) generates the specific gaming state in the second frequency state.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices I9 to I11, the first frequency state in which the second winning opening is less frequently accepted and the second winning opening are more frequently accepted in the permissible state. A specific gaming state is generated in at least one of the second frequency states, which is the frequency. In the first frequency state, the frequency with which the second winning opening is accepted is low. Therefore, in the first frequency state, the frequency at which the specific gaming state is generated is low, and the specific gaming state is generated as a special state. On the other hand, in the second frequency state, the frequency at which the second winning opening is accepted is high. Therefore, in the second frequency state, the frequency at which the specific gaming state is generated increases, and the specific gaming state is generated as a non-special state. In this way, the frequency of occurrence of the specific gaming state is different between the first frequency state and the second frequency state, and their positioning is also different. The game performance differs between the case where the specific gaming state is generated in the 1-frequency state and the case where the specific gaming state is generated in the 2nd frequency state, which is the second frequency in which the second winning opening is frequently accepted as the allowable state. Is given. As a result, the player's attention and interest in the game can be increased, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix I12]
The first display means (341) on which the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51), and
A second display means (39 or the like) different from the first display means (341) in which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed by the suggestion information continuous display means (51).
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions I1 to I11.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I12, a first display means for displaying a specific effect image corresponding to a second notification game executed based on the occurrence of a specific gaming state, and a second display for displaying predetermined suggestion information. The means are different. As described above, the first display means for displaying the specific effect image corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state and the second display means for displaying the predetermined suggestive information are different. This makes it possible to display predetermined suggestion information in the second display means without disturbing the display of the specific effect image in the first display means. Thereby, both the specific effect image and the predetermined suggestion information can be surely and appropriately displayed without disturbing each other's visual recognition.

[Appendix I13]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a reduced image of an image displayed on the display means (341) as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game (second special figure). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions I1 to I12, which is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I13, a reduced image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect executed in the second notification game can be achieved. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the variation display of the symbol, and the player is informed that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to grasp. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

Further, when the reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed after the end of the second notification. Not only can the player know that it will be restarted, but it is also possible for the player to know the display mode (type) of the predetermined suggestion information that is restarted in the first notification game. As a result, it is more appropriately prevented that the player feels uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and the interest in the game is further reduced due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Properly prevented.

[Appendix I14]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) reduces the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and displays the image in the second notification game. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions I1 to I13, characterized in that it is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in (second special figure game).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix I14, the image in which the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the image in which the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the image is executed in the second notification game. It is possible to easily and surely display predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the effect and the variable display of the symbol, and the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to let a person understand. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix I15]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and the predetermined notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions I1 to I14, which is displayed as suggestive information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I15, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect executed in the second notification game is performed. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the fluctuation display of the symbol or the symbol, and the player can resume the display of the predetermined suggestion information after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to grasp. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix I16]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping and displaying the variable display symbol.
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that, in the second notification game, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed on the front side or the back side of the variablely displayed symbol. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions I1 to I15.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix I16, predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed on the front side or the back side of the symbol which is variablely displayed in the second notification game. In this way, the player pays attention to the fluctuation of the symbol in the second notification game by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information on the front side or the back side of the symbol that is variablely displayed in the second notification game. However, it becomes possible to easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. As a result, the player can easily and surely understand that the predetermined suggestion information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game. Can be made to.

[Appendix I17]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions I1 to I16.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I17, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect and the symbol change executed in the second notification game. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the display, and to make the player understand that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification. Will be possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix I18]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions I1 to I17, wherein the predetermined suggestion information is displayed by an image including an image of a combination of the symbols to be stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix I18, the predetermined suggestion information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestion information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed. .. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, so that the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed. Since you can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that, the interest of the game will be improved.

[Appendix I19]
The predetermined suggestion information is added from the appendix I1 characterized in that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of I18.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix I19, the predetermined suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state, so that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that, and when the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, pay attention to whether the result of the transition judgment is to shift to the special gaming state and proceed with the game. Because it can be enjoyed, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix J1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A predetermined winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the above-mentioned determination condition when the game ball enters the ball, and
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41), and
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) has a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of transition to the special gaming state is the first probability, or a probability of determination to transition to the special gaming state. Is the second probability higher than the first probability, and the transition determination is made in the second determination state (probability variation game state).
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between a first winning opening (314) and an allowable state in which entry of a game ball is permitted and a restricted state in which entry of a game ball is restricted. Including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314).
The notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) is a first notification game (first special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the first winning opening (314). And the second notification game (second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315).
In the predetermined first notification game (the first special figure game in which the first special figure holding continuous effect is executed), predetermined suggestion information (information about the jackpot expectation degree by the first special figure holding continuous effect regarding the big hit expectation degree) is provided. Suggestion information display means (341) to be displayed and
The right to execute the second notification game (second special figure game), which is executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315), can be reserved up to the maximum number (for example, four). Means (41) and
A specific gaming state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific gaming state in which the second winning opening (315) is set to the predetermined allowable state (long open), and
Equipped with
In the specific game state, the second notification game is continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number, based on the fact that the second winning opening (315) is set to the predetermined allowable state (long open). It is in a state where it can be made to
Specific effect image (image displayed by the second special figure special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41) is displayed. Directed image display means (51) and
When the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special figure game), the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed (for example, as a captured image 78). Suggestion information continuous display means (51) to be displayed) and
Equipped with
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is a gaming machine characterized in that when the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed without being changed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix J1, when the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed without being changed. In this way, when the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed without being changed, so that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed before the start of the second notification game. It can be easily grasped by the player that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game. As a result, it is further prevented from forgetting that the predetermined suggestion information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game. Can be grasped in advance. As a result, due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestion information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game. Since it is more prevented that the person feels uncomfortable, the decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is further prevented.

[Appendix J2]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner.
The additional note that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) continuously displays (displays as a captured image 78) the predetermined suggestion information at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the symbol in the second notification game. The gaming machine described in J1.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix J2, predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the symbol in the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the symbol in the second notification game, the predetermined suggestion information was displayed before the start of the second notification game. And, it is possible to make the player understand that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game without obstructing the visual recognition of the variation display of the symbol executed in the second notification game.

[Appendix J3]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed (displayed as a captured image 78) at a position adjacent to the variable display area of the symbol in the second notification game. The gaming machine according to the appendix J1 or the appendix J2.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix J3, predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed at a position adjacent to the fluctuation display area of the symbol in the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying predetermined suggestion information at a position adjacent to the symbol variation display area in the second notification game, the player who pays attention to the symbol variation in the second notification game is predetermined. It becomes possible to more easily notice that the suggestion information of is continuously displayed. As a result, the player can easily and surely grasp that the predetermined suggestion information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game. Can be made to.

[Appendix J4]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping and displaying the variable display symbol.
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that, in the second notification game, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed on the front side or the back side of the variablely displayed symbol. The gaming machine described in Appendix J1.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix J4, predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed on the front side or the back side of the symbol which is variablely displayed in the second notification game. In this way, the player pays attention to the fluctuation of the symbol in the second notification game by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information on the front side or the back side of the symbol that is variablely displayed in the second notification game. However, it becomes possible to easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. As a result, the player can easily and surely understand that the predetermined suggestion information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game. Can be made to.

[Appendix J5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions J1 to J4, wherein the predetermined suggestion information is displayed by an image including an image of a combination of the symbols to be stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix J5, the predetermined suggestion information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestion information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed. .. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, so that the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed. Since you can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that, the interest of the game will be improved.

[Appendix J6]
The predetermined suggestion information is added from the appendix J1 characterized in that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state. The gaming machine described in any of J5.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix J6, the predetermined suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state, so that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that, and when the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, pay attention to whether the result of the transition judgment is to shift to the special gaming state and proceed with the game. Because it can be enjoyed, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix K1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A predetermined winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the above-mentioned determination condition when the game ball enters the ball, and
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41), and
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) has a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of transition to the special gaming state is the first probability, or a probability of determination to transition to the special gaming state. Is the second probability higher than the first probability, and the transition determination is made in the second determination state (probability variation game state).
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between a first winning opening (314) and an allowable state in which entry of a game ball is permitted and a restricted state in which entry of a game ball is restricted. Including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314).
The notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) is a first notification game (first special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the first winning opening (314). And the second notification game (second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315).
Suggestion information display means (341) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (information on jackpot expectation by hold continuous effect on jackpot expectation) in the predetermined first notification game (first special figure game in which hold continuous effect is executed). )When,
The right to execute the second notification game (second special figure game), which is executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315), can be reserved up to the maximum number (for example, four). Means (41) and
A specific gaming state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific gaming state in which the second winning opening (315) is set to the predetermined allowable state (long open), and
Equipped with
In the specific game state, the second notification game is continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number, based on the fact that the second winning opening (315) is set to the predetermined allowable state (long open). It is in a state where it can be made to
Specific effect image (image displayed by the second special figure special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41) is displayed. Directed image display means (51) and
When the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special figure game), the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed (for example, as a captured image 78). Suggestion information continuous display means (51) to be displayed) and
Equipped with
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is executed after the first notification game (first special figure game) in which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, the second notification game (second special figure game). A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed while maintaining the mode displayed in the first notification game (first special figure game).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K1, in the second notification game executed after the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, the mode displayed in the first notification game is maintained and the predetermined suggestion is made. By displaying the information, the player can more easily and surely grasp that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed in the first notification game before the execution of the second notification game. As a result, since it is more appropriately prevented that the player feels uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is restarted after the end of the second notification game, the display of the predetermined suggestion information is restarted. The resulting decline in the enjoyment of the game is prevented.

[Appendix K2]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner.
The additional note that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) continuously displays (displays as a captured image 78) the predetermined suggestion information at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the symbol in the second notification game. The gaming machine described in K1.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K2, predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the symbol in the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the symbol in the second notification game, the predetermined suggestion information was displayed before the start of the second notification game. And, it is possible to make the player understand that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game without obstructing the visual recognition of the variation display of the symbol executed in the second notification game.

[Appendix K3]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed (displayed as a captured image 78) at a position adjacent to the variable display area of the symbol in the second notification game. The gaming machine described in Appendix K2.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K3, predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed at a position adjacent to the variable display area of the symbol in the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying predetermined suggestion information at a position adjacent to the symbol variation display area in the second notification game, the player who pays attention to the symbol variation in the second notification game is predetermined. It becomes possible to more easily notice that the suggestion information of is continuously displayed. As a result, the player can easily and surely grasp that the predetermined suggestion information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game. Can be made to.

[Appendix K4]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping and displaying the variable display symbol.
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that, in the second notification game, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed on the front side or the back side of the variablely displayed symbol. The gaming machine described in Appendix K1.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K4, predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed on the front side or the back side of the symbol which is variablely displayed in the second notification game. In this way, the player pays attention to the fluctuation of the symbol in the second notification game by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information on the front side or the back side of the symbol that is variablely displayed in the second notification game. However, it becomes possible to easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. As a result, the player can easily and surely understand that the predetermined suggestion information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game. Can be made to.

[Appendix K5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping and displaying the variable display symbol.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions K1 to K4, wherein the predetermined suggestion information is displayed by an image including an image of a combination of the symbols to be stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K5, the predetermined suggestion information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestion information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed. .. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, so that the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed. Since you can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that, the interest of the game will be improved.

[Appendix K6]
The predetermined suggestion information is added from the appendix K1 characterized in that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state. The gaming machine described in any of K5.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K6, the predetermined suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state, so that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that, and when the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, pay attention to whether the result of the transition judgment is to shift to the special gaming state and proceed with the game. Because it can be enjoyed, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix L1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A predetermined winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the above-mentioned determination condition when the game ball enters the ball, and
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41), and
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) has a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of transition to the special gaming state is the first probability, or a probability of determination to transition to the special gaming state. Is the second probability higher than the first probability, and the transition determination is made in the second determination state (probability variation game state).
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between a first winning opening (314) and an allowable state in which entry of a game ball is permitted and a restricted state in which entry of a game ball is restricted. Including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314).
The notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) is a first notification game (first special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the first winning opening (314). And the second notification game (second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315).
In the predetermined first notification game (the first special figure game in which the first special figure holding continuous effect is executed), predetermined suggestion information (information about the jackpot expectation degree by the first special figure holding continuous effect regarding the big hit expectation degree) is provided. Suggestion information display means (341) to be displayed and
The right to execute the second notification game (second special figure game), which is executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315), can be reserved up to the maximum number (for example, four). Means (41) and
A specific gaming state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific gaming state in which the second winning opening (315) is set to the predetermined allowable state (long open), and
Equipped with
In the specific game state, the second notification game is continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number, based on the fact that the second winning opening (315) is set to the predetermined allowable state (long open). It is in a state where it can be made to
Specific effect image (image displayed by the second special figure special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41) is displayed. Directed image display means (51) and
When the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special figure game), the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed (for example, as a captured image 78). Suggestion information continuous display means (51) to be displayed) and
Equipped with
When the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, the suggestion information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that the suggestion information is continuously displayed without changing the display position of the predetermined suggestion information. ..

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L1, when the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, the display position of the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed without being changed. In this way, when the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed without changing the display position of the predetermined suggestive information, so that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed before the start of the 2 notification game. Can be easily grasped by the player that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the end of the second notification game. As a result, it is further prevented from forgetting that the predetermined suggestion information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game. Can be grasped in advance. As a result, due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestion information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game. Since it is more prevented that the person feels uncomfortable, the decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is further prevented.

[Appendix L2]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping and displaying the variable display symbol.
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that, in the second notification game, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed on the front side or the back side of the variablely displayed symbol. The gaming machine described in Appendix I1.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L2, predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed on the front side or the back side of the symbol which is variablely displayed in the second notification game. In this way, the player pays attention to the fluctuation of the symbol in the second notification game by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information on the front side or the back side of the symbol that is variablely displayed in the second notification game. However, it becomes possible to easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. As a result, the player can easily and surely understand that the predetermined suggestion information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game. Can be made to.

[Appendix L3]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) presents a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and the predetermined suggestion in the second notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to Appendix L1 or Appendix L2, which is characterized by displaying as information.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L3, a reduced image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect executed in the second notification game can be achieved. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the variation display of the symbol, and the player is informed that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to grasp. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

Further, when the reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed after the end of the second notification. Not only can the player know that it will be restarted, but it is also possible for the player to know the display mode (type) of the predetermined suggestion information that is restarted in the first notification game. As a result, it is more appropriately prevented that the player feels uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and the interest in the game is further reduced due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Properly prevented.

[Appendix L4]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) reduces the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and displays the image in the second notification game. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions L1 to L3, characterized in that it is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in (second special figure game).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L4, the image in which the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the image in which the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the image is executed in the second notification game. It is possible to easily and surely display predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the effect and the variable display of the symbol, and the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to let a person understand. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix L5]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and the predetermined notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions L1 to L4, characterized in that it is displayed as suggestive information.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L5, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect executed in the second notification game is performed. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the fluctuation display of the symbol or the symbol, and the player can resume the display of the predetermined suggestion information after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to grasp. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix L6]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions L1 to L5.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L6, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect and the symbol change executed in the second notification game. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the display, and to make the player understand that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification. Will be possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix L7]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions L1 to L6, wherein the predetermined suggestion information is displayed by an image including an image of a combination of the symbols to be stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L7, the predetermined suggestion information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestion information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed. .. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, so that the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed. Since you can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that, the interest of the game will be improved.

[Appendix L8]
The predetermined suggestion information is added from the appendix L1 characterized in that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state. The gaming machine described in any of L7.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L8, the predetermined suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state, so that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that, and when the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, pay attention to whether the result of the transition judgment is to shift to the special gaming state and proceed with the game. Because it can be enjoyed, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix M1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A predetermined winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the above-mentioned determination condition when the game ball enters the ball, and
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41), and
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) has a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of transition to the special gaming state is the first probability, or a probability of determination to transition to the special gaming state. Is the second probability higher than the first probability, and the transition determination is made in the second determination state (probability variation game state).
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between a first winning opening (314) and an allowable state in which entry of a game ball is permitted and a restricted state in which entry of a game ball is restricted. Including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314).
The notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) is a first notification game (first special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the first winning opening (314). And the second notification game (second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315).
Suggestion information display means (341) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (information on jackpot expectation by hold continuous effect on jackpot expectation) in the predetermined first notification game (first special figure game in which hold continuous effect is executed). )When,
The right to execute the second notification game (second special figure game), which is executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315), can be reserved up to the maximum number (for example, four). Means (41) and
A specific gaming state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific gaming state in which the second winning opening (315) is set to the predetermined allowable state (long open), and
Equipped with
In the specific game state, the second notification game is continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number, based on the fact that the second winning opening (315) is set to the predetermined allowable state (long open). It is in a state where it can be made to
Specific effect image (image displayed by the second special figure special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41) is displayed. Directed image display means (51) and
When the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special figure game), the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed (for example, as a captured image 78). Suggestion information continuous display means (51) to be displayed) and
Equipped with
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping and displaying the variable display symbol.
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed (displayed as a captured image 78) at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the symbol in the second notification game. Machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M1, predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the symbol in the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the symbol in the second notification game, the predetermined suggestion information was displayed before the start of the second notification game. And, it is possible to make the player understand that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game without obstructing the visual recognition of the variation display of the symbol executed in the second notification game.

[Appendix M2]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed (displayed as a captured image 78) at a position adjacent to the variable display area of the symbol in the second notification game. The gaming machine described in the appendix M1.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M2, predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed at a position adjacent to the variation display area of the symbol in the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying predetermined suggestion information at a position adjacent to the symbol variation display area in the second notification game, the player who pays attention to the symbol variation in the second notification game is predetermined. It becomes possible to more easily notice that the suggestion information of is continuously displayed. As a result, the player can easily and surely grasp that the predetermined suggestion information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game. Can be made to.

[Appendix M3]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) presents a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and the predetermined suggestion in the second notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to the appendix M1 or the appendix M2, which is characterized by displaying as information.

In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note M3, a reduced image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect executed in the second notification game can be achieved. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the variation display of the symbol, and the player is informed that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to grasp. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

Further, when the reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed after the end of the second notification. Not only can the player know that it will be restarted, but it is also possible for the player to know the display mode (type) of the predetermined suggestion information that is restarted in the first notification game. As a result, it is more appropriately prevented that the player feels uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and the interest in the game is further reduced due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Properly prevented.

[Appendix M4]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) reduces the density (for example, at least one of lightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and displays the image in the second notification game. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions M1 to M3, characterized in that it is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in (second special figure game).

In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note M4, the image in which the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the image in which the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the image is executed in the second notification game. It is possible to easily and surely display predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the effect and the variable display of the symbol, and the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to let a person understand. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix M5]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and the predetermined notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions M1 to M4, which is displayed as suggestive information.

In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note M5, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect executed in the second notification game is performed. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the fluctuation display of the symbol or the symbol, and the player can resume the display of the predetermined suggestion information after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to grasp. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix M6]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions M1 to M5.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M6, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect and the symbol change executed in the second notification game. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the display, and to make the player understand that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification. Will be possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix M7]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions M1 to M6, wherein the predetermined suggestion information is displayed by an image including an image of a combination of the symbols to be stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M7, the predetermined suggestion information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestion information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed. .. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, so that the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed. Since you can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that, the interest of the game will be improved.

[Appendix M8]
The predetermined suggestion information is added from the appendix M1 characterized in that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state. The gaming machine described in any of M7.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix M8, the predetermined suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state, so that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that, and when the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, pay attention to whether the result of the transition judgment is to shift to the special gaming state and proceed with the game. Because it can be enjoyed, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix N1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A predetermined winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the above-mentioned determination condition when the game ball enters the ball, and
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41), and
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) has a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of transition to the special gaming state is the first probability, or a probability of determination to transition to the special gaming state. Is the second probability higher than the first probability, and the transition determination is made in the second determination state (probability variation game state).
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between a first winning opening (314) and an allowable state in which entry of a game ball is permitted and a restricted state in which entry of a game ball is restricted. Including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314).
The notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) is a first notification game (first special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the first winning opening (314). And the second notification game (second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315).
In the predetermined first notification game (the first special figure game in which the first special figure holding continuous effect is executed), predetermined suggestion information (information about the jackpot expectation degree by the first special figure holding continuous effect regarding the big hit expectation degree) is provided. Suggestion information display means (341) to be displayed and
The right to execute the first notification game (first special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the first winning opening (314) can be reserved up to the first upper limit number (for example, four). First holding means (41) and
The right to execute the second notification game (second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315) can be reserved up to the second upper limit number (for example, four). Second holding means (41) and
A specific gaming state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific gaming state in which the second winning opening (315) is set to the predetermined allowable state (long open), and
Equipped with
In the specific game state, the second notification game is continuously performed a specific number of times equal to or more than the second upper limit number, based on the fact that the second winning opening (315) is set to the predetermined allowable state (long open). It is a state that can be generated
Specific effect image (image displayed by the second special figure special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41) is displayed. Directed image display means (51) and
When the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special figure game), the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed (for example, as a captured image 78). Suggestion information continuous display means (51) to be displayed) and
Equipped with
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays the predetermined suggestion information when the right to execute the first notification game (first special figure game) is reserved by the first holding means (41). A gaming machine characterized by continuous display.

Note: In the gaming machine related to N1, when the right to execute the first notification game executed when the gaming ball enters the first winning opening is reserved, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed. Will be done. In this way, when the right to execute the first notification game executed when the game ball enters the first winning opening is reserved, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed. , When the right to execute the first notification game is reserved while the second notification game is being executed in the specific game state, it is prevented that predetermined suggestion information is displayed for this first notification game. Will be done. As a result, after the end of the specific gaming state, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed for the first notification game in which the number of consecutive times of the predetermined suggestion information set before the transition to the specific gaming state is exceeded. Is prevented. As a result, when a predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed in a specific number of times or more in the first notification game and a privilege is given to the player, the predetermined suggestion information is given to the player even though there is no privilege to be given to the player. Since it is avoided that the suggestion information of is continuously displayed in the first notification game more than a specific number of times, the player is clearly shown that the privilege is given by the display in the notification game. It is prevented that the situation that the privilege is not given to the person occurs.

[Appendix N2]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) presents a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and the predetermined suggestion in the second notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to Appendix N1, which is characterized by displaying as information.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix N2, a reduced image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect executed in the second notification game can be achieved. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the variation display of the symbol, and the player is informed that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to grasp. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

Further, when the reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed after the end of the second notification. Not only can the player know that it will be restarted, but it is also possible for the player to know the display mode (type) of the predetermined suggestion information that is restarted in the first notification game. As a result, it is more appropriately prevented that the player feels uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and the interest in the game is further reduced due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Properly prevented.

[Appendix N3]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) reduces the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and displays the image in the second notification game. The gaming machine according to Appendix N1 or Appendix N2, which is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in (second special figure game).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix N3, the image in which the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the image in which the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the image is executed in the second notification game. It is possible to easily and surely display predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the effect and the variable display of the symbol, and the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to let a person understand. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix N4]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and the predetermined notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions N1 to N3, which is displayed as suggestive information.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix N4, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect executed in the second notification game is performed. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the fluctuation display of the symbol or the symbol, and the player can resume the display of the predetermined suggestion information after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to grasp. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix N5]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions N1 to N4.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix N5, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect and the symbol change executed in the second notification game. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the display, and to make the player understand that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification. Will be possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix N6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions N1 to N5, wherein the predetermined suggestion information is displayed by an image including an image of a combination of the symbols to be stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix N6, the predetermined suggestion information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestion information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed. .. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, so that the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed. Since you can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that, the interest of the game will be improved.

[Appendix N7]
The predetermined suggestion information is added from the appendix N1 characterized in that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state. The gaming machine described in any of N6.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix N7, the predetermined suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state, so that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that, and when the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, pay attention to whether the result of the transition judgment is to shift to the special gaming state and proceed with the game. Because it can be enjoyed, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix O1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A predetermined winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the above-mentioned determination condition when the game ball enters the ball, and
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41), and
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) has a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of transition to the special gaming state is the first probability, or a probability of determination to transition to the special gaming state. Is the second probability higher than the first probability, and the transition determination is made in the second determination state (probability variation game state).
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between a first winning opening (314) and an allowable state in which entry of a game ball is permitted and a restricted state in which entry of a game ball is restricted. Including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314).
The notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) is a first notification game (first special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the first winning opening (314). And the second notification game (second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315).
In the predetermined first notification game (the first special figure game in which the first special figure holding continuous effect is executed), predetermined suggestion information (information about the jackpot expectation degree by the first special figure holding continuous effect regarding the big hit expectation degree) is provided. Suggestion information display means (341) to be displayed and
The right to execute the second notification game (second special figure game), which is executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315), can be reserved up to the maximum number (for example, four). Means (41) and
A specific gaming state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific gaming state in which the second winning opening (315) is set to the predetermined allowable state (long open), and
Equipped with
In the specific game state, the second notification game is continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number, based on the fact that the second winning opening (315) is set to the predetermined allowable state (long open). It is in a state where it can be made to
Specific effect image (image displayed by the second special figure special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41) is displayed. Directed image display means (51) and
When the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special figure game), the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed (for example, as a captured image 78). Suggestion information continuous display means (51) to be displayed) and
The frequency in which the second winning opening (315) is in the permissible state is the first frequency, and the frequency in which the second winning opening (315) is in the permissible state is higher than the first frequency. Allowable frequency control means for switching between the second frequency state, which is also a high second frequency, and
Equipped with
The specific gaming state generating means (41) is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific gaming state is generated in at least one of the first frequency state and the second frequency state.

[Appendix O2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix O1, wherein the specific gaming state generating means (41) generates the specific gaming state in the first frequency state.

[Appendix O3]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note O1 or Supplementary Note O2, wherein the specific gaming state generating means (41) generates the specific gaming state in the second frequency state.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices O1 to O3, the first frequency state in which the second winning opening is less frequently accepted and the second winning opening are more frequently accepted in the permissible state. A specific gaming state is generated in at least one of the second frequency states, which is the frequency. In the first frequency state, the frequency with which the second winning opening is accepted is low. Therefore, in the first frequency state, the frequency at which the specific gaming state is generated is low, and the specific gaming state is generated as a special state. On the other hand, in the second frequency state, the frequency at which the second winning opening is accepted is high. Therefore, in the second frequency state, the frequency at which the specific gaming state is generated increases, and the specific gaming state is generated as a non-special state. In this way, the frequency of occurrence of the specific gaming state is different between the first frequency state and the second frequency state, and their positioning is also different. The game performance differs between the case where the specific gaming state is generated in the 1-frequency state and the case where the specific gaming state is generated in the 2nd frequency state, which is the second frequency in which the second winning opening is frequently accepted as the allowable state. Is given. As a result, the player's attention and interest in the game can be increased, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix O4]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) presents a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and the predetermined suggestion in the second notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary note O1 to Supplementary note O3, which is characterized by displaying as information.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note O4, a reduced image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect executed in the second notification game can be achieved. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the variation display of the symbol, and the player is informed that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to grasp. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

Further, when the reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed after the end of the second notification. Not only can the player know that it will be restarted, but it is also possible for the player to know the display mode (type) of the predetermined suggestion information that is restarted in the first notification game. As a result, it is more appropriately prevented that the player feels uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and the interest in the game is further reduced due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Properly prevented.

[Appendix O5]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) reduces the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and displays the image in the second notification game. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions O1 to O4, characterized in that it is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in (second special figure game).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix O5, the image in which the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the image in which the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the image is executed in the second notification game. It is possible to easily and surely display predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the effect and the variable display of the symbol, and the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to let a person understand. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix O6]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and the predetermined notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions O1 to O5, which is displayed as suggestive information.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note O6, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect executed in the second notification game is performed. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the fluctuation display of the symbol or the symbol, and the player can resume the display of the predetermined suggestion information after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to grasp. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix O7]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions O1 to O6.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix O7, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect and the symbol change executed in the second notification game. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the display, and to make the player understand that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification. Will be possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix O8]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions O1 to O7, wherein the predetermined suggestion information is displayed by an image including an image of a combination of the symbols to be stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix O8, the predetermined suggestion information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestion information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed. .. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, so that the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed. Since you can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that, the interest of the game will be improved.

[Appendix O9]
The predetermined suggestion information is added from Appendix O1 characterized in that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state. The gaming machine described in any of O8.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix O9, the predetermined suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state, so that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that, and when the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, pay attention to whether the result of the transition judgment is to shift to the special gaming state and proceed with the game. Because it can be enjoyed, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix P1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A predetermined winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the above-mentioned determination condition when the game ball enters the ball, and
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41), and
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) has a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of transition to the special gaming state is the first probability, or a probability of determination to transition to the special gaming state. Is the second probability higher than the first probability, and the transition determination is made in the second determination state (probability variation game state).
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between a first winning opening (314) and an allowable state in which entry of a game ball is permitted and a restricted state in which entry of a game ball is restricted. Including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314).
The notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) is a first notification game (first special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the first winning opening (314). And the second notification game (second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315).
In the predetermined first notification game (the first special figure game in which the first special figure holding continuous effect is executed), predetermined suggestion information (information about the jackpot expectation degree by the first special figure holding continuous effect regarding the big hit expectation degree) is provided. Suggestion information display means (341) to be displayed and
The right to execute the second notification game (second special figure game), which is executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315), can be reserved up to the maximum number (for example, four). Means (41) and
A specific gaming state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific gaming state in which the second winning opening (315) is set to the predetermined allowable state (long open), and
Equipped with
In the specific game state, the second notification game is continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number, based on the fact that the second winning opening (315) is set to the predetermined allowable state (long open). It is in a state where it can be made to
Specific effect image (image displayed by the second special figure special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41) is displayed. Directed image display means (51) and
When the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special figure game), the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed (for example, as a captured image 78). Suggestion information continuous display means (51) to be displayed) and
The first display means (341) on which the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51), and
A second display means (39 or the like) different from the first display means (341) in which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed by the suggestion information continuous display means (51).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix P1, the first display means for displaying the specific effect image corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific gaming state, and the second display for displaying predetermined suggestion information. The means are different. As described above, the first display means for displaying the specific effect image corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state and the second display means for displaying the predetermined suggestive information are different. This makes it possible to display predetermined suggestion information in the second display means without disturbing the display of the specific effect image in the first display means. Thereby, both the specific effect image and the predetermined suggestion information can be surely and appropriately displayed without disturbing each other's visual recognition.

[Appendix P2]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) presents a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and the predetermined suggestion in the second notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to Appendix P1, which is characterized by displaying as information.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix P2, a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect executed in the second notification game can be achieved. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the variation display of the symbol, and the player is informed that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to grasp. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

Further, when the reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed after the end of the second notification. Not only can the player know that it will be restarted, but it is also possible for the player to know the display mode (type) of the predetermined suggestion information that is restarted in the first notification game. As a result, it is more appropriately prevented that the player feels uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and the interest in the game is further reduced due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Properly prevented.

[Appendix P3]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) reduces the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and displays the image in the second notification game. The gaming machine according to Appendix P1 or Appendix P2, which is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in (second special figure game).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix P3, the image in which the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the image in which the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the image is executed in the second notification game. It is possible to easily and surely display predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the effect and the variable display of the symbol, and the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to let a person understand. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix P4]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and the predetermined notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions P1 to P3, which is displayed as suggestive information.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix P4, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect executed in the second notification game is performed. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the fluctuation display of the symbol or the symbol, and the player can resume the display of the predetermined suggestion information after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to grasp. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix P5]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions P1 to P4.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix P5, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect and the symbol change executed in the second notification game. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the display, and to make the player understand that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification. Will be possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix P6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions P1 to P5, wherein the predetermined suggestion information is displayed by an image including an image of a combination of the symbols to be stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix P6, the predetermined suggestion information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestion information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed. .. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, so that the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed. Since you can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that, the interest of the game will be improved.

[Appendix P7]
The predetermined suggestion information is added from the appendix P1 characterized in that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state. The gaming machine described in any of P6.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix P7, the predetermined suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state, so that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that, and when the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, pay attention to whether the result of the transition judgment is to shift to the special gaming state and proceed with the game. Because it can be enjoyed, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix Q1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A predetermined winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the above-mentioned determination condition when the game ball enters the ball, and
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41), and
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) has a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of transition to the special gaming state is the first probability, or a probability of determination to transition to the special gaming state. Is the second probability higher than the first probability, and the transition determination is made in the second determination state (probability variation game state).
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between a first winning opening (314) and an allowable state in which entry of a game ball is permitted and a restricted state in which entry of a game ball is restricted. Including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314).
The notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) is a first notification game (first special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the first winning opening (314). And the second notification game (second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315).
Suggestion information display means (341) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (information on jackpot expectation by hold continuous effect on jackpot expectation) in the predetermined first notification game (first special figure game in which hold continuous effect is executed). )When,
The right to execute the second notification game (second special figure game), which is executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315), can be reserved up to the maximum number (for example, four). Means (41) and
A specific gaming state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific gaming state in which the second winning opening (315) is set to the predetermined allowable state (long open), and
Equipped with
In the specific game state, the second notification game is continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number, based on the fact that the second winning opening (315) is set to the predetermined allowable state (long open). It is in a state where it can be made to
Specific effect image (image displayed by the second special figure special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41) is displayed. Directed image display means (51) and
When the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special figure game), the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed (for example, as a captured image 78). Suggestion information continuous display means (51) to be displayed) and
Equipped with
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is executed after the first notification game (first special figure game) in which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, the second notification game (second special figure game). A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed in a mode different from that of the first notification game (first special figure game).

In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note Q1, in the second notified game executed after the first notified game in which the predetermined suggested information is displayed, the predetermined suggested information is displayed in a mode different from that of the first notified game. In this way, in the second notification game executed after the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed in a mode different from that of the first notification game, so that the second notification game is displayed. It is possible to make the player understand in various ways that the predetermined suggestion information was displayed before the start of the notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game. At the same time, it is possible to make the player grasp the effect performed in the second notification game and the visual recognition of the variation display of the symbol.

[Appendix Q2]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) presents a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and the predetermined suggestion in the second notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to Appendix Q1, which is characterized by displaying as information.

In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note Q2, a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect executed in the second notification game can be achieved. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the variation display of the symbol, and the player is informed that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to grasp. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

Further, when the reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed after the end of the second notification. Not only can the player know that it will be restarted, but it is also possible for the player to know the display mode (type) of the predetermined suggestion information that is restarted in the first notification game. As a result, it is more appropriately prevented that the player feels uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and the interest in the game is further reduced due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Properly prevented.

[Appendix Q3]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) reduces the density (for example, at least one of lightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and displays the image in the second notification game. The gaming machine according to Appendix Q1 or Appendix Q2, which is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in (second special figure game).

In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note Q3, the image in which the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the image in which the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the image is executed in the second notification game. It is possible to easily and surely display predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the effect and the variable display of the symbol, and the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to let a person understand. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix Q4]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and the predetermined notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices Q1 to Q3, which is characterized by displaying as suggestive information.

In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note Q4, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect executed in the second notification game is performed. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the fluctuation display of the symbol or the symbol, and the player can resume the display of the predetermined suggestion information after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to grasp. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix Q5]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions Q1 to Q4.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix Q5, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect and the symbol change executed in the second notification game. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the display, and to make the player understand that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification. Will be possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix Q6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping and displaying the variable display symbol.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions Q1 to Q5, wherein the predetermined suggestion information is displayed by an image including an image of a combination of the symbols to be stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix Q6, the predetermined suggestion information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestion information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed. .. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, so that the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed. Since you can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that, the interest of the game will be improved.

[Appendix Q7]
The predetermined suggestion information is added from the appendix Q1 characterized in that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state. The gaming machine described in any of Q6.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix Q7, the predetermined suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state, so that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that, and when the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, pay attention to whether the result of the transition judgment is to shift to the special gaming state and proceed with the game. Because it can be enjoyed, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix R1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A predetermined winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the above-mentioned determination condition when the game ball enters the ball, and
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41), and
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) has a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of transition to the special gaming state is the first probability, or a probability of determination to transition to the special gaming state. Is the second probability higher than the first probability, and the transition determination is made in the second determination state (probability variation game state).
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between a first winning opening (314) and an allowable state in which entry of a game ball is permitted and a restricted state in which entry of a game ball is restricted. Including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314).
The notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) is a first notification game (first special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the first winning opening (314). And the second notification game (second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315).
Suggestion information display means (341) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (information on jackpot expectation by hold continuous effect on jackpot expectation) in the predetermined first notification game (first special figure game in which hold continuous effect is executed). )When,
The right to execute the second notification game (second special figure game), which is executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315), can be reserved up to the maximum number (for example, four). Means (41) and
A specific gaming state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific gaming state in which the second winning opening (315) is set to the predetermined allowable state (long open), and
Equipped with
In the specific game state, the second notification game is continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number, based on the fact that the second winning opening (315) is set to the predetermined allowable state (long open). It is in a state where it can be made to
Specific effect image (image displayed by the second special figure special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41) is displayed. Directed image display means (51) and
When the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special figure game), the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed (for example, as a captured image 78). Suggestion information continuous display means (51) to be displayed) and
Equipped with
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner.
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that, in the second notification game, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed on the front side or the back side of the variablely displayed symbol. Gaming machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix R1, predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed on the front side or the back side of the symbol which is variablely displayed in the second notification game. In this way, the player pays attention to the fluctuation of the symbol in the second notification game by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information on the front side or the back side of the symbol that is variablely displayed in the second notification game. However, it becomes possible to easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. As a result, the player can easily and surely understand that the predetermined suggestion information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification game. Can be made to.

[Appendix R2]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) presents a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and the predetermined suggestion in the second notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to Appendix R1, which is characterized by displaying as information.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix R2, a reduced image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect executed in the second notification game can be achieved. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the variation display of the symbol, and the player is informed that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to grasp. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

Further, when the reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed after the end of the second notification. Not only can the player know that it will be restarted, but it is also possible for the player to know the display mode (type) of the predetermined suggestion information that is restarted in the first notification game. As a result, it is more appropriately prevented that the player feels uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and the interest in the game is further reduced due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Properly prevented.

[Appendix R3]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) reduces the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and displays the image in the second notification game. The gaming machine according to Appendix R1 or Appendix R2, which is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in (second special figure game).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix R3, the image in which the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the image in which the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the image is executed in the second notification game. It is possible to easily and surely display predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the effect and the variable display of the symbol, and the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to let a person understand. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix R4]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and the predetermined notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices R1 to R3, which is displayed as suggestive information.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix R4, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect executed in the second notification game is performed. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the fluctuation display of the symbol or the symbol, and the player can resume the display of the predetermined suggestion information after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to grasp. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix R5]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions R1 to R4.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix R5, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect and the symbol change executed in the second notification game. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the display, and to make the player understand that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification. Will be possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix R6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions R1 to R5, wherein the predetermined suggestion information is displayed by an image including an image of a combination of the symbols to be stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix R6, the predetermined suggestion information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestion information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed. .. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, so that the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed. Since you can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that, the interest of the game will be improved.

[Appendix R7]
The predetermined suggestion information is added from the appendix R1 characterized in that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state. The gaming machine described in any of R6.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix R7, the predetermined suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state, so that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that, and when the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, pay attention to whether the result of the transition judgment is to shift to the special gaming state and proceed with the game. Because it can be enjoyed, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix S1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A predetermined winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the above-mentioned determination condition when the game ball enters the ball, and
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41), and
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) has a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of transition to the special gaming state is the first probability, or a probability of determination to transition to the special gaming state. Is the second probability higher than the first probability, and the transition determination is made in the second determination state (probability variation game state).
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between a first winning opening (314) and an allowable state in which entry of a game ball is permitted and a restricted state in which entry of a game ball is restricted. Including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314).
The notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) is a first notification game (first special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the first winning opening (314). And the second notification game (second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315).
Suggestion information display means (341) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (information on jackpot expectation by hold continuous effect on jackpot expectation) in the predetermined first notification game (first special figure game in which hold continuous effect is executed). )When,
The right to execute the second notification game (second special figure game), which is executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315), can be reserved up to the maximum number (for example, four). Means (41) and
A specific gaming state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific gaming state in which the second winning opening (315) is set to the predetermined allowable state (long open), and
Equipped with
In the specific game state, the second notification game is continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number, based on the fact that the second winning opening (315) is set to the predetermined allowable state (long open). It is in a state where it can be made to
Specific effect image (image displayed by the second special figure special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41) is displayed. Directed image display means (51) and
When the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special figure game), the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed (for example, as a captured image 78). Suggestion information continuous display means (51) to be displayed) and
Equipped with
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping and displaying the variable display symbol.
The gaming machine, characterized in that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed by an image including an image of a combination of the symbols to be stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix S1, the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol that is displayed in a variable manner, and the predetermined suggestion information is displayed by an image including an image of a combination of the symbols that is stopped and displayed. By doing so, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, so that the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed. Since you can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that, the interest of the game will be improved.

[Appendix S2]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) presents a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and the predetermined suggestion in the second notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to Appendix S1, which is characterized by displaying as information.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix S2, a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect executed in the second notification game can be achieved. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the variation display of the symbol, and the player is informed that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to grasp. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

Further, when the reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed after the end of the second notification. Not only can the player know that it will be restarted, but it is also possible for the player to know the display mode (type) of the predetermined suggestion information that is restarted in the first notification game. As a result, it is more appropriately prevented that the player feels uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and the interest in the game is further reduced due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Properly prevented.

[Appendix S3]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) reduces the density (for example, at least one of lightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and displays the image in the second notification game. The gaming machine according to Appendix S1 or Appendix S2, which is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in (second special figure game).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix S3, the image in which the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the image in which the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the image is executed in the second notification game. It is possible to easily and surely display predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the effect and the variable display of the symbol, and the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to let a person understand. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix S4]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and the predetermined notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions S1 to S3, which is displayed as suggestive information.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix S4, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect executed in the second notification game is performed. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the fluctuation display of the symbol or the symbol, and the player can resume the display of the predetermined suggestion information after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to grasp. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix S5]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions S1 to S4.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix S5, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect and the symbol change executed in the second notification game. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the display, and to make the player understand that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification. Will be possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix S6]
The predetermined suggestion information is added from the appendix S1 characterized in that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of S5.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix S6, the predetermined suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state, so that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that, and when the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, pay attention to whether the result of the transition judgment is to shift to the special gaming state and proceed with the game. Because it can be enjoyed, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix T1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A predetermined winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the above-mentioned determination condition when the game ball enters the ball, and
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41), and
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) has a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of transition to the special gaming state is the first probability, or a probability of determination to transition to the special gaming state. Is the second probability higher than the first probability, and the transition determination is made in the second determination state (probability variation game state).
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between a first winning opening (314) and an allowable state in which entry of a game ball is permitted and a restricted state in which entry of a game ball is restricted. Including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314).
The notification game (first special figure game or second special figure game) is a first notification game (first special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the first winning opening (314). And the second notification game (second special figure game) executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315).
Suggestion information display means (341) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (information on jackpot expectation by hold continuous effect on jackpot expectation) in the predetermined first notification game (first special figure game in which hold continuous effect is executed). )When,
The right to execute the second notification game (second special figure game), which is executed when the game ball enters the second winning opening (315), can be reserved up to the maximum number (for example, four). Means (41) and
A specific gaming state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific gaming state in which the second winning opening (315) is set to the predetermined allowable state (long open), and
Equipped with
In the specific game state, the second notification game is continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number, based on the fact that the second winning opening (315) is set to the predetermined allowable state (long open). It is in a state where it can be made to
Specific effect image (image displayed by the second special figure special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41) is displayed. Directed image display means (51) and
When the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special figure game), the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed (for example, as a captured image 78). Suggestion information continuous display means (51) to be displayed) and
Equipped with
The predetermined suggestion information is a gaming machine characterized in that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix T1, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special gaming state, which is a predetermined suggestion. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting the information to be displayed, and if the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, pay attention to whether the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state. Since you can enjoy the progress of the game, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix T2]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) presents a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and the predetermined suggestion in the second notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to Appendix T1, which is characterized by displaying as information.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix T2, a reduced image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect executed in the second notification game can be achieved. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the variation display of the symbol, and the player is informed that the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to grasp. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix T3]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) reduces the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and displays the image in the second notification game. The gaming machine according to Appendix T1 or Appendix T2, which is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in (second special figure game).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix T3, the image in which the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the image in which the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the image is executed in the second notification game. It is possible to easily and surely display predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the effect and the variable display of the symbol, and the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to let a person understand. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix T4]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game, and the predetermined notification game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions T1 to T3, which is displayed as suggestive information.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix T4, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the effect executed in the second notification game is performed. It is possible to easily and surely display the predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the fluctuation display of the symbol or the symbol, and the player can resume the display of the predetermined suggestion information after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to grasp. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix T5]
In the second notification game (second special figure game), the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a character image corresponding to the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game. The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices T1 to T4, which is displayed as the suggestion information of the above.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix T5, the character image corresponding to the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game. In this way, the character image corresponding to the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game, so that the character image is executed in the second notification game. It is possible to easily and surely display predetermined suggestion information without obstructing the visual recognition of the effect and the variable display of the symbol, and the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the end of the second notification. It becomes possible to let a person understand. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestion information is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix T6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions T1 to T5, wherein the predetermined suggestion information is displayed by an image including an image of a combination of the symbols to be stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix T6, the predetermined suggestion information is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestion information is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means in the notification game, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed. .. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, so that the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed. Since you can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that, the interest of the game will be improved.

[Appendix A1]
A predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) in which a predetermined profit can be given in a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first opportunity (the jackpot lottery result in the normal game state is a type 1 jackpot). )When,
The first state (the state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (maintenance state of the second time-saving game state)) or the second state (the setting of the number of time-saving games) which is more profitable than the first state is enabled. A state executing means (41) capable of executing a state (third time-saving game state), and
Equipped with
The state executing means (41) is
A specific value determining means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second opportunity different from the first opportunity (the result of the big hit lottery in the second time-saving game state is out of the time-saving symbol) is established in the predetermined state. ,
When the specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, the means capable of executing the second state and the means.
When the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established, a means capable of executing the first state and a means for executing the first state.
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, the period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined state among the execution periods that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value is longer than a predetermined period (the first). A gaming machine characterized in that the number of time-saving games set for the jackpot lottery result in the two-time-saving game state is larger than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A1, when the second opportunity different from the first opportunity is established in the predetermined state executed by the establishment of the first opportunity, the profit is higher than the first state when the specific state is established. While the two states are executed, the first state is executed when the specific state is not established. In this way, when a second opportunity different from the first opportunity is established in the predetermined state executed by the establishment of the first opportunity, the second state, which is more profitable than the first state, is executed when the specific state is established. On the other hand, in order to execute the second state with high profit by executing the first state when the specific state is not established, the predetermined state is executed by the establishment of the first opportunity, and the predetermined state is executed. A new playability is given on condition that a specific state is established when the second opportunity is established and further, when the second opportunity is established. As a result, the player enjoys the progress of the game while expecting that the first opportunity is established, and pays attention to whether or not the second opportunity is established in the predetermined state executed after the establishment of the first opportunity. If the second opportunity is established, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the appendix A1, an execution period that can be executed based on a predetermined specific value determined when the second opportunity is established is set. In this way, by setting the execution period that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value determined when the second trigger is established, the period of the second state is set as a value depending on the predetermined specific value. Will be done. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to a predetermined specific value when the second opportunity is established, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the appendix A1, the specific state can be executed after the end of the predetermined state among the execution periods that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established. It is in a state where it is above a predetermined level. As described above, the specific state is a state in which the period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined state is longer than the predetermined period among the execution periods that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established. As a result, the stage at which the specific state can be established and the criteria for success / failure of the specific state are clarified, so that it becomes easy to grasp the stage at which the specific state can be established and the success / failure of the specific state. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the predetermined specific value at the stage when the predetermined second opportunity is established, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix B1]
A predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) in which a predetermined profit can be given in a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first opportunity (the jackpot lottery result in the normal game state is a type 1 jackpot). )When,
The first state (the state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (maintenance state of the second time-saving game state)) or the second state (the setting of the number of time-saving games) which is more profitable than the first state is enabled. A state executing means (41) capable of executing a state (third time-saving game state), and
Equipped with
The state executing means (41) is
A specific value determining means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second opportunity different from the first opportunity (the result of the big hit lottery in the second time-saving game state is out of the time-saving symbol) is established in the predetermined state. ,
When the specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, the means capable of executing the second state and the means.
When the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established, a means capable of executing the first state and a means for executing the first state.
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, the period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined state among the execution periods that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value is longer than a predetermined period (the first). The number of time-saving games set for the jackpot lottery result in the two-time-saving game state is larger than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state).
The probability that the second trigger (the jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state is out of the time-saving symbol) is established in the predetermined state (second time-saving game state) is the same for the entire period of the predetermined period. A gaming machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix B1, the probability that the second trigger is established in the predetermined state is the same for the entire period of the predetermined period. In this way, the probability that the second trigger will be established in the predetermined period of the predetermined state is the same for the entire period of the predetermined period, so that the timing of the establishment of the second trigger in the predetermined period becomes random, and the predetermined state is set. The second opportunity can be established for the entire period of the predetermined period. As a result, it can be expected that the second trigger will be established during the entire predetermined period of the predetermined state, so that the player may suffer the disadvantage that the second trigger is not established during a part of the predetermined period of the predetermined state. Instead, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game during the entire predetermined period of the predetermined state.

[Appendix B2]
When the second trigger is established (out of the time saving symbol stop) in the predetermined period of the predetermined state (second time saving game state), the shorter the remaining period (remaining time saving number of times) of the predetermined state, the more the specific state becomes. The gaming machine according to Appendix B1, which is characterized by being easily established.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B2, when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the easier it is that the specific condition is satisfied. In this way, when the second opportunity is established in the predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the easier it is for the specific condition to be satisfied, and the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state (the closer to the end of the predetermined period). , The possibility that the specific condition is satisfied is high, the possibility that the second state is executed is high, and the expectation is high. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while having anxiety about the end of the predetermined period approaching, but with the expectation that the second opportunity will be established when the end of the predetermined period is approaching. Will be improved.

[Appendix B3]
When the specific condition is satisfied when the second trigger is established (the time-saving symbol is out of stop) in the predetermined state (second time-saving gaming state), the first The gaming machine according to Appendix B1 or Appendix B2, characterized in that the magnitudes of profits (number of time-saving games) in the two states (third time-saving gaming state) are different.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B3, when the specific condition is satisfied when the second opportunity is satisfied in the predetermined state, the magnitude of the profit in the second state differs depending on the remaining period of the predetermined state. In this way, when the specific condition is satisfied when the second opportunity is established in the predetermined state, the magnitude of the profit in the second state differs depending on the remaining period of the predetermined state, so that the second in the predetermined period of the predetermined state Since the progress of the game can be enjoyed by paying attention to the timing when the opportunity is established, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix B4]
When the specific condition is satisfied when the second trigger is established (the time reduction symbol is out of stop) in the predetermined state (second time reduction game state), the shorter the remaining period (remaining time reduction number of times) of the predetermined state, the more. The gaming machine according to Appendix B3, characterized in that the profit (number of time-saving games) in the second state (third time-saving gaming state) is large.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B4, when the specific condition is satisfied when the second opportunity is satisfied in the predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the greater the profit in the second state. In this way, when the specific condition is satisfied when the second opportunity is established in the predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the larger the profit in the second state, and the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state ( As the end of the predetermined period approaches), the playability that makes it easier to receive a high profit in the second state is imparted. As a result, while feeling anxious about the end of the predetermined period approaching, the game progresses with the expectation that when the end of the predetermined period approaches, the second opportunity will be established and a high profit will be received in the second state. Because you can enjoy, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix C1]
A predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) in which a predetermined profit can be given in a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first opportunity (the jackpot lottery result in the normal game state is a type 1 jackpot). )When,
The first state (the state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (maintenance state of the second time-saving game state)) or the second state (the setting of the number of time-saving games) which is more profitable than the first state is enabled. A state executing means (41) capable of executing a state (third time-saving game state), and
Equipped with
The state executing means (41) is
A specific value determining means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second opportunity different from the first opportunity (the result of the big hit lottery in the second time-saving game state is out of the time-saving symbol) is established in the predetermined state. ,
When the specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, the means capable of executing the second state and the means.
When the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established, a means capable of executing the first state and a means for executing the first state.
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, the period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined state among the execution periods that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value is longer than a predetermined period (the first). The number of time-saving games set for the jackpot lottery result in the two-time-saving game state is larger than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state).
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined period is set longer than the execution period.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix C1, a predetermined period is set longer than the execution period. In this way, by setting the predetermined period longer than the execution period, there may be a case where the specific state is established and a situation where the specific state is not established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state. Therefore, whether or not the specific state is established in the predetermined state is imparted with playability that depends on the timing at which the second trigger is established in the predetermined period from the start to the end of the predetermined state. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the timing when the second opportunity is established while expecting that the second opportunity is established in the predetermined state, so that the interest of the game is improved. ..

[Appendix C2]
A plurality of types of the specific value are set including the predetermined specific value.
The execution period is set in a plurality of types corresponding to the specific value, and is set.
The gaming machine according to Appendix C1, wherein the specific value determining means sets the predetermined specific value from the plurality of specific values when the second opportunity is established.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix C2, the execution period is set from a plurality of execution periods based on the predetermined specific values set from the plurality of specific values when the second trigger is established. In this way, when the second trigger is established, the execution period is set from a plurality of execution periods based on the predetermined specific values set from the plurality of specific values, so that the execution period is set to the predetermined specific value. Since it differs depending on the type, the success or failure of the specific state depends on the type of the predetermined characteristic value. As a result, when the second opportunity is established, it becomes difficult to grasp the success or failure of the specific state from the predetermined specific value. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game in the expectation that a specific state will be established while paying attention to the type of the predetermined characteristic value when the second opportunity is established, so that the interest of the game is improved. Will be done.

[Appendix C3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C2, wherein the execution period of a plurality of types includes two or more types of execution periods having different benefits when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix C3, a plurality of types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods having different benefits when the second state is executed. In this way, the multiple types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods having different benefits when the second state is executed, so that the benefits when the second state is executed depend on the execution period. Set. Therefore, the player can grasp the high profit when the second state is executed by paying attention to the execution period set at the stage where the second opportunity is established. As a result, it becomes possible to further increase the degree of attention and interest in the execution period set at the stage where the second opportunity is established, and thus the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C4]
Described in Appendix C3, the execution period of the two or more types is characterized in that the higher the profit when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41), the higher the probability that the specific state is established. Gaming machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix C4, the higher the profit when the second state is executed, the higher the probability that the specific state is established in the two or more types of execution periods. In this way, the higher the profit when the second state is executed, the higher the probability that the specific state is established for the two or more types of execution periods, so that the player can benefit from the execution of the second state. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that a high execution period is set, and you can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that a specific state will be established when a high profit execution period is set. Because it can be done, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix C5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C1, wherein the execution period is one type.

Note: In the gaming machine according to C5, the execution period is one type. In this way, since there is only one type of execution period, the execution period when the second trigger is established is set as a fixed period. This makes it easier to grasp the success or failure of the specific state depending on the timing at which the second trigger in the predetermined state is established. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game in the expectation that the specific state will be established while paying attention to the timing at which the second opportunity in the predetermined state is established, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix D1]
A predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) in which a predetermined profit can be given in a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first opportunity (the jackpot lottery result in the normal game state is a type 1 jackpot). )When,
The first state (the state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (maintenance state of the second time-saving game state)) or the second state (the setting of the number of time-saving games) which is more profitable than the first state is enabled. A state executing means (41) capable of executing a state (third time-saving game state), and
Equipped with
The state executing means (41) is
A specific value determining means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second opportunity different from the first opportunity (the result of the big hit lottery in the second time-saving game state is out of the time-saving symbol) is established in the predetermined state. ,
When the specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, the means capable of executing the second state and the means.
When the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established, a means capable of executing the first state and a means for executing the first state.
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, the period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined state among the execution periods that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value is longer than a predetermined period (the first). The number of time-saving games set for the jackpot lottery result in the two-time-saving game state is larger than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state).
Specific timing determination means (41) for determining whether or not the predetermined timing is the specific timing in the predetermined period in which the predetermined state is executed, and
An effect executing means (51) that executes a predetermined effect in the predetermined state, and
Equipped with
The effect executing means (51) is
After the execution of the predetermined state is started by the predetermined state execution means (41), the first effect is executed as the predetermined effect until the specific timing determination means (41) determines that the specific timing is reached. Means and
A means for executing a second effect different from the first effect as the predetermined effect in the predetermined period after the specific timing determination means (41) determines that the specific timing is reached.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix D1, the first effect is executed from the start of the execution of the predetermined state to the specific timing in the predetermined period, and after the specific timing, the second effect different from the first effect is executed. In this way, the first effect is executed from the start of the execution of the predetermined state to the specific timing in the predetermined period, and after the specific timing, the second effect different from the first effect is executed, so that the player can perform the player. Since it is possible to suppress a feeling of boredom and a decrease in interest in a game during a predetermined period in which a predetermined state is executed, a decrease in the interest of the game is prevented.

[Appendix D2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D1, wherein the profit state given to the player differs between the specified timing and the subsequent timing during the predetermined period in which the predetermined state is executed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix D2, the profit state given to the player is different between the specific timing and the later in the predetermined period in which the predetermined state is executed. Further, in the predetermined period, the first effect is executed until the specific timing, and after the specific timing, the second effect different from the first effect is executed. Therefore, the player can grasp that the specific timing has arrived by switching the predetermined effect executed in the predetermined period from the first effect to the second effect. That is, the player can grasp that the profit state to be granted has changed by switching from the first effect to the second effect. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the change in the profit state while paying attention to the switching from the first effect to the second effect during the predetermined period in which the predetermined state is executed. The interest of is further improved.

[Appendix D3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D2, wherein the profit state is higher after the specific timing than before the specific timing during the predetermined period in which the predetermined state is executed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix D3, in the predetermined period in which the predetermined state is executed, the profit state is higher after the specific timing than before the specific timing. That is, when the first effect is switched to the second effect in a predetermined period, the profit state is higher when the second effect is executed than when the first effect is executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting to be switched to the second effect, which is executed when the profit state is high, as compared with the case where the first effect is executed in a predetermined period. Because it can be done, the fun of the game is further improved.

[Appendix D4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices D1 to D3, wherein the specific timing is a timing at which the specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix D4, the specific timing is the timing at which the specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state. As described above, since the specific timing is the timing at which the specific state is established, the player is in the first state when the first effect is executed in the predetermined period, and the second effect is executed in the predetermined period. In this case, it can be grasped that the second state has a higher profit than the first state based on a predetermined type of effect. That is, the player can grasp that the first state is switched to the second state with high profit by switching from the first effect to the second effect in a predetermined period. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the first effect can be switched to the second effect in a predetermined period, so that the interest of the game is further improved.

[Appendix E1]
A predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) in which a predetermined profit can be given in a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first opportunity (the jackpot lottery result in the normal game state is a type 1 jackpot). )When,
The first state (the state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (maintenance state of the second time-saving game state)) or the second state (the setting of the number of time-saving games) which is more profitable than the first state is enabled. A state executing means (41) capable of executing a state (third time-saving game state), and
Equipped with
The state executing means (41) is
A specific value determining means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second opportunity different from the first opportunity (the result of the big hit lottery in the second time-saving game state is out of the time-saving symbol) is established in the predetermined state. ,
When the specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, the means capable of executing the second state and the means.
When the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established, a means capable of executing the first state and a means for executing the first state.
Equipped with
The specific state is
A state in which the period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined state among the execution periods that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value at the stage when the predetermined second opportunity is established is equal to or longer than the predetermined period (in the second time-saving game state). The number of time-saving games set for the jackpot lottery result being out of the time-saving symbol is larger than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state).
A gaming machine characterized in that, even if the predetermined second trigger is established, it is not established from the start of execution of the predetermined state by the predetermined state executing means (41) to the predetermined timing.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix E1, the specific state is not established even if the predetermined second trigger is established from the start of the execution of the predetermined state to the predetermined timing. In this way, from the start of execution of the predetermined state to the predetermined timing, even if the predetermined second trigger is established, it is not established. Therefore, when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, the specific state is established. There may be cases where is true and situations where the specific state is not true. Therefore, whether or not the specific state is established in the predetermined state is imparted with playability that depends on the timing at which the second trigger is established in the predetermined period from the start to the end of the predetermined state. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the timing when the second opportunity is established while expecting that the second opportunity is established in the predetermined state, so that the interest of the game is improved. ..

[Appendix E2]
A plurality of types of the specific value are set including the predetermined specific value.
The execution period is set in a plurality of types corresponding to the specific value, and is set.
The gaming machine according to Appendix E1, wherein the specific value determining means sets the predetermined specific value from the plurality of specific values when the second opportunity is established.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix E2, the execution period is set from a plurality of execution periods based on the predetermined specific values set from the plurality of specific values when the second trigger is established. In this way, when the second trigger is established, the execution period is set from a plurality of execution periods based on the predetermined specific values set from the plurality of specific values, so that the execution period is set to the predetermined specific value. Since it differs depending on the type, the success or failure of the specific state depends on the type of the predetermined characteristic value. As a result, when the second opportunity is established, it becomes difficult to grasp the success or failure of the specific state from the predetermined specific value. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game in the expectation that a specific state will be established while paying attention to the type of the predetermined characteristic value when the second opportunity is established, so that the interest of the game is improved. Will be done.

[Appendix E3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E2, wherein the execution period of a plurality of types includes two or more types of execution periods having different benefits when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E3, a plurality of types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods having different benefits when the second state is executed. In this way, the multiple types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods having different benefits when the second state is executed, so that the benefits when the second state is executed depend on the execution period. Set. Therefore, the player can grasp the high profit when the second state is executed by paying attention to the execution period set at the stage where the second opportunity is established. As a result, it becomes possible to further increase the degree of attention and interest in the execution period set at the stage where the second opportunity is established, and thus the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix E4]
Described in Appendix E3, the two or more types of execution periods are characterized in that the higher the profit when the second state is executed by the state executing means (41), the higher the probability that the specific state is established. Gaming machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix E4, the higher the profit when the second state is executed, the higher the probability that the specific state is established in the two or more types of execution periods. In this way, the higher the profit when the second state is executed, the higher the probability that the specific state is established for the two or more types of execution periods, so that the player can benefit from the execution of the second state. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that a high execution period is set, and you can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that a specific state will be established when a high profit execution period is set. Because it can be done, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix E5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix R1, wherein the execution period is one type.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix E5, the execution period is one type. In this way, since there is only one type of execution period, the execution period when the second trigger is established is set as a fixed period. This makes it easier to grasp the success or failure of the specific state depending on the timing at which the second trigger in the predetermined state is established. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game in the expectation that the specific state will be established while paying attention to the timing at which the second opportunity in the predetermined state is established, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix F1]
A predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) in which a predetermined profit can be given in a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first opportunity (the jackpot lottery result in the normal game state is a type 1 jackpot). )When,
The first state (the state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (maintenance state of the second time-saving game state)) or the second state (the setting of the number of time-saving games) which is more profitable than the first state is enabled. A state executing means (41) capable of executing a state (third time-saving game state), and
Equipped with
The state executing means (41) is
A specific value determining means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second opportunity different from the first opportunity (the result of the big hit lottery in the second time-saving game state is out of the time-saving symbol) is established in the predetermined state. ,
When the specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, the means capable of executing the second state and the means.
When the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established, a means capable of executing the first state and a means for executing the first state.
Equipped with
The specific state is
A state in which the period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined state among the execution periods that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value at the stage when the predetermined second opportunity is established is equal to or longer than the predetermined period (in the second time-saving game state). The number of time-saving games set for the jackpot lottery result being out of the time-saving symbol is larger than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state).
A plurality of types of the specific value are set including the predetermined specific value.
The execution period is set in a plurality of types corresponding to the specific value, and is set.
The specific value determining means is a gaming machine characterized in that when the second trigger is established, the predetermined specific value is set from the plurality of specific values.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix F1, the execution period is set from a plurality of execution periods based on the predetermined specific values set from the plurality of specific values when the second trigger is established. In this way, when the second trigger is established, the execution period is set from a plurality of execution periods based on the predetermined specific values set from the plurality of specific values, so that the execution period is set to the predetermined specific value. Since it differs depending on the type, the success or failure of the specific state depends on the type of the predetermined characteristic value. As a result, when the second opportunity is established, it becomes difficult to grasp the success or failure of the specific state from the predetermined specific value. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game in the expectation that a specific state will be established while paying attention to the type of the predetermined characteristic value when the second opportunity is established, so that the interest of the game is improved. Will be done.

[Appendix F2]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary note F1, wherein the execution period of a plurality of types includes two or more types of execution periods having different benefits when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix F2, a plurality of types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods having different benefits when the second state is executed. In this way, the multiple types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods having different benefits when the second state is executed, so that the benefits when the second state is executed depend on the execution period. Set. Therefore, the player can grasp the high profit when the second state is executed by paying attention to the execution period set at the stage where the second opportunity is established. As a result, it becomes possible to further increase the degree of attention and interest in the execution period set at the stage where the second opportunity is established, and thus the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix F3]
The above-mentioned two or more types of execution periods are described in Appendix F2, wherein the higher the profit when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41), the higher the probability that the specific state is established. Gaming machine.

Note: In the gaming machine according to F3, the higher the profit when the second state is executed, the higher the probability that the specific state is established in the two or more types of execution periods. In this way, the higher the profit when the second state is executed, the higher the probability that the specific state is established for the two or more types of execution periods, so that the player can benefit from the execution of the second state. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that a high execution period is set, and you can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that a specific state will be established when a high profit execution period is set. Because it can be done, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix G1]
A predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) in which a predetermined profit can be given in a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first opportunity (the jackpot lottery result in the normal game state is a type 1 jackpot). )When,
The first state (the state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (maintenance state of the second time-saving game state)) or the second state (the setting of the number of time-saving games) which is more profitable than the first state is enabled. A state executing means (41) capable of executing a state (third time-saving game state), and
Equipped with
The state executing means (41) is
A specific value determining means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second opportunity different from the first opportunity (the result of the big hit lottery in the second time-saving game state is out of the time-saving symbol) is established in the predetermined state. ,
When the specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, the means capable of executing the second state and the means.
When the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established, a means capable of executing the first state and a means for executing the first state.
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, the period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined state among the execution periods that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value is longer than a predetermined period (the first). The number of time-saving games set for the jackpot lottery result in the two-time-saving game state is larger than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state).
The second opportunity (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving gaming state is out of the time-saving symbol) can be established in the entire period of the predetermined period in the predetermined state (second time-saving gaming state). ..

In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note G1, the second opportunity may be established for the entire period of the predetermined period in the predetermined state. In this way, since the second opportunity can be established in the entire period of the predetermined period in the predetermined state, the timing at which the second opportunity is established in the predetermined period becomes random, and the second opportunity is established in the entire period of the predetermined period in the predetermined state. An opportunity can be established. As a result, it can be expected that the second trigger will be established during the entire predetermined period of the predetermined state, so that the player may suffer the disadvantage that the second trigger is not established during a part of the predetermined period of the predetermined state. Instead, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game during the entire predetermined period of the predetermined state.

[Appendix G2]
When the second trigger is established (out of the time saving symbol stop) in the predetermined period of the predetermined state (second time saving game state), the shorter the remaining period (remaining number of time saving) of the predetermined state, the more the specific state becomes. The gaming machine according to Appendix G1, which is characterized by being easily established.

In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note G2, when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the easier it is that the specific condition is satisfied. In this way, when the second opportunity is established in the predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the easier it is for the specific condition to be satisfied, and the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state (the closer to the end of the predetermined period). , The possibility that the specific condition is satisfied is high, the possibility that the second state is executed is high, and the expectation is high. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while having anxiety about the end of the predetermined period approaching, but with the expectation that the second opportunity will be established when the end of the predetermined period is approaching. Will be improved.

[Appendix G3]
When the specific condition is satisfied when the second trigger is established (the time-saving symbol is out of stop) in the predetermined state (second time-saving game state), the first The gaming machine according to Appendix G1 or Appendix G2, characterized in that the magnitudes of profits (number of time-saving games) in the two states (third time-saving gaming state) are different.

In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note G3, when the specific condition is satisfied when the second opportunity is satisfied in the predetermined state, the magnitude of the profit in the second state differs depending on the remaining period of the predetermined state. In this way, when the specific condition is satisfied when the second opportunity is established in the predetermined state, the magnitude of the profit in the second state differs depending on the remaining period of the predetermined state, so that the second in the predetermined period of the predetermined state Since the progress of the game can be enjoyed by paying attention to the timing when the opportunity is established, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix G4]
When the specific condition is satisfied when the second trigger is established (the time reduction symbol is out of stop) in the predetermined state (second time reduction game state), the shorter the remaining period (remaining time reduction number of times) of the predetermined state, the more. The gaming machine according to the appendix G3, characterized in that the profit (number of time-saving games) in the second state (third time-saving gaming state) is large.

Note: In the gaming machine according to G4, when the specific condition is satisfied when the second opportunity is satisfied in the predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the greater the profit in the second state. In this way, when the specific condition is satisfied when the second opportunity is established in the predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the larger the profit in the second state, and the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state ( As the end of the predetermined period approaches), the playability that makes it easier to receive a high profit in the second state is imparted. As a result, while feeling anxious about the end of the predetermined period approaching, the game progresses with the expectation that when the end of the predetermined period approaches, the second opportunity will be established and a high profit will be received in the second state. Because you can enjoy, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix H1]
A predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) in which a predetermined profit can be given in a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first opportunity (the jackpot lottery result in the normal game state is a type 1 jackpot). )When,
The first state (the state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (maintenance state of the second time-saving game state)) or the second state (the setting of the number of time-saving games) which is more profitable than the first state is enabled. A state executing means (41) capable of executing a state (third time-saving game state), and
Equipped with
The state executing means (41) is
A specific value determining means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second opportunity different from the first opportunity (the result of the big hit lottery in the second time-saving game state is out of the time-saving symbol) is established in the predetermined state. ,
When the specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, the means capable of executing the second state and the means.
When the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established, a means capable of executing the first state and a means for executing the first state.
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, the period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined state among the execution periods that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value is longer than a predetermined period (the first). The number of time-saving games set for the jackpot lottery result in the two-time-saving game state is larger than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state).
The predetermined state executing means (41) is a gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined state is executed until the preset predetermined period expires regardless of the success or failure of the specific state in the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H1, the predetermined state is executed until the preset predetermined period expires regardless of the success or failure of the specific state in the predetermined period. In this way, regardless of the success or failure of the specific state in the predetermined period, the predetermined state is executed until the preset predetermined period expires, so that the player can determine the profit of the predetermined state in the entire period of the predetermined period. It will be possible to enjoy the benefits of the state.

Further, regardless of the success or failure of the specific state in the predetermined period, the predetermined state is executed until the predetermined period expires, so that the player is notified of the establishment of the specific state, for example, when the predetermined period expires. Can be granted. In this case, the player can grasp the success or failure of the specific state in the predetermined period in which the predetermined state is executed at the expiration of the predetermined period. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the specific state has been established in the predetermined period and waiting for the expiration of the predetermined period, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix H2]
The appendix H1 is characterized in that, when the specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, the state executing means (41) executes the second state after the predetermined period has expired. The described gaming machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H2, when the specific state is established when the second opportunity is established in the predetermined state, the second state is executed after the predetermined period expires. In this way, when the specific state is established when the second opportunity is established in the predetermined state, the second state is executed after the predetermined period expires, so that the profit of the predetermined state can be obtained in the predetermined state for the entire period of the predetermined period. While enjoying the benefits of, the benefits of the second state can be enjoyed again after the expiration of the predetermined period.

[Appendix I1]
A predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) in which a predetermined profit can be given in a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first opportunity (the jackpot lottery result in the normal game state is a type 1 jackpot). )When,
The first state (the state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (maintenance state of the second time-saving game state)) or the second state (the setting of the number of time-saving games) which is more profitable than the first state is enabled. A state executing means (41) capable of executing a state (third time-saving game state), and
Equipped with
The state executing means (41) is
A specific value determining means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second opportunity different from the first opportunity (the result of the big hit lottery in the second time-saving game state is out of the time-saving symbol) is established in the predetermined state. ,
When the specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, the means capable of executing the second state and the means.
When the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established, a means capable of executing the first state and a means for executing the first state.
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, the period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined state among the execution periods that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value is longer than a predetermined period (the first). The number of time-saving games set for the jackpot lottery result in the two-time-saving game state is larger than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state).
A gaming machine comprising a resetting means capable of resetting a profit in the second state when the second opportunity is established in the second state (third time-saving gaming state).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I1, if the second opportunity is established in the second state, the profit in the second state may be reset. In this way, when the second opportunity is established in the second state, the profit in the second state can be reset, so that no profit is given when the second opportunity is established in the second state. On the other hand, it is prevented that the player feels uncomfortable, and the interest of the game is prevented from being lowered.

[Appendix I2]
When the second opportunity is established in the second state (third time-saving game state), a profit determining means for determining a predetermined profit for the establishment of the second opportunity is provided.
In the resetting means, when the second opportunity is established in the second state (third time-saving gaming state), the predetermined profit determined by the profit determining means is the first when the second opportunity is established. The gaming machine according to Supplementary note I1, wherein when the profit in the second state is larger than the profit in the second state, the profit in the second state is reset to the predetermined profit.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I2, when the second opportunity is established in the second state, the predetermined profit determined for the establishment of the second opportunity is the profit in the second state when the second opportunity is established. If it is greater than, the profit in the second state is reset to the predetermined profit. In this way, when the second opportunity is established in the second state, the predetermined profit determined for the establishment of the second opportunity is larger than the profit in the second state when the second opportunity is established. In addition, since the profit in the second state is reset to the predetermined profit, the profit in the second state is always increased when the profit in the second state is reset due to the establishment of the second opportunity. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the second opportunity is established even in the second state, and when the second profit is established, pay attention to the profit due to the establishment of the second opportunity. Because you can enjoy the progress of the game, the interest of the game is improved. Further, when the predetermined profit determined when the second opportunity is established in the second state is larger than the profit when the second opportunity is established in the second state, the profit in the second state is reset to the predetermined profit. This prevents the profit in the second state from decreasing when the profit in the second state is reset. As a result, the player is prevented from suffering a disadvantage due to the resetting of the profit in the second state, and thus the deterioration of the interest of the game is prevented.

[Appendix I3]
The profit determining means determines the predetermined profit as the profit period of the second state (third time-saving gaming state).
The resetting means sets the remaining period of the second state when the profit period determined by the profit determining means is longer than the remaining period of the second state at the time of establishment of the second opportunity. The gaming machine according to Appendix I2, characterized in that the profit period is reset to the profit period determined by the profit determining means.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I3, when the profit period of the second state determined when the second opportunity is established in the second state is longer than the remaining period of the second state when the second opportunity is established. , The remaining period of the second state is reset to the profit period. In this way, when the profit period of the second state determined when the second opportunity is established in the second state is longer than the remaining period of the second state when the second opportunity is established, the second state By resetting the remaining period of to the profit period, the profit period will always be longer when the profit period in the second state is reset. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the second opportunity is established even in the second state, and if the second profit is established, pay attention to the profit period due to the establishment of the second opportunity. Since you can enjoy the progress of the game, the interest of the game is improved. Further, when the profit period of the second state determined when the second opportunity is established in the second state is longer than the remaining period of the second state at the time of the establishment of the second opportunity, the rest of the second state. By resetting the period to the profit period, it is possible to prevent the profit period in the second state from being shortened when the profit period in the second state is reset. As a result, the player is prevented from suffering a disadvantage due to the resetting of the profit period in the second state, and thus the deterioration of the interest of the game is prevented.

[Appendix I4]
When the second opportunity is established in the second state (third time-saving game state), a profit determining means for determining a predetermined profit for the establishment of the second opportunity is provided.
The resetting means obtains the predetermined profit determined by the profit determining means when the second trigger is established in the second state (third time-saving gaming state), and the second trigger when the second trigger is established. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions I1 to I3, characterized in that the profit is reset as the profit in the second state regardless of the profit in the second state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I4, the predetermined profit determined when the second opportunity is established in the second state is in the second state regardless of the profit in the second state when the second opportunity is established. It is reset as a profit. In this way, the predetermined profit determined when the second opportunity is established in the second state is reset as the profit in the second state regardless of the profit in the second state when the second opportunity is established. By doing so, when the second opportunity is established in the second state, the profit in the second state becomes high or low. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the predetermined profit when the second opportunity is established and paying attention to the level of the profit in the second state, so that the interest of the game is improved. ..

[Appendix I5]
The profit determining means determines the predetermined profit as the profit period of the second state (third time-saving gaming state).
The resetting means sets the profit period determined by the profit determining means when the second opportunity is established in the second state (third time-saving gaming state) to the first when the second opportunity is established. The gaming machine according to Appendix I4, wherein the gaming machine is reset as the remaining period in the second state regardless of the remaining period in the second state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I5, the profit period determined when the second opportunity is established in the second state is the second state regardless of the profit period in the second state when the second opportunity is established. It is reset as the profit period in. In this way, the profit period determined when the second opportunity is established in the second state is the profit period in the second state regardless of the profit period in the second state when the second opportunity is established. By resetting, the profit period in the second state becomes longer or shorter when the second opportunity is established in the second state. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the profit period when the second opportunity is established and paying attention to the length of the profit period in the second state, so that the interest of the game is improved. To.

[Appendix J1]
A predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) in which a predetermined profit can be given in a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first opportunity (the jackpot lottery result in the normal game state is a type 1 jackpot). )When,
The first state (the state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (maintenance state of the second time-saving game state)) or the second state (the setting of the number of time-saving games) which is more profitable than the first state is enabled. A state executing means (41) capable of executing a state (third time-saving game state), and
Equipped with
The state executing means (41) is
A specific value determining means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second opportunity different from the first opportunity (the result of the big hit lottery in the second time-saving game state is out of the time-saving symbol) is established in the predetermined state. ,
When the specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, the means capable of executing the second state and the means.
When the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established, a means capable of executing the first state and a means for executing the first state.
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, the period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined state among the execution periods that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value is longer than a predetermined period (the first). The number of time-saving games set for the jackpot lottery result in the two-time-saving game state is larger than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state).
A predetermined ball entry means (315) capable of entering a game ball by being opened by a predetermined opening mode selected from a plurality of types of opening modes (short opening, long opening) is provided.
The first state (second time-saving gaming state) and the second state (third time-saving gaming state) are characterized in that the predetermined opening mode of the predetermined ball-entry means (315) is different. ..

In the gaming machine according to the appendix J1, the opening mode of the predetermined ball entry means differs between the first state and the second state. As described above, since the opening mode of the predetermined ball entry means is different between the first state and the second state, the opening mode of the ball entry means differs depending on the success or failure of the specific condition when the second opportunity is established. That is, the ease of entering a game ball into a predetermined ball entry means differs depending on the success or failure of the specific condition. As a result, the benefits in the first and second states are the direct benefits for the player that the game ball to the predetermined ball entry means is easy, that is, the game ball to the predetermined ball entry means is obtained. For example, since it leads to the number of big hit lottery, prize balls), the degree of attention and interest in the game is improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix J2]
The plurality of types of opening modes include a first opening mode (short opening) and a second opening mode (long opening) in which a game ball is easier to enter than the first opening mode.
In the first state (second time-saving game state), the predetermined ball entry means (315) is opened in the first opening mode.
The gaming machine according to Appendix J1, wherein in the second state (third time-saving gaming state), the predetermined ball-entry means (315) is opened in the second opening mode.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix J2, it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the predetermined ball entry means in the second state than in the first state. In this way, in the second state, it is easier for the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry means in the second state than in the first state, and in the second state executed by the establishment of the specific condition when the second opportunity is established. It is easy for the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry means, and it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry means in the first state executed due to the failure of the specific condition when the second opportunity is established. As a result, in the second state, as compared with the first state, the game property is imparted so that the profit obtained by the game ball to the predetermined ball entry means can be easily enjoyed, so that the degree of attention and interest in the game is improved. The interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix K1]
A predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) in which a predetermined profit can be given in a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first opportunity (the jackpot lottery result in the normal game state is a type 1 jackpot). )When,
The first state (the state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (maintenance state of the second time-saving game state)) or the second state (the setting of the number of time-saving games) which is more profitable than the first state is enabled. A state executing means (41) capable of executing a state (third time-saving game state), and
Equipped with
The state executing means (41) is
A specific value determining means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second opportunity different from the first opportunity (the result of the big hit lottery in the second time-saving game state is out of the time-saving symbol) is established in the predetermined state. ,
When the specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, the means capable of executing the second state and the means.
When the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established, a means capable of executing the first state and a means for executing the first state.
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, the period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined state among the execution periods that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value is longer than a predetermined period (the first). The number of time-saving games set for the jackpot lottery result in the two-time-saving game state is larger than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state).
A predetermined ball entry means (315) capable of entering a game ball by being opened by a predetermined opening mode is provided.
In the first state (second time-saving gaming state) and the second state (third time-saving gaming state), a predetermined hit / fail determination (big hit) is triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the predetermined entry means (315). A gaming machine characterized in that a lottery) is executed.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K1, a predetermined hit / fail determination is executed triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the predetermined entry means in the first state and the second state. In this way, by executing the predetermined hit / fail determination by the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entry means in the first state and the second state, the specific condition is satisfied when the second opportunity is established. It is possible to impart playability in which the frequency (probability) at which a predetermined hit / fail determination is executed and the winning probability in a predetermined win / fail determination differ depending on the presence or absence, that is, between the first state and the second state. As a result, the degree of attention and interest in the game is increased, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix K2]
The second trigger is described in Appendix K1 characterized in that the second trigger can be established on condition that the result of the predetermined hit / fail determination by the hit / miss determination means (41) is a predetermined result (time saving symbol stop off). Gaming machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K2, the second trigger may be established on condition that the result of the predetermined hit / fail determination executed with the entry of the gaming ball into the predetermined entry means is the predetermined result. .. In this way, the second opportunity can be established on the condition that the result of the predetermined hit / fail determination executed by the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means is the predetermined result. Whether or not the two moments are established and the profits in the first state and the second state are defined by the predetermined ball entry means. Therefore, in the gaming machine, it is possible to determine the success or failure of the second opportunity by using the existing ball entry means (for example, the second winning opening) in which the winning / failing determination is executed, and the first state and the second state. Since it is possible to give a profit in the game machine, it is possible to give a new game property without adding a new means to the game machine.

10: Game machine 31: Game board 314: First winning opening 315: Second winning opening 316: Variable winning opening 317L, 317R: Through gate 341: Symbol display unit 4: Main control device 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
5: Audio lamp control device 51: MPU
511: ROM
512: RAM

Claims (4)

A predetermined state execution means for executing a predetermined state capable of giving a predetermined profit in a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first opportunity,
A state execution means capable of executing a first state or a second state having a higher profit than the first state,
Equipped with
The state executing means is
A specific value determining means for determining a specific value when a second trigger different from the first trigger is established in the predetermined state.
When the specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, the means capable of executing the second state and the means.
When the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established, a means capable of executing the first state and a means for executing the first state.
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which there is a predetermined period or more that can be executed after the end of the predetermined state among the execution periods that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established. ,
A specific timing determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined timing is the specific timing in the predetermined period in which the predetermined state is executed.
An effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect in the predetermined state, and
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
A means for executing the first effect as the predetermined effect from the start of execution of the predetermined state by the predetermined state execution means until the specific timing determination means determines that the specific timing is reached.
A means for executing a second effect different from the first effect as the predetermined effect in the predetermined period after the specific timing determination means determines that the specific timing is reached.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein in the predetermined period in which the predetermined state is executed, the profit state given to the player differs between the specific timing and the subsequent timing. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the profit state is higher after the specific timing than before the specific timing during the predetermined period in which the predetermined state is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the specific timing is a timing at which the specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state.

Images